JP2020044412A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine having an excellent operational feeling.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a posture correcting device 13312, which applies a load for changing posture of a swing operation member 13310 in a direction for reducing the amount of change of the posture when posture of the swing operation member 13310, which is viewed from a player operating the swing operation member 13310, is changed by movement of a lever member 13340, thus maintaining the posture of the swing operation member 13310 to be posture in that a player can easily operate.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 89

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with an operation member that moves between a first position and a second position by manual operation by a player (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-144218 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the operability of the operation member has room for improvement.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine with good operability of an operation member.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 has an operating member that is operated by a player and is configured to be movable, and the operating member and the gaming machine body are connected and movable. The connection member is configured to move the connection member so that the attitude of the operation member viewed from a player operating the operation unit changes to a first state and a second state different from the first state. A correction means is provided for changing the attitude of the operation member in a direction in which the amount of change in the attitude is reduced when formation is possible.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, there is provided the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising a driving device for driving the connection member, wherein a change state in which the operation member changes a posture in a movement range of the connection member, and the operation state. A maintenance state is formed in which the posture of the operation member and the connection member is maintained without the posture of the member being changed, and a load generated on the operation member from the correction unit during the change state brakes the connection member. Turn to the direction to let.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, further comprising an abutted member abutted on the correcting means, wherein the correcting means abuts the abutted member upon movement of the operating member. The contact changes the posture of the operation member.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operability of the operation member can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, operability during a driving operation can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the second aspect, the weight of the operating member can be reduced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine along the line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6 (a). 7A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. It is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member of a lever member, an upper cover member, a lower cover member, and a swing member. It is a front exploded perspective view of a swing operation member. 14A is a front view of the eccentric cam member, FIG. 14B is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member, and FIG. 14C is a cross-sectional view of the eccentric cam member along line XIVc-XIVc in FIG. It is. 15A is a front view of the phase detection member, FIG. 15B is a bottom view of the phase detection member, and FIG. 15C is a cross-sectional view of the phase detection member taken along line XVc-XVc in FIG. It is. (A) is a front view of the lever member, (b) is a side view of the lever member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a), and (c) is an arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a). FIG. 5 is a top view of the lever member as viewed in a direction. 17A is a front view of the operation device, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. FIG. 17A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 17B is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. 17C is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc in FIG. FIG. 19 is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the swing operation member in the XX-XX line of FIG.17 (b). FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 17A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc in FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in 2nd Embodiment in XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). 30A is a front view of the cam member of the eccentric cam member, FIG. 30B is a side view of the cam member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXb in FIG. 30A, and FIG. It is a front view of a main-body member, (d) is a side view of the main-body member in the arrow XXXd direction of FIG.30 (c). (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the eccentric cam member as viewed in the XXXIB direction of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a front view of the eccentric cam member. . (A) is a front view of the unlocking cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member as viewed in the XXXIIb direction of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is FIG. 32 (a). FIG. 13 is a side view of the unlocking cam member when viewed in the XXXIIc direction. (A) is a front view of a lock member, (b) is a side view of the lock member as viewed in the XXXIIIb direction of (a) of FIG. (A) to (d) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and a lock release cam member. (A)-(c) is a front view of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and a lock release cam member. (A)-(c) is a front view of the main body member of the swinging member shown in the axial direction of the shaft support rod. (A) is a top view of the motor fixing plate, (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate in the XXXVIIb direction of FIG. 37 (a), and (c) is shown in FIG. 37 (b). It is a side view of the motor fixing plate which shows the state in which the U-shaped member was slid from the state. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in 3rd Embodiment in XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a front view of a lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member as viewed in the XXXXIVb direction of FIG. 44 (a). (A) And (b) is a side view of a lock member. It is a front exploded perspective view of a lever member and a swing operation member. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a top view of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member, and (b) and (c) are side surfaces of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member in the LIIIb direction in FIG. 53 (a). FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine and the operation device as viewed in cross section along the line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6. It is a front exploded perspective view of an inner case member in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member in the LVIb direction of FIG. 56 (a), and (c) is an LVIc of FIG. 56 (a). It is a side view of the eccentric cam member in a direction view. (A) is a front view of the unlocking cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member as viewed in the direction of LVIIb in FIG. 57 (a), and (c) is FIG. 57 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in LVIIc direction. (A) is a front view of a lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member as viewed in the LVIII direction of FIG. 58 (a). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member which show operation of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member in time series. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member, which show operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member in time series. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member which show operation of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member in time series. It is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member. (A) And (b) of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member which show operation of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member in a time series in 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member which show operation of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member in time series. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member which show operation of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member in time series. FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the seventh embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in 8th Embodiment in XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is a side view of the operation device in 9th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in 10th Embodiment in XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is a partial sectional view of the swing operation member and the lever member in the eleventh embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the swing operation member and the lever member in the twelfth embodiment along the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line in FIG. 17 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device in a 13th embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. It is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member of a lever member, an upper cover member, a lower cover member, and a swing member. It is a front exploded perspective view of a swing operation member. (A) is a bottom view of the front cover and the back cover, (b) is a bottom view of the front cover, the back cover, and the separation prevention cover, and (c) is a line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc of FIG. 83 (b). 3 is a cross-sectional view of a front cover, a rear cover, a separation prevention cover, and a protection cover in FIG. (A) is a perspective view of a back side frame member, and (b) is a back side frame member as viewed in a direction indicated by an arrow LXXXIVb in FIG. 84 (a) (a direction viewed from a direction perpendicular to the surface of the guide bottom wall). 84 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member taken along line LXXXIVc-LXXXIVc in FIG. 84 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of the hook member, (b) is a front view of the hook member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a), and (c) is an arrow of FIG. 85 (a). FIG. 85D is a side view of the hook member as viewed in the LXXXVc direction, and FIG. 85D is a cross-sectional view of the hook member taken along line LXXXVd-LXXXVd in FIG. 85B. (A) is a front perspective view of the support member, (b) is a top view of the support member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a), and (c) is an LXXXVIc in FIG. 86 (b). It is sectional drawing of a support member in the -LXXXVIc line. (A) is a partial top view of the back side frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member along the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87 (a), and (c) is a back side view. FIG. 87 is a partial top view of the frame member and the posture correcting device, and FIG. 87D is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correcting device taken along line LXXXVIId-LXXXVIId in FIG. 87C. It is sectional drawing of the back side frame member and attitude | position correction apparatus in LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe line of 87 (d). (A) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88 (a). (C) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correcting device, and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correcting device taken along line LXXXVIIId-LXXXVIIId in FIG. 88 (c). Yes, (e) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correcting device, and (f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correcting device along line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf in FIG. 88 (e). It is. FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. (A) is a front view of the lock member in 14th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the lock member in the arrow LXXXXIb direction of FIG. 91 (a). FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. (A) to (c) are partial enlarged views of the eccentric cam member and the posture switching device. FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. (A) to (c) are partial enlarged views of the eccentric cam member and the posture switching device. (A) and (b) are top views of the contact member in the fifteenth embodiment, and (c) is a cross-section of the rear-side frame member and the posture correcting device on a line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87. It is a figure, (d) is sectional drawing of the back side frame member and attitude | position correction apparatus in LXXXXXXd-LXXXXXXVIIId line of FIG.98 (c). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correcting device along a line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87, and (b) is a back side frame along the line LXXXXXb-LXXXXXb in FIG. 99 (a). It is sectional drawing of a member and a posture correction apparatus. (A) to (d) are side views of the operation device according to the sixteenth embodiment. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in a 17th embodiment in a line corresponding to a XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of Drawing 17 (a). (A) to (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device according to the eighteenth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of an operating device in a 19th embodiment in a line corresponding to a XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of Drawing 17 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of an operation device in a 20th embodiment in a line corresponding to a XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of Drawing 17 (a). FIG. 104 is a rear view of the swing operation member as viewed in the direction of the arrow CV in FIG. 104 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operating device in a 21st embodiment in a line corresponding to a XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of Drawing 17 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of an operating device in a 22nd embodiment in a line corresponding to a XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of Drawing 17 (a).

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 which are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a tapping screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. And so on.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared with the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (start winning) as a trigger, while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that varies and displays the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes through as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is moved for a predetermined time. Only the operating state (opened).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during probable change and during working hours.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640.

  The second winning opening 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (expanded) is increased. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during probable changes or during working hours, passing the ball through the through gate 67 causes the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be easily opened, and the second winning opening 640 to be easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 such that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, the pachinko machine 10 may aim at the first winning opening 64 by “right-handing” or the second winning opening 640 by “left-handing”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with a method of shooting a ball in accordance with the playing state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Need to be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way of hitting the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol and Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position may be the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. The present invention is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port (not shown). A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port. Out ports are provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning port 65a.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 335a and 337a and a vibration device 366.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 when viewed from the front (that is, at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  The operation device 300 includes a swing operation member 310 that can be gripped and operated by a player. The swing operation member 310 includes an accommodation recess 17 a that is recessed in the front-rear direction along an outer frame of the upper plate 17 and a lower plate. A region formed by a housing recess 15a that is vertically recessed at the center of the unit 15 in the left-right direction can be moved.

  A gap is provided between the swinging operation member 310 and the accommodation recesses 15a, 17a, at least so that a finger of a hand can enter at least without difficulty. Thereby, the player can grip the swinging operation member 310 by grasping it from above. When the swing operation member 310 is gripped from above, the finger inserted between the swing operation member 310 and the housing recess 17a is caught on the side surface on the back side of the swing operation member 310, and the hand is held in this state. The hand is prevented from slipping off the swing operation member 310 even if the force is released and the force is left to gravity. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of the player maintaining the hand on the swing operation device 310.

  Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the operation of the swing operation member 310 is often performed with the left hand. Therefore, the following description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the swing operation member 310 with the left hand.

  FIG. 6A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along a line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6A. 7 is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along the line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A.

  6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. 6 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the upward position (the initial position in the present embodiment), and FIG. 7 illustrates a state where the swing operation member 310 is in the downward position (the push-down position according to the present embodiment). ) Is illustrated, and the hand holding the swing operation member 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  The accommodation recess 15a of the lower plate unit 15 and the accommodation recess 17a of the upper plate 17 are arranged sufficiently separated from the outer shape of the swing operation member 310. Therefore, when the player grips the swinging operation member 310 and performs the pushing-down operation, it is possible to suppress a finger from being pinched between the swinging operation member 310 and the housing recess 15a and the housing recess 17a.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the player places his or her finger on the intermediate frame member 312 and grips the swing operation member 310. In this state, since the lens member 317 also serving as a push button portion is arranged to face the palm, the player can perform an operation of pushing the vibration member 310 by grasping while holding the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it is possible to push the lens member 317 while holding the swing operation member 310 without pressing the push button with a finger or holding the swing operation member 310 while holding the swing operation member 310. it can. Therefore, the operation can be simplified.

  The lens member 317 arranged on the swing operation member 310 is arranged at a position where the lens member 317 hits the palm when the player grips the swing operation member 310. Therefore, by detecting that the player is holding the swing operation member 310 and then vibrating the lens member 317, the vibration can be transmitted to the player (the palm, the finger, etc.), and the vibration can be reduced. Can be prevented from being noticed. Therefore, the effect of the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In addition, by performing the pushing operation of the lens member 317 in accordance with the vibration, it is possible to perform an effect so that the timing of performing the input operation can be achieved. The problem of being unable to concentrate can be solved.

  Since the lens member 317 is hidden inside the player's hand while the player holds the swing operation member 310, it is determined whether the lens member 317 is vibrating (the lens member 317 is moved with respect to the intermediate frame member 312). It is difficult for a player other than the player holding the swing operation member 310 to determine whether or not the player is moving. Therefore, only the player holding the swing operation member 310 can be notified of the jackpot, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the front-back position and the vertical position of the swing operation member 310 are different between the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position and the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position. Thereby, when operating the swing operation member 310, the player moves the position of the hand in the up-down direction or the front-rear direction, so that it is possible to obtain a feeling that the player is operating.

  When the player grips the swing operation member 310, the player's finger swings on the intermediate frame member 312, and the fingertip of the player is caught on the back side frame member 311. Since the back side frame member 311 warps in a manner of drawing an arc having the center of the radius of curvature on the back side, the fingertip can be easily hooked on the back side frame member 311, as shown in FIG. Even when the wrist is hardened, as in the case where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position, the fingertip can be prevented from coming off the back side frame member 311.

  Further, since the fingertip is caught on the back side frame member 311, the vibration of the vibration device 366 (see FIG. 11) can be confined inside the palm, and the vibration felt by the player can be largely secured.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the swing operation member 310 is pressed down from the state shown in FIG. 6, the wrist returns naturally as the swing operation member 310 moves to the lower side in front of the player. Therefore, the operation of pushing the swing operation member 310 to the back (see FIG. 22B) can be performed by extending the wrist in such a manner that the return of the wrist is released. Thereby, the burden on the player who operates the swing operation member 310 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 6, as compared with the arm length R1 from the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to the shaft support rod 363 that is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, the upper end of the swing operation member 310 The arm length R2 up to the pivot 363, which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, is long. Accordingly, when the upper part of the swing operation member 310 is gripped and the swing operation member 310 is rotated around the pivot 363, it can be easily rotated (with a light force). On the other hand, a large force can be required when the user swings the lower end portion of the swing operation member 310 to rotate the swing operation member 310 around the shaft support rod 363 (erroneous operation). Accordingly, the burden on the player when rotating the swing operation member 310 by gripping the upper portion of the swing operation member 310 can be reduced, and the player can place his or her hand on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 and An erroneous operation of rotating the swing operation member 310 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 of the operation device 300 is disposed at a downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 8, in the operation device 300, a swing operation member 310 is arranged to protrude to the front side from a rectangular outer case member 320.

  FIG. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which the outer case member 320 has been removed from the inner case member 330 disposed inside the outer case member 320.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the outer case member 320 has a rear surface side formed along the curved surface of the cover members 344 and 345 (see FIG. 11), and the inner case member 330 has right and left sides of the cover members 344 and 345 from the front side. A front cover 321 attached so as to hide the edge, a long plate-shaped upper cover 322 fitted from above into a projection 321a projecting rearward from an upper end of the front cover 321; a front cover 321 and an upper cover A left cover member 323, a right cover member 324, and a left cover member 324, which are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 330 from the left and right directions in such a manner that flange portions 321b and 322a extending in a flange shape in the left and right direction of the inner case 322 are fitted inside. And a sensor base 325 having a plurality of sensor members 325a protruding and disposed inside the sensor base.

  By fastening and fixing the left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324 while fitting and fixing the front cover 321 and the upper cover 322, it is possible to prevent the fastening screws from being viewed in a front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent mischief of disassembling the operation device 300.

  The sensor member 325a includes a photocoupler-type first sensor member 325a1 inserted into the first sensor insertion hole 332e2, a photocoupler-type second sensor member 325a2 inserted into the second sensor insertion hole 332e3, and a second sensor member 325a2. A photocoupler-type third sensor member 325a3 which is disposed below the sensor member 325a2 and is inserted into the sensor insertion hole 332f.

  Note that the first sensor member 325a1 and the second sensor member 325a2 are sensors that detect the posture of the lever member 340, and the third sensor member 325a3 is a sensor that detects the phase of the eccentric cam member 333.

  Further, the photocoupler-type sensor includes a light projecting unit for projecting light, a light receiving unit for receiving light from the light projecting unit, and a gap (slit) into which a detecting portion can be inserted. It means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

  FIG. 10 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. In FIG. 10, the illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and a state in which the inner case member 330 is disassembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the inner case member 330 includes a left cover member 331 and a right cover member 332 assembled in a box shape in which the lever member 340 is disposed inside, and an eccentric cam protruding from the left cover member 331. An eccentric cam member 333 supported by the shaft 331d2; a phase detection member 334 supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 similarly to the eccentric cam member 333 in which the relative phase of the eccentric cam member 333 is invariable; A first driving device 335 that is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 331 from the outside to generate a driving force for rotating the eccentric cam member 333, and a lock member 336 that is supported by a lock shaft 331d3 protruding from the left cover member 331. A second driving device 337 that is fastened from the outside to the right cover member 332 and generates a driving force for rotating the lock member 336, and a lever member A gear damper 338 is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 for supporting the 40, mainly comprises.

  The left cover member 331 is a bottomed tubular member having an opening formed on the right side, and has a lower side wall 331a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom (the left side in FIG. 10) and a lower side thereof. A rectangular plate-shaped upper side wall portion 331b offset to the left (rear side in FIG. 10) as viewed from the front above the side wall portion 331a, and a right side extending from the edges of the lower side wall portion 331a and the upper side wall portion 331b and extending forward. A plate-like connecting side wall 331c which is in contact with the right cover member 332 except for the upper side, and a plurality of rod-like members formed to project rightward from the lower side wall 331a or the upper side wall 331b and formed in a columnar shape. 331d, a plurality of insertion holes 331e formed in the upper side wall 331b, a photocoupler-type sensor member 331f for detecting the attitude of the lock member 336, and a rod-shaped member 331 protruding to the left of the upper side wall 331b. Comprising a shaft support 331g lever support shaft 331d1 which is placed on top inner fitting support to bottomed cylindrical among, mainly.

  The right cover member 332 is a bottomed cylindrical member having an opening formed on the left side, and has a lower side wall portion 332a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom (the right portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side portion thereof. A plate-like upper side wall 332b offset to the right (front side in FIG. 10) in front view above the side wall 332a, and a front side extending leftward from edges of the lower side wall 332a and the upper side wall 332b. Except for the upper portion, a plate-shaped connecting side wall portion 332c that comes into contact with the left cover member 331 and a lower side wall portion 332a are formed by combining a pair of circular shapes, and the gear portion of the second driving device 337 is formed. A driving member insertion hole 332d to be inserted, a plurality of insertion holes 332e formed in the upper side wall 332b, a sensor insertion hole 332f in which the third sensor member 325a3 is inserted, and a right side of the upper side wall 332b. Stick out A cylindrical support 332g having a bottom and internally supporting the lever support shaft 331d1 disposed at the uppermost part of the member 331d; an annular protrusion 332i annularly protruding on the inner surface side of the upper side wall 332b; Mainly equipped.

  The upper side wall portions 331b and 332b are formed such that the upper portion on the front side has a quarter circle shape centering on the shaft support portions 331g and 332g when viewed in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17B). Notches 331c1 and 332c1 that are cut in the left-right direction are provided on the upper front side.

  The notches 331c1 and 332c1 are portions through which the lever member 340 is passed, and have a role of preventing lateral displacement of the lever member 340 (positional displacement of the lever support shaft 331d1, which is a swing shaft, in the extending direction). In addition, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 9) is attached to the inner case member 330 from the front side by using the quarter circular shape of the upper side wall portions 331b and 332b.

  The rod-shaped member 331d is formed of four cylindrical members in the present embodiment. That is, the rod-shaped member 331d includes a lever support shaft 331d1 disposed at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 331, an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 disposed below the lever support shaft 331d1, and a right side of the lower side wall portion 331a. Mainly includes a lock shaft 331d3 protruding from and an auxiliary shaft 331d4 provided below the lock shaft 331d3.

  The lever support shaft 331d1 is a member on which the lever member 340 is swingably supported, and is supported at both ends by being inserted into the shaft support portions 331g and 332g.

  The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is a member that is inserted in a state where the eccentric cam member 333 and the phase detection member 334 are in phase.

  The lock shaft 331d3 and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 are both shafts through which the lock member 336 is inserted. The lock shaft 331d3 is a member that supports the shaft support hole 336b of the lock member 336. The auxiliary shaft 331d4 is a lock. This is a member for guiding the guide hole 336c of the member 336.

  In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 331e includes three through holes. That is, a guide support hole 331e1 which is arranged on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1 and extends along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, and a circular shape arranged on the back side of the lever support shaft 331d1. A gear damper insertion hole 331e2, which is a through hole through which the gear damper 338 is inserted, and a driving member insertion hole 331e3, which is disposed below the rear side of the gear damper insertion hole 331e2 and is formed by combining a pair of circular shapes. Prepare mainly.

  The guide support hole 331e1 guides the swing of the lever member 340 through which the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted, and defines the end of the swing of the lever member 340 at the end.

  The sensor member 331f detects the posture of the lock member 336 by detecting that the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 passes through the gap between the sensor members 331f.

  The driving member insertion hole 332d has a shape in which a large circle and a small circle are connected. By adjusting the shape of each circle, the driving gear 337b of the second driving device 337 can be enlarged. The right cover member 332 is projected to the left through the circle, and in this state, the pedestal portion that supports the drive gear 337b can be fitted into a small circle.

  This allows the second drive device 337 to be inserted through the inner cover member 332 while supporting the drive gear 337b (the hole having a diameter equal to or larger than the outer diameter of the drive gear 337b). Fixing the shaft position (fixed with a hole having the same diameter as the base of the drive shaft of the drive gear 337b) can be compatible.

  In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 332e includes three through holes. That is, a guide support hole 332e1 formed at a position and a shape that coincides with the guide support hole 331e1 in the left-right direction and guided by the angle regulating rod member 346 of the lever member 340, and a rectangular shape disposed on the back side of the shaft support 332g. A first sensor insertion hole 332e2 through which the first sensor member 325a1 is inserted, and a rectangular through hole which is disposed at a position where the first sensor insertion hole 332e2 is rotated about the shaft support 332g. And a second sensor insertion hole 332e3 through which the second sensor member 325a2 is inserted.

  The sensor insertion holes 332e2 and 332e3 are through holes through which the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 that detect the posture of the lever member 340 by detecting that the sensor detection piece 343b of the lever member 340 passes through the gap.

  A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the shaft supports 331g and 332g. Further, plate-like torsion spring engaging portions 331h, 332h are arranged below the front of the shaft support portions 331g, 332g, and extend outward in the left-right direction of the left cover member 331 and the right cover member 332.

  In the present embodiment, one end of the torsion spring SP1 is in contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h from above, and the other end is in contact with the angle regulating rod member 346 from below. Accordingly, the lever member 340 is urged in a direction in which the swing operation member 310 rises.

  The annular convex portion 332i is a portion where the phase detecting member 334 is externally fitted. Since the phase detection member 334 is externally fitted to the annular projection 332i, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 can be firmly aligned.

  The first driving device 335 mainly includes a driving motor 335a that generates a driving force, and a driving gear 335b that is rotatably supported by the driving motor 335a. The driving gear 335b is meshed with the main body 333a of the eccentric cam member 333, and the driving force is transmitted.

  The lock member 336 is a member that prevents the lever member 340 from swinging, and includes a main body 336a having a substantially L-shaped hook at the distal end, and a shaft formed at the base end of the main body 336a. The support hole 336b, a guide hole 336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 336b, and a gear-shaped protrusion from the base end side of the main body 336a toward the outside of the shaft support hole 336b in the radial direction. It mainly includes a gear portion 336d provided, and a plate-shaped detection piece 336e extending outward in the axial direction of the shaft support hole 336b and capable of passing through a gap between the sensor members 331f.

  The guide hole 336c is a long hole into which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is inserted, and the swing end of the lock member 336 can be defined by the length of the guide hole 336c.

  The second driving device 337 mainly includes a driving motor 337a for generating a driving force, and a driving gear 337b that is rotatably supported by the driving motor 337a. The driving gear 337b is meshed with the gear 336d of the lock member 336, and the driving force is transmitted.

  The gear damper 338 is a member that imparts viscous resistance to the member that meshes and rotates, and the gear member projects rightward from the left cover member 331 (inside the inner case member 330) through the gear damper insertion hole 331 e 2, and the gear thereof The member is engaged with the gear portion 342b (see FIG. 11). Therefore, the lever member 340 receives the viscous resistance from the gear damper 338 while swinging.

  FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340. FIG. 11 shows a state in which the back side frame member 311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 310, and a gear damper receiving member 342, a posture detecting member 343, which is fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 340, and a purpose of preventing destruction. The state in which the peeling member 350 provided as a disassembly is disassembled is illustrated.

  The rear side frame member 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape whose outer shell protrudes to the rear side, and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape in such a manner that the upper part protrudes (returns) to the front side from the protruding end (FIG. 17 (b)). )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a, which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole into which the swing member 360 is partially inserted.

  As shown in FIG. 11, a lever member 340 is formed of a metal material such as iron, and is formed in a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section. The lever member 340 is fastened and fixed to the left side surface of the main body member 341 in the axial direction. A gear damper receiving member 342 having a substantially circular outer shape, a shaft supported coaxially with the gear damper receiving member 342, a substantially circular outer shape when viewed in the axial direction, and fastening to a right side surface of the main body member 341. The posture detecting member 343 to be fixed, the upper cover member 344 formed in a shape that is fitted to the circular portions of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detecting member 343 from above, and the upper cover member 344 with the main body member 341 interposed therebetween. A lower cover member 345 disposed to face, and a corner inserted into the cylindrical portion 342a of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the cylindrical portion 343a of the attitude detecting member 343. The regulating rod member 346, a peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft hole 341b coaxial with the body member 341 mainly includes a swing member 360 which is disposed on the front end of the body member 341, a.

  The gear damper receiving member 342 mainly includes a cylindrical tubular portion 342a inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341 and a gear portion 342b formed in a gear tooth shape along the outer peripheral surface. In addition, the posture detecting member 343 is disposed in the axial direction at a position (the far side in FIG. 11) that is the farthest from the cylindrical portion 343 a inserted into the shaft hole 341 b of the main body member 341. And a plate-shaped sensor detecting piece 343b extending along the main part.

  The cylindrical portions 342a and 343a are portions inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10) is inserted into the inner peripheral side. This enables the lever member 340 to swing about the lever support shaft 331d1.

  The gear portion 342b is a portion that meshes with the gear damper 338 (see FIG. 10), and is a portion that transmits the viscous resistance generated by the gear damper 338 to the lever member 340.

  The sensor detection piece 343b is a portion that allows the posture of the lever member 340 to be detected by passing through a gap between the first sensor member 325a1 or the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 18C).

  The peeling member 350 is provided coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the lever member 340 and has a plate-shaped main body member 351 having an insertion hole 352 inserted through the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10). It mainly includes a rectangular raising member 353 to be fixed, and a magnet member 354 that is arranged above the raising member 353 and is fixed and fixed to the main body member 351 and formed of a magnetic material.

  The magnet member 354 is disposed to face the main body member 341, and is fixedly fastened to the main body member 351, so that the magnet member 354 has a function of uniting and separating the main body member 341 and the main body member 351.

  FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swing member 360 of the lever member 340.

  The main body member 341 of the lever member 340 includes a main body 341a formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, and a pair of shaft holes 341b formed in a substantially central portion of the main body 341a in the left-right direction. A regulating hole 341c drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341b, and a front end of the main body 341a inclined downward (downward in FIG. 12) with respect to the extending direction of the main body 341a. A pair of left and right swing member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e formed in the left and right direction on the root side of the swing member support portion 341d, and a shaft hole 341e formed in the left and right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341e. And a regulating hole 341f.

  The shaft hole 341b is a through hole through which the cylindrical portions 342a and 343a (see FIG. 11) are inserted and into which the lever support shaft 331d1 is inserted. That is, the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are axially supported coaxially with the axis of the shaft hole 341b.

  The restriction hole 341c is a through hole in which the angle restriction rod member 346 is supported.

  The shaft hole 341e is a through hole through which a shaft support rod 363 that supports the swing member 360 is inserted, and the regulating hole 341f is a through hole through which a regulating rod 365 that regulates the swing angle of the swing member 360 is inserted. It is. The inner diameter of the shaft hole 341e is larger than that of the regulating hole 341f by the amount of the buffer member 364 provided around the shaft support rod 363.

  The upper cover member 344 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and forms a curved surface on the back side along a circle centered on the shaft hole 341b. A guide portion 344a, an external fitting portion 344b formed in a U-shape in cross section which is connected to the guide portion 344a and which can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and the guide portion 344a and the external portion. And a connecting portion 344c for connecting the fitting portions 344b. The thickness of the connecting portion 344c is reduced (see FIG. 22).

  The lower cover member 345 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and extends in the left-right direction in a shape along a circle centered on the shaft hole 341b. A rear guide 345a to be formed, an outer fitting portion 345b formed in a U-shaped cross-section that can be fitted to the main body 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and a back guide 345a opposite to the outer fitting 345b. Mainly includes a front curved portion 345c disposed on the side and curved toward the front side, and a front guide portion 345d extending toward the front side from left and right ends of the front curved portion 345c.

  The rear guide portion 345a is a portion disposed along the cutout 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330 together with the guide portion 344a of the upper cover member 344. In the assembled state, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 8) and the upper cover 322 (see FIG. 8) of the outer case member 320 are arranged so as to cover the edges of the rear guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a. Accordingly, the rear guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a can prevent dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inner case member 330.

  The front curved surface portion 345c and the front guide portion 345d are both portions that guide the swing of the main body member 361 of the swing member 360 (see FIG. 11). The front curved surface portion 345c receives a positional shift of the swing member 360 in the rotation direction and an impact when the lens member 317 (see FIG. 10) is pushed in, and the front guide portion 345d allows the swing member 360 to move in the axial direction. Is suppressed.

  Since the lower cover member 345 is disposed to face the lower end of the cutout 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330, the outer case member 320 (see FIG. 8) when the lever member 340 is pressed down. The main body member 341 (made of a metal material) of the lever member 340 can be prevented from directly abutting on the lever member 340. That is, by providing the lower cover member 345 formed of a resin material therebetween, it is possible to reduce the impact when the lever member 340 and the outer case member 320 come into contact with each other.

  The swing member 360 is a member that is disposed at the front end of the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and that can swing about the shaft hole 341e. The swing member 360 is located outside the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped main body member 361 having a side wall portion 361a disposed therein and formed in a U-shaped cross section, and is engaged with a wall portion on the front side of the main body member 361 and is coaxial with the main body member 361 and pivotally supported. A plate-shaped motor fixing plate 362, a cylindrical shaft support rod 363 inserted into the shaft holes 361c and 341e of the main body member 361, and the shaft support rod 363 are fitted into the shaft support member 363 and the shaft support member 363 is externally inserted into the shaft hole 341e. A buffer member 364 to be fitted, a torsion spring SP2 wound around and supported by the buffer member 364, a cylindrical regulating rod 365 inserted through and fixed to the regulating hole 341f, and a motor fixed plate 362 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing plate 362. A vibration device 366 comprised of a voice coil motor that generates a linear vibration in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the plate 362 mainly comprises a.

  The main body member 361 has a pair of plate-shaped side walls 361a arranged to face each other, a front wall 361b connecting the side walls 361a at front ends, and a pair of side walls 361a coaxially and circularly formed. A shaft hole 361c provided therein and into which the buffer member 364 is fitted; an elongated hole regulating hole 361d formed along a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c and through which the regulating rod 365 is inserted; a side wall portion 361a; A fixing plate portion 361e which is bent above the front wall portion 361b in a direction away from each other and to which the swinging operation member 310 is fastened and fixed.

  Since the outer shape of the back side end of the side wall portion 361a is formed in a circular shape centering on the shaft hole 361c, the main body member 361 is moved with the back side end of the side wall portion 361a sliding on the front curved surface portion 345c. Can be rocked.

  The shaft hole 361c is externally supported by the buffer member 364, similarly to the shaft hole 341e. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the vibration generated on the swing member 360 side from being transmitted to the main body member 341 side of the lever member 340.

  The angle regulating hole 361d includes a buffer member 361d1 formed of a resin material. The buffer member 361d1 is attached so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the angle regulating hole 361d. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress an impact when the regulating rod 365 comes into contact with the angle regulating hole 361d.

  The motor fixing plate 362 includes a plate-shaped main body 362a which is vertically locked to the front wall 361b of the main body member 361, and a pair of side wall portions 362b bent at left and right ends of the main body 362a. , Mainly comprising.

  The main body 362a has a projection 362a1 protruding from the front side, and is locked by inserting the projection 362a1 into a hole formed in the front wall 361b.

  The side wall portion 362b is a portion in which a shaft hole 362b1 having the same diameter as the shaft hole 341e is bored, and is externally supported by the cushioning member 364, and is disposed inside the right and left sides of the swing member support portion 341d. That is, the swing member support portion 341d is assembled so as to be sandwiched between the side wall portions 361a and 362b.

  The cushioning member 364 is a tubular member that is inserted through the main body member 341 from the outside. The insertion portion 364a, which is the insertion tip side, has a small diameter, and a root portion 364b that is formed closer to the root side than the insertion portion 364a. Is formed with a larger diameter than the insertion portion 364a.

  Out of those supported by the buffer member 364, the main body member 361 is externally fitted to the root portion 364b, and the main body member 341 and the motor fixing plate 362 are externally fitted to the insertion portion 364a.

  The vibrating device 366 is a device for operating a pair of members in such a manner as to cause a pair of members to approach and separate in a linear direction by electromagnetic force, and is a cylindrical member fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 362 and having a copper wire wound therearound. A certain bobbin member 366a, a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a, and a cylinder having an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a are coaxially arranged and have a disc-shaped shape. And a pressing member 366b (see FIG. 19) connected by a plate.

  The pressing member 366b is made of a magnetic material whose inner cylinder changes its polarity in the axial direction.

  The torsion spring SP2 has one end locked to the main body member 341 and the other end locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP2 urges the swing member 360 in a direction in which the swing member 360 falls down with respect to the main body member 341.

  FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 310. In FIG. 13, the illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 13, the swinging operation member 310 is fixedly fastened to the back side frame member 311 (see FIG. 11), the back side frame member 311 is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 361 e of the swinging member 360. Annular frame member 312 to be formed, a vibration guide member 313 fastened and fixed to the front side of the intermediate frame member 312 in a state where the phases of the intermediate frame member 312 are matched, and the vibration guide member 313 A vibrating member 314 formed in a disk shape having no hole at the center and a light guide member 313a protruding from the vibrating member is inserted, and a vibrating coil spring CS1 fixed to the center of the vibrating member 314 is sandwiched therebetween. When the switch member 315 is disposed to face the vibration member 314, the intermediate member 316 is externally fitted from the front side of the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 is accommodated on the rear side. A lens member 317 which is fitted supported on the vibrating member 314, mainly comprises.

  With the above-described configuration, in the swinging operation member 310, the intermediate frame member 312 and the vibration guide member 313 are fixed to each other, the vibration member 314 and the lens member 317 are fixed to each other, and the switch member 315 and the intermediate member 316 are fixed to each other. .

  The intermediate frame member 312 includes an annular plate-shaped bottom portion 312a, a side wall portion 312b extending forward from the outer periphery of the bottom portion 312a to the entire periphery, and a front side in a direction perpendicular to a surface formed by the bottom portion 312a. Mainly includes a plurality of cylindrical switch support rods 312c standing upright and a back button member 312d movably disposed in the front-rear direction on the rear side upper portion of the bottom portion 312a.

  The bottom 312a includes rectangular recesses 312a1 that are recessed from the radial direction toward the center at the upper, lower, left, and right ends in FIG.

  The recessed portion 312a1 is a portion through which the arm 315f of the switch member 315 is inserted, and the tip of the arm 315f of the switch member 315 is locked to the side wall 312b (see FIG. 21A). Thus, the switch member 315 is disposed so as not to be pulled out with respect to the intermediate frame member 312.

  The switch support rod 312c is a member that is commonly inserted into the vibration guide member 313, the vibration member 314, and the switch member 315. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 from tilting in the operation direction when the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (the stacking direction of each member). Therefore, for example, even when a force is applied to the lens member 317 from a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, it is possible to suppress resistance from being generated in the pushing operation of the lens member 317, and to improve the operability of the pushing operation. . Further, when the vibration member 314 is vibrated by the vibration device 366, the vibration member 314 can be prevented from tilting.

  Here, the vibration of the vibration device 366 means a vibration in which the member vibrates finely, a reciprocating operation in which the member moves in a linear direction, collides with another member at the end of movement, and returns.

  The back button member 312d is usually arranged at a position protruding to the back side by a coil spring interposed between the back button member 312a and a plate-shaped detection piece 312d1 at the center on the front side.

  The vibration guide member 313 includes a plurality (eight in this embodiment) of light guide members 313a that are erected on the front side, a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which the switch support rods 312c are inserted, and a front end at the lower end. It mainly includes a photocoupler-type first sensor member 313c to be provided, and a photocoupler-type second sensor member 313d provided on the rear side at the upper end.

  The light guide member 313a is a transparent member in which a light emitting member such as an LED is disposed on the back side. The light guide member 313a is inserted into the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316, so that the distal end portion is disposed to be opposed to (close to) the lens member 317. Therefore, light emitted from the light emitting member can be guided to the vicinity of the lens member 317, and the effect of causing the lens member 317 to emit light can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 are prevented from tilting in the operation direction when the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the members are stacked). In addition, the inclination of the switch member 315 makes contact with the light guide member 313a, so that the light guide member 313a can be prevented from being damaged.

  The first sensor member 313c is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 315g (see FIG. 21A) provided on the switch member 315 has passed through the gap, and detects the arrangement of the switch member 315.

  The second sensor member 313d is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 312d1 has passed through the gap and detects the posture of the swing operation member 310 to be described later.

  The vibrating member 314 has a substantially disc-shaped main body 314a having an outer diameter of substantially the same cross-section as the bottom 312a and no opening formed in the center, and a plurality of the switch support rods 312c (FIG. Switch support holes 314b (four places in the present embodiment), a central cylindrical portion 314c projecting from the center of the main body portion 314a to the front side in a cylindrical shape and around which the vibration coil spring CS1 is wound and supported, and a switch support rod 312c. A switch receiving member 314d that is inserted from the tip of the main body 314a following the push-in coil spring CS2, a sensor housing hole 314e formed in a lower part of the main body 314a in a shape capable of housing the first sensor member 313c in the front-rear direction, A light guide hole 314f through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted.

  The elastic coefficient of the push-in coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibrating coil spring CS1.

  Since the outer shape of the main body 314a is substantially the same as that of the bottom 312a, the arms 315f of the switch member 315 can be inserted through four recesses formed in the outer peripheral portion.

  The switch receiving member 314d is a cylindrical member in which a large-diameter portion 314d1 having a larger diameter than the switch support hole 314b is formed on the front side, and is inserted into the switch support hole 314b from the front side to have a large diameter. The portion 314d1 is locked in the switch support hole 314b. The push-in coil spring CS2 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the switch support hole 314b.

  The switch member 315 includes a main body 315a formed in a disc shape, a spring receiving portion 315b formed on a cup from the center of the main body 315a toward the front side (left side in FIG. 13), and a switch. A switch support hole 315c through which the support rod 312c can be inserted, a light guide hole 315d formed through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and a pair of switch receiving members arranged at the upper and lower centers (the upper and lower centers in FIG. 13). A guide shaft 315e inserted through 314d, an arm 315f inserted into and locked into the recessed portion 312a1, and a lower portion of the main body 315a (lower side in FIG. 13) that can pass through a gap between the first sensor member 313c. ) Mainly includes a plate-shaped detection piece 315 g protruding from the rear side.

  The switch support hole 315c is formed with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the switch support rod 312c, and is formed with a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the large diameter portion 314d1 of the switch receiving member 314d. Accordingly, when the switch member 315 moves in a direction approaching the vibration member 314, the switch member 315 can be supported by the large diameter portion 314d1.

  Since the guide shaft 315e is inserted through the switch receiving member 314d, the inclination of the switch member 315 with respect to the vibration member 314 can be suppressed.

  The intermediate member 316 includes a light guide hole 316a through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and is externally fixed to the switch member 315 so as not to rotate relatively.

  14 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 333, FIG. 14 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 333, and FIG. 14 (c) is XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the eccentric cam member 333 in a line.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the eccentric cam member 333 includes a main body 333a formed as a rotating gear, a cylindrical tubular part 333b disposed coaxially with the rotation axis of the main body 333a, A cam portion 333c that extends in the axial direction along a circle inscribed in the portion 333b, is formed slightly shorter than the cylindrical portion 333b, and has a hollow inside, and a distal end portion of the cylindrical portion 333b along the axial direction. A pair of notches 333d to be cut, a plate-like rib 333e connecting the cylindrical portion 333b and the cam portion 333c in a direction passing through both axes, and a disk-shaped umbrella covering a gear portion of the main body 333a. And a part 333f.

  The main body part 333a and the cam part 333c are arranged to be shifted in the axial direction (in a two-layer structure). Since the cam portion 333c is hollow, when the cam portion 333c comes into contact with the lever member 340, the cam portion 333c is slightly bent inward (elastically deformed) so that the impact can be absorbed.

  The cam portion 333c is a hollow annular portion having a circular outer shape, and is eccentrically fixed to the main body portion 333a.

  The notch 333d is for making the relative phase with the phase detecting member 334 (see FIG. 15) invariable, and a pair of notches arranged opposite to each other are formed with different circumferential lengths. Thus, it is possible to prevent the phase detection member 334 from being turned 180 degrees and assembled.

  The rib portion 333e is disposed in such a manner as to connect the position farthest from the cylindrical portion 333b of the cam portion 333c and the cylindrical portion 333b, so that the most strong among the hollowly formed cam portions 333c. The strength of the weakened portion can be improved. This can prevent the cam portion 333c from being damaged.

  Note that the rib 333e may be partially cut in the middle of the longitudinal direction. Accordingly, when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small, no load is applied to the rib portion 333e, and the rib portion 333e is divided only when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is large. Can be made to abut each other. This can prevent the rib 333e from being fatigued while the rib 333e is not in contact (when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam 333c is small), thereby improving the durability of the rib 333e. Can be done.

  FIG. 15A is a front view of the phase detection member 334, FIG. 15B is a bottom view of the phase detection member 334, and FIG. 15C is XVc-XVc of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the phase detection member 334 in a line. In FIG. 15C, the annular projection 332i and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17A) are shown by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the phase detecting member 334 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose diameter is enlarged in the middle, and is supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331 d 2 (see FIG. 10). An enlarged portion 334b which is continuously connected to the 334a and is enlarged toward the front side (upward in FIG. 15 (c)) (increased in two stages), and an axial direction from the front end of the enlarged portion 334b. The main part is provided with a plate-shaped detection piece 334c that extends from the bottom surface, and a detent projection 334d that matches the shape of the notch 333d.

  The enlarged diameter portion 334b is a portion that is externally fitted to an annular projection 332i (see FIG. 10) that is annularly provided on the inner surface side of the right cover member 332. The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is supported by the inner surface of the annular convex portion 332i, and the enlarged diameter portion 334b of the phase detecting member 334 is supported by the outer peripheral surface of the annular convex portion 332i from the inner peripheral side. By supporting the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, it is possible to suppress the axial displacement when the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 receives a load from the radial direction.

  The detection piece 334c can pass through a gap between the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9). When the detection piece 334c passes through the gap between the third sensor member 325a3, the rotation preventing projection 334d and the notch 333d mesh with each other to detect the posture of the eccentric cam member 333 whose relative phase with the phase detection member 334 is not changed. can do.

  FIG. 16A is a front view of the lever member 340, FIG. 16B is a side view of the lever member 340 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIb in FIG. 16A, and FIG. FIG. 17 is a top view of the lever member 340 when viewed in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft hole 341e is lower than a straight line directed in the longitudinal direction of the main body member 341 and passing through the shaft hole 341b as compared with the shaft hole 341b (see FIG. ) Below). Thus, it is possible to suppress the load generated on the swing member 360 side from being applied along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340, and to direct the load in the rotation direction of the lever member 340.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a peeling member 350 is provided on the open side of the U-shape. A slight gap is provided between the raising member 353 or the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341.

  Accordingly, when the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, the strength of the main body member 341 is increased by filling the open side of the U-shape of the main body member 341 (the lower side in FIG. 16B) with the peeling member 350. Can be secured.

  Further, when the peeling member 350 starts to be peeled from the state where the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, or in a direction in which the peeling member 350 approaches the main body member 341 from the peeled state (see FIG. 23A). The movement resistance when moving to can be increased.

  Accordingly, the movement resistance when the peeling member 350 relatively moves with respect to the main body member 341 can be increased. For example, the lever member 340 can be controlled in a state where the swinging of the lever member 340 is restricted (see FIG. 22A). When the member 340 is overloaded and the peeling member 350 is pulled off from the main body member 341, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from swinging at high speed due to the applied load.

  FIG. 17A is a front view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. Note that FIG. 17 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged at a downward position (a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pressed down by the player).

  FIG. 18A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 18B is a portion of the operation device 300 along the line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 18C is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc in FIG. 17A. FIG. 19 is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member 310 in FIG. 18B and FIG. 18C are slightly enlarged from FIG. 18A, and in FIG. 19, the central axis of the vibration device 366 of the swing operation member 310 is directed in the vertical direction. The state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position, the eccentric cam member 333 contacts the lower side surface of the peeling member 350. When the lock member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface, the peeling member 350 is prevented from swinging in both directions, so that the swing operation member 310 is fixed at the upward position.

  As in the present embodiment, the lock member 336 is swung about the lock shaft 331d3, and the lock member 336 blocks the swinging of the peeling member 350, and the eccentric cam member 333 is located on the opposite side of the peeling member 350. Is arranged, the posture of the lock member 336 in a state where the peeling member 350 is prevented from swinging by the lock member 336 can be designed and adjusted.

  In the present embodiment, when the distance between the rotation axis of the lock member 336 and the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 is closest, that is, the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side of the peeling member 350 and the cylindrical portion 333b The lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the peeling member 350 only in a state in which is comes into contact with the peeling member 350.

  In other words, the length of the main body portion 336a of the lock member 336 is formed such that the L-shaped hook portion abuts on the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 in a state where the peeling member 350 abuts on the cylindrical portion 333b. .

  Therefore, in a state where the lock member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 and the swinging operation member 310 is fixed at the upward position, the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 is always positioned below the peeling member 350. Is abutted on the side. Therefore, when an overload is applied in a direction in which the swing operation member 310 moves upward from a state where the swing operation member 310 is fixed at the upward position, the overload is applied to the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333. The eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged, and can be prevented from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, the gear portion 342b of the gear damper receiving member 342 meshes with a gear damper 338 disposed on the back side of the gear damper receiving member 342. As will be described later, the gear damper 338 has a role of generating a viscous resistance to the swing of the lever member 340 and a role of generating a resistance force against the load when the lever member 340 receives a load pushing the lever member 340 backward. Have together.

  By disposing the gear damper 338, for example, in a state where the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is pulled off from the peeling member 350, the resistance when the player operates the swing operation member 310 at high speed is large. On the other hand, when the lever member 340 rises due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1, the resistance when the speed is small can be reduced.

  Thus, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be set smaller than when a large resistance corresponding to a high-speed operation of the player is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the degree of freedom in designing the torsion spring SP1 is improved. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 18C, in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position, the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap between the second sensor members 325a2, and the detection piece of the phase detection member 334 is formed. 334c is arranged in the gap between the third sensor members 325a3. That is, the lock member 336 is swung only when the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap between the second sensor members 325a2 and the detection piece 334c of the phase detection member 334 is arranged in the gap between the third sensor members 325a3. This allows the lock member 336 to contact the upper side surface of the peeling member 350.

  Further, as described later, when the peeling member 350 is pulled off from the main body member 341, the sensor detecting piece 343b is moved from the gap between the second sensor members 325a2. Therefore, it is detected that the lock member 336 is not swinging from the state of FIG. 18A (detected by the sensor member 331f) and that the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap between the second sensor members 325a2. Thus, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

  FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 taken along line XX-XX in FIG. In addition, illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 20, the back button member 312d is disposed on the back side of the intermediate frame member 312, and is urged in a direction away from the intermediate frame member 312 by a coil spring. When no load is applied, the detection piece 312d1 is separated from the second sensor member 313d. On the other hand, a pushing load (a load directed upward in FIG. 20) is applied to the back button member 312d, and the back button member 312d is moved until the detection piece 312d1 is inserted into the gap of the second sensor member 313d. It can be detected that the back button member 312d has been pressed.

  FIGS. 21A and 21B are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. In addition, FIG. 21A illustrates a state in which the vibration device 366 operates from the states illustrated in FIGS. 18A and 19 to generate a load upward, and FIG. 21B illustrates a state illustrated in FIG. 19) and the state where the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state of FIG.

  As described above, the switch member 315 is locked so as not to be pulled out from the intermediate frame member 312, and the vibration member 314 is interposed between the switch member 315 and the intermediate frame member 312, and the vibration member 314 is a vibration coil spring CS1. As a result, it is pressed toward the intermediate frame member 312 (downward in FIG. 21A).

  From this state, when current is applied to a copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibration device 366 and the pressing member 366b is pressed against the vibration member 314 by the electromagnetic force generated, the vibration member 314 is pressed against the switch member 315. Move in the direction to be pressed. Thereby, the lens member 317 fitted and fixed to the vibration member 314 moves (upward in FIG. 21A). In this state, since the step portion 317a of the lens member 317 is in contact with the switch member 315, it is difficult to push the lens member 317 in (it becomes hard and cannot be pushed).

  On the other hand, when the vibration member 314 is separated from the lens member 317, the player can push the lens member 317 (pushable state). Therefore, the timing at which the player performs an input operation through the lens member 317 can be designated by driving the vibration member 314.

  Further, since a pushable state in which the lens member 317 can be pushed and a pushable state in which the lens member 317 is fixed so as not to be displaceable and cannot be pushed are configured, the influence on the lever member 340 by the operation performed by the player is provided. Switching can be performed on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) side.

  For example, when the player pushes the lens member 317 intermittently and repeatedly (continuously hits), when the lens member 317 returns from the pushed state, the lever member 340 reacts to the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 18A The load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in the direction approaching ()). Therefore, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, when the push-in state is disabled, the entire swing operation member 310 is pushed down in response to the push-in operation of the player, whereby the lever member 340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 18A). Move in the direction. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the lens member 317, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 collide due to the swinging operation member 310 returning upward by the urging force.

  In addition, as a method of configuring the state in which the lens member 317 cannot be pushed, the lens member 317 is locked by a hook-shaped claw, or the lens member 317 is moved to the end position by a vibration device 366 such as a voice coil motor that linearly reciprocates. An example is a method of overhanging (continuing to apply a load in one direction). According to the method in which the lens member 317 is extended to the end position by the vibration device 366 such as a voice coil motor, the lens member 317 is vibrated by the vibration device 366 and the lens member 317 cannot be pushed. Both effects can occur.

  By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibration device 366, the moving direction of the pressing member 366b can be reversed. Here, since the vibration member 314 is not pulled by the force of the electromagnetic force, there is a possibility that the moving speed may be reduced. In the present embodiment, the vibration member 314 is pressed by the elastic recovery force of the vibration coil spring CS1. And moves downward in FIG. 21 (b).

  Accordingly, the vibration of the lens member 317 can be speeded up without fastening and fixing the pressing member 366b and the vibration member 314.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the step 317a formed on the back side of the lens member 317 comes into contact with the arm 315f of the switch member 315 so that the lens member 317 is pressed. 317 and the vibration member 314 move integrally with the switch member 315. Therefore, since the degree of contraction of the vibrating coil spring CS1 does not change, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance when the lens member 317 is pushed.

  After the pushing operation of the lens member 317, the switch receiving member 314d (see FIG. 13) abutting on the lower side surface of the switch member 315 pushes up the switch member 315 by the elastic recovery force of the pushing coil spring CS2. The lens member 317 returns to the position before being pushed (see FIG. 18A).

  That is, the push-in coil spring CS2 for returning the position of the lens member 317 when the lens member 317 is pushed in and the vibration coil spring CS1 for returning the position of the vibration member 314 can be formed by different members.

  In the present embodiment, since the elastic coefficient of the pushing coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibrating coil spring CS1, the pushing operation of the lens member 317 is performed with a small force while securing a high speed of returning the vibrating member 314. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of the pushing operation of the lens member 317 while securing the magnitude of the vibration passively felt by the player.

  FIGS. 22A and 22B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. 22 (a) and 22 (b) show a state in which the lock member 336 is swung to the fixed side, and in FIG. 22 (a), the swing operation member 310 is arranged at an upward position. FIG. 22B shows a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is pushed to the rear side (the right side in FIG. 22B) from the state in FIG. 22A.

  The lever member 340 that supports the swing operation member 310 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in a direction (clockwise in FIG. 22A) in which the swing operation member 310 is lifted around the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, even if the lock member 336 is swung in the release direction (clockwise in FIG. 22A) from the state of FIG. 22A, the swing operation member 310 can be held at the upward position.

  The swing of the lever member 340 due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is stopped by the lever member 340 coming into contact with the guide support holes 331e1, 332e1, the upper cover 322, and the eccentric cam member 333. As described above, by preparing a plurality of portions that come into contact when the lever member 340 is stopped, the load applied to the lever member 340 can be dispersed, and damage to the lever member 340 can be suppressed. . Hereinafter, each contact portion will be described in detail.

  Since the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted into the guide supporting holes 331e1 and 332e1, the swing of the lever member 340 is stopped by the angle regulating rod member 346 coming into contact with the ends of the guide supporting holes 331e1 and 332e1. Can be. As described above with reference to FIG. 10, since the guide support holes 331 e 1 and 332 e 1 are disposed so as to sandwich the lever member 340 in the swing axis direction, when the lever member 340 is stopped, the lever member 340 is centered on the longitudinal direction. Tilting in the turning direction can be suppressed.

  The connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the upper cover 322. The connecting portion 344c is formed with a step 344c1, which is a portion that vertically contacts the upper cover 322, and a space is formed between the connecting portion 344c and the lever member 340 (see FIG. 22A). Therefore, even when the upper cover 322 abuts on the step portion 344c1, the connecting portion 344c can be deformed toward the space, so that the shock generated between the connecting portion 344c and the upper cover 322 can be reduced. it can.

  Thus, the transmission of the impact to the main body member 341 can be suppressed, so that the configuration of the main body member 341 can be simplified, and the weight of the entire lever member 340 can be reduced. In this case, the elastic coefficient required for the torsion spring SP1 can be suppressed, and accordingly, the driving force required for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 10) that drives the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

  Further, the upper cover member 344 has a role of preventing dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inside of the inner case member 330 in addition to a role of reducing impact. That is, even if the lever member 340 swings (refer to FIG. 23B), the space between the upper cover member 344 and the upper cover 322 is always closed, so that the dust is formed inside the inner case member 330. And balls (game balls, game media) can be prevented from entering.

  Further, the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the notch 331c1 of the inner case member 330 in the swing axis direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 22A). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from wobbling in the swing axis direction using the upper cover member 344.

  The peeling member 350 of the lever member 340 contacts the eccentric cam member 333. Breaking the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented by bringing the lever member 340 into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 with the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 facing the peeling member 350 side.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, in the operation device 300, a straight line L <b> 1 indicating the central axis in the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 passes through the shaft support rod 363. Therefore, the shock of the vibration of the vibration device 366 is given to the shaft support rod 363, but a buffer member 364 (see FIG. 12) is disposed between the shaft support rod 363 and the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 12). Therefore, the shock of the vibration can be reduced by the buffer member 364. Thereby, the vibration transmitted to the lever member 340 can be suppressed.

  The angle between the straight line L1 and a straight line L2 along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340 is defined as an angle θ1. Thereby, the vibration generated by the vibration device 366 can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2, and is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 to vibrate the pachinko machine 10. The load to be applied (the load in the direction along the straight line L2) can be suppressed.

  Similarly, the force applied in the pushing direction of the lens member 317 (parallel to the straight line L1) can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2. By pushing the lens member 317, the load applied to the lever support shaft 331d1 can be suppressed.

  The vibration device 366 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 22A) of the lever support shaft 331d1, and a reaction generated when the vibration device 366 operates operates in a direction to push down the swing member support portion 341d of the main body member 341 downward. Pointed. Therefore, the main body member 341 can be swung in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 by the vibration of the vibration device 366. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the eccentric cam member 333 from receiving a load due to the vibration of the vibration device 366.

  As shown in FIG. 22B, in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed in, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c. In this case, the direction F1 of the load generated toward the lever member 340 is directed to the direction in which the swing member support portion 341d of the lever member 340 is pressed down about the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of a load toward the eccentric cam member 333 due to the pushing operation of the swing operation member 310.

  When the swing operation member 310 is pushed in, the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 form an angle θ2. Since the angle θ2 is larger than the angle θ1, the directional component of the vibration of the vibration device 366 along the straight line L2 can be reduced as compared with the state of FIG. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed by pushing the swing operation member 310.

  In addition, the directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2 can be increased. Therefore, the lever member 340 can be easily swung counterclockwise in FIG. 22B by utilizing the reaction of the vibration, and the vibration mode felt by the player pushing the swinging operation member 310 is changed. A plurality of types of vibrations, that is, a vibration in a linear direction along the straight line L1 and a vibration in which the swinging operation member 310 rotates around the shaft support rod 363 can be caused to appear.

  FIG. 23A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 23B is a cross-section of the operation device 300 along the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc in FIG. FIG. FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the main body member 341 is pulled off from the peeling member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is pressed down in a state where the swinging of the peeling member 350 is restricted by the lock member 336. A sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

  In the state shown in FIG. 22, a load equal to or more than a predetermined amount (a load equal to or more than the attraction force due to magnetic force) is applied in the direction in which the lens member 317 is pushed in, or a load equal to or more than a predetermined amount (in the direction in which the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down). The main body member 341 is pulled off from the magnet member 354 by applying a load equal to or more than the attraction force, and the swing operation member 310 moves to the state shown in FIG. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a large load from being applied between the lock member 336 and the peeling member 350, and to prevent the lock member 336 and the peeling member 350 from being damaged.

  The eccentric cam member 333 is disposed on the opposite side of the direction in which the lever member 340 moves when the swing operation member 310 is pressed down. Since no load is transmitted, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 23B, by moving the sensor detecting piece 343b from the gap between the second sensor members 325a2, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

  In this case, the attraction force due to the magnetic force generated between the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341 suddenly disappears, and the swinging operation member 310 moves vigorously downward. For this reason, the lever member 340 may swing excessively, and a load may be generated on the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 310 is pressed down, the rear side frame member 311 and the front cover 321 of the swing operation member 310 are arranged to face each other and are brought into contact with each other. Even in the case of excessive rotation, the load can be reduced by deforming the rear frame member 311 or the front cover. This can prevent the lever member 340 from being damaged.

  When the player releases the load applied downward from the state shown in FIG. 23A, the main body member 341 is pivoted clockwise by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 in FIG. Is adsorbed to the peeling member 350 again. Thereby, the posture (arrangement) of the lever member 340 (and the main body member 341) can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

  Since the peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331d1, which is the swing axis of the main body member 341, in a state where the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, the weight of the peeling member 350 increases. Does not move in the moving direction.

  That is, the weight balance of the main body member 341 before and after the lever support shaft 331d1 changes between a state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and a state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled from the main body member 341. That is, when the peeling member 350 is pulled off, the moment in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310 applied to the main body member 341 becomes larger. Thus, after the peeling member 350 is peeled, the speed at which the main body member 341 rises can be reduced, so that the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be suppressed. Can be.

  Further, since the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section and the peeling member 350 moves in a manner of entering from the U-shaped open side of the main body member 341 to the U-shaped closed side, the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 When frictional resistance is generated between the main body member 341 and the separation member 350, the speed at which the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be reduced.

  Since the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is transmitted to the main body member 341 and transmitted to the peeling member 350, the locking member 336 or the eccentric cam is kept in a state where the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are pulled apart. It is possible to prevent the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 from acting on the member 333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged in a state where the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are separated from each other.

  Since the peeling member 350 is fixed to the eccentric cam member 333 and the lock member 336 in the state of FIG. 23A, the sensor detecting piece 343b enters the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 again, and It is possible to detect that the member 341 and the peeling member 350 are attracted.

  FIGS. 24A and 24B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. Note that FIG. 24A illustrates a state in which the lock member 336 has been swung to the release side (clockwise in FIG. 24A) from the state of FIG. 22A, and FIG. The state where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated by about 180 degrees from the state of FIG. 24A and the lever member 340 is swung is illustrated. Also, the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pressed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  When the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 enters the gap between the sensor members 331f, it is possible to detect that the lock member 336 swings to the release side. After detecting that the lock member 336 swings to the release side, the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) of the first drive device 335 is rotated to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 and swing the lever member 340. Can be done. Note that the eccentric cam member 333 may be continuously rotated in one direction, or the rotation direction may be switched halfway.

  While the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating, the lever member 340 is urged in a direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 24A) pressed against the eccentric cam member 333 by the torsion spring SP1. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in conjunction with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. Thereby, it is possible to easily attract the player's attention to the swing operation member 310.

  When the vibration device 366 operates in the state shown in FIG. 24A or FIG. 24B, the reaction of the vibration acts in a direction to push down the main body member 341 along the straight line L1. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 due to the reaction of the vibration, so that it is possible to suppress the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 due to the operation of the vibration device 366.

  Consider a case where the lens member 317 is pushed in. Assuming that the direction of the load applied to the lens member 317 is along the straight line L1 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the lever member 340 is moved downward (FIG. 24 ( a) There is a possibility of swinging (counterclockwise) or a swing operation of the swinging operation member 310 (clockwise in FIG. 24A).

  In this embodiment, in any case, since a load is applied to swing the lever member 340 in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333, the load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the lens member 317 in. Can be suppressed. Thereby, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

  FIGS. 25A and 25B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 25A shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 has been rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 from the state of FIG. 24B, and FIG. The state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise by the predetermined angle θ3 from the state shown in FIG. 3 is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. In FIGS. 25A and 25B, the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pressed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  In the present embodiment, since the swing member 360 is urged forward (in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 25), the player can easily grip the swing operation member 310 and perform the downward operation. That is, when a force is applied in the direction M1 (see FIG. 25A) from the state of FIG. 24B to push down the swing operation member 310, the swing operation member 310 is swung (the shaft support rod). The swing operation member 310 can be immediately pushed down without performing the operation of swinging about the center 363).

  Here, if the lever member 340 can be separated from the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 can be urged from a position separated from the eccentric cam member 333 to collide with the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 25 (a) and FIG. 25 (b), since the swing operation member 310 can be pushed up from the position of the imaginary line to the position of the solid line), the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 333 is made hollow so that the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged. That is, the load from the lever member 340 is received by the elastic deformation of the eccentric cam member 333, and the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged.

  As described above, the eccentric cam member 333 can rotate the lever member 340 by continuously rotating regardless of the rotation direction. Here, the characteristics of the rotation direction will be described.

  FIG. 25A shows the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A) (hereinafter, this phase is referred to as a “retreat phase”). Shows the rotation angle of. That is, in order to rotate from the evacuation phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 in FIG. 25A, it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ1 by clockwise rotation.

  FIG. 25B shows the rotation angle from the phase (retreat phase) of the eccentric cam member 333 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A). That is, in order to rotate from the retreating phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 in FIG. 25B, it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ2 by counterclockwise rotation. Here, the angle φ1 is smaller than the angle φ2 (φ1 <φ2).

  Assuming that the eccentric cam member 333 rotates at a constant speed, the direction in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted phase is the direction in which the lever member 340 is biased by the torsion spring SP1 and the rotational direction of the eccentric cam member 333. Can be made shorter than when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise (when the angle is φ2).

  Further, when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted position, the lever member 340 is rotated in a state where the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 and the direction in which the lever member 340 is biased by the torsion spring SP1 are opposed to each other. The position where the eccentric cam member 333 and the eccentric cam member 333 abut can be brought closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 (the position where the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 abut in FIG. 25 (a) and the eccentric cam in FIG. 25 (b)). (It can be closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 than the position where the member 333 and the lever member 340 contact each other.) In this case, if the same torque is applied to the lever member 340, the load generated at the position where the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 contact each other is reduced. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 can be reduced, so that the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, since a large load may be applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by the player lifting the swing operation member 310, the eccentric cam member 333 is continuously rotated in the same direction. In this case, it is preferable to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise in FIG. In this case, when the rib 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates within the angle range of the angle φ2 in FIG. 25B, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 from the lever member 340 is suppressed (the lever support shaft). Since the distance from 331d1 to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member becomes longer), even if the eccentric cam member 333 moves in the direction approaching the lever member 340, the possibility that the eccentric cam member 333 is damaged is reduced. Can be lower.

  On the other hand, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates within the angle range of the angle φ1 in FIG. 25A, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 increases (from the lever support shaft 331d1). (The distance to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 is shortened.) However, since the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating in the direction away from the lever member 340, the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 are The load generated on the eccentric cam member 333 at the contact position can be suppressed, and the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved. It is not necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 in the same direction, and the eccentric cam member 333 may perform a reciprocating rotation operation (reversal operation) on the angle φ1 side or the angle φ2 side.

  FIGS. 26A and 26B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. 26A shows a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is swung in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 26A) from the state in FIG. 24B, and FIG. 26A illustrates a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated to the retreat phase from the state of FIG. 26A and the lever member 340 is swung until it comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333, and a cross section of the swing operation member 310 is illustrated. The vision is omitted.

  Here, when the operation of pushing down the lever member 340 is exclusively required while the lever member 340 is rocked by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the posture of the lever member 340 changes as shown in FIG. Without this, the swing operation member 310 does not normally swing backward (clockwise in FIG. 26A). Therefore, by detecting that the back button member 312d has been pressed, it is possible to detect that the player has performed an erroneous operation (an operation of lifting the swinging operation member 310).

  In this case, a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 through the lever member 340. Since the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged, the eccentric cam member 333 is driven by the driving force of the driving gear 335b until the retreat phase as shown in FIG. Can be prevented.

  At this time, by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise in FIG. 26B, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated more safely. That is, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated while the contact position between the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 is separated from the lever support shaft 331d1, which is compared with the case where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise. Thus, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

  FIGS. 27A and 27B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 27A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pressed down from the state in FIG. 24A, and FIG. 27B illustrates a state in which the swing operation is performed from the state in FIG. FIG. 27A shows a state in which the member 310 is swung clockwise about the shaft support rod 363 in FIG. 27A, and the sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

  When a force is applied in the direction D1 shown in FIG. 27A from the state of FIG. 24A, the swing operation member 310 can be pushed down together with the lever member 340. Next, when a force is applied along the direction D2 opposite to the direction D1 from the state of FIG. 27A, the posture of the lever member 340 is maintained, and the swing operation member 310 is pivoted about the pivot rod 363. Can be rocked. As described above, since a series of operations can be performed by reversing the direction of the force without requiring two types of operations (operations of different modes such as pushing and rotating), the operation of the operation device 300 can be performed. Can be easy.

  During this operation, since the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 function as rigid bodies (the state fixed by the attraction force of the magnet member 354 is maintained), it is possible to suppress a change in the operational feeling felt by the player, Operability of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the swing operation member 310 is swung, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344, so that the lever member 340 is moved in the direction opposite to that of FIG. The load is applied in the clockwise direction. This allows the lever member 340 to be easily fixed to the position of FIG. 27A when the swing operation member 310 is swung, and holds the swing operation member 310 in the state of FIG. 27B. Can be made easier.

  Next, an operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 has the center portion. It is formed as a separate member from the main body member 2333a to be supported and the cam member 2333b to be supported eccentrically. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the second embodiment, the urging force acts in the direction in which the lever member 2340 is raised from the torsion spring SP21, and the head swing operation member 310 is rotated backward from the torsion spring SP22 (clockwise in FIG. 28A). Energizing force works.

  The torsion spring SP21 is wound around the shaft supporting portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of which is in contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 9) from above, and the other end of the torsion spring member 346. Touched from below. Thus, the lever member 2340 is urged in a direction in which the swing operation member 310 is raised.

  The torsion spring SP22 is supported by being wound around the buffer member 364 (see FIG. 12), and one end is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 2362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP22 urges the swing member 2360 in a direction in which it rotates backward with respect to the main body member 341 (clockwise in FIG. 28A).

  FIGS. 28A and 28B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. 28 (a) and 28 (b) show a state in which the rocking of the lever member 2340 is restricted by the lock member 2336. In FIG. 28 (b), the neck is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 28 (a). A state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung rearward about the pivot 363 is illustrated. In the present embodiment, the state of FIG. 28A is the initial position, and in FIG. 28A, the posture P21 in which the swinging operation member 310 is swung by the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Is done. FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. However, since the appearance is the same as the operation device 2300, the operation device 300 will be described as the operation device 2300. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the vibration device 2366 is a device for operating a pair of members mutually in a manner of moving the pair of members close to and away from each other in a linear direction by electromagnetic force. A bobbin member 2366a, which is a tubular member around which a copper wire is wound, and a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a and an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a. And a pressing member 2366b in which the cylinders are coaxially arranged and connected by a disk-shaped plate. The inner cylinder of the pressing member 2366b is formed of a magnetic material.

  The bobbin member 2366a and the pressing member 2366b are smaller in length in the radial direction than the bobbin member 366a and the pressing member 366b in the first embodiment, and the central axis C21 of the vibration device 2366 is located on the front side from the shaft support rod 363 (FIG. 28). (A) on the left side.

  Here, when the swing operation member 310 is provided as an operation unit at the end of the lever member 2340 as in the present embodiment, it may be required for the player to perform the holding in the effect. However, it was difficult to detect whether the player held the swing operation member 310. For example, it is possible to request that the push button be pressed for a long time.However, when requesting operation of the push button is frequently used, it is necessary to push the push button every time with a force greater than the reaction force of the push button. May be stressful.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the central axis of the vibration device 2366 is spaced apart from the front side of the shaft support rod 363, the oscillation member 2360 reciprocates and swings due to the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 2366. The posture of the swing operation member 310 changes in a manner of reciprocatingly swinging between the posture shown in FIG. 28A and the posture P21. Accordingly, before the player grips the swing operation member 310, the back button member 312d reciprocates in the pushing direction (the direction parallel to the center axis C21), so that the back button member 312d is moved to the second sensor member 313d (FIG. 20). ), It is possible to detect that the player is before gripping the swing operation member 310.

  On the other hand, when the player grips the swing operation member 310, the posture of the intermediate frame member 312 is fixed by the gripping force, and the back button member 312d does not reciprocate, so that the signal detected by the second sensor member 313d is detected. Pattern changes. By detecting this change, it is possible to detect that the player has gripped the swing operation member 310.

  When the swing operation member 310 is gripped, there is no reaction force generated, so that the force required for the player is small. In addition, the player only needs to cover the swing operation member 310 with the hand of the player (the player can immediately operate the swing operation member 310). For example, the player places his or her own weight on the intermediate frame member 312. Alone, it is possible to reduce the stress on the player.

  Thus, whether or not the player is holding the swinging operation member 310 (whether or not the operation is in the preparation stage) can be performed without requiring the player to operate the push button, and the effect is advanced. The timing can be set to the timing when the player grips the swing operation member 310, and the stress on the player due to requesting the operation of the push button can be eliminated.

  When the connection between the lever member 2340 and the oscillating member 2360 is pivotally supported, the center axis of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 and the rotation axis of the oscillating member 2360 are matched to increase the vibration transmitted to the player. be able to. On the other hand, in this case, large vibration is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, there is a problem that the loosening of the fastening screws and the deterioration of the members occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is used to rotate the vibration operation member 310 by shifting the rotation axis of the vibration member 2360 and the central axis of the vibration of the vibration device 2366. The vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) can be reduced (the energy of the vibration is used for rotating the swing operation member 310). In addition, the lens member 317 can be vibrated while rotating the swing operation member 310 by the vibration of the vibration device 2366, so that the effect can be improved.

  The rod-shaped member 2331d includes a lock release shaft 2331d5 (see FIG. 28A) extending in parallel with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2.

  FIGS. 29A and 29B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. Note that FIG. 29A illustrates a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down while the lock member 2336 is arranged on the release side and is arranged at a downward position. FIG. 29B illustrates a state in which the swinging operation member 310 has been rotated from the state illustrated in FIG. 29A to the end of rotation in the forward rotation direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29A).

  Since the swing operation member 310 is urged backward by the torsion spring SP22 (clockwise direction in FIG. 29A), the swing operation member 310 is held until the lever member 2340 is disposed at the lower end of the swing range. Is kept pressed against the upper cover member 344.

  When a load is further applied to the swing operation member 310 in a direction in which the lever member 2340 is pushed down to the lower end of the swing range (see FIG. 29A), the swing operation member 310 is further pushed down. It rotates in the forward rotation direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29A). This allows the player to recognize the lower end of the operation of pushing down the swinging operation member 310, and does not know the end of the operation range of the swinging operation member 310. Applying a load can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 that transmits the driving force to the lever member 2340 and the lock release cam member 2339 that swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side (see FIG. 29A) are both driven. It is rotated by the gear 335b. This eliminates the necessity of disposing the second drive device 337 (see FIG. 10), and can reduce the product cost. Hereinafter, the eccentric cam member 2333, the lock release cam member 2339, and the lock member 2336 will be described.

  FIG. 30A is a front view of the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30B is a side view of the cam member 2333b as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXb of FIG. (C) is a front view of the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (d) is a side view of the main body member 2333a when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXd of FIG. 30 (c). 30 (c) and 30 (d), the main body member 2333a is partially viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, the cam member 2333b has a cylindrical portion 2333b1 supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) and a circle inscribed in the cylindrical portion 2333b1. A cam portion 2333b2 extending in the axial direction along the axis and formed slightly shorter than the cylindrical portion 2333b1 and having a hollow inside, and a pair of cutouts cut along the axial direction at the tip of the cylindrical portion 2333b1 The notch 2333b3, the plate-like rib portion 2333b4 connecting the cylindrical portion 2333b1 and the cam portion 2333b2 in a direction passing through both axes, and the rib portion 2333b4 is provided to project from the rib portion 2333b4 in parallel with the axis of the cylindrical portion 2333b1. And a projection portion 2333b5.

  The protruding portion 2333b5 is a projection that is disposed at a position radially separated from the cylindrical portion 2333b1 by the length of the radius R21 and inserted into the annular concave portion 2333a3 of the main body member 2333a, and is formed of a magnetic material. It is bonded to the rib portion 2333b4 with an adhesive or the like. In addition, the protruding portion 2333b5 has a side surface (upper and lower side surfaces in FIG. 30 (a)) arranged in a manner intersecting with the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 2333b1 and a curved surface shape following a circular shape centered on the cylindrical portion 2333b1. Is formed.

  Note that the cylindrical portion 2333b1 corresponds to the cylindrical portion 333b, the cam portion 2333b2 corresponds to the cam portion 333c, the notch 2333b3 corresponds to the notch 333d, and the rib portion 2333b4 corresponds to the rib portion 333e. Since the technical ideas are common, the description is omitted here.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 (c) and 30 (d), the main body member 2333a is provided with a shaft hole 2333a2 having a circular cross section supported at the center by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10). A disk-shaped disk portion 2333a1 in which gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) are formed on the outer peripheral surface, and along the axial direction of the shaft hole 2333a2 from the front side of the disk portion 2333a1. An annular concave portion 2333a3 mainly provided with an annular concave portion, and a fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in which a magnetic material is annularly disposed along the outer peripheral surface of the annular concave portion 2333a3.

  In the annular concave portion 2333a3, the distance from the center of the shaft hole 2333a2 to the inner peripheral surface of the annular concave portion 2333a3 is the length of the radius R22, and the radial width is slightly larger than the thickness of the convex portion 2333b5. In the present embodiment, the radius R22 has the same length as the deformation R21 (radius R21 = radius R22). Further, the depth of the annular recess 2333a3 is longer than the length of the projection 2333b5.

  Here, since the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the annular concave portion 2333a3, the cam member 2333b is moved from the lever member 2340 when the convex portion 2333b5 is provided above the tubular portion 2333b1. When receiving an overload, the cam member 2333b receives a load in a direction in which the protruding portion 2333b5 is released from the fixed magnet portion 2333a4. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the protruding portion 2333b5 from being pressed against the fixed magnet portion 2333a4, and it is possible to suppress deterioration due to friction between the magnets.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are assembled, FIG. 31A is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. FIG. 31A is a side view of the eccentric cam member 2333 as viewed in the XXXXb direction, and FIG. 31C is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333. FIG. 31C illustrates a state in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are relatively rotated from the state illustrated in FIG. 31A. At D12 (b), the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are partially viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), in a state where the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 and assembled, the projecting portion 2333b5 is circular. The magnetic force is inserted into the annular concave portion 2333a3, and a magnetic force acts between the convex portion 2333b5 and the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 so as to attract each other. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b can be integrally rotated by the driving force transmitted from the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 10).

  At this time, the shape of the projecting portion 2333b5 is formed by a curved surface along a circle centered on the cylindrical portion 2333b1, and the area of contact with the side surface of the annular recess 2333a3 can be increased. The member 2333b can be firmly fixed.

  On the other hand, since the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are merely attracted and fixed by magnetic force, when the cam member 2333b receives a load with a force greater than the attracting force, the cam member 2333b slides on the main body member 2333a. Can be made. That is, as shown in FIG. 31A, the main body member 2333a is shifted from the state in which the reference line O representing the reference phase of the main body member 2333a coincides with the straight line Q21 representing the phase of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b. By applying a load in the rotating direction to the fixed cam member 2333b, the reference line O and the straight line Q21 can be changed to a state where the straight line Q21 is displaced as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 32A is a front view of the unlocking cam member 2339, and FIG. 32B is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member 2339 in the XXXIIb direction of FIG. 32) is a side view of the unlocking cam member 2339 when viewed in the XXXIIc direction of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the unlocking cam member 2339 is formed to have the same size as the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and has gear teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface thereof so as to mesh with the driving gear 335b. Portion 2339a, a shaft hole 2339b formed at the center of the main body 2339a and through which the unlocking shaft 2331d5 is inserted, and extending radially outward along the front side surface of the main body 2339a. A release portion 2339c formed to have a length capable of contacting the locking portion 2666d of the lock member 2336, and a detection piece extending radially outward at a position 90 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the release portion 2339c. 2339d.

  The detection piece 2339d passes through a gap between the detection sensors (not shown). Thus, the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 can be detected.

  FIG. 33 (a) is a front view of the lock member 2336, and FIG. 33 (b) is a side view of the lock member 2336 as viewed in the XXXIIIb direction of FIG. 33 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, the lock member 2336 has a shape in which the gear 336d (see FIG. 10) is omitted. The lock member 2336 is a member for preventing the swing of the lever member 2340, and is formed in a plate-shaped main body 2336a having a substantially L-shaped hook at the distal end and a base end of the main body 2336a. A shaft support hole 2336b through which the lock shaft 331d3 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, a guide hole 2336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 2336b, and a lock release cam member of the main body 2336a Mainly includes a locking portion 2336d protruding above the shaft support hole 2336b (the tip of the L-shaped hook-shaped portion) from the side surface on the side (the left side in FIG. 33B) facing the 2339.

  The body portion 2336a has a large force to rotate the lock member 2336 when the side surface of the tip portion formed in an L-shaped hook shape (the side surface that comes into contact with the lower side of the lever member 2340) comes into contact with the lever member 2340. It is an aspect.

  The guide hole 2336c is a long hole into which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 (see FIG. 10) is inserted. The swing end of the lock member 2336 can be defined by the length of the guide hole 2336c.

  The locking portion 2336c is a portion pressed from the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 (see FIG. 32). In addition, a torsion spring (not shown) is locked to the locking portion 2336c, and the lock member 2336 receives an urging force toward the fixed side (see FIG. 28A) from beginning to end.

  34 and 35 are front views of the lever member 2340, the eccentric cam member 2333, the lock member 2336, and the lock release cam member 2339, which illustrate in a time series that the lever member 2340 swings by the rotation of the drive gear 335b. It is.

  Note that FIG. 34A illustrates a state in which the swinging of the lever member 2340 is restricted by the lock member 2336. In FIG. 34B, the lock release cam member 2339 is changed from the state illustrated in FIG. FIG. 34C illustrates a state where the lock member 2336 is rotated until the lock member 2336 is released from the state illustrated in FIG. 34B. FIG. 34D illustrates a state in which the lock release cam member 2339 is rotated from the state illustrated in FIG. 34C and the lock member 2336 returns to the fixed side position.

  FIG. 35 (a) shows a state in which the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 contacts the lever member 2340 on the side opposite to the cylindrical portion 2333b1 (the side disposed at an angle of 180 degrees). 35 (b), the state where the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of FIG. 35 (a) and the lever member 2340 abuts on the lock member 2336 from the upper side, and in FIG. 35 (c), FIG. The state where the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of (b) and the swing of the lever member 2340 is restricted by the lock member 2336 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when it is necessary to rotate the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 by the angle θ21 before coming into contact with the locking portion of the lock member 2336, the lock release cam member 2339 is rotated by the angle θ21. 34B, the swing of the lever member 2340 is restricted, so that the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 cannot rotate. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b, which rotate in synchronization with the lock release cam member 2339, relatively rotate from the state shown in FIG. 34A by the angle θ21 (see FIG. 34B).

  As described above, since the cam member 2333b is rotatable relative to the main body member 2333a, even when the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlocking cam member 2339 are assembled out of phase, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 causes the lever member to rotate. The drive motor 335a (see FIG. 10) can be prevented from being damaged by being dammed by 2340.

  After the lock release cam member 2339 rotates by the angle θ21, the lock release cam member 2339 starts to move the lock member 2336 to the release side, so that the swing of the lever member 2340 can be released. The rotation causes the lever member 2340 to swing. In this case, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are attracted by magnetic force and rotate integrally.

  When the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 comes out above the lock member 2336 and the lock member 2336 returns to the fixed side (see FIG. 34D), the rear end of the lever member 2340 regardless of the timing thereafter. (FIG. 34 (a) right end portion) pushes the curved surface portion of the hook-shaped portion of the main body portion 2336a of the lock member 2336, thereby pushing the lock member 2336 to the release side, and further lowering the rear end portion of the lever member 2340. The swing is naturally regulated.

  Therefore, for example, when the player operates the swinging operation member 310 in the lifting direction and the rear end of the lever member 2340 descends, regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (FIG. 34D) Regardless of the posture shown in FIG. 35A or FIG. 35B, the swing is restricted by swinging the lever member 2340 to below the hook-like portion of the lock member 2336.

  Here, as a countermeasure against the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts the swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), the eccentric cam member 2333 is formed of an elastic material such as rubber, and the member is made of an elastic material. A method of releasing the load by deforming is considered. However, in this case, there has been a problem that the member is sagged or the shape is changed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the player lifting the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). This can prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged.

  That is, irrespective of the posture of the lever member 2340 (regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 shown in FIG. 34 (d), FIG. 35 (a) or FIG. 35 (b)), the swing operation member 310 (FIG. 28), the lever member 2340 pushes the cam member 2333b (slids against the main body member 2333a), and the lever member 2340 swings below the hook-like portion of the lock member 2336. The swing is regulated by being moved.

  On the other hand, in this case, although the posture of the cam member 2333b is the same (see FIG. 35 (c)), the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 is different (FIGS. 34 (d) and 35 (a)). Or, see FIG. 35 (b)). Therefore, the rotation angle of the drive gear 335b required until the lock release cam member 2339 moves the lock member 2336 to the release side again differs, and it becomes difficult to determine the timing of starting the drive of the lever member 2340. was there.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 can be matched by detecting the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 with a detection sensor (not shown). That is, when the rocking of the lever member 2340 is restricted by the locking member 2336, the arrangement of the cam member 2333b is fixed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 35 (c). In this state, the drive gear 335b is rotated to lock the cam member 2333b. By rotating the release cam member 2339 to a predetermined phase (see FIG. 34B), the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 can be matched.

  This allows the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 to match each other regardless of the timing at which the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). The drive start timing can be easily matched.

  Next, the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 36A to 36C are front views of the main body member 2361 of the swinging member 2360 illustrated in the axial direction of the shaft support rod 363. Note that FIG. 36A illustrates a state in which the main body member 2361 is swingably disposed at the rear end on the backward rotation side (see FIG. 28A), and FIG. A state in which the main body member 2361 is oscillated (see FIG. 28B) is shown. In FIG. 36C, the main body member 2361 is moved along the longitudinal direction of the long hole 2361f from the state shown in FIG. 36B. 2 shows a state in which the sliding movement has been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the main body member 2361 is a member coaxial with the shaft hole 341e (see FIG. 12) and supported by the shaft support rod 363, and the shape of the side wall portion 361a (see FIG. 12) is slightly deformed. The fixed side wall portion 2361a, the elongated hole 2361f formed along the extending direction of the fixed plate portion 361e from the shaft hole 361c, and the fixed plate portion 361e extending from the upper end of the angle regulating hole 361d. And a long hole 2361g formed along the direction.

  As a result, as long as at least the main body member 2361 is not pivotally arranged at the end on the forward rotation side, the shaft support rod 363 and the restriction rod 365 are disposed so as not to enter the long holes 2361f and 2361g. Therefore, the main body member 2361 performs only the swing operation about the pivot 363.

  Next, the motor fixing plate 2362 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 (a) is a top view of the motor fixing plate 2362, FIG. 37 (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 in the XXXVIIb direction of FIG. 37 (a), and FIG. FIG. 38 is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 showing a state where the U-shaped member 2362d is slid from the state shown in FIG. 37 (b). 37B and 37C, the outer shape of the main body member 2361 is shown by imaginary lines in FIG. 37 (b) and FIG. 37 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 37, the motor fixing plate 2362 includes a main body 2362a and a side wall 2362b formed by extending the main body 362a and the side wall 362b rearward (upward in FIG. 37), and a bottom of the main body 2362a. A pair of rod portions 2362c extending downward from the side, a U-shaped member 2362d which is slidably disposed on the rod portions 2362c and has a crotch width larger than the width of the long holes 2361f and 2361g; Mainly equipped.

  The side wall portion 2362b includes a long hole 2362b1 that is formed along the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a.

  The U-shaped member 2362d is disposed in such a manner that the direction of the U-shaped crotch width is along the width direction of the long holes 2361f and 2361g, and is urged away from the main body 2362a by an elastic spring or the like (not shown). Is done. That is, when no load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. 37 (b), and the U-shaped legs overlap the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. In addition, it is possible to prevent the shaft support rod 363 and the restriction rod 365 from moving along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

  On the other hand, when a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d in a direction approaching the main body 2362a, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. Since it overlaps with the long holes 2361f and 2361g, the shaft support rod 363 and the restriction rod 365 can be moved along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

  That is, by switching whether or not to apply a load to the U-shaped member 2362d, it can be switched whether or not the main body member 2361 can be moved along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

  Here, a member that slides the U-shaped member 2362d will be described. In the present embodiment, a plate-shaped first release member 2370 disposed slidably along the longitudinal direction inside the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 and a back side frame member 311 of the swing operation member 310 are provided. A plate-shaped second release member 2380 that is slidably disposed in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the main body 2362a through the provided through-hole.

  Note that the first release member 2370 is provided so as to be able to slide the U-shaped member 2362d on the rear side (the right side in FIG. 28A), and the second release member 2380 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 28A). The character member 2362d is slidably provided.

  In addition, the first release member 2370 pushes the U-shaped member 2362d when the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 2340, so that the main body member 351 contacts the end of the first release member 2370. Shaped. The second release member 2380 is configured such that the front swinging operation member 310 is disposed at the downward position, and the front swinging member 2360 is rotated to be disposed at the end of the swing in the forward rotation direction. The U-shaped member 2362d is brought into contact with the end portion and is pushed.

  For example, in the state shown in FIG. 29B, the U-shaped member 2362d on the front side (left side in FIG. 29A) is slid while the U-shaped member on the rear side (right side in FIG. 29A) is slid. Since 2362d is not slid, the swing operation member 310 cannot be slid downward.

  FIGS. 38A and 38B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 38A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state illustrated in FIG. FIG. 38B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is slid along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g from the state illustrated in FIG. 38A.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the peeling member 350 is pulled off from the main body member 341, and the swinging operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position and rotated and arranged at the end of the swing in the forward rotation direction. Thus, the pair of U-shaped members 2362d is slid and the swing operation member 310 can slide along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

  At this time, the body member 341 of the lever member 2340 has already overloaded the swing operation member 310 due to the peeling member 350 being pulled off, and the swing operation member 310 swings to the lower end of the swing range. In addition, a downward force is further applied to the swing operation member 310. Therefore, the player does not necessarily apply an overload when operating the swing operation member 310, and may determine that the swing operation member 310 is being destroyed regardless of the operation. it can.

  Therefore, for example, by detecting the state shown in FIG. 38B by a detection sensor (not shown) and issuing an alarm, it is possible to prevent the player from overloading the swinging operation member 310. However, it is possible to prevent the operation device 2300 from being destroyed.

  In addition, when the overload is not applied to the swing operation member 310, the slide movement of the swing operation member 310 can be prevented. Therefore, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 310 is improved by the long holes 2361f and 2361g. It can be prevented from changing.

  Next, an operation device 3300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described where the driving force for driving the lever member 340 is transmitted to the lever member 340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1, but the operating device 3300 in the third embodiment drives the lever member 3340. The driving force to be transmitted is transmitted in front of the lever support shaft 331d1. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the third embodiment, an urging force is exerted from the torsion spring SP31 in a direction to cause the lever member 3340 to fall forward, and an urging force is exerted from the torsion spring SP32 to a direction to cause the swinging operation member 310 to fall backward.

  The torsion spring SP31 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of which is in contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 10) from above, and the other end of the torsion spring member 346. It is abutted from above. Accordingly, the lever member 340 is urged in a direction in which the swing operation member 310 falls forward.

  The torsion spring SP32 is supported by being wrapped around the buffer member 364, and has one end locked to the front curved surface portion 345c and the other end locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP32 urges the swing member 360 in a direction in which the swing member 360 rises with respect to the main body member 341.

  FIGS. 39A and 39B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 according to the third embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. 39 (a) and 39 (b) show a state in which the rocking of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the lock member 336. In FIG. 39 (b), the neck is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a). A state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung forward about the pivot 363 is illustrated. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 39A is the initial position. Also, although the operation device 300 is illustrated in FIG. 17A, the appearance is the same, so that the description will be made assuming the operation device 3300. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the operation device 3300 in the present embodiment does not include the eccentric cam member 333, and the driving of the lever member 3340 is performed by a solenoid mechanism described later. Hereinafter, the solenoid mechanism will be described.

  The solenoid mechanism includes a magnetic member 3339 formed of a magnetic material disposed inside the inner cover member 3330, and a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member 3345f fixed to the lever member 3340. .

  The lower cover member 3345 of the lever member 3340 includes a pair of transmission portions 3345e extending rearward and downward from the left and right ends of the rear guide portion 345a and molded integrally with the lower cover member 3345. A metal rod-shaped member 3345f is fixed to the end in a posture parallel to the lever support shaft 331d1, and current is conducted to the rod-shaped member 3345f.

  The magnetic material 3339 is a U-shaped magnet that extends from the front side wall of the inner cover member 3330 to the back side (the right side in FIG. 39A) in a pair of upper and lower sides. In the present embodiment, the upper arm 3339n disposed on the upper side has an N pole, and the lower arm 3339s disposed on the lower side has an S pole. The lower surface of the upper arm 3339n and the upper surface of the lower arm 3339s are arranged with a slight gap in the vertical direction from the locus of the movement of the bar-shaped member 3345f with the swing of the lever member 3340. Therefore, when the lever member 3340 swings, it is possible to prevent the rod-shaped member 3345f from colliding with the magnetic member 3339.

  Here, for example, when an electric current is applied to the bar-shaped member 3345f toward the near side in FIG. 39A, an electromagnetic force is generated to move the bar-shaped member 3345f rearward (to the right in FIG. 39A). When a current is applied in the opposite direction, an electromagnetic force is generated to move the rod-shaped member 3345f forward (to the left in FIG. 39A). The lever member 3340 can be swung by these electromagnetic forces.

  FIG. 40A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 3300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 40A illustrates a state in which the lock member 336 is arranged on the release side, the lever member 3340 is swung by the urging force, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position.

  In this embodiment, since the lever member 3340 is urged forward by the torsion spring SP1, the lever member 3340 can be started to swing by disposing the lock member 336 on the release side.

  As in the present embodiment, when the lever member 3340 is urged in the direction of falling forward, when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310, the eccentricity that drives the lever member 3340 to the side closer to the lever member 3340 is used. It is necessary to arrange the cam member, and there is a problem that the eccentric cam member is easily damaged by the operation of the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member is omitted, and the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 3340 by the solenoid mechanism. Since the magnetic member 3339 constituting the solenoid mechanism is disposed in such a manner as to leave a slight gap from the movement trajectory of the rod member 3345f constituting the solenoid mechanism, it is possible to suppress the collision between the rod member 3345f and the magnetic member 3339. Then, it is possible to prevent the solenoid mechanism from being damaged when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310.

  FIG. 40B is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 3300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. Note that FIG. 40B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state illustrated in FIG. 39B and the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are separated.

  Since the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is directed in the direction in which the lever member 3340 falls forward (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 40B), even if the player releases his / her hand from the state in FIG. The swing operation member 310 does not immediately move upward, but is maintained in place.

  Here, assuming that the biasing direction of the lever member 340 is the rising direction, when the player overloads the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 is separated from the peeling member 350 and the lock member 336 is damaged. Even if the player can release the hand, the swinging operation member 310 rises as soon as the player releases his hand, so the player does not notice that the player is overloading and repeatedly applies the overload to the swinging operation member 310. There was a problem that there was a risk of calling.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the direction of the urging of the lever member 3340 is directed to the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 40B), the swing operation member 310 is directed downward. Can be kept in place. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player repeatedly applies an overload to the swing operation member 310.

  In the present embodiment, a rod-shaped member 3345f that receives an electromagnetic force for driving the lever member 3340 operates integrally with the main body member 341. That is, in a state where the main body member 341 is separated from the peeling member 350, the main body member 341 can be swung by the electromagnetic force applied to the rod-shaped member 3345f.

  Here, when the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 340 (see FIG. 10) by the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10), when the eccentric cam member 333 is disposed below the peeling member 350, the lever member is turned by the lock member 336. When the swing of the 340 is regulated, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 is also regulated at the same time (see FIG. 18A). Therefore, when the swing of the lever member 340 is restricted by the lock member 336, when the eccentric cam member 333 operates, there is a problem that a load is applied to the lock member 336 and the lock member 336 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the rocking of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the lock member 336, the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving the electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 can be rocked. On the other hand, no driving force is transmitted to the peeling member 350.

  Therefore, even when a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f when the rocking of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the lock member 336, the electromagnetic force generated at that time is used for the rocking of the main body member 341 and the rocking of the peeling member 350 is performed. Since it is not used for movement, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 from being damaged.

  FIGS. 41A and 41B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. Note that FIG. 41A illustrates a state where the lever member 3340 is swung in a rising direction from the state illustrated in FIG. 40B, and FIG. 41B illustrates a state illustrated in FIG. 41A. , The state where the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving an electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 of the lever member 3340 can be swung. Here, when the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10) is disposed below the peeling member 350 and the lever member 3340 is driven by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 is moved from the peeling member 350 to the lever member 340. The main body member 341 cannot be driven in a state where the main body member 341 is peeled off (see FIG. 23B).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the driving force is not transmitted to the main body member 341 via the peeling member 350, but the electromagnetic force received by the rod-shaped member 3345f is transmitted to the main body member 341 via the transmission portion 3345e. The main body member 341 is driven. Therefore, even when the position of the peeling member 350 is fixed, the main body member 341 can be swung.

  The body member 341 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 40B toward the back side of FIG. 40B through the rod-shaped member 3345f until the transmission portion 3345e changes its posture by the angle α31, thereby changing the main body member 341 to the state shown in FIG. 41 (a) until the transmitting portion 3345e changes its posture by the angle α32 from the state shown in FIG. 41 (a), by flowing a current toward the back side of FIG. 41 (a). The main body member 341 can be in the state shown in FIG.

  By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the posture of the main body member 341 can be repeatedly changed between the state of FIG. 41 (a) and the state of FIG. 41 (b). Accordingly, a fluttering operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300 can be performed.

  In addition, even in a state where the peeling member 350 is fixed by suction to the main body member 341 (see FIG. 40A), by inverting the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the player can pay attention to the operation device 3300. Actions can be taken. At this time, the path along which the bar-shaped member 3345f moves is the same as the path in a state where the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Therefore, the peeling member 350 is pulled from the main body member 341 by a single magnetic member 3339. It is possible to cope with the case where the peeling member 350 is adsorbed on the body member 341 and the case where the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341.

  Note that the weight balance in the longitudinal direction of the main unit member 341 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Even if a large amount of current flows, the speed of the tilting operation can be made different. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  FIGS. 42A and 42B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. In FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), for easy understanding, the swing operation member 310 is shown in a side view instead of a sectional view, and the player's hand is shown in imaginary lines. .

  FIG. 42 (a) shows a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position and the player's hand is put on the back side of the swing operation member 310 (the right side in FIG. 42 (a)). In this state, when a current flows through the bar-shaped member 3345f toward the back of the drawing of FIG. 42A, the bar-shaped member 3345f receives an electromagnetic force and swings in a direction in which the lever member 3340 rises. By the swing of the lever member 3340, the swing operation member 310 is caught by the player's hand, and the swing operation member 310 swings in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42A). As a result, the state of the back button member 312d changes, and by detecting the change with the second sensor member 313d (see FIG. 20), it is possible to determine the presence or absence of an input operation from the player.

  In this case, the player can perform the input operation only by putting his or her hand on the swing operation member 310, and the input operation can be facilitated. Further, the state of the back button member 312d changes depending on the mode (timing and strength) of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f (the swinging operation member 310 on which the player puts his hand swings forward). Can be controlled. Therefore, without requiring the player to perform an input operation, the player places his / her hand on the swing operation member 310 and controls the direction and intensity of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, so that the input of the back button 312d is performed on the control side. The timing of the operation can be determined. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the player, for example, when performing an effect that requires input at a good timing.

  Further, if the player does not put his / her hand on the back side of the swing operation member 310, for example, only putting his / her hand on the lens member 317, the lever member 3340 is raised from the state shown in FIG. Even when swinging, the swing operation member 310 does not swing in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42A). Therefore, when there are a plurality of operation modes of the operation device 3300, it is possible to specify an operation method for performing input with good timing, and it is possible to cause a player to operate the operation device 3300 in an appropriate method.

  This is impossible in a mode in which the eccentric cam member 333 is disposed below and below the lever support shaft 331d1 of the lever member 3340. For example, as in the present embodiment, a bar-shaped member 3345h is provided in front of the lever support shaft 331d1. This is the first effect achieved by adopting a mode in which the received electromagnetic force is transmitted and the main body member 341 is swung in the rising direction.

  Next, an operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the lock member 336 restricts the swing of the lever member 340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position has been described. However, the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment has The lock member 4336 regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 43 is an exploded front perspective view of an operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 43, the illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and a state in which the inner case member 4330 is disassembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the inner case member 4330 includes a left cover member 4331 and a right cover member 4332 assembled in a box shape in which the lever member 4340 is disposed inside, and an eccentric cam protruding from the left cover member 4331. An eccentric cam member 4333 supported by the shaft 331d2 and a lock member 4336 supported by a lock shaft 4331d3 protruding from the left cover member 331 are mainly provided. The arrangement and posture of the driving member insertion hole 332d and the second driving device 337 in this embodiment are slightly different from those in the first embodiment, but the technical idea of driving the lock member 4336 is different from that in the first embodiment. Since they are the same, the same reference numerals are given and their explanation is omitted.

  The left cover member 4331 is different from the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment, and includes a plurality of rod-shaped members 4331d formed to protrude rightward from the upper side wall 331b and formed in a columnar shape.

  The bar-shaped member 4331d is provided at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 4331, a lever support shaft 331d1, an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 disposed below the lever support shaft 331d1, and a rear portion of the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. Mainly provided with a lock shaft 4331d3.

  The lock shaft 4331d3 is a shaft through which the lock member 4336 is inserted, and is supported by the left cover member 4331 and the right cover member 4332 at both ends.

  The eccentric cam member 4333 includes a cam portion 4333c, unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment. The cam portion 4333c has the same configuration as the cam portion 333c, but has a larger diameter of the eccentric cam than the cam portion 333c. In detail, the end of the cam portion 4333c is aligned with the axis of the main body portion 333a, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position with the largest diameter portion of the cam portion 4333c closest to the lever member 4340. The diameter of the eccentric cam is formed by the size of the eccentric cam.

  The lock member 4336 is disposed below the lock receiving member 4350 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is disposed near the downward position and the side of the lever member 4340 where the lock receiving member 4350 is disposed is disposed upward. It is a member that abuts and regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

  FIG. 44 (a) is a front view of the lock member 4336, and FIG. 44 (b) is a side view of the lock member 4336 as viewed in the XXXXIVb direction of FIG. 44 (a).

  The lock member 4336 includes a main body member 4336a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission member 4336b formed in a fan-shaped cross section and transmitting the driving force of the second driving device 337 by meshing gears. , Mainly comprising.

  The main body member 4336a is penetrated in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 44 (a)) of the main body portion 4336a1 formed in a long plate shape and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. Shaft support hole 4336a2, locking portion 4336a3 projecting above shaft support hole 4336a2 from the side surface of main body portion 4336a1 opposite to transmission member 4336b, and side surface of main body portion 4336a1 facing transmission member 4336b. And a recessed portion 4336a4 that is recessed from the back side (the right side in FIG. 44B) to the front side below the shaft support hole 4336a2.

  The locking portion 4336a3 is a portion to which the other arm of the torsion spring SP41, which is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and whose one arm is locked to the connection side wall 331c, is locked (see FIG. 45). Thus, the main body member 4336a is constantly urged counterclockwise in FIG. 44 (b).

  The concave portion 4336a4 is a portion that comes into contact with the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b. Since the depth of the recessed portion 4336a from the back side is equal to or greater than the thickness of the projecting portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b, the main body member when the main body member 4336a is in the lock standby state (see FIG. 45A). The posture of 4336a can be defined based on the relationship between main body member 4336a and connection side wall portion 331c (holding posture while main body member 4336a is in contact with connection side wall portion 331c).

  The transmission member 4336b is formed in a fan-shaped cross section, and a main body 4336b1 in which a gear portion meshed with the drive gear 337b is formed in a curved surface portion, and in the left-right direction (FIG. 44 (a) left-right direction) of the main body portion 4336b1. A shaft support hole 4336b2 that is bored and through which a lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted; a plate-shaped detection piece 4336b3 that can detect the attitude of the transmission member 4336b through a gap between sensor members (not shown); The main portion 4336b4 mainly includes a protruding portion 4336b4 that protrudes from a side surface of the portion 4336b1 facing the main body member 4336a and that comes into contact with the concave portion 4336a4 in the swing direction of the main body portion 4336b1.

  The protrusion 4336b4 is formed at the rear end of the main body 4336b1. Thus, by swinging the transmission member 4336b in a direction to approach the connection side wall portion 331c, the rear side surface of the main body member 4336a that swings by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 can be brought into contact with the connection side wall portion 331c. it can.

  FIGS. 45A and 45B are side views of the lock member 4336. FIG. In FIGS. 45A and 45B, the drive gear 337b and the connecting side wall 331c are shown in an assembled state.

  The lock member 4336 can be configured to have a lock standby state shown in FIG. 45A and a lock forced release state shown in FIG. 45B. The lock standby state refers to a state in which the transmission member 4336b is disposed close to the connection side wall 331c and the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connection side wall 331c.

  The lock forced release state means that the drive gear 337b rotates from the lock standby state and the transmission member 4336b swings in a direction away from the connection side wall 331c, so that the main body member 4336a faces the lever member 4340. This means a state in which the end portion is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the lever member 4340. In the lock forcible release state, the projecting portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b abuts the recessed portion 4336a4 to maintain the posture of the main body member 4336a.

  When the lever member 4340 abuts from above the main body member 4336a in the lock standby state, the swing of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47A). When the lock is forcibly released from the state in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted, the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 is released, and the lever member 4340 can swing (see FIG. 48).

  Here, by bringing the lock gear into the lock standby state again (by rotating the drive gear 337b and turning the transmission member 4336b clockwise in FIG. 6A), the lock member 4336 of the lever member 4340 is brought into contact with the lock member 4336 as described later. The swing of the lever member 4340 can be automatically restricted as the end on the contact side gets over the lock member 4336 upward. On the other hand, by maintaining the lock forcibly released state, it is possible to prevent the swing of the lever member 4340 from being restricted.

  FIG. 46 is an exploded front perspective view of the lever member 4340 and the swing operation member 310. The lever member 4340 includes a main body member 4341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, a lock receiving member 4350 supported coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 4341, It mainly comprises.

  The main body member 4341 is formed in a shape of a long rod having a U-shaped cross section, and has a front main body portion 4341a having a cutout on the rear left side (the left side in FIG. 46), and a mode for supplementing the cutout of the front main body portion 4341a1. An electromagnet member M41 for attaching the rear main body 4341a2 having an L-shaped cross section, and adsorbing the rear main body 4341a2 and the front main body 4341a1 only when current is conducted and fixed to the upper surface side of the rear main body 4341a2. And a pair of shaft holes 341b drilled in the left-right direction substantially at the center of the front main body portion 4341a1.

  The lock receiving member 4350 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape which is long in the front and rear directions, and is fixed to the lower surface of the rear main body portion 4341a2 of the lever member 4340, and has a left-right direction at a front end of the main body 4351. And a shaft hole 4352 coaxial with the shaft hole 341b and supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the rear main body portion 4341a2 can swing about the lever support shaft 331d1 independently of the front main body portion 4341a1, which will be described later.

  FIGS. 47A and 47B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. 47 (a) and 47 (b) show a state in which the rocking of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336. In FIG. 47 (b), the neck is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 47 (a). A state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung rearward about the shaft support rod 363 (see FIG. 46) is illustrated, and a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. Also, although the operation device 300 is illustrated in FIG. 17A, the appearance is the same, so that the description will be made assuming the operation device 4300. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (b), similarly to the first embodiment, the swing operation of the swing operation member 310 is performed in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted, and the back button member 312d is pushed in. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, since the lock member 4336 is abutted from below on the lever member 4340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1, it is possible to resist the erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 with the strength of the lock member 4336. Can be.

  Since the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the lock member 4336 behind the lock shaft 4331d3, it is possible to prevent the lock member 4336 from swinging toward the forcibly unlocked state (see FIG. 45B). can do. Thus, a load can be applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 4336 in the direction in which the lock member 4336 falls forward (left direction in FIG. 47A), and the posture of the lock member 4336 can be maintained.

  In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 4333 can be separated from the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated by the lock member 4336. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 from being damaged when the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated due to malfunction or the like while the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336. it can.

  FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 4300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. Note that FIG. 48 illustrates a state in which the lock member 4336 is in the lock release state and the lever member 4340 has begun to swing.

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the lock member 4336 is in the lock release state from the state in which the rocking of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47A), the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is applied. As a result, the lever member 4340 swings in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48).

  This can encourage the player to operate the operation device 4300, but since the swing speed of the lever member 4340 is determined by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 and does not change every time, the degree of freedom in rendering is reduced. There was a problem that.

  Note that the posture of the eccentric cam member 4333 at the time of contact with the lever member 4340 is variously changed, and the operation speed can be varied by linking the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the swing of the lever member 4340. However, there is a problem that the eccentric cam member 4333 may be damaged when the lever member 4340 erroneously collides with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed. Therefore, the timing at which the lock member 4336 is swung toward the forcibly unlocked state is determined by the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9) that the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retreat phase (see FIG. 49A). It is preferred that the detection be performed after the detection.

  Here, the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 366 included in the swinging operation member 310 acts in a direction to cause the lever member 4340 to fall forward along the straight line L1. Thus, for example, by vibrating the vibration device 366 while the lever member 4340 is swinging in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48), the lever member 4340 can be pushed back in the direction of falling forward, The swing speed and the manner of swing of the member 4340 can be changed (can be made slower). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from accidentally colliding with the eccentric cam member 4333 at a high speed.

  FIGS. 49A and 49B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. Note that FIG. 49A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position, and FIG. 49B shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is moved rearward from the state of FIG. 49 (a) (rightward direction) is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

  In FIGS. 49A and 49B, the lock member 4336 is maintained in the lock forcibly released state. Therefore, for example, even if the player performs an operation of gripping and moving the swinging operation member 310 up and down from the state of FIG. 49 (a), the rocking of the lever member 4340 is not restricted by the lock member 4336. When the user releases his / her hand, the swinging operation member 310 returns to the upward position by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1.

  FIGS. 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a) and 51 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). FIGS. 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a) and 51 (b) show a state in which the lever member 4340 swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 in a time-series manner. You.

  FIG. 50A illustrates a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retreat phase, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the eccentric cam member 4333, and the lock member 4336 is in the lock standby state. 50) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 has rotated counterclockwise by about 90 degrees from the state of FIG.

  51A, the eccentric cam member 4333 is further rotated in the same direction from the state of FIG. 50B, and the lever member 4340 is in contact with the upper end of the lock member 4336 to restrict the swing. FIG. 51B shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 further rotates in the same direction from the state of FIG. 51A, and is in the retreat phase (see FIG. 50A).

  As shown in FIG. 50 (a), FIG. 50 (b), FIG. 51 (a) and FIG. 51 (b), the operating device 4300 is pressed down by the player after the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position. Even when the operation is not performed, the swinging operation member can be moved to the downward position (initial position) by swinging the lever member 4340 by the eccentric cam member 4333.

  Lock member 4336 is in a lock standby state. In this case, when the lever member 4340 pushes the left side surface of the lock member 4336, the lock member 4336 rotates in the direction of falling backward (see FIG. 50B). On the other hand, since the lock member 4336 is always urged forward by the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45), when the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 4336, the urging force lowers the lever member 4340. Side (see FIG. 51 (a)). As described above, in the process of swinging the lever member 4340, the lock member 4336 automatically regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

  Therefore, even if the timing at which the player pushes down the swinging operation member 310 is unknown, it is possible to prevent the lock member 4336 from restricting the swing of the lever member 4340 by disposing the swinging operation member 310 at the downward position. It can be done reliably.

  In the arrangement in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated (see FIG. 51A), the largest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 is in contact with the lever member 4340. Therefore, in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated by the lock member 4333 (see FIG. 51A), the eccentric cam member 4333 is not rotated in the reverse direction, but is continuously rotated in the same direction. The member 4333 can be returned to the evacuation phase. Therefore, a detection device for detecting the timing of reverse rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 can be eliminated, and the control of the first driving device 335 for driving the eccentric cam member 4333 can be easily performed.

  FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 4300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. The outer shapes of the lever member 4340, the swing operation member 310, and the eccentric cam member 4333 in the state of FIG. 50A are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 52, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 back and forth at an angle θ41 about the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated at an angle θ42 around the lever support shaft 331d1. Accordingly, a fluttering operation of causing the player to pay attention to the operation device 4300 can be performed.

  At this time, by reciprocatingly rotating the cam portion 4333c of the eccentric cam member 4333 with the cam portion 4333c disposed on the opposite side of the lever support shaft 331d1, the distance from the contact position between the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 to the lever support shaft 331d1 is obtained. The distance can be kept long. Thereby, the driving force required to swing the lever member 4340 can be suppressed (the driving force may be small), and the load applied to the eccentric cam member 4333 from the lever member 4340 can be suppressed (overload). Tolerable).

  Further, when the lock member 4336 is in the lock forcible release state, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the lever member 4340 from the lock member 4336 when the lever member 4340 swings back and forth, and to rotate the eccentric cam member 4333. Therefore, the driving force generated by the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 43) can be suppressed.

  FIG. 53 (a) is a top view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340, and FIGS. 53 (b) and 53 (c) are lever members as viewed in the LIIIb direction of FIG. FIG. 46 is a side view of a main body member 4341 and a lock receiving member 4350 of 4340. FIG. 53 (c) illustrates a state where the front main body portion 4341a1 has swung in a direction away from the electromagnet member M41 from the state of FIG. 53 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 53A, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are attracted by the electromagnet member M41. Therefore, unless a load greater than the attraction force of the electromagnet member M41 is applied to the main body member 4341, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 swing together.

  On the other hand, the electromagnet member M41 loses the attraction force when the conduction of the current is stopped. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off, the relative position (angle) between the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 changes (see FIG. 53 (c)).

  FIGS. 54A and 54B are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 as viewed in cross section along the line VIb-VIb in FIG. Although the pachinko machine 10 and the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment are illustrated in FIG. 6, since the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment have the same appearance, the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment is used. The description will be made assuming that the operation device 4010 and the operation device 4300 are illustrated.

  Here, in the operation device 4300, the protruding length of the swing operation member 310 toward the front side changes depending on whether the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position or the downward position. That is, in the state illustrated in FIG. 54A, the swinging operation member 310 is extended toward the front side by the distance X41 compared to the state illustrated in FIG. 54B.

  In this case, since the width dimension of the pachinko machine 4010 in the front-rear direction is smaller in the state shown in FIG. 54B, when selecting a box for packing the pachinko machine 4010, for example, as shown in FIG. If the selection is made based on the state, the size of the box can be reduced. On the other hand, when the power is turned off in a state where the rocking is restricted by the lock member 4336 when the lever member 4340 is fixed in the shape of a straight bar, even if a force is applied to the swinging operation member 310 from the outside, the swinging operation member There is a problem that the pachinko machine 4010 cannot be placed in a packing box because the 310 cannot be arranged in the upward position.

  Further, if the width of the line is determined by the width of the pachinko machine 4010 in a state where the swinging operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position in a factory inspection line or the like, the swinging operation member 310 is incorrectly arranged at the downward position. There is a problem that the swing operation member 310 may collide with an inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line in the state in which it is performed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the attraction force of the electromagnet member M41 integrating the main body member 4341 of the lever member 4340 is lost by turning off the power. Therefore, by turning off the power, regardless of whether or not the lock receiving member 4350 is in contact with the lock member 4336, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 causes the front main body portion 4341a1 of the lever member 4340 to swing in the rising direction, The swing operation member 310 can be arranged at the upward position.

  Thus, the swing operation member 310 can be reliably arranged at the upward position during packing. In addition, by turning off the power when the pachinko machine 4010 flows through the inspection line, it is possible to prevent the swing operation member 310 from colliding with the inspection machine or the like.

  Next, an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock member 4336 are independently driven has been described. However, the operating device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is configured such that the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are formed by a single drive motor 335a. Are driven synchronously. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a front exploded perspective view of the inner case member 5330 according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 55, the illustration of the right cover member is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the inner case member 5330 includes an eccentric cam member 5333 supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, and a columnar unlocking shaft disposed behind the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 with the drive gear 335b interposed therebetween. 5331d5, a lock release cam member 5339 supported by the lock release shaft 5331d5, and a lock member 5336 supported by the lock shaft 4331d3.

  FIG. 56 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 5333, FIG. 56 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 5333 in the LVIb direction of FIG. 56 (a), and FIG. FIG. 56 is a side view of the eccentric cam member 5333 as viewed in the LVIc direction of FIG. 56 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 56, the eccentric cam member 5333 mainly includes a cam portion 5333c having a substantially D shape in a front view and an umbrella portion 5333f in which a cutout 5333f1 is partially provided.

  The cam portion 5333c is formed in a substantially D-shape when viewed from the front, extends in a straight line shape up to the maximum diameter end of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has high rigidity and rigidity compared to the rigid portion 5333c1. And a buffer portion 5333c2 for reducing the impact from the lever member 4340. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the rigid body portion 5333c1 in a front view is set to be approximately three times the thickness of the buffer portion 5333c2 in a front view.

  The notch 5333f1 of the umbrella portion 5333f is a notch formed to have a size that allows the drive gear 355b to be removed in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is disposed to face the drive gear 355b, and is formed with respect to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. 55). This is a mark for adjusting the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333. Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are synchronously operated by a single drive motor 335a (see FIG. 55), the posture of the lever member 4340 is detected and only one of the lock member 5336 or the eccentric cam member 5333 is detected. Cannot be swung, so that the phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 and the phase of the lock member 5336 need to be matched in advance.

  In this embodiment, since the notch 5333f1 is provided in the umbrella portion 5333f, the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 can be easily determined using the notch 5333f1 as a mark.

  When the umbrella portion 5333f is disposed on the opposite side (the lower portion in FIG. 56 (b)) of the main body portion 333a, the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, the eccentric cam member 5333 cannot be inserted if the umbrella portion 5333f hits the drive gear 335b when the eccentric cam member 5333 is inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2.

  That is, since the eccentric cam member 5333 can be inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 only in a position where the notch 5333f1 faces the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 can be assembled in a correct position.

  FIG. 57 (a) is a front view of the unlocking cam member 5339, and FIG. 57 (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member 5339 in the LVIIb direction of FIG. 57 (a). 57) is a side view of the unlocking cam member 5339 as viewed in the LVIIc direction of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the unlocking cam member 5339 is formed to have the same size as the main body 333a of the eccentric cam member 5333 and has gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 59) on the outer peripheral surface. Is formed, a shaft hole 5339b formed at the center of the main body portion 5339a and through which the lock release shaft 5331d5 is inserted, and radially outward along the front side surface of the main body portion 5339a. A release portion 5339c that is extended and formed to have a length that can contact the locking portion 4336a3 of the lock member 5336, and a disk-shaped umbrella portion 5339d that covers the gear portion on the front side of the main body portion 5339a. Prepare mainly.

  The umbrella portion 5339d includes a notch 5339d1 that is partially cut from the outer peripheral surface toward the shaft side. The notch 5339d1 of the umbrella portion 5339d is a notch formed to have a size that allows the drive gear 355b to be removed in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is disposed to face the drive gear 355b. This is a mark for adjusting the initial phase of the lock release cam member 5339.

  When the umbrella portion 5339d is disposed on the opposite side (the lower portion in FIG. 57 (b)) of the main body portion 5339a, the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the umbrella portion 5339d hits the drive gear 335b when inserting the unlocking cam member 5339 into the unlocking shaft 5331d5, the unlocking cam member 5339 cannot be inserted.

  That is, the unlocking cam member 5339 can be inserted into the unlocking shaft 5331d5 only when the notch 5339d1 faces the drive gear 335b, so that the unlocking cam member 5339 can be assembled in a correct attitude.

  FIG. 58 (a) is a front view of the lock member 5336, and FIG. 58 (b) is a side view of the lock member 5336 as viewed in the LVIII direction of FIG. 58 (a). As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), the lock member 5336 is formed of a member formed in a long plate shape, and a transmission member 4336b (FIG. 44) formed in a plate shape having a sector shape in section. Is not required.

  The lock member 5336 is formed in a long plate-like main body member 5336a, and is penetrated in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 58 (a)) of the main body member 5336a, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted therethrough. And a locking portion 5336c protruding above the shaft supporting hole 5336b from a side surface (the left side in FIG. 58A) of the main body member 5336a facing the unlocking cam member 5339. Prepare for.

  The locking portion 5336c is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3, and the other arm of the torsion spring SP41 whose one arm is locked to the connection side wall 331c is locked, and the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 57). Is a portion pressed from the release portion 5339c.

  The main body member 5336a has a curved wall portion 5336a1 that is curved along a locus of a rear end portion of the lever member 4340 on a side surface on a side that comes into contact with the lever member 4340 when the lock member 5336 is in the lock standby state. A projection portion 5336a2 is provided mainly from the upper end of the curved wall portion 5336a1 to the side close to the lever member 4340 along a circle centered on the shaft support hole 5336b.

  The projecting portion 5336a2 is inclined upward as the lower end surface approaches the tip. This can prevent the lever member 4340 from being caught (locked) by the protruding portion 5336a2. Therefore, the driving force of the first driving device 335 that generates the driving force for driving the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333 can be suppressed.

  FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member 5333, and a lock release cam that represent the operation of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in time series. It is a schematic diagram of member 5339 and lock member 5336. FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the swinging of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 5336. In FIG. 59 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (a). When the lock release cam member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the lever member 4340 can be swung from the initial position before a driving force is applied to the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 5333 from being damaged as the player operates the swing operation member 310 immediately after the swing operation member 310 moves. For example, when the swing operation member 310 starts moving from the initial position, even if the player swings the swing operation member 310 up and down, the lever member 4340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 5333. Collision between the cam member 5333 and the lever member 4340 can be suppressed.

  This is a problem that cannot be avoided when restricting the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position (for example, in the case of the first embodiment). This has been solved by restricting the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position as in the embodiment.

  Note that, even when the player does not hold the swing operation member 310, the eccentric cam member 5333 has a mechanical posture when the lock member 5336 releases the swing restriction (see FIG. 59B). Therefore, the lever member 4340 can reliably contact the specific position of the eccentric cam member 5333 (the position on the short diameter side, the position on the opposite side of the cam portion 5333c).

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released and the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the eccentric cam member 5333 has the cylindrical portion 333b connected to the lever. The posture closest to the member 4340 is taken. Therefore, damage to the cam portion 5333c due to the collision of the lever member 4340 with the cam portion 5333c can be suppressed.

  Further, since the cam portion 5333c is arranged on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the swing of the lever member 4340 immediately after the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released. The angle (movement amount) can be maximized. That is, in the present embodiment, in the mode in which the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 operate synchronously, the swing angle of the lever member 4340 immediately after the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released. This is a synchronization mode in which the maximum amount of movement is secured. This makes it possible to secure a large amount of upward movement of the swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 17B) when the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the effect of the swinging operation member 310 is produced. Can be improved.

  FIGS. 60A and 60B show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member 5333, and a lock release cam that represent the operation of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in time series. It is a schematic diagram of member 5339 and lock member 5336. In FIG. 60 (a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (b), and the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is disposed above the locking portion 5336c of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336 is provided. FIG. 60B shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 60A, and the rear end of the lever member 4340 becomes a curved wall of the lock member 5336. The state of sliding with the portion 5336a1 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved by swinging the lever member 4340 on the side surface of the rigid body portion 5333c1.

  Here, when the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam hits from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam of the lever member 4340, the moment applied to the eccentric cam increases, and the load applied to the driving device in the rotation direction increases. Therefore, when it is not known when the eccentric cam collides with the lever member 4340, it is preferable that the large-diameter portion does not hit the operating member in the rotation direction of the transmission member (a circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the lever member 4340 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are in contact with each other, it is more preferable to swing the operating member at the large outer diameter portion (radially outward), so that the swing speed of the operating member is reduced. Because it can be large, the effect can be enhanced.

  With synchronous driving, the timing at which the lever member 4340 collides with the eccentric cam member 5333 can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the rigid portion 5333c1 is slightly retracted, and the rigid portion 5333c1 can be brought into contact with the lever member 4340 at the timing after the collision, and the lever member 4340 swings. The speed of operation can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 60A and the state shown in FIG. 60B are alternately repeated (the driving gear 335b is alternately rotated to rotate) so that the lever member 4340 is moved up and down. The swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be vertically reciprocated.

  Here, when the lock member 5336 is driven alone, the lock member 4336 is set to the lock forcible release state (see FIG. 48) when the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down, and is operated by the player or the eccentric cam member. When the lever member 4340 is swung in the direction in which the lever member 4340 is tilted forward by being pushed up by 4333, and the swinging operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position, the lock member 4336 is set in the lock standby state, so that the lever member 4340 Swing can be regulated.

  This suppresses the resistance from being applied to the lever member 4340 from the lock member 4336 in the state where the lever member 4340 is vertically reciprocated (see FIG. 52), and is necessary for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55). Driving force can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are controlled in synchronization, the posture of the member that drives the lock member 5336 (the lock release cam member 5339 in the present embodiment) depends on the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, especially when the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position by the operation of the player, it may be difficult to immediately arrange the lock member 5336 in the lock standby state.

  For example, when the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is disposed on the opposite side of the lock member 5336, it is necessary to rotate the lock member 5336 by half rotation before the release portion 5339c starts pushing the lock member 5336. Therefore, it becomes difficult to swing the lock member 5336 according to the operation of the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lock member 5336 is always in the lock standby state in the states shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b). Thereby, when operated by the player, the lever member 4340 is swung in the direction to fall forward, and the lock member 5336 is always brought into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340 when the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position. The swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated (see FIG. 62).

  However, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 5336 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocated by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333, the lever member 4340 receives resistance from the lock member 5336, and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 5333 is increased. There is a risk that it will be excessive.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the curved wall portion 5336a1 formed on the lock member 5336 allows the lock member 5336 to escape from the lever member 4340 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocated by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, the resistance applied to the lever member 4340 from the lock member 5336 can be suppressed.

  When the lever member 4340 swings in the direction of falling forward from the state shown in FIG. 60B, the rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the protruding portion 5336a2, and the lock member 5336 is turned to the unlocked state side. 60A (clockwise in FIG. 60A), the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336 returns to the biasing direction to enter the lock standby state, thereby causing the lever member 4340 to rotate. Swing is regulated.

  Therefore, it is possible to restrict the swing direction of the lever member 4340 at an arbitrary timing while suppressing the resistance when the lever member 4340 swings back and forth.

  Note that the unlocking cam member 5339 transmits the driving force to the lock member 5336 only when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)). The transmission is canceled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is caused to reciprocate and swing, the lock member 5336 operates in conjunction with each other, and it is possible to prevent a problem such as collision with the lever member 4340 from occurring.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (a), until the lock member 5336 is arranged at the lock standby position, the lever member 4340 is in the posture in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the posture in FIG. 59 (b)). To maintain.

  Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are controlled synchronously, the lock member 5336 is moved from the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)) to the lock standby state (see FIG. 60 (a)). Thus, the eccentric cam member 5333 may swing the lever member 4340. In this case, there is a problem that the swing operation member 310 cannot be maintained at the upward position in the lock standby state.

  In the present embodiment, since the rigid portion 5333c1 is formed in a straight line in contact with the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 333b (see FIG. 60 (a)), the eccentric cam member 5333 is at a predetermined angle (from the position shown in FIG. 59 (b)). Even if rotated (up to the position of FIG. 60 (a)), the gap between the rigid body portion 5333c1 and the lever member 4340 is only buried, and the swinging of the lever member 4340 can be suppressed. Thus, the swing operation member 310 can be maintained at the upward position while the lock member 5336 is changed from the unlocked state to the lock standby state.

  FIGS. 61A and 61B are schematic diagrams of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 61A shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60B, and the rear end of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the projection 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. 61B, the state where the eccentric cam member 5333 has been rotated from the state shown in FIG. 61A and the upper surface of the lock member 5336 has been rotated to the position in which it contacts the lower surface of the lever member 4340 is shown. You.

  As shown in FIG. 61A, when the rear end of the lever member 4340 pushes up the protruding portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 rotates in a direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 5333 is further rotated, the rear end of the lever member 4340 moves above the upper end of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336 is returned by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Thus, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the upper surface of the lock member 5336.

  Until the rear end of the lever member 4340 abuts on the protrusion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 escapes from the lever member 4340 by the curved wall portion 5336a1. The structure can suppress the resistance applied from the outside.

  In addition, since a load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 during a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the protrusion 5336a2, the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). And the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) can be secured at a high speed. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 can be reliably restricted.

  FIG. 62 is a schematic view of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 62 illustrates a state in which the lever member 4340 has been pressed down by the player in the direction of falling forward from the state illustrated in FIG. 60B.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), a circumscribed circle C41 of the cam portion 5333c around the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 contacts the lower surface of the lever member 4340. Therefore, it is not necessary to return the eccentric cam member 5333 in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 62) in a state where the swing operation member 310 is operated by the player and is arranged at the downward position, and the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved in the same direction (clockwise in FIG. 62). By rotating the eccentric cam member 5333 in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 62, the eccentric cam member 5333 can be returned to the initial position (see FIG. 59A).

  Even if the player does not push down the lever member 4340 in the direction of falling forward from the state shown in FIG. 60B, the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved from the state shown in FIG. By rotating the lever member 4340 clockwise, the lever member 4340 is rocked, and the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) to restrict the rocking of the lever member 4340. Can be.

  This allows the swing operation member 310 to return to the downward position regardless of whether or not the player performs an operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310 after the lock member 5336 is unlocked.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the swing width of the lever member 4340 is ensured by disposing the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c below the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. In the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is disposed above the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b) show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member, which represents the operation of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in time series in the sixth embodiment. 6333 is a schematic diagram of a lock release cam member 5339 and a lock member 5336. FIG. FIG. 63 (a) shows a state in which the swinging of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 5336. In FIG. 63 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 63 (a). When the lock release cam member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the eccentric cam member 6333 has an unlocking cam member 5339 in a state where the cam portion 5333c faces the lever member 4340 in a state immediately before the unlocking cam member 5339 contacts the locking member 5336. With this, the notch 6333f1 of the umbrella portion 6333f is recessed in an arrangement different from that of the fifth embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), when the lock member 5336 is brought into the unlocked state, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lever member 4340 come into contact immediately, so that the lever member 4340 is It swings following the rotation of the member 6333. Therefore, according to the method of synchronizing the operation of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the operation of the unlocking cam member 5339 in the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the timing of releasing the restriction of the lock member 5336.

  Further, since the swing speed of the lever member 4340 depends on the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be arbitrarily set immediately after the lock member 5336 is released. Accordingly, the degree of freedom in designing the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 moving up and down can be improved.

  FIGS. 64A and 64B show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member 6333, and a lock release cam that represent the operation of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in time series. It is a schematic diagram of member 5339 and lock member 5336.

  In FIG. 64 (a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 63 (b), and the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is disposed above the locking portion 5336c of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336 is provided. FIG. 64B illustrates a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64A, and the rigid portion 5333c1 of the eccentric cam member 6333 is positioned below the lever member 4340. The state of contact with the side surface is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, when the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 is disposed on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the lever member 4340 is used. Swings, the swing is stopped by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. Therefore, there is no possibility that the cam portion 5333c and the lever member 4340 collide with each other. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 is increased, an overload occurs when the lever member 4340 and the cam portion 5333c collide. The eccentric cam member 6333 is not damaged.

  Therefore, by increasing the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 only between FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the lever member 4340 is brought into the state shown in FIG. (A state arranged at the lower end) can be shortened. Thus, the period during which the lever member 4340 is in the state shown in FIG. 64A can be set arbitrarily, so that the degree of freedom in designing the swing operation of the lever member 4340 can be improved.

  FIGS. 65A and 65B are schematic diagrams of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 65A illustrates a state where the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64B and the rear end of the lever member 4340 slides on the curved wall 5336a1 of the lock member 5336. 65B, the state where the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 65A and the rear end of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the protruding portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336 is shown. Is done.

  Further, when the eccentric cam member 5333 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 65 (b), the rear end of the lever member 4340 is pushed up, and the upper surface of the lock member 5336 contacts the lower surface of the lever member 4340. This restricts the swing of the lever member 4340.

  In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 64 (b) and the state shown in FIG. 65 (a) are alternately repeated (the drive gear 335b is alternately rotated to rotate) so that the lever member 4340 is moved up and down. The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be vertically reciprocated (tilted).

  In this case, as shown in FIGS. 64B and 65A, the lock release cam member 5339 does not contact the lock member 5336 (the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member is separated from the lock member 5336). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the resistance from being applied to the lock release cam member 5339 from the lock member 5336, and to stabilize the rotation state of the eccentric cam member 5333.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the rear end of the lever member 4340 pushes up the protruding portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 rotates in a direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 6333 is further rotated, the rear end of the lever member 4340 moves above the upper end of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336 is returned by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Then, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the upper surface of the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 63A).

  In addition, since a load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 during a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the protrusion 5336a2, the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). And the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) can be secured at a high speed. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 can be reliably restricted.

  In the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), a case is considered where a load is applied from the player in the direction of lifting the lever member 4340 upward. In this case, a downward load is applied to the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 from the lever member 4340, and the eccentric cam member 6333 is rotated clockwise. In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking cam member 5339 are operated synchronously, when the rotation of the unlocking cam member 5339 is restricted, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333 is also restricted, and The eccentric cam member 6333 may be damaged by the applied load.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lever member 4340 is lifted from the state of FIG. 65A and the rear end is lowered, the unlocking cam is rotated with the clockwise rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333. Since the member 5339 rotates clockwise, the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 moves in a direction away from the lock member 5336. Accordingly, since there is no possibility that the lock release cam member 5339 abuts on the lock member 5336 to restrict the rotation, the eccentric cam member 6333 can be prevented from being damaged by the load applied from the lever member 4340.

  In the present embodiment, the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 differ in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 65A) (FIG. 65A). (A position that does not interfere in the direction parallel to the paper). Therefore, even if the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 rotate in the approaching direction in FIG. 65A from the state of FIG. Since they pass each other, breakage of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lock release cam member 5339 can be prevented.

  Next, an operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the gear damper 338 constantly applies resistance to the lever member 340 has been described. However, the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment is limited to the case where the peeling member 7350 is pulled off from the lever member 7340. A case where resistance is applied to the lever member 7340 from the gear damper 7347 will be described. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 66A and 66B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. 66A shows a state in which the peeling member 7350 is attracted to the lever member 7340. In FIG. 66B, the swing of the peeling member 7350 is regulated by the lock member 336, and the lever member 7340 is peeled off. The state where the member 7350 is peeled off is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 66A, the lever member 7340 includes a gear damper 7347 disposed inside the main body member 341. The gear damper 7347 is engaged with a gear portion 7351a formed in a gear tooth shape along a circle centered on an insertion hole 352 formed in the main body member 7351 of the peeling member 7350.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are attracted and fixed and swing together, the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a does not change. The member 7340 does not receive the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66B, the swinging of the peeling member 7350 is restricted by the lock member 336, and the lever member 7340 swings in a state where the peeling member 7350 is pulled off from the lever member 7340. When the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) is operated), the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a changes, so that the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 is given to the lever member 7340.

  Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 acts on the lever member 7340 only when the player applies an overload to the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) enough to peel the lever member 7340 from the peeling member 7350. can do. This makes it possible to change the operational feeling when the player operates the swing operation member 310 and to prompt the player to use the swing operation member 310 appropriately.

  For example, when the operation resistance when operating the swing operation member 310 in the state of FIG. 66B becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult for the player to perform the operation, resulting in stress. When the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 return to the state where they are fixed by suction, the operation resistance is reduced, and the player can easily operate. Therefore, the player who tries to avoid the stress will avoid applying an overload to the swing operation member 310. This can prevent the operation device 7300 from being destroyed.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above embodiments, the case where the lock members 336, 2336, 4336, 5336 are pivotally supported by the inner case members 330, 3330, 4330, 5330 has been described. However, the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment has the lock member 8336. However, the inner case member 8330 is configured to be slidable as the lever member 340 swings. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 67A and 67B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 8300 according to the eighth embodiment, taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the external shape is the same as the operation device 8300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 will be substituted. The same applies to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 67 (a) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position, and FIG. 67 (b) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position. .

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the inner case member 8330 includes a plurality of elongated hole-shaped slide holes 8331i formed in the left cover member 8331 along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. The slide hole 8331i is formed in a position corresponding to a right cover member (not shown) arranged in a pair with the left cover member 8331, similarly to the left cover member 8331.

  The slide hole 8331i is formed of a pair of long holes, the inner surface is formed of a smooth surface, and the first slide hole 8331i1 is provided on the side away from the lever support shaft 331d1, and the inner surface is formed of a smooth surface. And a second slide hole 8331i2 disposed closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 than the first slide hole 8331i1.

  The second slide hole 8331i2 is a long hole into which the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 of the shaft portion 8336f of the lock member 8336 is inserted. The frictional resistance between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2 changes depending on the posture of the lock member 8336.

  The lock member 8336 is pivotally supported by a plate-like slide plate 8370 provided so as to slide along the inner surface of the left cover member 8331. The lock member 8336 is a cylindrical portion inserted into the shaft support hole 336b and includes a shaft portion 8336f penetrating the slide plate 8370, and is supported by the slide plate 8370 via the shaft portion 8336f.

  The shaft portion 8336f includes a wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 which is a part in the axial direction and is inserted into the second slide hole 8331i2. The wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 has a pair of first side surfaces 8336f1a formed in such a manner as to be separated by a predetermined distance from a side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where they are opposed to each other (see FIG. 67A). In a state where the second slide holes 8331i2 are opposed to each other, a pair of second side surfaces 8336f1b are provided mainly with side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide holes 8331i2 (see FIG. 68 (a)). It is configured in a curved substantially rhombic shape.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the first side surface 8336f1a is formed in a curved shape (having the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 when the lock member 8336 is located on the release side. You. Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the second side surface 8336f1b has a curved surface shape (having the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 when the lock member 8336 is located on the fixed side. It is formed.

  In a state where the lock member 8336 is disposed on the release position side, the first side surface 8336f1a does not abut on the second slide hole 8331i2, and a gap is provided for a predetermined distance, so that the movement follows the swing of the lever member 340. The sliding resistance of the sliding plate 8370 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 67 (b) shows a state in which the lock member 8336 has been rotated from the position on the release side toward the position on the fixed side by a predetermined amount. Even in this state, a slight gap is left between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2. That is, even if the lock member 8336 rotates slightly from the position on the release side, the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370 does not increase, so that the swing resistance of the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the player swings the operation device 8300. Impairment of the operational feeling when performing the dynamic operation can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if the lock member 8336 is kept rotated from the release side position to the fixed side position by a predetermined amount, the period until the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side at a predetermined timing is shortened. can do. This makes it easier to arrange the lock member 8336 at a desired position on the fixed side.

  The slide plate 8370 includes a protrusion 8371 which is inserted into the slide hole 8331i and is formed to have a circular cross section, a magnet 8372 which is disposed to face the peeling member 350 and is formed of a magnetic material, and a lock member 8336. A drive motor 8373 disposed on the slide plate 8370 so that the rotation axis and the drive axis are parallel to each other, and a drive gear 8374 rotated by the drive motor 8373 and meshed with the gear 336d of the lock member 8336. Prepare mainly.

  The projecting portion 8371 is formed in an arc shape centering on the lever support shaft 331d1. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the protrusion 8371 from being caught by the locking recess 8331i2.

  The magnet portion 8372 is formed from a magnetic material and is adhered to the peeling member 350. When the lever member 340 is swung while the magnet member 8372 is adhered to the peeling member 350, the slide plate 8370 slides along the slide hole 8331i.

  The drive motor 8373 drives the drive gear 8374 so that the lock member 8336 can be arranged at a position on the release side (see FIG. 67A) and a position on the fixed side (see FIG. 68A). Drive means. Since the drive motor 8373 is provided on the slide plate 8370, the drive motor 8373 slides with the slide plate 8370.

  The peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects magnetism along a lower side surface, and the magnetic sensor MC1 detects whether the magnet portion 8372 is attracted to the peeling member 350 or the peeling member 350 separates from the magnet portion 8372. Is detected. Hereinafter, an example of control of the lock member 8336 will be described.

  Here, in the state of FIG. 67 (a), the detection piece 343b (see FIGS. 23 (b) and 16) is disposed in the gap between the second sensor members 325a2 (see FIG. 23 (b)). It is detected that the member 340 is disposed at the end of the swing range. In the state of FIG. 67 (b), the detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap between the first sensor member 325a1 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever member 340 is arranged at the end of the swing range. Is detected.

  Therefore, when the lever member 340 repeatedly switches between the state shown in FIG. 67A and the state shown in FIG. 67B while the eccentric cam member 333 is stopped, the player swings the swing operation member 310. It can be detected that the operation is repeatedly performed in the maximum movable range up and down (signals are output from the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 to the main controller). In this case, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged by the repeated collision of the lever member 340 (peeling member 350) with the eccentric cam member 333.

  In a mode in which the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lever member 340 in a stopped state can be fixed by the lock member 336, but the lever member in the middle of swinging can be fixed. It was difficult to fix 340 with lock member 336.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lock member 8336 can move following the lever member 340, the swing of the lever member 340 is stopped by the lock member 8336 even during the swing operation of the lever member 340. It is possible to do. Therefore, when it is detected that the player repeatedly operates the swing operation member 310 up and down in the maximum movable range, the locking member 8336 is operated to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. Can be. Hereinafter, this will be described.

  FIGS. 68A and 68B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 8300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 68 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged between the upward position and the downward position, and FIG. 68 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is at least a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 68 (a). Is applied to the swing operation member 310 downward, and the lever member 340 is pulled off from the peeling member 350.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), by rotating the drive gear 8374 and disposing the lock member 8336 on the fixed side, the second side surface 8336f1b of the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 comes into contact with both side surfaces of the second slide hole 7332i2. Thus, the sliding movement of the slide plate 8370 is stopped by the frictional force. In this state, for the operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310, the lock member 8336 locks the peeling member 350 downward, and for the operation of pushing up the swing operation member 310 via the magnet portion 8372. The slide plate 8370 locks the peeling member 350 upward. For this reason, the lever member 340 maintains the posture in the state of FIG. 68A even if a slight load is applied in the vertical direction.

  From the state of FIG. 68 (a), when the player applies a load to the swinging operation member 310 downward by a predetermined amount or more (at least the attraction force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340). The peeling member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 340 (see FIG. 68B). Thus, the lock member 8336 can be prevented from being damaged by transmitting a load equal to or more than a predetermined amount applied to the swing operation member 310 to the lock member 8336 by the player.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the slide plate 8370 is fixed in the middle of its movement range (middle of the movement range of the lever member 340), so that the player lifts the swing operation member 310. However, by contacting the magnet portion 8372 before the lever member 340 contacts the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 can be prevented from contacting the eccentric cam member 333. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), since the angle range in which the lever member 340 can be rocked (the range above the peeling member 350) is narrowed, the player moves the swing operation member 310 upward. By doing so, the momentum applied to the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the load generated when the lever member 340 contacts the peeling member 350 from above can be suppressed.

  Accordingly, the load generated on the lock member 8336 due to the reaction when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the peeling member 350 can be suppressed, so that the driving force of the drive motor 8373 for driving the lock member 8336 can be suppressed. it can.

  FIGS. 69A and 69B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 8300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. In FIG. 69 (a), the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 which are pivoted by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 are shown by imaginary lines, and the peeling member is in a state where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release side. The lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 in a state where 350 is pulled off from the magnet portion 8372 are shown by solid lines, and in FIG. 69 (b), the lock member 8336 is moved from the state shown by solid lines in FIG. The state where it is arranged on the fixed side is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 69A, when the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 causes the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 to swing, the slide plate 8370 also slides together with the peeling member 350. At this time, if a downward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 at a high speed, the slide plate 8370 cannot follow the moving speed of the peeling member 350 (the speed is reduced by the frictional resistance with the slide hole 8331i). The member 350 and the slide plate 8370 can be separated from each other (see the solid line in FIG. 69A).

  In this case, when the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release side, the slide plate 8370 is not fixed, and the player performs an operation of lifting the swinging operation member 310 upward, the peeling member 350 contacts the eccentric cam member 333. The contact may cause the eccentric cam member 333 to be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the peeling member 350 includes the magnetic sensor MC1 that detects that the magnet portion 8372 has been pulled off from the peeling member 350. When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the peeling member 350 and the magnet portion 8372 have separated, the lock member 8336 is immediately disposed on the fixed side (see FIG. 69 (b)), whereby the peeling is performed. The upper surface of the lock member 8336 can be abutted against the lower surface of the member 350.

  Thus, even if the player applies an upward load to the swing operation member 310, the peeling member 350 contacts the lock member 8336 before the peeling member 350 contacts the eccentric cam member 333, so that the downward movement occurs. Since the movement is stopped, the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged. Note that this effect is achieved only when there is a configuration in which the lock member 8336 slides together with the peeling member 350 as in the present embodiment.

  That is, when the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, depending on the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (for example, see FIG. 24B), the lock member 336 is fixed to the fixed side. However, there is a possibility that the upper surface of the eccentric cam member 333 may protrude more toward the peeling member 350 than the upper surface of the lock member 336, and if an upward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in this state. The peeling member 350 contacts the eccentric cam member 333. Therefore, the effect of preventing damage to the eccentric cam member 333 is not sufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the peeling member 350 and the lock member 8336 similarly move by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 (the state in which the peeling member 350 contacts both the eccentric cam member 333 and the magnet portion 8372). Is maintained), so that the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side immediately after the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372, so that the upper surface of the lock member 8336 is more detached than the eccentric cam member 333. You can get closer. Thus, the locking member 8336 is brought into contact with the peeling member 350 before the eccentric cam member 333, and it is possible to prevent the peeling member 350 from colliding with the eccentric cam member 333.

  It is preferable that the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 is stopped when the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the magnet portion 8372 and the peeling member 350 have separated. If the eccentric cam member 333 continues to rotate as it is and moves in a manner in which the largest diameter portion approaches the peeling member 350, the largest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 333 may approach the peeling member 350 beyond the lock member 8336. That's why.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the entirety of the lever members 340, 2340, 3340, 4340 is rigid has been described. However, the operation device 9300 in the ninth embodiment uses a coil spring to swing the operation member 310 of the lever member 9340. It has elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 to be formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 70A and 70B are side views of the operation device 9300 in the ninth embodiment. 70A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the downward position, and FIG. 70B shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is directed downward in the state shown in FIG. 70A. A state where a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied and the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are bent is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the lever member 9340 includes coil spring-like elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 arranged in a pair in the vicinity of the swing operation member 310.

  In a state where the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 310, the state in which the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are contracted to substantially the same length is maintained. In order to support the weight of the swing operation member 310 and maintain the state shown in FIG. 70A (a state in which both are contracted to substantially the same length), the elastic coefficient of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 decreases. The elastic coefficient is set higher than the elastic coefficient of the elastic connecting member CS91 on the side, and both lengths are substantially the same.

  When the load applied by the player to the swing operation member 310 is smaller than a predetermined amount, the relative positional relationship between the lever member 9340 and the swing operation member 310 is maintained by the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), when a load equal to or more than a predetermined amount is downwardly applied to the swing operation member 310, the expansion / contraction state of the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 changes (the upper elastic connecting member Since the length of CS91 is longer than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92), the relative positional relationship between the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 9340 is broken, and the swing operation member 310 is loaded. It is possible to suppress the load from being directly transmitted to the rear part of the lever member 340 (the peeling member 350 and the like, see FIG. 16). In other words, the load applied to the swing operation member 310 can be consumed for deformation of the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the member (for example, the eccentric cam member 333, see FIG. 10) inside the outer case member 320 from being damaged by the load applied to the swing operation member 310.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74. In the above embodiments, the case where the eccentric cam members 333, 2333, 4333, 5333 are disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and below the lever members 340, 2340, 4340 has been described. In the operation device 10300, the eccentric cam member 2333 is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and above the lever member 340. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 71 (a), 71 (b), 72 (a) and 72 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 according to the tenth embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). Although FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the external shape is the same as that of the operation device 10300 according to the present embodiment, so that it is substituted. 73 and 74 are similarly used.

  FIG. 71 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position. In FIG. 71 (b), the eccentric cam member 2333 is moved from the state of FIG. FIG. 72 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ101 from the state shown in FIG. 71 (a). FIG. 72B shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged at an upward position.

  As shown in FIG. 71A, the operating device 10300 includes a box-shaped inner case member 10330 having a rectangular cross section, and the inner case member 10330 pivotally supports the eccentric cam member 2333 behind the lever support shaft 331d1. An eccentric cam shaft 10331i is provided, and a drive gear 10335 driven by a drive motor is provided at a position separated from the eccentric cam shaft 10331i by a predetermined distance. The rotation of the drive gear 10335 drives the eccentric cam member 2333 to rotate. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP101 formed of an elastic material generates an urging force for urging the lever member 340 in a direction to push the swinging operation member 310 downward.

  Accordingly, since the lever member 340 is constantly urged in a state of being pressed against the eccentric cam member 2333, the lever member 340 can be operated by following the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333.

  In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 2333 described in the second embodiment is used as a means for swinging the lever member 340, the player pushes down the swinging operation member 310, so that the rear end of the lever member 340 is moved. Even when the portion is lifted and a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 from the lever member 340, the main member 2333a and the cam member 2333b slide, thereby preventing the cam member 2333b from being damaged.

  Here, even if the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, if the extending direction of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b and the upper surface of the lever member 340 abut against each other in a vertical posture, the lever member 340 will be disengaged. May act in the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 2333 (do not escape in the circumferential direction), and the cam member 2333b may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71A, in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position, the portion P101 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the lever member 340 becomes the eccentric cam member 2333. The position is shifted by a predetermined angle from the rib portion 2333b4 (the position shifted by a predetermined angle clockwise in FIG. 71).

  Thus, even if a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 from the lever member 340 in the state of FIG. 71A, a load is applied in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the cam member 2333b is moved relative to the main body member 2333a. Can be slid. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

  In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 2333 is disposed behind and above the lever support shaft 331d1, if the player performs an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 separates from the eccentric cam member 333. Move in the direction you want. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged due to an erroneous operation of lifting the lever member 340.

  In the state of FIG. 71 (a), a columnar member is provided below the peeling member 350, and the lever member 340 cannot be further swung (the posture of FIG. 71 (a) is changed). End position).

  When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 71B to the state shown in FIG. 72A, the swing operation member 310 swings upward. When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates in the reverse direction (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 72A to the state shown in FIG. 71B, the swinging operation member 310 swings downward. As described above, by repeatedly rotating the eccentric cam member 2333 clockwise and counterclockwise, the swinging operation member 310 can be vertically reciprocated (pivoted). Thereby, an advantageous state or an unfavorable state for the player can be notified. In addition, the operation device 10300 can be visually recognized by a player as a rendering device.

  When the swing operation member is vertically reciprocated by the reciprocating rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, it is preferable that the eccentric cam member 2333 is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 as in the present embodiment. The lever support shaft 331d1 can be easily arranged on the player side (front), so that the swing angle of the swing operation member 310 even when the notch 331c1 and 332c1 have the same length in the circumferential direction of the lever support shaft 331d1. This is because it is possible to increase. In this case, the vertical movement amount of the swing operation member 310 can be kept large, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

  In the state shown in FIG. 72B, the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side, and the movement of the peeling member 350 is restricted by the lock member 336. Therefore, when a small load such as a player putting a hand on the swing operation member 310 is applied, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are prevented from swinging.

  73 (a), 73 (b) and 74 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 73 (a), the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position, the lock member 336 is arranged at the fixed position, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is retracted to the opposite side of the lever member 340. 73 (b) shows a state in which the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 from the state of FIG. 73 (a), and is in contact with the eccentric cam member 2333. In FIG. The state where the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle from the state of FIG. 73 (b) and the lever member 340 is swung clockwise is shown, and the state of FIG. 73 (b) is an imaginary line. Is illustrated in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side and the movement of the lever member 340 is regulated, the eccentric cam member 2333 is controlled to move to a position away from the lever member 340 accordingly. . Accordingly, when a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 is pulled off from the peeling member 350 and moves, the lever member 340 comes into contact with the cylindrical portion 2333b1 side of the eccentric cam member 2333 (FIG. 73). (Refer to (b)), it is possible to prevent the cam portion 2333b2 of the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is pulled off from the peeling member 350, the load applied by the player to the swing operation member 310 is reduced. A part is used to peel off the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350. Therefore, the load applied by the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333 can be reduced.

  When the player applies a load in the downward direction to the swinging operation member 310, the lever member 340 does not move until the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, so that a reaction force is transmitted to the player ( The swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 is increased). Thus, in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attraction force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swing operation member 310. It is necessary to perform the operation (it becomes heavy), so that the player can be given an operational feeling.

  As shown in FIG. 74, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated to swing the lever member 340 and swing the head. The member 310 can be reciprocated up and down (pulling motion).

  This makes it difficult for the player to recognize a change in the internal state that the lever member 340 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350. Therefore, anxiety felt by the player due to the destructive operation of peeling the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350 can be suppressed.

  Further, by swinging the lever member 340 after the operation of pushing down the swinging operation member 310, the reaction force can be returned to the hand of the player holding the swinging operation member 310, and the player can feel a sense of operation. Can be granted.

  On the other hand, after the lever member 340 is peeled from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates at a high speed, so that the lever member 340 swings back and forth at a high speed. This allows the player to be notified of the abnormality. For example, the characters “weak” can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko machine 10 to notify the player that the load applied to the swing operation member 310 is too strong.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the lever member 340 is reciprocated up and down with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. It can be used to give a feeling of returning operation, and can also be used to notify a player of an abnormality. The former case has an effect of promoting the operation performed by the player, and the latter case has an effect of suppressing the operation performed by the player. Note that this state can be switched according to the magnitude of the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350, the player can perform a predetermined operation or perform a predetermined operation. Can be suppressed.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pushing operation of the lens member 317 and the swing operation of the swing operation member 310 are not structurally linked has been described. However, the operation device 11300 in the eleventh embodiment includes the swing operation member 11310. Is increased by the pushing operation of the lens member 317. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 11310 and the lever member 340 in the eleventh embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Although FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the external shape is the same as that of the operation device 11300 according to the present embodiment, so that it is substituted. Further, FIG. 75 (a) illustrates a no-load state in which the lens member 317 does not receive a pressing load, and FIG. 75 (b) illustrates a state where the lens member 317 is pressed in from the state of FIG. 75 (a). The state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the swing operation member 11310, a through hole is formed on the central axis of the pressing member 11366b of the vibration device 11366, and the radial direction of the shaft support rod 363 extends from the bottom wall of the bobbin member 11366a. A pair of through holes are opened toward both sides. Therefore, a through hole penetrating from the vibration member 11314 to the shaft support rod 363 through the vibration device 11366 is formed. The interval between the openings of the bobbin member 11366a is shorter than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2 wound around the shaft support rod 363.

  The vibration member 11314 includes a rotation stopper 11314g inserted into a through hole of the pressing member 11366b.

  The rotation stopping portion 11314g is a rod-shaped portion inserted into the through hole of the pressing member 11366b, and includes a sandwiching portion 11314g1 that is inserted into the pair of through holes of the bobbin member 11366a and formed into a pair of leaf springs. .

  The sandwiching portion 11314g1 is arranged at a position separated from the torsion spring SP2 in a no-load state (see FIG. 75A), and in a state where the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 75B). It is arranged at a position to hold SP2. Here, the holding portion 11314g1 is formed in the shape of a leaf spring, and in the state of FIG. 75 (b), the holding portion 11314g1 holds the shaft support rod 363 together with the torsion spring SP2, so that the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation member 310 is provided. , The resistance of the swing operation centered at the center can be increased. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

  In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 11366, the vibration of the vibration device 11366 is consumed as the driving force of the swing around the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player (FIG. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the vibration component of 75 (a) in the vertical direction.

  Also, while suppressing the swing of the swinging operation member 310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can move the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In a no-load state where the hand is released, the swinging operation member 310 can be caused to swing by the vibration of the vibration device 11366.

  Thus, the same vibrating device 11366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player pushing the lens member 317 and the effect of intensifying the operation of the swinging operation member 11310 to attract the player's attention in the no-load state. Can be compatible.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the resistance of the swinging operation of the swing operation member 11310 is increased by the pushing operation of the lens member 317 has been described. However, the operating device 12300 according to the twelfth embodiment has the pushing operation of the lens member 317. As a result, the regulating rod 365 is pressed against the lower end of the angle regulating hole 361d of the swing member 360. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 76A and 76B are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 12310 and the lever member 340 in the twelfth embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. Although FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the external shape is the same as that of the operation device 12300 according to the present embodiment, so that it is substituted. Further, FIG. 76 (a) illustrates a no-load state in which the lens member 317 does not receive a pressing load, and FIG. 76 (b) illustrates a state where the lens member 317 is pressed in from the state of FIG. 76 (a). The state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 76A, the swing operation member 12310 mainly includes an intermediate frame member 12312 and a vibration member 12314.

  In the intermediate frame member 12312, the opening at the center of the bottom 312a is enlarged compared to the intermediate frame member 312 (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment.

  The vibration member 12314 includes a rod-shaped pressing rod portion 12314g extending downward from the main body portion 314a along the vibration device 366 at an enlarged portion of the center opening of the intermediate frame member 12312. The pressing rod portion 12314g is extended to a position where the tip can contact the regulating rod 365.

  The pressing rod portion 12314g is disposed at a position in contact with the regulating rod 365 in a no-load state (see FIG. 76A), and in a state where the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 76B). 365. Therefore, when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the swinging operation member 12310 is rotated clockwise by the distance that the pressing rod portion 12314g moves (the distance between the main body portion 314a and the pressing member 366b), and the shaft support rod is rotated. 365 is pressed against the end of the angle regulating hole 361d. In this state, the pivot bar 365 can be fixed to the angle regulating hole 361d, so that the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 12310 around the pivot bar 363 can be suppressed. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 12310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

  In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 366, the vibration of the vibration device 366 is consumed as the driving force of the swing around the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player (FIG. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the vibration component of (a) in the vertical direction.

  In addition, while suppressing the swing of the swinging operation member 12310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can move the lens member 317 out of the lens member 317. In a no-load state where the hand is released, the swinging operation member 12310 can be caused to swing by the vibration of the vibration device 366.

  Thus, the same vibrating device 366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player pushing the lens member 317 and the effect of intensifying the operation of the swinging operation member 12310 to attract the player's attention in the no-load state. Can be compatible.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 causes the lever member 340 to rotate, and during the rotation operation, the swing operation member 310 is held by the lever member 340 in the biasing direction with respect to the lever member 340. Although the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment has been described, while the lever member 340 rotates, the swing operation member 310 moves the lever member 340 in the opposite direction to the biasing direction with respect to the lever member 340. A state of displacement can be configured. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a front perspective view of the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 77 illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 of the operation device 13300 is disposed at a downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 77, in the operation device 13300, a swing operation member 13310 is arranged so as to protrude forward from a rectangular outer case member 13320.

  FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 13300. Note that FIG. 78 illustrates a state in which the outer case member 13320 has been removed from the inner case member 13330 disposed inside the outer case member 13320.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the outer case member 13320 has a rear surface formed in a shape along the curved surface of the cover members 344 and 345 (see FIG. 11), and the inner case member 13330 has left and right sides of the cover members 344 and 345 from the front side. It mainly includes a left front cover 13321 and a right front cover 13322 that are attached in a manner to hide the edge, and a left cover member 13323 and a right cover member 13324 that are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 13330 from the left and right.

  The left cover member 13323 and the right cover member 13324 are provided with adjusting slots 13323a and 13324a, respectively, which are formed at the outer upper end and formed in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction.

  The adjustment long holes 13323a and 13324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322, respectively, and are elongated in the left-right direction, so that the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 are formed due to variations in molding and the like. Even when the shapes vary, the positions of the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 with respect to the swing operation member 13310 in the left-right direction can be easily adjusted. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the lateral displacement between the wall member 13322b fitted into the right front cover 13322 and the contact member 13312a.

  The left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 are fastened and fixed to the adjustment slots 13323a and 13324a in the front-rear direction, and are also fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at end faces opposed in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the right front cover 13322 is fitted rightward from the end face of the right front cover 13322 that comes into contact with the left front cover 13321, and the right front cover 13322 is prevented from falling in the front-rear direction by the fitting concave 13322 a. Wall member 13322b attached in a manner, and in a state where the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 are assembled (see FIG. 77), the leftward movement is stopped by the end surface of the left front cover 13321. The member 13322b is held inside the fitting recess 13322a.

  With such a configuration, when replacing the wall member 13322b, the wall member 13322b can be replaced only by removing the right front cover 13322. (The wall member 13322b is damaged by the load from the posture correction device 13312. This is an easy part). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

  FIG. 79 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 13300. In FIG. 79, the illustration of the outer case member 13320 is omitted, and a state in which the inner case member 13330 is disassembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a plurality of rod members 13331d. The plurality of rod members 13331d pivotally support a lever support shaft 331d1 that supports the lever member 13340 and an eccentric cam member 5333. An eccentric cam shaft 331d2, a lock shaft 4331d3 on which a lock member 5336 is supported, and a length shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1 that is arranged above the lock shaft 4331d3 and the lock release cam member 5339 is supported Mainly provided with a lock release shaft 13331d5.

  A bent sheet metal member B13 is fixed to the left cover member 13331 by being fastened to the distal end of the lock release shaft 13331d5. As a result, the unlocking cam member 5339 is maintained so that it cannot be removed from the unlocking shaft 13331d5.

  Since the lock release shaft 13331d5 is formed shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1, the lever member 13340 is provided at a portion where the lock release shaft 13331d5 is not provided (a portion on the right side in front view of the tip of the lock release shaft 13331d5). By rotating, it is possible to avoid interference between the lock release shaft 13331d5 and the lever member 13340.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a left cover member 13331 and a right cover member 13332 assembled in a box shape in which the lever member 13340 is disposed inside, an eccentric cam member 5333, a phase detection member 334, and , A first driving device 335, a lock member 5336, a gear damper 338, and a lock release cam member 5339.

  FIG. 80 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 13310 and the lever member 13340. FIG. 80 shows a state in which the back side frame member 13311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 13310, and also shows a state in which the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detection member 343 fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 13340 are disassembled. Is illustrated.

  The rear side frame member 13311 is formed in a hemispherical shape with an outer shell protruding to the rear side, and is depressed in a substantially semicircular shape in such a manner that the upper part projects (returns) to the front side from the protruding end (FIG. 17 (b)). )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a, which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole into which the swing member 360 is partially inserted.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the lever member 13340 is formed of a metal material such as iron and has a main body member 13341 formed in a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section, a gear damper receiving member 342, and a coaxial with the gear damper receiving member 342. The posture detecting member 343, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, the angle regulating rod member 346, and the swing member 360 provided at the front end of the main body member 341 are supported. Prepare mainly.

  FIG. 81 is an exploded front perspective view of the main body member 13341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swing member 360 of the lever member 13340.

  The main body member 13341 of the lever member 13340 has a main body portion 13341a formed in a long rod shape in a U-shaped cross section, a pair of shaft holes 341b formed in a substantially central portion of the main body portion 13341a in a left-right direction, and a restriction. A hole 341c, a pair of swing member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e, a restriction hole 341f, and an eccentric cam member 5333 and a lock member 5336 (see FIG. 79) which are fastened and fixed to the rear lower portion of the main body 13341a. And a contact member 13341g to be contacted.

  The contact member 13341g is in contact with the eccentric cam member 5333 on the front side portion of the lower side surface, and is in contact with the lock member 5336 on the rear side portion of the lower side surface. The cross-sectional shape of the contact member 13341g is the same as the shape of the lock receiving member 4350 (see FIG. 46).

  Next, the frame structure of the swing operation member 13310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 13310. The swing operation member 13310 includes a disk-shaped intermediate base M13 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 361e (see FIG. 81) of the swing member 360, and a rear side frame member fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the intermediate base M13. 13311, a posture correcting device 13312 disposed inside the rear side frame member 13311 and having a portion extending from the inside to the outside, and a flange portion sandwiched between the rear side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13. A front cover 13313 and a rear cover 13314 which are fastened and fixed to each other by sandwiching the rear frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13 from the front-rear direction, and a pair of covering members provided at the fastening positions of the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314. The separation preventing cover 13315 and fitted from below the separation preventing cover 13315 (FIG. 82). That the protective cover 13316, a lens member 13317 which is elastically connected with the intermediate base M13, mainly comprises a.

  The posture correcting device 13312 includes a contact member 13312a that protrudes outward from the guide hole 13311b of the rear frame member 13311, a support member 13312b that is disposed between the contact member 13312a, and the coil spring SP13. And a hook member 13312c having a hook-shaped portion that protrudes inward from the hook insertion hole 13311e of the rear side frame member 13311 and that fits with the locking projection 13312b3 of the support member 13312b.

  The contact member 13312a includes a straight bar-shaped protrusion 13312a1 and a flange 13312a2 that protrudes from the protrusion 13312a1 in a flange shape in the left-right direction.

  The overhang portion 13312a1 is a portion that extends outside the guide hole 13311b of the back side frame member 13311, and the flange portion 13312a2 abuts on the extension wall 13311c of the back side frame member 13311 so that the abutment member 13312 is no more. This is the part that prevents overhang.

  The front cover 13313 includes a recessed locking recess 13313a that is opened rearward below the fastening position with the rear cover 13314 (in the rear in FIG. 82).

  The separation preventing cover 13315 is recessed in the same shape as the outer shape of the protective cover 13316 and is provided with a receiving recess 13315a configured to be able to receive the protective cover 13316 in an assembled state, and above the receiving recess 13315a (on the near side in FIG. 82). Mainly comprises a retaining hole 13315b which is formed such that a rod that is pierced and inserted therein can be fitted into the locking recess 13313a in an assembled state (see FIG. 77).

  FIG. 83 illustrates a method of assembling the front cover 13313, the rear cover 13314, the separation preventing cover 13315, and the protective cover 13316 in time series. FIG. 83A illustrates a bottom view of the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314. 83 (b) is a bottom view of the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, and the separation preventing cover 13315, and FIG. 83 (c) is the front cover 13313 and the back surface along the line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc in FIG. 83 (b). It is sectional drawing of the cover 13314, the separation prevention cover 13315, and the protective cover 13316.

  As shown in FIG. 83, FIG. 83 (a) illustrates a state in which the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314 are fixed, and FIG. 83 (b) shows the state of the separation preventing cover 13315 in the state of FIG. 83 (a). FIG. 83 (c) shows a state in which a protective cover 13316 is added to the state shown in FIG. 83 (b) and is fixed to the rear frame member 13311.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314 are assembled by fastening the wall portions opposed to each other by fastening screws N13a. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), a separation screw 13315 is attached so as to cover the fastening screw N13a (at least in the front-rear direction (covering in the vertical direction in FIG. 83 (b))), and the fastening screw inserted into the locking recess 13313a. N13b is screwed into the retaining hole 13315b, so that the separation preventing cover 13315 is fixed undetachably.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (c), the protective cover 13316 is fitted into the receiving recess 13315a so as to cover the fastening screw N13b (fitted to the side (right side in FIG. 83 (c)) so as not to be pulled out), and thereafter When the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) is fastened and fixed to the rear frame member 13311, the upper surface of the rear frame member comes into contact with the lower surface of the protective cover 13316.

  With this structure, it is difficult to separate the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, and it is possible to partially disassemble the operation device 13300 and prevent an illegal passage of a wire inside.

  That is, in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, the fastening screw N13a must be removed, but the path to the fastening screw N13a is prevented by the separation preventing cover 13315.

  Further, in order to separate the separation preventing cover 13315 from the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, the fastening screw N13b must be removed. However, the path to the fastening screw N13b is prevented by the protective cover 13316. Is in contact with the rear side frame member 13311 in the pull-out direction in the assembled state, so that it is necessary to remove the rear side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) in order to remove the protective cover 13316.

  Therefore, in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, it is necessary to remove the rear frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13. In the assembled state, the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover are provided on the rear side of the rear frame member 13311. Since 13322 is disposed close to (see FIG. 77), the access path for removing the fastening screw inserted from the back side to the front side becomes narrow. Therefore, it is difficult to remove the rear frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13, and it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Next, the rear frame member 13311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the back side frame member 13311, and FIG. 84 (b) is a view in the direction of the arrow LXXXIVb in FIG. 84 (a) (view in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d). 84) is a top view of the back side frame member 13311, and FIG. 84 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 along line LXXXIVc-LXXXIVc in FIG. 84 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 84, the rear frame member 13311 has an insertion hole 311a through which the lever member 13340 (see FIG. 80) is inserted, and a front-rear direction (FIG. 84 (c) left and right direction) below the insertion hole 311a. ), A wall-shaped extending wall 13311c extending outside the left and right side surfaces of the guide hole 13311b inside the back side frame member 13311, and a bottom wall of the guide hole 13311b. A guide bottom wall 13311d extending inside the back side frame member 13311 along the bottom surface, and a hook insertion hole 13311e drilled vertically at an end of the guide bottom wall 13311d opposite to the guide hole 13311b. A pair of support member guide walls 13311f extending from the end of the extension wall 13311c along the opening direction of the guide hole 13311b. The mainly it includes.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (c), the hook insertion hole 13311e is inclined such that the side surface on the guide bottom wall 13311d side is away from the guide hole 1311b as going upward from the lower end. This inclination secures the contact area of the hook member 13312c with the inclined contact portion 13312c3, which will be described later, and prevents the guide bottom wall 13311d from being damaged (cracked) by the load applied from the hook member 13312c.

  The support member guide wall 13311f has an upper end surface (FIG. 84 (a) front side surface) formed as a surface parallel to the guide bottom wall 13311d.

  Next, the hook member 13312c will be described with reference to FIG. The hook member 13312c is a member made of a hard resin material. FIG. 85 (a) is a front perspective view of the hook member 13312c, and FIG. 85 (b) is the direction of the arrow LXXXVb in FIG. 85 (a). FIG. 85 (c) is a front view of the hook member 13312c as viewed from the side, FIG. 85 (c) is a side view of the hook member 13312c as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXVc in FIG. 85 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the hook member 13312c in the LXXXVd-LXXXVd line of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the hook member 13312c is a member formed in a symmetrical shape, and extends from the upper end of the rectangular plate-shaped main body 13312c1 to the front side along the vertical direction. The hook 133133c2 provided, an inclined contact portion 13312c3 extending from the lower end of the main body 13312c1 to the front side, and a bottom wall extending outward from the bottom surfaces of the main body 13312c1 and the inclined contact 133133c3. And a concave portion 13312c5 formed by cutting a part of the main body 13312c1 in the longitudinal direction from the lower surface of the bottom wall portion 13312c4.

  The inclination angle of the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the inclined contact portion 13312c3 is the same as the inclination angle of the hook insertion hole 13311e with respect to the guide bottom wall 13311d of the rear side frame member 13311.

  Next, the support member 13312b will be described with reference to FIG. The support member 13312b is a member made of hard resin and formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to the longitudinal direction when viewed from above. FIG. 86 (a) is a front perspective view of the support member 13312b, and FIG. 86B is a top view of the support member 13312b as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86A, and FIG. 86C is a cross-sectional view of the support member 13312b along the line LXXXVIc-LXXXVIc in FIG. 86B. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the support member 13312b includes a main body 13312b1 formed in a plate shape having an L-shaped cross section, and a pair of plate-shaped contact plates 13312b2 connecting both side surfaces of an intersection of the main body 13312b1. The main part 13333b1 mainly includes a locking projection 13312b3 projecting from the end of the main body 13312b1 in the thickness direction, and a peeping hole 13312b4 drilled in the vertical direction at the intersection of the main body 13312b1.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (c), the support member 13312b is a member in which the coil spring SP13 and the contact member 13312a are disposed in a region surrounded by the main body 13312b1 and the contact plate 13312b2.

  In addition, when the main body 13312b1 is assembled in a state of covering the coil spring SP13, the coil spring SP13 can be visually recognized through the viewing hole 13312b4, so that the coil spring SP13 is forgotten to be inserted at the time of assembly, or the position of the coil spring SP13 with respect to the support member 13312b is shifted. Can be prevented.

  Next, a method for assembling the posture correcting device 13312 to the rear frame member 13311 will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 87 and 88, the manner in which the posture correcting device 13312 is assembled to the back side frame member 13311 is illustrated in a time-series manner.

  FIG. 87 (a) is a partial top view of the back side frame member 13311, and FIG. 87 (b) is a partial cross sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 along the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87 (a). 87 (c) is a partial top view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 13312, and FIG. 87 (d) is the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device along the line LXXXVIId-LXXXVIId in FIG. 87 (c). FIG. 87 (e) is a cross-sectional view of the rear-side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 13312 taken along line LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe of FIG. 87 (d).

  Also, FIGS. 88 (a), 88 (c) and 88 (e) are partial top views of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 13312, and FIG. 88 (b) is a view of FIG. 88 (a). 88 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 13312 along the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb, and FIG. 88 (d) is the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device along the line LXXXVIIId-LXXXVIIId of FIG. 88 (c). FIG. 88 (f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 13312 taken along line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf in FIG. 88 (e).

  The method of assembling the rear frame member 13310 and the posture correcting device 13312 will be described in detail. First, the posture correcting device 13312 is moved along the guide bottom wall 13311d to the rear side frame member 13310 shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b), and FIG. 87 (c) and FIG. 87 (d). ), The tip of the main body 13312b1 of the support member 13312b is inserted into the guide hole 13311b. Here, a hook member 13312c is attached to the left side of the support member 13312b, but since it is to be retrofitted, a space for a path for inserting the support member 13312b into the guide hole 13311b (see FIG. 87 (d)). (Left space) can be widened, and the support member 13312b can be easily inserted into the guide hole 13311b.

  In this state, as shown in FIG. 87 (e), the abutting member 13312a is configured such that the flange portion 13312a2 is locked (blocked) by the extension wall 13311c of the back side frame member 13311, so that the back side frame member 13311a is formed. It is arranged inside.

  In the state shown in FIG. 87 (c) to FIG. 87 (e), the coil spring SP13 is in a state of being shortened from its natural length. That is, a rightward load is applied to the support member 13312b, and when the load is released, the support member 13312b moves to the left.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), the hook member 13312c is inserted into the hook insertion hole 13311e of the rear frame member 13311 from the state shown in FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e). It is inserted from the outside of the frame member 13311 (the lower side in FIG. 88B). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), a part of the hook member 13312c is exposed to the outside of the back side frame member 13311, so that if the assembling is forgotten, or if the hook member is damaged and falls off, the appearance is reduced. Inspection can detect those defects.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 (c) and 88 (d), the hook member 13312c is pushed in until the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the hook member 13312c contacts the lower surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d, and the hook member 13312b is hung on the support member 13312b in this state. When the applied load is removed, the support member 13312b is moved leftward in FIG. 88F to a position where the support member 13312b contacts the hook member 13312c by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 (the leftward movement of the support member 13312b is controlled by the hook member 13312c). In this case, the upward movement of the support member 13312b is restricted by covering the locking protrusion 13312b3 from above with the hook 133133c2 of the hook member 13312c.

  That is, the support member 13312b is positioned by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 on the back side frame member 13311 as shown in FIGS. 88 (e) and 88 (f).

  In this embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the moving dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced. That is, in the embodiment in which the hook member 13312c is assembled to the rear frame member 13311 from the inside of the rear frame member 13311, the hook member 13312c is moved to the rear side in the same manner as the hook portion 13312c2 blocks the upward movement of the support member 13312b. In the case where the hook-shaped portion for blocking the upward movement from the frame member 13311 is provided on the opposite side of the hook portion 13312c2, the support member 13312b is added to the size of the hook portion 13312c2 in addition to the size of the hook-shaped portion. Also need to be moved.

  In this case, it is difficult to select the coil spring SP13, and there is a possibility that the function of the posture correcting device 13312 will be affected. That is, when the holding force of the posture correcting device 13312 is emphasized, it is better to select a coil spring SP13 having a large elastic force. When the support member 13312b needs to be moved extra (for example, it needs to be moved twice as long) at the time of assembly, the elastic force generated from the coil spring SP13 increases accordingly (for example, becomes twice), and the force is weak. It is difficult for workers to assemble.

  On the other hand, the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 that holds the support member 13312b in the assembled state depends on the natural length of the coil spring SP13 in the assembled state regardless of the distance that the support member 13312b is moved when the hook member 13312c is assembled. By displacement. Therefore, when the distance for moving the support member 13312b is reduced, the support member 13312b can be assembled with a smaller force and a large holding force can be secured. In the present embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the rear frame member 13311, the movement dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced.

  When removing the posture correcting device 13312, the front end (the left end in FIG. 88 (f)) of the support member 13312b is moved in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts, whereby the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b are engaged. The stopper is released, and the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b can be separately removed from the rear side frame member 13311.

  In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 88 (f)), the front end of the main body 13312b1 is disposed inside (surface position) outside the outer surface of the rear side frame member 13311. It is considered difficult to pull out the support member 13312b from the outside, and in order to move the support member 13312b in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts, it is necessary to apply a force from inside the back side frame member 13311. This can prevent the player from accidentally removing the support member 13312b from the back side frame member 13311, or preventing the player from removing the support member 13312b or the hook member 13312c.

  In order to prevent wobble of the support member 13312b, in the assembled state (see FIG. 88 (f)), the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c2 of the hook member 13312c and the upper surface of the locking projection 13312b3 of the support member 13312b are in close contact. Need to be done. For this reason, it is necessary to strictly control the dimensional relationship. However, due to the variation in the molding of the support member 13312b and the hook member 13312c, the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c2 does not go up to the upper side of the upper surface of the locking convex portion 13312b3 if only the fitting is performed. (The back surface of the hook 13312c2 (the surface on the right side in FIG. 88 (f)) and the locking protrusion 13312b3 come into contact with each other and the support member may stop halfway).

  In the present embodiment, the force is concentrated and pushed into the recessed portion 13312c5 disposed on the hook member 13312c, so that the hook member 13312c is deformed with a relatively small force, and the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c1 is engaged with the locking projection. It can be pushed inside the back side frame member 13311 until it goes above the upper surface of 13312b3.

  Even when the hook member 13312c is damaged or the hook member 13312c is forgotten to be attached, the support member 13312b is moved by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 until the support member 13312b is pressed against the wall on the opposite side of the guide hole 13311b. The insertion hole 13311e is closed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of intruding the wire from the hook insertion hole 13311e.

  Next, the function of the posture correction device 13312 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 89A and 89B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 13300 taken along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 89 (a) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, and FIG. 89 (b) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position. .

  As shown in FIG. 89A, the direction Y13a in which the lens member 13317 moves when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position (a linear direction passing through the shaft support rod 363, and the vibration device 366 is displaced). The case where the operation direction U13a in which the player pushes the lens member 13317 in the same direction as the (direction) is described. The smaller the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a, the easier the operation becomes (the wrist can be pushed in without being turned).

  By rotating the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) from the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated, and the lever member 13340 is rotated to the downward position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), when moving the swing operation member 13310 from the upward position to the downward position, the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position The lever member 13340 is rotated by an angle θ13x formed by a straight line X13a parallel to the angle X13a and a straight line X13b parallel to the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position.

  Here, in a case where the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 are not relatively displaced, and the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a is the angle θ13x.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, the tip of the protrusion 13312a1 of the contact member 13312a contacts the wall member 13322b, and the swing operation of the lever member 13340 is performed. The member 13310 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 89A by the angle θ13y. The angle θ13y is set to the same angle as the angle at which the main body member 361 of the swing member 360 can rotate.

  When the swing operation member 13310 is swung with respect to the lever member 13340, the direction in which the lens member 13317 moves is changed to the direction Y13b (the angle formed by the direction Y13a and the direction Y13b is the angle θ13y). Therefore, in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position, the direction Y13b in which the lens member 13317 moves is moved toward the operation direction U13a (the angle between the direction in which the lens member 13317 is moved and the operation direction U13a is reduced). Therefore, it is possible to avoid a change in the operational feeling and to prevent a situation in which the player has difficulty in pressing the lens member 13317.

  In the present embodiment, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is achieved by disposing the posture correction device 13312 inside the swing operation member 13310. Therefore, the structure can be simplified as compared with a case where a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the swing operation member 13310 is provided inside the lever member 13340.

  In addition, since the posture is changed at the timing when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, it is compared with the case where the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is continued while the lever member 13340 is rotated. Then, it is possible to easily suggest to the player the timing of pressing the lens member 317. That is, for example, by displaying “press” or the like on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) in accordance with the timing at which the posture of the swing operation member 13310 changes with respect to the lever member 13340, the third symbol is displayed. The display on the display device 81 and the movement of the operation device 13310 can be linked, and the timing at which the player should press the lens member 13317 can be clearly notified to the player.

  In the present embodiment, although the posture correcting device 13312 has a function of applying a load for changing the posture of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340, the force applied from the posture correcting device 13312 to the swing operation member 13310 is a lever member. The rotation occurs in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of 13340 (when the lever member 13340 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 89B, a load is generated to rotate the swing operation member 13310 clockwise in FIG. 89B). Therefore, the force generated by the posture correcting device 13312 to change the posture of the swing operation member 13310 also functions as a force for braking the lever member 13340. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the lever member 13340 from rotating too much due to excessive momentum and the rear end portion (the right end portion in FIG. 89B) of the lever member 13340 from colliding with the inner case member 13330.

  Note that the wall member 13322b with which the posture correcting device 13312 comes into contact can also come into contact with the lever member 13340 when the lever member 13340 is going to rotate excessively counterclockwise (to further rotate from the state of FIG. 89 (b)). It is arranged in a suitable position. Thus, even when the player overloads the lens member 13317, the wall member 13322b can prevent the lever member 13340 from over-rotating.

  Here, it is also possible to connect a gear from the rotation axis of the lever member 13340 to the swing operation member 13310 along the lever member 13340, and to rotate the swing operation member 13310 by meshing rotation of the gear group. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the posture of the swing operation member 13310 is changed by the contact member 13312a protruding from the swing operation member 13310 abutting on the wall member 13322b, so that the lever member 13340 is provided. The weight of the gear group can be saved. Therefore, the weight of the lever member 13340 can be reduced, and the driving force of the driving motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), the elastic force (displacement in the torsion direction) of the torsion spring SP2 for urging the swing operation member 13310 is compared with the state where the torsion spring SP2 is disposed at the upward position. , The state of being arranged at the downward position is made larger. In the downward position, a force is applied from the posture correcting device 13312 to the swing operation member 13310 in a manner to rotate the swing operation member 13310 in the direction opposite to the biasing direction of the torsion spring SP2.

  Therefore, the force for fixing the swing operation member 13310 so as not to be relatively displaced with respect to the lever member 13340 is smaller than the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upper position. Is larger. Therefore, a state (upward position) in which the rotation resistance of the swinging operation member 13310 is small (light) with respect to the lever member 13340 (upward position), and a state (downward position) in which the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 is large (heavy). Can be formed.

  For example, when the operation of hitting the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) is performed when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is weak, and the swing operation member 13310 is caused by the recoil of the hit. While it is possible to perform an effect of swinging about the lever member 13340, while performing an operation of hitting the lens member 13317 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation member 13310 By increasing the rotational resistance of the lever member 13340, the swing operation member 13310 can be fixed to the lever member 13340, and for example, when the lens member 13317 is continuously hit, it is possible to prevent the lens member 13317 from being missed. .

  Note that the change in the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 in the present embodiment is caused by the change in the position of the lever member 13340, and the action does not change with the moving speed of the lever member 13340.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90, a description will be given of a posture change of the swing operation member 13310 in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position. FIGS. 90A and 90B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 13300 along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. Note that FIGS. 90A and 90B show a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position. In FIG. 90A, the contact member 13312a comes into contact with the wall member 13322b. 90 (b), a force is applied to the swing operation member 13310 even after the lens member 13317 is pushed in, and the coil spring SP13 of the posture correcting device 13312 is contracted while being rotated. , The state in which the swing operation member 13310 is tilted forward.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (b), even when an overload is applied to the lens member 13317, the posture correction device 13312 is configured in such a manner as to be able to contract, so that when the lens member 13317 is overloaded In addition, the posture of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed, and the wall member 13322b can be prevented from being damaged (penetrated and broken).

  When the tip of the contact member 13312a is pressed against the wall member 13322b to rotate the swing operation member 13310, the displacement of the coil spring SP13 increases as the rotation angle increases, and the elastic force generated by the coil spring SP13 reduces the displacement. Since it becomes larger in proportion, it is possible to suppress the swing operation member 13310 from excessively rotating.

  In the present embodiment, since the shaft support rod 363 that is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 13310 is provided in the directions Y13a and Y13b in which the lens member 13317 is pushed, the swing operation member is pressed by the load that pushes the lens member 13317. The generation of a force for rotating 13310 can be suppressed.

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the case has been described where the posture of the swing operation member 13310 is always changed when the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position. In the state where the operation member 14310 is arranged at the downward position, it is possible to switch between the case where the posture of the swing operation member 14310 changes and the case where the posture does not change. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 91 (a) is a front view of a lock member 14336 according to the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 91 (b) is a side view of the lock member 14336 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXXIb in FIG. 91 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 91, the lock member 14336 is formed in a vertically long rod shape, and has a main body member 14336a having a curved wall portion 5336a1 and a convex portion 5336a2, a shaft support hole 5336b, and a main body member 14336a. And a locking member 14336c that is configured to be movable in the protruding direction.

  The locking member 14336c is fitted into the main body member 14336a so as to be able to protrude and has a biasing spring SP14a disposed between the locking member 14336c and the main body member 14336a. It is arranged at a position where it can be touched. The locking member 14336c includes a chamfered portion 14336c1 configured to bevel the upper surface.

  Therefore, when the lock release cam member 5339 (see FIG. 92A) comes into contact with the locking member 14336c from above, the locking member 14336c is pushed inward along the chamfered portion 14336c1 toward the inside of the main body member 14336a ( The lock member 14336 can be rotated by pressing the locking member 14336c when it comes into contact with something other than above (for example, from the front side (from the left side in FIG. 91B)). .

  With reference to FIG. 92 (a), an eccentric cam member 14333 and a posture switching device 14337 which rotates while contacting the eccentric cam member 14333 will be described. FIG. 92A is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 14300 taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (a), the eccentric cam member 14333 includes a main body 333a, a cylindrical portion 333b, a cam portion 14333c having different shapes in the left-right direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 92 (a)), and an umbrella portion. 5333f.

  The cam portion 14333c has a semicircular portion 14333c1 formed in a semicircular shape on the near side in FIG. 92 (a), and a semicircular portion on the left side of the semicircular portion 14333c1 (in the back of the drawing in FIG. 92 (b)). And a protruding portion 14333c2 protruding from an end of the 14333c1.

  The projecting portion 14333c2 has a side surface in the circumferential direction inclined with respect to the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333. Therefore, when the protruding portion 14333c2 and the attitude switching device 14337 come into contact with each other, the pressing force of the protruding portion 14337b1 is generated not only in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also in the radial direction (the eccentric cam shaft). 331d2). Therefore, the load on the eccentric cam member 14333 in the rotation direction can be reduced.

  The posture switching device 14337 includes a main body member 14337a configured in a plate shape having an L-shaped cross section, an extending portion 14337b extending in a bifurcated shape from the side of the main body member 14337a, and the main body member 14337a. The posture of the main body member 14337a is maintained at an intermediate position by applying an elastic force to an end portion of the main body member 14337a and the end of the main body member 14337c that supports the main body member 14337a and the extension portion 14337b at a connection portion with the extension portion 14337b. And an elastic device 14337d.

  The main body member 14337a is configured such that the end opposite to the end supported by the shaft support portion 14337c can protrude from the inner case member 14330. In the state shown in FIG. 92 (a), the main body member 14337a has a positional relationship (a positional relationship of touching at a distance of 0) in which a load cannot be applied even if the main body member 14337a contacts the swing operation member 14310.

  The extending portion 14337b is disposed on the same plane as the umbrella portion 5333f as a position in the left-right direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 92A), and can be brought into contact with the projecting portion 14333c2 on the opposite side of the shaft support portion 14337c. FIG. 92A is provided with a protruding portion 14337b1 protruding toward the near side of the drawing. Here, the projecting portion 14337b1 is disposed on the movement trajectory of the projecting portion 14333c2 in the state of FIG. 92 (a), and the main body member 14337a is rotated to the end (FIG. 93 (b) or FIG. 95 (b)) at a position deviating from the movement trajectory of the protruding portion 14333c2.

  The elastic device 14337d has a case fixed to the inside of the inner case member 14330, a portion in contact with the main body member 14337a is concavely formed in a U shape, and the position can be changed while the concave portion is urged by a coil spring. Be composed. That is, even if the main body member 14337a is rotated, when the rotational force is removed, the position can be returned in a form converged on the U-shaped concave portion.

  FIG. 92B is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 14300 taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. In FIG. 92 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated from the state of FIG. 92 (a), and the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock release cam member 5339 rotate counterclockwise, so that the lock member 14336 is rotated. , The state where the lever member 13340 is rotated and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged at the upward position. That is, between FIG. 92A and FIG. 92B, the swing operation member 14310 is moved by the same distance as the swing operation member 13310 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as compared with the thirteenth embodiment, the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and a guide hole formed so that the posture correcting device 13312 (see FIG. 80) protrudes. A back side frame member 14311 formed in a state where the 13311b is closed is disposed on the rear side surface of the swing operation member 14310.

  FIGS. 93A and 93B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 14300 along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 93 (a) shows a state where the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 92 (b) and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged at the downward position, and FIG. 93 (b). FIG. 93A shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 93A and the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 is rotated to the rotation end. When the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated from the state of FIG. 93 (b), the state returns to the state of FIG. 92 (a).

  That is, in the driving state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 92A, no load is generated from the posture switching device 14337 to the swing operation member 14310, and the swing operation member 14310 is connected to the lever member 13340. Move while maintaining the posture with respect to.

  Next, the interlocking of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the attitude switching device 14337 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 94A to 94C are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337. FIG. 94 (a) shows a state where the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise and the protruding portions 14333c2 and 14337b1 are in contact with each other. FIG. 94 (c) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of a), and the protruding portion 14337b1 is moved toward the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 from the protruding portion 14333c2. 94B shows the state immediately after the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 94B, and the contact between the protruding portions 14333c2 and 14337b1 is released.

  As shown in FIG. 94, in the present embodiment, as compared with the case where the attitude switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1, the protruding portions 14333c2 and 14337b1 are formed in a state where the rotation angle of the extending portion 14337b is small. Contact can be released.

  That is, when pushing the attitude switching device 14337 with the semicircular portion 14333c1, the extension portion 14337b continues to rotate until the protruding portion 14337b1 is pushed out from the rotation trajectory of the semicircular portion 14333c1.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the protruding portion 14337b1 can escape between the protruding portion 14333c2 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 94 (b)), the state shown in FIG. 94 (a). Therefore, the contact between the projecting portions 14333c2 and 14337b1 can be released only by rotating the extending portion 14337b to the state shown in FIG. 94B (see FIG. 94C). Therefore, it is possible to reduce a region where the extension portion 14337b becomes a resistance of rotation of the eccentric cam member 14333, and it is possible to suppress a driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 14333.

  With reference to FIGS. 95 and 96, FIGS. 95 (a), 95 (b), 96 (a) and 96 (b) show lines corresponding to lines XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). It is a partial sectional view of operation device 14300. In FIG. 95 (a), the swing operation member 14310 is arranged at the downward position, and the protruding portion 14333c2 of the eccentric cam member 14333 is disposed below the protruding portion 14337b1 of the attitude switching device (FIG. 95A). 92 (a) is shown. In FIG. 95 (b), the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 95 (a), and the protruding portion 14333c pushes the protruding portion 14337b1. FIG. 96A shows a state in which the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 is rotated to the rotation end, and FIG. 96A shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 95B. FIG. 96 (b) shows a state where the eccentric cam member 14333 has been rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 96 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, by rotating the eccentric cam member 14333 counterclockwise, the swing operation member 14310 can be swung through the attitude switching device 14337 (FIG. 95 (b)). reference). That is, by simply switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, switching between an operation state in which the swing operation member 14310 swings in the downward position and an operation state in which the posture of the swing operation member 14310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is maintained. Can be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), when a load is applied to the swing operation member 14310 by the eccentric cam member 14333, the eccentric cam member 14333 does not apply a load to the lever member 13340. This is because a sufficient distance is provided between the lever member 13340 and the attitude switching device 14337, and the lever member 13340, the attitude switching device 14337, and the eccentric cam member 14333 are arranged in a positional relationship such that they do not abut at the same time. Therefore, while it is possible to transmit the driving force to each of the plurality of members by the eccentric cam member 14333, it is possible to prevent the driving force from being transmitted at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the driving force of the driving motor 335a (see FIG. 79). Can be.

  Since the upper side surface (the side surface in contact with the protruding portion 14337b1) of the protruding portion 14333c2 is formed to be inclined with respect to the axial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the protruding portion 14333c2 and the posture switching device 14337 are formed. At the time of contact, the pressing force of the convex portion 14337b1 is generated not only by the circumferential force of the eccentric cam member 14333, but also by a radially generated force (a load generated by a distance relationship with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2). Can be done. Therefore, the load on the eccentric cam member 14333 in the rotation direction can be reduced.

  When the eccentric cam member 14333 further rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 96B, the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 95A. At this time, the lock release cam member 5339 is brought into contact with the lock member 14336 from above, so that the lock member 14336c (see FIG. 91) of the lock member 14336 is in a retracted state, and the rotation of the lock release cam member 5339 is rotated. Inhibition is prevented.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96, by switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, it is possible to switch whether or not the posture changes in a state where the swing operation member 14310 is arranged at the downward position. By arranging the eccentric cam member 14333 in a specific phase, the control of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be eased compared to the case where a load is applied to the swinging operation member 14310 (slightly idling). However, no change in appearance can be caused).

  Here, the time required for the eccentric cam member 14333 to change from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. 92 (b) and the eccentric cam member 14333 are rotated from the state of FIG. 95 (a). In this way, the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 14333 is adjusted by adjusting the time until the state changes to the state shown in FIG. 95B (by determining the stop positions of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 so as to match). By switching the rotation direction as it is, the state shown in FIG. 92A is changed to the state shown in FIG. 92B at the same timing after the driving of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79), or the state shown in FIG. Either the change from the state to the state of FIG. 95 (b) can be caused.

  For example, the time required to change from the state of FIG. 95 (a) to the state of FIG. 95 (b) is shorter than the time required to cause the change to the state of FIG. 92 (b) to the state of FIG. Assuming that the time is shorter, if there is no change from the state of FIG. 95 (a) to the state of FIG. 95 (b) after the operation vibration of the drive motor 335a is sensed, the state of FIG. ) Changes from the state of FIG. 92 to the state of FIG. 92B, and it is possible to determine what operation the swing operation member 14310 will perform next without paying attention to the movement of the swing operation member 14310. This will reduce the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the player feels the vibration of the drive motor 335a, whether the change from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. It can be made impossible to determine whether a change from the state of a) to the state of FIG. 95B occurs. Therefore, the player's attention to the swing operation member 14310 can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 mesh with the same drive gear 335b and rotate synchronously has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 may be rotated by different drive gears as in the fourth embodiment. In this case as well, the time from when one of the drive motors is operated to the time when the swing operation member 14310 starts to swing (rotates clockwise in FIG. 92A) with respect to the lever member 13340, and The same effect can be obtained by adjusting the time until the member 13340 starts rotating clockwise in FIG. 92A.

  In addition, even when the time until each operation starts is different, the first drive motor that takes a long time is rotated first, the second drive motor that takes a short time is rotated later, and then the first drive motor is used first. By stopping the driven first drive motor (the player still feels the vibration of the second drive motor during this time), the player can feel the vibration of the first drive motor that takes a long time, The operation by the second drive motor can be caused, and the player can be surprised.

  Next, the interlocking of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 97A to 97C are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the attitude switching device 14337. Note that FIG. 97 (a) illustrates a state where the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise, and the protruding portions 14333c2 and 14337b1 have begun to abut. In FIG. 97 (b), FIG. FIG. 97 (c) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount and the protruding portion 14337b1 is moved to the side closer to the outer periphery of the protruding portion 14333c2. The state where the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of (b), and the protruding portion 14337b1 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the protruding portion 14333c2 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 97, as the upper surface of the projection 14333c2 is closer to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 from the outer peripheral surface, it is inclined away from the straight line connecting the outer peripheral surface and the eccentric cam shaft 331d. Causes the protrusion 14337b1 to move in the axial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 (the load component in the axial direction becomes dominant). Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 14333 (the load applied to the drive motor 335a) can be suppressed as compared with the case where resistance in the circumferential direction occurs on the eccentric cam member 14333.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 97 (c), the load applied to the eccentric cam member 14333 from the projecting portion 14337b passes through the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, so that no force for rotating the eccentric cam member 14333 is generated, and the driving motor 335a Even when the power is off, it is possible to withstand the load from the protruding portion 14337b. Therefore, the power consumption of the drive motor 335a can be reduced.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the case where the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 cannot be removed from the outside of the rear side frame member 13311 has been described. However, the operating device 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment has the contact member 13312a A state in which the rear side frame member 13311 is pulled out from the outside can be configured. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  98 (a) and 98 (b) are top views of the contact member 15312a in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 98 (c) is a back side frame along a line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 98D is a cross-sectional view of the rear-side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 15312 taken along line LXXXXXXVIIId-LXXXXXVIIId in FIG. 98C.

  FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the overhang member 13312a1 (locked state), and FIG. 98 (b) shows a state where the flange member 15312a2 is removed from the overhang member 13312a1 ( (Pull-out state) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b), the contact member 15312a has a rod-shaped overhang member 15312a1 whose end is configured to be deformable, and a protrusion member 15312a1 having a T-shaped cross section. And a flange member 15312a2 that deforms the projecting member 15312a1 by being embedded in the main body.

  The overhang member 15312a1 is mainly formed of a long rod-shaped main body 15312a11 and a pair of deformed portions 15312a12 connected at one end in the short direction of one end of the main body 15312a11. Prepare. The connecting portion between the main body 15312a11 and the deformable portion 15312a12 is cut to facilitate deformation, and the deformable portion 15312a12 is in a state where the flange member 15312a2 is not embedded (see FIG. 98 (b)). 15312a11 fits inside the width in the short direction.

  The flange member 15312a2 is based on the distance between the base portion 15312a21 formed to have a size that fits between the pair of support member guide walls 13311f and the connection between the main body 15312a11 and the deformed portion 15312a12 of the projecting member 15312a1 from the base portion 15312a21. And a protruding portion 15312a22 protruding with a short width.

  With such a configuration, when the protruding portion 15312a22 of the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the overhang member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 of the overhang member 15312a1 is brought into a locked state in which it protrudes outward (see FIG. 98A). When the flange member 15312a2 is separated from the overhang member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 is in a withdrawn state (see FIG. 98 (b)) which narrows inward.

  FIGS. 98 (c) and 98 (d) show a state in which the hook member 13312c is assembled to the back side outer frame member 13311. In this state, since the coil spring SP13 is shorter than the natural length, it is possible to generate a load from the coil spring SP13 for embedding the flange member 15312a2 in the projecting member 15312a1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98 (d), the contact member 15312a is locked. In this locked state, even if an attempt is made to pull out the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 is caught and cannot be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1 and illegally pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1.

  FIG. 99 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 15312 taken along a line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87, and FIG. 99 (b) is a diagram illustrating the LXXXXXb- in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the back side frame member 13311 and attitude | position correction apparatus 15312 in LXXXXIXb line.

  Note that FIG. 99 (a) and FIG. 99 (b) show a state where the hook member 13312c is removed from the back side frame member 13311 and the support member 13312b is slid to the space occupied by the hook member 13312c. .

  In the state shown in FIG. 99 (a) and FIG. 99 (b), the coil spring SP13 is in a state longer than the natural length, so that a force for pressing the flange member 15312a2 against the overhang member 15312a1 is not generated, and the deformed portion 15312a12 has a shape. By returning (returning to the state of FIG. 98B), the contact member 15312a is pulled out. Thus, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be extracted from the outside of the back side frame member 13311 (right side in FIG. 99B).

  That is, it is possible to replace the overhang member 15312a1 only by sliding the support member 13312b laterally without separating the support member 13312b from the rear frame member 13311. Therefore, for example, many members are arranged inside the back side frame member 13311, and even if it is not possible to separate the support member 13312b from the guide bottom wall 13311d, the support member 13312b collides with another member and is likely to be damaged. It is possible to replace a certain overhang member 15312a1 and to improve the maintainability.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the hook member 13312c falls off and the support member 13312b moves, the force for pushing the contact member 15312a to the outside of the rear side frame member 13311 is reduced. When a large load that falls off due to cracking or the like of the 13312c is applied from the support member 13312b to the hook member 13312c, it is possible to suppress the contact member 15312a from being similarly damaged.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the hook member 13312c falls off, the contact member 15312a can be pulled out, so that replacement can be performed immediately. For example, the fatigue strength is designed so that the hook member 13312c falls off when the contact member 15312a collides with the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) a predetermined number of times as a number of times in which the fatigue strength is weighted in consideration of safety. Thus, it is possible to determine the replacement time of the contact member 15312a by using the dropping of the hook member 13312c as a mark. Further, in a state where the hook member 13312c is dropped, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be pulled out from the outside of the rear side frame member 13311, so that replacement can be easily performed and maintenance performance can be improved.

  Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the elastic force of the torsion spring SP1 for urging the swing operation member 13310 changes depending on whether the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position or the downward position, and Although the case where the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes has been described, the operation device 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment additionally operates the swing operation member 16310 by changing the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310. The feeling can be changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 100A to 100D are side views of the operation device 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment. 100 (a) to 100 (d) show an external view of the swing operation member 16310, a cross-sectional view of the lever member 13340 is schematically shown, and other portions are schematically imagined. This is illustrated by a line.

  100 (a) and 100 (b) show a state in which the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, and in FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d), the swing operation member 16310 is downward. The state where it is arranged at the position is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (c), a state in which the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the moving end on the forward rotation side (counterclockwise side in FIG. 100 (a)) with respect to the lever member 13340 is shown. 100 (b) and 100 (d), a state in which the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the moving end on the backward (the clockwise side in FIG. 100 (a)) with respect to the lever member 13340 is shown. Illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the swing operation member 16310 hides the rear frame member 13311, the posture correcting device 13312, the front cover 13313, the rear cover 13314, and the fastening portions of the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314. In addition, a separation prevention cover 16315 having an iron ball 16315e for changing the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310, and a protection cover 13316 disposed between the separation prevention cover 16315 and the rear side frame member 13311 (FIG. 82) and a lens member 13317.

  The separation preventing cover 16315 is provided on the receiving recess 13315a and the retaining hole 13315b (see FIG. 82) and on the wall surfaces of the rear frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313 in the front-rear direction (left and right directions in FIG. 100 (a)) from the lower end of the disk portion. Extending portion 16315c extending along the inner surface, a long groove 16315d arranged in a long groove shape on a side surface of the extending portion 16315c facing the rear frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313, and the inside of the long groove 16315d. And an iron ball 16315e movably disposed.

  The long groove 16315d is a groove for rolling the iron ball 16315e disposed inside by gravity, and in FIG. 100 (a), the right end portion is closer to the shaft support rod 363 than the left end portion. The distance is shortened.

  Further, the angle θ13y for rotating the swing operation member 16310 from the forward rotation end to the rearward rotation end is 10 degrees (θ13y = 10 °), and the rotation angle of the lever member 13340 is 34 degrees. By setting the angle θ16a of the long groove 16315d at 100 (a) to be less than 24 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 100 (a)) (θ16a <24 °), the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position. In this case, the position of the iron ball 16315e can be maintained with respect to the swing operation of the swing operation member 16310 regardless of whether the iron ball 16315e is swung downward (the vertical relationship between the left and right ends of the long groove 16315d is maintained). Can be). In the present embodiment, the angle θ16a is set to about 10 degrees.

  The iron ball 16315e is a spherical member made of iron, and is a ball that can bear most of the weight of the swing operation member 16310. Therefore, when the iron ball 16315e moves, the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 changes.

  As shown in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (b), when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, an iron ball 16315e is arranged at the right end of the long groove 16315d, and the center of gravity is set at the shaft support rod 363. 100 (c) and 100 (d), when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the downward position, an iron ball 16315e is arranged at the left end of the long groove 16315d, and the center of gravity is set. The position is moved away from the pivot 363.

  That is, the distance from the pivot 363 to the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position or the downward position. Thus, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed.

  For example, in the case where the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position than in the case where the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the position of the center of gravity is farther from the shaft support rod 363 and the moment around the axis of the swing operation member 16310 (FIG. 100 (c) counterclockwise moment) can be increased.

  Therefore, in a state where the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the downward position (see FIG. 100C and FIG. 100D), the player pushes the lens member 13317 to perform the front swing operation member 16310. After rotating in the turning direction (after rotating from the state of FIG. 100 (d) to the state of FIG. 100 (c)), the posture of the swing operation member 16310 returns due to the load generated by the posture correcting device 13312 (FIG. 100 (c)). ) To the state shown in FIG. 100 (d)) can be made longer (so as to return slowly) than when the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 is arranged near the rotation axis. Can be).

  Thus, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is reduced by the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 (see FIG. 89) in the thirteenth embodiment. When the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the downward position while maintaining the same, the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 rotating in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 100C) can be increased. . In this case, the time from when the player hits the lens member 13317 to return to the state shown in FIG. 100D after the swing operation member 16310 is brought into the state shown in FIG. Also, when the player hits the lens member 13317 again (when the player repeatedly hits the lens member 13317), the posture of the swing operation member 16310 can be maintained in the state of FIG. 100 (c), and immediately from the state of FIG. 100 (c). As compared with the case where the state returns to the state of FIG. 100D, the continuous tapping operation of the lens member 13317 can be facilitated.

  Also, in terms of the change in rotation resistance due to the difference in the rotation direction of the swing operation member 16310, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, the swing operation member 16310 is rotated clockwise in FIG. Since the direction in which the iron ball 16315e is moved downward is a direction in which the iron ball 16315e is moved downward, the rotation resistance can be reduced as compared with the case where the iron ball 16315e is rotated counterclockwise in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the direction in which the swing operation member 16310 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 100C is the direction in which the iron ball 16315e is moved downward. Rotational resistance can be reduced as compared with the case of rotating clockwise in FIG. 100 (c).

  Therefore, depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the downward position or the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, the direction in which the rotational resistance when rotating the swing operation member 16310 is reduced is reduced. Can be reversed.

  According to the present embodiment, the rotation resistance of the swinging operation member 16310 is changed by the movement of the iron ball 16315e (due to a change in the state of the inside of the swinging operation member 16310). The load applied to the swing operation member 16310 can be reduced as compared with the case where the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310 is increased by applying a load in the direction.

  Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the case where the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes due to the change in the torsion of the torsion spring SP2 has been described. However, the operation device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment includes the swing member 17360. The operability of the swinging operation member 13310 can be changed by rubbing the wall member 17322b with the wall member 17322b. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 101 (a) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, and FIG. 101 (b) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position. . FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b) show a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed, and a swing operation member with respect to the lever member 13340, respectively. The state where 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side is illustrated.

  In the present embodiment, a swing member 17360 is pivotally supported at the tip of the lever member 13340 instead of the swing member 360 in the first embodiment. The swing member 17360 mainly includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 17362 formed to rub against the wall member 17322 b, a shaft support bar 363, a buffer member 364, a regulating bar 365, and a vibration device 366. (See FIG. 81).

  The motor fixing plate 17362 includes a friction arm portion 17362c extending in the radial direction of the shaft hole 362b1 through which the shaft support rod 363 is inserted from the side wall portion 362b.

  Also, instead of the wall member 13322b of the thirteenth embodiment, a wall member 17322b is fitted between the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 (see FIG. 78). The wall member 17322b includes an extending portion 17322b1 extending upward from an upper end thereof.

  As shown in FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b), the extending portion 17322b1 does not come into contact with the friction arm portion 17362c when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, and the swing operation member 13310 Is formed in a state of contacting the friction arm portion 17362c in a state in which is disposed at the downward position. That is, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, the extending portion 17322b1 has a contact surface pressed against the distal end portion of the friction arm portion 17362c. It is formed in an arc shape centered at 363. Thereby, the contact area between the extended portion 17322b1 and the friction arm portion 17362c can be secured, and a sufficient dynamic friction force can be exhibited. Accordingly, since the rotational resistance of the motor swing plate 13362 increases due to the dynamic frictional force, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 also increases, so that the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

  Since the change in the operational feeling described above changes depending on the position of the lever member 13340, the change amount does not change depending on the operation speed of the lever member 13340. Therefore, regardless of whether the swing operation member 13310 is swung at a high speed or the swing operation member 13310 is operated slowly, if the tip of the lever member 13310 is disposed at the downward position, the swing operation member 13310 is provided. In the same manner, a dynamic frictional force can be applied to the rotation of, so that a change in the operational feeling can be reliably generated.

  Further, the dynamic frictional force changes according to the pressing force, and does not change according to the rotation speed of the motor fixing plate 17362. Therefore, in the state where the tip of the frictional arm portion 17362c is pressed against the extension portion 17322b1. Even when the rotation speed is low (for example, when the rotation is started), a sufficient dynamic frictional force can be generated.

  In this embodiment, since the extending portion 17322b1 is provided on the wall member 17322b, when the extending portion 17322b1 is damaged, the members that need to be replaced are limited to the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322. it can. Therefore, replacement of the wall member 17322b can be facilitated, and maintainability can be improved.

  Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the case where the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 changes depending on the arrangement of the lever member 13340 has been described. However, the operating device 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment drives the driving force via the eccentric cam member 5333. Is transmitted to the swinging member 18360, so that the rotational resistance of the swinging operation member 13310 can be changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 102A to 102C are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. Note that FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (c) show a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position, and the torsion spring SP2 is not shown, and the lower cover member 345 (FIG. 81) (See FIG. 2) is removed. Also, a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated forward with respect to the lever member 18340 is shown.

  The operation device 18300 according to the present embodiment includes a swing member 18360 that is disposed inside the swing operation member 13310 and rotates integrally with the swing operation member 13310, and a lever member 18340 that pivotally supports the swing member 18360. , At least as a part different from the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  The oscillating member 18360 includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 18362 having a thin wall portion 18362 c extending from the side wall portion 362 b along the opening direction of the shaft hole 362 b 1, a shaft support rod 363, and a cushioning member 364. , A regulating rod 365 and a vibration device 366 (see FIG. 81).

  The thin wall portion 18362c is a portion disposed around the shaft support rod 363 in an assembled state (see FIG. 102A). In the present embodiment, the thin wall portion 18362c is attached to the shaft support rod 363. A rubber band RB capable of generating a load in the pressing direction is wound around the thin wall portion 18362c.

  The rubber band RB is a band-shaped member formed of a rubber material, and both ends are fixed to the periphery of the lever support shaft 331d1 by pins so as not to move. Therefore, when rotating the swing operation member 13310, sliding friction occurs between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB.

  The lever member 18340 includes, instead of the main body member 13341 of the thirteenth embodiment, a main body member 18341 having a transmission device 18347 configured to be movable by being brought into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333.

  The main body member 18341 sandwiches a long hole 18341h extending obliquely to the longitudinal direction of the lever member 18340 and a direction in which the long hole 18341h extends on the side wall portion of the main body 18341a formed in a U-shaped cross section. And a pair of guide wall portions 18341i arranged in parallel in an aspect. The long hole 18341h extends to a position where it interferes with the rubber band RB, as shown in FIG.

  The transmission device 18347 has a protrusion inserted into the long hole 18341h and is sized so as to be slidable between the guide walls 18341i. The pusher 18347a is supported by the lower end of the pusher 18347a. An adjusting portion 18347b and a projecting portion 18347c projecting from the lower end of the pushing portion 18347a along one side surface of the adjusting portion 18347b (along the upper side surface in this embodiment). In the present embodiment, the adjusting portion 18347b is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 102A (the posture in which the adjusting portion 18347b comes into contact with the overhang portion 18347c) by an urging spring (not shown) with respect to the pushing portion 18347a.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, the long hole 18241h and the guide are provided in a positional relationship in which the adjusting portion 18347b and the eccentric cam member 5333 collide while the eccentric cam member 5333 rotates. A wall portion 18341i is provided.

  By extending the overhang portion 18347c beyond the pivotal support position of the adjustment portion 18347b, it is possible to prevent the adjustment portion 18347b from rotating in a direction approaching the overhang portion 18347c. Therefore, a direction in which the adjusting portion 18347b is easily rotated with respect to the pushing portion 18347a and a direction in which the adjusting portion 18347b is hardly rotated can be created.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to switch whether or not to change the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position.

  That is, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 102A from the state of FIG. 102A, the driving force is used to rotate the adjusting portion 18347b with respect to the pushing portion 18347a. The part 18347a does not move along the long hole 18341h (see FIG. 102 (b)). Therefore, the state of the rubber band RB does not change, and the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 does not change.

  On the other hand, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 102A from the state of FIG. 102A, the adjusting portion 18347b is locked in the rotating direction by the overhang portion 18347c, and the adjusting portion 18347b is pushed in by the pushing portion 18347a. Therefore, the driving force is used to move the long hole 18341h (see FIG. 102 (c)). In this case, since the pushing portion 18347a deforms the rubber band RB in the extending direction, the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB are more closely adhered to each other, and the sliding resistance between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB increases. . Therefore, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes.

  Therefore, even if the swinging operation member 13310 appears to be in the same state as the state in which the swinging operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 5333 is switched and the transmission device 18347 is operated or stopped. Thus, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

  Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the load generated from the posture correcting device 13312 is given only to the swing operation member 13310. However, the operating device 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment has the load generated from the posture correcting device 13312. It can be applied to the lever member 19340. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 103A and 103B are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. 103 (a) and 103 (b) show a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, and in FIG. 103 (a), the player gives the swing operation member 13310 FIG. 103 (b) shows a state in which no force is applied, and FIG. 103 (b) shows a state in which the player applies a force to the swing operation member 13310 and rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 103 (b)). Illustrated.

  The lever member 19340 is configured in such a manner that only the locking projection 19345e protrudes from the side wall of the lower cover member 345 of the lever member 13340 in the thirteenth embodiment is added from the lever member 13340. The locking projection 19345e is disposed at a position on the rotation locus of the rotation lever 19337b when the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position.

  As shown in FIG. 103A, in the present embodiment, an inner case member 19330 is provided instead of the inner case member 13330. The inner case member 19330 is configured such that a transmission device 19337 is added inside the inner case member 13330.

  The transmission device 19337 is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft 19337a of the left cover member 13331 and is formed in an L-shaped cross section, and a rotation direction of the rotation lever 19337b fixed to the left cover member 13331 (FIG. 103 (a)). ) A torsion spring SP19 for generating a biasing force in a counterclockwise direction).

  When the rotating lever 19337b is located at the rotating end in the biasing direction (see FIG. 103 (a)), the posture maintaining portion 19337b1 abuts on the inner surface of the front wall surface of the left cover member 13331, and maintains the posture. When the rotary lever 19337b is positioned at the rotation end in the biasing direction while being bent from the rod-shaped portion having the portion 19337b1, the front end and the front contact surface 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 of the left front cover 13321 and the surface position. And a contact portion 19337b2 disposed on the main body. In this embodiment, the arrangement of the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and an opening is also formed in the inner case member 19330, so that the contact member 13312a and the contact portion 19337b2 are formed inside the opening. And can be abutted.

  With these configurations, the load applied to the swing operation member 13310 can be used as a load for suppressing the vibration of the lever member 19340. The details will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at a downward position in a state where the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 13310 (for example, an eccentric cam member 5333 (see FIG. 89)). (When the swing operation member 13310 is moved by the rotation of the lever), the contact member 13312a of the posture correcting device 13312 is pushed by the contact portion 19337b2 of the transmission device 19337, and the swing operation member 13310 rotates with respect to the lever member 19340. (The state shown in FIG. 103A). In this state, the rotating lever 19337b is not in contact with the lever member 19340, and no load is transmitted, so that the driving force for driving the rotating lever 19337b can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the player performs an operation of rotating the swing operation member 13310 from the state of FIG. 103 (a), if the load at that time exceeds the urging force of the torsion spring SP19. The contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 rotates the rotation lever 19337b of the transmission device 19337. In this case, when the rotating lever 19337b comes into contact with the locking projection 19345e in the rotating direction, a reaction operation of the lever member 19340 in the rotating direction via the rotating lever 19337b (the operation of rotating clockwise in FIG. 103 (b)). ) Can be suppressed.

  Therefore, for example, when the player hits the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) of the swing operation member 13310, a load is applied in a direction to raise the lever member 19340 due to the reaction, and the rear end of the lever member 19340 is moved from below. Although the supporting lock member 5336 (see FIG. 12B) may be overloaded, in the present embodiment, the rotation lever 19337b is configured to suppress the rotation of the lever member 19340. The required load can be reduced.

  Further, when the rotating lever 19337b contacts the lever member 19340, the rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 increases, and the driving force for driving the lever member 19340 may be unnecessarily large. In this embodiment, the lens member 13317 is used. Since the rotation lever 19337b can be brought into contact with the lever member 19340 only when an overload is applied (see FIG. 77), a normal (for example, when the player does not touch the swing operation member 13310) is used. The rotation resistance of the lever member 19340 can be maintained in a low state.

  Thereby, while the driving force of the lever member 19340 is suppressed, when an overload is applied, the rotation resistance of the lever member 19340 is temporarily increased, so that the locking member 5336 (see FIG. 89 (b)) is provided. The applied load can be suppressed, and the durability of the lock member 5336 can be improved.

  Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the case where the posture correcting device 13312 that rotates the swinging operation member 13310 in the direction in which it is raised moves linearly is described. However, the operating device 20300 in the twentieth embodiment is configured such that the posture correcting device 20312 is rotated. It is configured as a mobile device. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 104A and 104B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 20300 in the twentieth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A, and FIG. FIG. 7A is a rear view of the swing operation member 20310 when viewed in the direction of the arrow CV.

  104 (a) and 104 (b) show a state in which the swing operation member 20310 is arranged at the downward position, and in FIG. 104 (a), the player swings the swing operation member 13310. FIG. 104 (b) shows a state in which no force is applied and the swing operation member 20310 is rotated in the backward rotation direction. In FIG. 104 (b), a force is applied from the player to the swing operation member 13310 and the forward rotation direction (FIG. 104 ( (b) Counterclockwise rotation) shows a state in which the swing operation member 20310 is rotated.

  The swing operation member 20310 is provided in a cup-shaped (outer shape similar to the rear frame member 13311) rear side frame member 20311 disposed below the swing member 366, and disposed on the rear side frame member 20311. It mainly includes a posture correcting device 20312, a front cover 13313, a rear cover 13314, a separation preventing cover 13315, a protective cover 13316, and a lens member 13317 (see FIG. 82).

  The rear side frame member 20311 includes a functional wall portion 20311c that is a partition that divides an opening on the rear surface into an insertion hole 311a and an operation region hole 20311b that opens a region where the posture correction device 20312 operates.

  The functional wall portion 20311c is recessed from the back side to the front side with a width slightly larger than the shaft bar portion 20312a1 of the posture correcting device 20312, and is formed to be able to support the shaft bar portion 20312a1; Above the concave portion 20311c1, the insertion concave portion 20311c2, which is concavely formed in a fan-shaped cross section (a shape in which the width increases as the depth increases from the entrance) and the concave portion 20311c1 of the insertion concave portion 20311c2, And a locking projection 20311c3 projecting from the inner side surface on the far side.

  The posture correcting device 20312 mainly includes a main body member 20312a having a J-shaped cross section, and a leaf spring-shaped leaf spring member 20312b assembled with the main body member 20312a so as to pass through the opening 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. Prepare for.

  The main body member 20312a includes a shaft bar portion 20312a1 that is supported by the recessed portion 20311c1, a flat plate portion 20312a2 formed by disposing the shaft bar portion 20312a1 at an end, and a shaft bar portion 20312a1 and a flat plate portion. An opening portion 20312a3 formed between the opening portions 20312a2, a curved portion 20312a4 formed by bending from the lower end portion of the flat plate portion 20312a2, and a pinch formed to be able to pinch the leaf spring member 20312b at a distal end portion of the curved portion 20312a4. And a concave portion 20312a5.

  A side surface of the insertion recessed portion 20311c2 far from the recessed portion 20311c1 is disposed in parallel with a wall portion in which the recessed portion 20311c1 is recessed, and a vertical interval between them is greater than a thickness of the leaf spring member 20312b. Is also slightly increased.

  The leaf spring member 20312b is set to have a thickness smaller than the dimension of the entrance of the insertion recess 20311c2 and a width smaller than the opening 20312a3. An upper portion 20312b1 that presses the shaft bar portion 20312a1 fitted in the 20311c1 so that it cannot be pulled out, and is bent from the lower end portion (located at the upper end portion of the opening portion 20312a3) of the upper portion 20312b1 and the opening portion 20312a3 faces inward. It mainly includes a lower portion 20312b2 that is extended in a penetrating manner and inserted into the holding concave portion 20312a5, and a locking hole 20312b3 that is formed in the upper portion 20312b1. In the present embodiment, the leaf spring member 20312b is urged in a direction in which the bending is gentle (a direction in which the lower end portion in FIG. 104A rubs counterclockwise).

  The locking hole 20312b3 is a hole in which the locking projection 20311c3 is hooked in a state where the leaf spring member 20312b is inserted into the insertion concave portion 20311c2. Therefore, even when an outward (rightward in FIG. 104A) load is applied to the leaf spring member 20312b in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the leaf spring member 20312b from dropping out of the insertion concave portion 20311c2. .

  According to the configuration in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the main body member 20312a from dropping off from the recess 20311c1 due to the elastic force of the leaf spring member 20312b. That is, when the shaft bar portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a is moved in the dropping direction, the leaf spring member 20312b also needs to be moved together. Since the direction is to bite into the portion 20311c3, the leaf spring member 20312b cannot be moved, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the shaft bar portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a from dropping from the recessed portion 20311c1.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the main body member 20312a receives a load from the wall member 13322b and is pushed into the inside of the back side frame member 20311, the main body member 20312a is pressed in the direction in which the urging force of the leaf spring member 20312b increases. Since the spring member 20312b is displaced, it becomes more difficult to drop the shaft bar portion 20312a1 from the concave portion 20311c1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player mistakenly removes the posture correcting device 2031 during a game while using no fastening member such as a screw.

  Here, when an overload occurs between the wall member 13322b and the main body member 20312a and the main body member 20312a is broken, the lower end of the main body member 20312a is not locked to the lower end of the operation area hole 20311b, The leaf spring member 20312b is deformed to a position where the bending is eliminated. Therefore, since the leaf spring member 20312b is exposed outside the back side frame member 20311, a difference from a normal state is large, and the necessity of maintenance can be easily determined by an appearance inspection.

  As a method of assembling the posture correcting device 20312 to the functional wall portion 20311c, first, the shaft bar portion 20312a1 is fitted into the recessed portion 20311c1 with the leaf spring member 20312b inserted through the opening 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. At this time, the leaf spring member 20312b has not yet been inserted into the holding recess 20312a5.

  Next, the upper part 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b, which can freely move inside the opening 20312a3, is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2.

  Finally, the lower part 20312b2 of the leaf spring member 20312b is pulled downward from the inside of the back side frame member 20311 and inserted into the holding recess 20312a5, whereby the state shown in FIG. 104A can be formed. In this state, the upper portion 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b is rotated around the side surface on which the recessed portion 20311c1 is formed as a fulcrum in a direction approaching the locking protrusion 20311c3 inside the inserted concave portion 20311c2, and the locking hole is formed. 20312b3 is hooked on the locking projection 20311c3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper portion 20312b1 from dropping from the insertion concave portion 20311c2.

  As described above, if the leaf spring member 20312b is touched from the inside of the back side frame member 20311, the assembling and removal are easy (the lower side 20312b2 may be deformed), but the back side frame member is in an assembled state. When the leaf spring member 20312b is touched only from the outside of 20311, removal becomes difficult.

  Therefore, when the posture correcting device 20312 is detached from the inside by removing the rear frame member 20311 as in the case of maintenance, the operation can be performed quickly and easily, and the posture can be corrected from the outside of the rear frame member 20311. Fraud such as removal of the device 20312 can be made difficult.

  Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, the case where the motor fixing plate 17362 rubs against the wall member 17322b has been described. However, in the operating device 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment, the motor fixing plate 21362 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the lever member 13340. It consists of. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 106A and 106B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 106 (a) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, and FIG. 106 (b) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position. . Further, FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b) show a state where the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed, and in FIG. 106 (a), the lever member 13340 is attached to the lever member 13340. On the other hand, FIG. 106B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side, and FIG. 106B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the rear rotation side. You.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the wall member 21322b includes an extended slide portion 21322b2 that extends forward and upward (in FIG. 106 (a), diagonally to the upper left) and is disposed inside the pair of friction arms 17362c.

  The extension slide portion 21322b2 includes a long hole 21322b21 that is formed in the left-right direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 106) and extends in the up-down direction. The groove portion 21322b21 is arranged at a position where the protruding pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. 106 (a), and from the position, the outer side of an arc passing through the position with the lever support shaft 331d1 as a center. 106 is formed in such a manner that the distance from the lever support shaft 331d1 increases as it goes downward, and the projecting pins 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. 106 (b).

  The swing member 21360 includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 21362 having a shape similar to the motor fixing plate 362, a shaft support rod 363, a buffer member 364, a regulating rod 365, a vibration device 366, (See FIG. 81).

  The motor fixing plate 21362 mainly includes a main body portion 362a, a side wall portion 362b, a pair of friction arm portions 17362b, and a projection pin 21362d protruding inward from the pair of friction arm portions 17362b.

  In this embodiment, since the protruding pin 21362d is inserted into the elongated hole 21322b21, the shape of the elongated hole 21322b21 changes the manner of movement of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 accompanying rotation of the lever member 13340. be able to. For example, by forming the long hole 21322b21 to have a shape equivalent to an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, the swing operation member 13310 can rotate with respect to the lever member 13340 when the lever member 13340 rotates around the lever support shaft 331d1. Displacement can be eliminated.

  On the other hand, by making the long hole 21322b21 extend in a direction inclined with respect to an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 as in the present embodiment, the lever member 13340 is projected by rotation. The motor fixing plate 21362 is rotated so as to fill the displacement of the fitting position that occurs between the setting pin 21362d and the long hole 21322b21. Accordingly, if the motor fixing plate 21362 rotates (in a rotatable direction, that is, from the state shown in FIG. 106A to the state shown in FIG. 106B) with (in conjunction with) the rotating operation of the lever member 13340. 106 (a) (clockwise), the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated. Thus, the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated in conjunction with each other.

  Next, a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described twenty-first embodiment, the case where the posture of the swing operation member 13310 changes due to the projection pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 being guided by the groove portion 21322b21, but the operation device 22300 in the twenty-second embodiment has The posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is caused by the gear meshing rotation. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 107A and 107B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 22300 in the twenty-second embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A.

  FIG. 107 (a) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, and FIG. 107 (b) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position. Note that FIGS. 107 (a) and 107 (b) show a state where the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed, and in FIG. 107 (a), the lever member 22340 is attached to the lever member 22340. On the other hand, FIG. 107B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side, and FIG. 107B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the rear rotation side. You. In FIG. 107 (a) and FIG. 107 (b), illustration of the torsion spring SP1 and the guide support hole 331e1 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 107, the operation device 22300 pivotally supports the swing operation member 13310 at one end (the left side in FIG. 107 (b)), and a lever member 22340 pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331 d 1. A wall member 22322b having an arcuate wall portion 22322b2 always meshed with the rotating gear 22347 of the lever member 22340, and a oscillating member 22360 having a toothed plate portion 22362c always meshed with the rotating gear 22347 of the lever member 22340. Prepare mainly.

  The lever member 22340 is configured in such a manner that a rotary gear 22347 supported by the angle regulating rod member 346 is added to the lever member 13340 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  The wall member 22322b is a plate member fitted into the fitting concave portion 13322a (see FIG. 78), and includes an inward extending portion 22322b1 extending in a direction approaching the lever support shaft 331d1, and an inward extending portion thereof. An arc-shaped wall portion 22322b2 extending from the inner end (the right side in FIG. 107A) of the 22322b1 along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and having gear teeth meshed with the rotating gear 22347. And.

  The oscillating member 22360 has a motor fixing plate in which the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 81) of the oscillating member 360 in the thirteenth embodiment has a toothed plate portion 22362c in which gear teeth to be meshed with the rotary gear 22347 are formed. 22362.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the lever member 22340 is rotated, the rotary gear 22347 is rotated with respect to the arcuate wall portion 22322b2, and the motor fixing plate 22362 is supported by the rotation of the rotary gear 22347. The rod 363 is rotated about an axis. Therefore, the rotation of the swing operation member 13310 can be continued while the lever member 22340 is rotating.

  In the present embodiment, the lever member 22340 is rotated 34 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 107A to the state shown in FIG. 107B, and during this time, the swing operation member 13310 is rotated 10 degrees. That is, the gear ratio of the tooth plate portion 22362c to the gear teeth formed on the arc-shaped wall portion 22322b2 is about 0.3 (= 10/34).

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the shape of the body member 341 of the lever member 340 is fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be partially expandable and contractible in the longitudinal direction. In this case, the main body member 341 is contracted, and the swinging operation member 310 is configured to be able to be stored at the rear, so that the swinging operation member 310 is disposed at the downward position and protrudes to the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the packing box is provided. In the case of protruding, the front and rear width of the swinging operation member 310 can be reduced to a size that can be accommodated in a packing box.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the gear damper 6347 generates viscous resistance only when the peeling member 6350 is peeled from the lever member 6340 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a viscous resistance may be generated in the gear damper only when the lever member 6340 and the peeling member 6350 are fixed by suction. In this case, a resistance corresponding to the operation speed when the player operates the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the player, and the operational feeling can be improved.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350 (when the circumscribed circle of the rotation trajectory of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact). Although the case where the upper end of the lock member 4336 abuts on the lower end of the lock receiving member 4350 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lock receiving member 4350 may be restricted from swinging by the upper end of the lock member 4336 at a position separated upward from the eccentric cam member 4333.

  In this case, when the lock receiving member 4350 swings due to the rotational driving of the eccentric cam member 4333, the lock receiving member 4350 is not restricted by the lock member 4336, so that the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotationally driven in one direction. By doing so, it is possible to perform a tilting operation of reciprocating the swing operation member 310 up and down.

  Further, for example, when the intermediate portion between the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350, the lock receiving member 4350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336. But it is good.

  In this case, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 in one direction, the lock receiving member 4350 can reciprocate up and down above the upper end of the lock member 4336, and can perform a tilting operation. In addition, even if the player performs an erroneous operation of lifting the swinging operation member 310 upward during the swinging operation, the swing of the lock receiving member 4350 can be restricted by the lock member 4336, and the eccentric cam member 4333 is not moved. Damage can be prevented.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the lock member 8336 enters the lower side of the lever member 340 when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other and regulates the swing of the lever member 340 has been described. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a bar-shaped member that extends and contracts from the side wall of the inner case member 8330 toward the inside of the inner case member 8330 is provided, and the bar-shaped member is extended when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other, The lever member 340 may be inserted under the rear end portion.

  In this case, it is not necessary to make the shape of the hook-shaped tip portion of the lock member 8336 into a shape below the lever member 340, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lock member 8336 can be improved.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side in a state where the lever member 340 is in the middle position of the swing angle range has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side when the rear end of the lever member 340 is arranged at the uppermost position of the swing angle range.

  In this case, even if the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the range in which the lever member 340 can swing above the peeling member 350 whose swing is restricted is limited, so that the player's operation is possible. Accordingly, the momentum in the swing direction applied to the lever member 340 is suppressed (the lever member 340 cannot be moved to such an extent that the momentum is applied). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the inner case member 8330 from being damaged by the lever member 340 vigorously colliding with the inner case member 8330.

  Further, for example, when the rear end of the lever member 340 is located at the lowest position in the swing angle range, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side. In this case, the distance between the rear end of the lever member 340 and the upper side surface of the inner case member 8330 can be increased in the posture in which the swinging of the lever member 340 is restricted. The player notices that the sensation transmitted to the player is changed by this operation (the weight of the peeling member 350 is not transmitted to the player and the swing operation member 310 is felt heavy), and the player swings the swing operation member. It is possible to have a time margin to reduce the load applied to 310.

  On the other hand, when the rear end of the lever member 340 is located at the lowermost position of the swing angle range, the peeling member 350 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other, so that a load is applied from the peeling member 350 to the eccentric cam member 333. May occur. Therefore, in order to prevent this, only when the lock member 8336 is arranged on the information than the middle position of the swing range (when the eccentric cam member 333 does not contact the peeling member 350), the lock member 8336 is fixed to the fixed side. May be arranged.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case has been described where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are formed with the same length, and the elastic coefficient of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is larger than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 may have the same elastic coefficient, and the upper elastic connecting member CS91 may be shorter than the lower elastic connecting member CS92.

  In this case, in a state where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 have the same length (stretched) with each other, the upper elastic connecting member CS91 has a larger elastic displacement and a larger elastic recovery force. In a later state, the lens member 317 of the swing operation member 310 can be easily held upward. This makes it easy for the player to push the lens member 317 from above.

  In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the case where the hook member 13312c is formed of a hard resin has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hook member 13312c may be formed of a shape memory material that maintains its shape at room temperature and changes shape in a manner in which the engagement with the support member 13312b is released by heating. In this case, the replacement of the hook member 13312c can be performed without removing the rear frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the protective cover 13316 is formed from a hard resin and the rear side frame member 13311 needs to be removed from the intermediate base M13 in order to remove the protective cover 13316 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the protective cover 13316 may be formed from a soft resin material. In this case, by changing the shape of the protective cover 13316, the protective cover 13316 can be removed even while the rear frame member 13311 is fixed to the intermediate base M13.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the surface state of the extending portion 17322b1 of the wall member 17322b is uniform has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a first region having a large friction coefficient and a second region having a smaller friction coefficient than the first region may be formed in the surface state of the extending portion 17322b1. In this case, the friction arm portion 17362c gives the player a sense of operation (rotational resistance, weight) that gives the player who swings the swing operation member 13310 while the friction arm portion 17362c and the extension portion 17322b1 are rubbing. It can be changed between the case where it rubs with the region and the case where the friction arm portion 17362c rubs with the second region.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the rotating lever 19337b is in contact with the lever member 19340 in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation lever 19337b may be in contact with the lever member 19340 while the swing operation member 13310 is moving toward the downward position (the lever member 19340 is moving). In this case, by operating the rotating lever 19337b in a direction opposite to the rotating direction of the lever member 19340 and bringing the lever into contact with each other, an effect of decelerating the lever member 19340 can be obtained.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<One example of the technical concept of a structure in which the lever member 340 breaks when locked>
In a gaming machine including a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's operation, and a regulating member that regulates movement of the moving member, the moving member may be configured such that the player An operating member to be operated, and a regulated member connected to the operating member and capable of regulating movement of the regulating member, wherein the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulating member. A gaming machine A1 wherein the shape of the moving member is configured to be deformable when a load of a predetermined amount or more acts on the operating member.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's manual operation is regulated at a predetermined position by a regulating member (for example, See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the player applies an overload to the moving member in a state where the movement is restricted, the load is applied to the restricting member through the moving member, and the restricting member may be damaged. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the moving member includes the operating member operated by the player and the regulated member which is connected to the operating member and whose movement can be regulated by the regulating member. In the state where the member is restricted from moving by the regulating member, the load of the moving member is deformable by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the operating member, so that the load is consumed for deforming the shape of the moving member. Thus, the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restriction member from being damaged by the player applying an overload to the moving member.

  In addition, as a configuration of the moving member that realizes deformation of the shape of the moving member due to the application of a load, for example, a configuration in which an elastic member such as a spring is disposed in a part of the A configuration in which each part is attracted by magnetic force is exemplified.

  In a configuration in which an elastic member such as a spring is provided in a part of the moving member, the degree of deformation of the shape of the moving member changes in proportion to the applied load. The greater the degree of deformation, the greater the degree of deformation of the moving member. For this reason, as the overload is applied to the operation member by the player, the load consumed by the elastic member can be increased, and the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced accordingly.

  In a configuration in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts and each member is attracted by magnetic force, the moving member maintains its shape until a load greater than the attracting force is applied, and the moving member is not applied until a load greater than the attracting force is applied. Is deformed. Thereby, when operating normally with a load equal to or less than the suction force, the moving member can be treated as a rigid body, and the operation of the moving member can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine A1, the moving member is fixed to the operating member by a predetermined amount or more in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and in a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulating member. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being able to constitute at least a non-transmission state in which the operation member is relatively movable with respect to the regulated member by applying a load of.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1, the moving member is operated in a fixed state in which the operation member is fixed to the regulated member and in a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulating member. By applying a load equal to or more than a predetermined amount to the member, at least the non-transmission state in which the operation member is relatively movable with respect to the regulated member can be configured. In the non-transmission state, transmission of the load to the regulating member can be suppressed while ensuring the performance.

  In the gaming machines A1 and A2, a supporting member that supports the moving member is provided, and the operating member and the regulated member that constitute the moving member are coaxially supported by a first shaft provided on the supporting member. The gaming machine A3, wherein the movement of the moving member is a swing about the first axis.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines A1 and A2, the operation member is operated so that a large load is not applied between the regulating member and the regulated member. Damage to the regulating member can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A4, further comprising a first urging member for generating an urging force for moving the moving member in the swing direction, wherein the urging force is applied to the operation member.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the urging force of the first urging member is applied to the operation member side and is not applied to the regulated member side. It is possible to prevent the urging force from being applied. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged by receiving an excessive urging force from the first urging member when the moving member is in the non-transmission state.

  Here, when an excessive urging force is generated, the spring member is arranged in a manner to connect the operation member and the regulated member, and the spring member does not expand and contract in the fixed state, but operates in the non-transmission state. The case where the spring member between the member and the regulated member is expanded and contracted to generate an urging force is exemplified. In this case, if the amount of change in the distance between the operation member and the regulated member increases, an excessive urging force may be generated from the regulated member to the regulating member.

  In the gaming machine A4, the first shaft is disposed in the longitudinal direction in the horizontal direction, and the urging force of the first urging member is generated in a direction in which the operating member is caused to fall forward, and the fixed state is set. The gaming machine A5, wherein the non-transmission state is configured by applying a downward load to the operation member in a state where the movement member is restricted from swinging by the restriction member.

  Here, if the direction of urging of the first urging member is set to the direction in which the moving member rises, when the player overloads the operation member downward, the operation member is separated from the regulated member and regulated. Even if the damage to the members can be prevented, the operating member rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so that the player may not notice that the operating member is overloaded and may repeatedly overload the operating member. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, since the direction of urging of the operating member by the first urging member is directed to the direction in which the operating member is tilted forward, the operating member is moved downward. Can be kept in place. Thus, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player repeatedly applies an overload to the operation member.

  In the gaming machine A4, the first shaft is disposed in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, and the urging force of the first urging member is directed in a direction to raise the operation member, and the movement in the fixed state is performed. The gaming machine A6, wherein the non-transmission state is configured by applying a downward load to the operation member in a state where the member is restricted from swinging by the restriction member.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, since the operation member is oriented in a direction of ascending and a downward load is applied to the operation member, a non-transmission state is configured. Even if a downward load is applied to the moving member and the moving member is in the non-transmission state, when the player releases the load, the operating member moves to the fixed state side by the urging force. Accordingly, the arrangement of the operation members can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

  A gaming machine A7 provided with a braking means for reducing a swing speed of the operation member when the moving member returns from the non-transmission state to the fixed state in the gaming machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, since the swing speed of the operation member when returning from the non-transmission state to the fixed state is reduced, the operation member can quickly return to the fixed state. Thus, transmission of an impact to the regulating member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A7, the braking means is a gear damper provided on the support member and capable of generating viscous resistance, and a gear portion provided on the operation member meshes with the gear damper. Gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the braking means is constituted by a gear damper capable of generating a viscous resistance. Therefore, the greater the swing speed of the operating member, the greater the resistance applied to the operating member. . Therefore, the resistance when the swing speed is low (the return speed of the operation member is low) is suppressed. For example, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state, the player operates the operation member and the operation member swings at high speed. If so, the resistance can be increased.

  Thus, the urging force of the first urging member can be set smaller than in a case where a large resistance corresponding to a high-speed operation of the player is generated irrespective of the swing speed, and the first urging member can be freely designed. The degree can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A8, the gear damper is provided in a manner to generate a viscous resistance to the relative movement between the operation member and the regulated member.

  Here, when the operating member and the regulated member are fixed and swing as a unit, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member does not change, so that the operating member does not receive viscous resistance from the gear damper.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, when the operating member swings in the non-transmission state, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member changes. Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper is given to the operation member.

  Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper can be applied to the operation member only when the player applies a load to the operation member such that the regulated member and the operation member constitute a non-transmission state. Thereby, it is possible to change the operational feeling when the player operates the operation member, and to prompt the player to appropriately use the operation member.

  For example, if the operation resistance when operating the operation member becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult for the player to perform the operation, resulting in stress. When the operating member and the regulated member return to the fixed state, the operating resistance is reduced, and the player can easily operate.

  Therefore, a player who tries to avoid stress will avoid applying an overload to the operation member. Thereby, it can suppress that a moving member is destroyed.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, a driving device for generating a driving force for driving the moving member, and a transmission member for transmitting the driving force to the moving member, the moving member receiving a load, The gaming machine A10, wherein the transmission member is disposed at a position where the load is not transmitted when changing from the fixed state to the non-transmission state.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, even if the moving member receives a load and changes from the fixed state to the non-transmitting state, the load is not transmitted to the transmitting member. In addition, the damage of the transmission member can be suppressed, and the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

  In addition, as the position where the load is not transmitted from the moving member, when the moving member moves in the direction to receive the load, the position on the opposite side of the direction in which the moving member moves or the moving member moves in the direction to receive the load In this case, a position in a direction in which the moving member moves and a position separated from the moving member by a predetermined distance is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A10, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state and a driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operation member and is not transmitted to the regulated member. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A10, even when a driving force is generated from the driving device when the swinging of the moving member is restricted by the restricting member, the driving force generated at that time is the operating member. Is not used for swinging the regulated member, so that the regulating member can be prevented from being damaged.

  In the gaming machines A2 to A11, when the moving member is in the fixed state and the moving member is disposed at the second position as compared to when the moving member is disposed at the first position, the operating member Is configured to protrude outward, and when the moving member is disposed at the second position, the movement of the moving member is regulated by the regulating member, and the operating member and the regulated member are attracted by the electromagnet. The gaming machine A12 wherein the fixed state is configured by being performed.

  Here, when the swing of the operation member is restricted at the first position, the width of the operation member protruding outward is small. Therefore, for example, when selecting a box for packing the gaming machine, the operation member is controlled at the first position. If the box is selected based on the state in which the box is fixed, the size of the box can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power is turned off in a state where the swing of the operation member is restricted at the second position, the operation member cannot be moved from the second position, and the gaming machine cannot be put in the packing box. There was a problem.

  Further, if the line width is determined by the width of the state where the operating member is located at the first position in a factory inspection line or the like, the operating member may be erroneously located at the second position and the swing may be fixed. There is a problem that the operating member may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A11, even if the movement is restricted at the second position at which the moving member projects the operation member, the operation member and the restricted member are not moved. Since it is fixed by the electromagnet, the operation member and the regulated member can be unlocked by turning off the power. Thereby, the operation member can be easily arranged at the first position, and the gaming machine can be easily stored in the packing box, and the inspection on the improved inspection line can be easily performed.

<An example of the technical idea that the eccentric cam can be separated from the lever>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player, a driving device that generates a driving force that moves the moving member, and a driving force that is generated by the driving device. A transmission member that transmits the moving member in one direction, whereby the moving member moves in a direction away from the transmission member by operating the moving member in one direction. Machine B1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player is driven by gear meshing (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-2014). -144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the moving member is manually operated while the moving member is being driven, the load on the gear increases, the durability of the driving device and the transmission member is reduced, and the moving member is driven. There is a problem that a load may be applied to the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the player operates the moving member in one direction, the moving member moves in the direction away from the transmission member, so that a load is applied from the moving member to the drive device and the transmission member. Can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress that the moving member applies a load to the player by the driving. The transmission member is exemplified by an eccentric cam, a solenoid, and the like.

  In the gaming machine B1, the transmitting member is constituted by a member which is eccentrically supported on a first shaft and is rotated about the first shaft.

  Here, when the moving member is operated in one direction, the moving member and the transmitting member are separated from each other. Therefore, when the moving member is operated in the other direction, the moving member and the transmitting member collide. The arm length of the transmitting member often increases as the moving width of the moving member increases. In this case, the transmission member may be damaged by the collision.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B1, the transmission member is formed of an eccentric cam, so that the moving member is driven at a portion where the distance from the first shaft to the outer shape is long. When colliding with the moving member while securing the moving amount, the moving member and the transmitting member collide from the first axis by taking a posture in which a portion having a short distance from the first axis to the outer shape is directed toward the moving member. The arm length of the transmission member in the portion to be formed can be shortened. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the transmission member from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine B2, a first urging member that generates an urging force for moving the moving member in a specific direction is provided, and the specific direction is a direction in which the moving member and the transmission member are brought closer to each other. Gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the moving member is pressed against the transmission member by the urging force of the first urging member. The member can be reciprocated. This makes it easier to attract the player's attention to the moving member.

  In the gaming machine B3, the moving member is pivotally supported by a second shaft that is different from the first shaft and extends in the left-right direction, and the moving member is operated by a player. A gaming machine B4 comprising a member, wherein the transmission member is disposed on the opposite side of the operation member with respect to the second shaft and below the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B3, the transmission member is located below the moving member in a state where the second shaft extends in the left-right direction and the lever can swing forward. Since it is arranged on the side and on the opposite side of the operation member with the second shaft interposed therebetween, it is possible to suppress a load from being applied to the transmission member when the player presses down the operation member. Thereby, the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, an effect member for effecting an effect for a player is provided on the operation member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4, the operation member is provided with the effect member for effecting the effect on the player, so that the player's attention can be focused on the operation member.

  Examples of the effect device for effecting the effect for the player include a light emitting device such as an LED disposed on a base, a vibration device that generates vibration, and the like.

  In the gaming machine B5, the effect member includes at least a vibration device that generates vibration, and a load applied to the operation member by vibrating the vibration device is directed in a direction that causes the moving member to move away from the transmission member. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that:

  Here, when the effect device is provided on the operation member, the weight of the moving member on the operation member side increases, so that a large urging force of the first urging member is required. Therefore, the load applied to the transmission member may be increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the effect member is provided with a vibrating device that generates at least vibration, and the load applied to the operating member by vibrating the vibrating device is reduced by the moving member. Is moved away from the transmission member, so that the load applied to the transmission member from the moving member by the vibration of the vibration device can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B6, the operation member is formed in a spherical shape having a hollow inside, and the vibration device is disposed at a substantially central portion of the operation member, and a vibration portion vibrated by the vibration device is provided outside the operation member. A gaming machine B7 connected to the shell as a rigid body.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B6, the operating member is formed in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, and the vibration device is disposed substantially at the center of the operating member. The size of the vibration device can be ensured while keeping the size small. In addition, since the vibrating unit vibrated by the vibration device is not hidden inside the operation member but is connected as a rigid body to the outer shell of the operation member, vibration is directly applied to the finger of the player operating the operation member. Can tell. Therefore, the effect of producing the vibration device can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the operation member includes a pushing member that enables a pushing operation downward, and a direction axis for pushing the pushing member is the same as the first shaft with the second shaft interposed therebetween. A gaming machine B8 arranged on the opposite side.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the operating member includes a pushing member that allows a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is the second axis. Since it is arranged on the opposite side of the first axis with respect to the axis, when the player pushes the pushing member, the load is applied in the direction in which the moving member is separated from the transmitting member, and the load applied to the transmitting member from the moving member Can be reduced.

  The gaming machine B9, wherein the gaming machine B8 has a pushable state in which the pushing member can be pushed in, and a non-pushable state in which the pushing member is fixed so as not to be displaceable and cannot be pushed.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B8, a pushable state in which the pushing member can be pushed in, and a push-in impossible state in which the pushing member is fixed so as not to be displaced and cannot be pushed, are configured. The effect on the moving member by the operation performed by the player can be switched on the gaming machine side.

  For example, when the player intermittently repeatedly pushes (continuously hits) the pushing member, when the pushing member returns from the pushed state, a load is applied in a direction in which the moving member approaches the transmission member due to the reaction. Therefore, the transmission member may be damaged.

  On the other hand, when the push-in state is disabled, the entire operation member is pushed down in response to the push-in operation of the player, whereby the moving member also moves in a direction away from the transmission member. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the pushing member, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the transmitting member and the moving member collide due to the operating member returning upward by the urging force.

  In addition, as a method of configuring the push-in impossible state, there are a method of locking the push-in member with a hook-shaped claw, and the push-in member is extended to the end position by a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor that reciprocates linearly. A method (continue to apply a load in one direction) is exemplified. According to the method in which the pushing member is extended to the end position by a vibration device such as a voice coil motor, the vibration device causes both the pushing member to vibrate and the pushing member to be unable to be pushed. Can be done.

  In any of the gaming machines B4 to B9, the first axis and the second axis are arranged in parallel, and the rotation direction of the transmission member is such that the side separated from the first axis across the second axis is A gaming machine B10, which is set in a direction facing a moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B4 to B9, the rotation direction of the transmission member is set to a direction facing the moving member on a side farther from the first axis with the second axis interposed therebetween. Therefore, when the transmission member moves facing the moving member, the load applied to the transmission member from the moving member is suppressed (the distance from the second shaft to the contact position between the moving member and the transmission member is long). Therefore, even if the transmission member moves in the direction approaching the moving member, the possibility of the transmission member being damaged can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the transmission member is supported by a first shaft, and a rotating gear to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving device; An eccentric cam abutting on a member, wherein a fixed state in which the rotary gear is fixed to the eccentric cam, and a non-transmission state in which the rotary gear is relatively movable with respect to the eccentric cam. A gaming machine B11 characterized by being made possible.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, in the fixed state, the moving member can be swung by the rotation of the transmission member, and the eccentric cam is moved from the moving member by a threshold value or more. When receiving the load, the load applied to the eccentric cam from the moving member can be released by setting the eccentric cam and the rotary gear in the non-transmission state. This can prevent the eccentric cam from being damaged.

  The case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear can be configured to be in the non-transmission state is, for example, a case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear are attracted and fixed by a magnetic force, or a case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear A case where the members are fitted by friction is exemplified.

<One example of a technical concept in which a lock member that fixes a moving member is operated in synchronization with the moving member>
A moving member that moves between the first position and the second position by a player's operation, a driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving member, and a shaft that is eccentrically supported by the first shaft and A game machine comprising: a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving device to the moving member; and a regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member, wherein the regulating member controls the swing of the moving member. A restrictable standby state and a release state for releasing the restriction of the swing of the moving member can be configured, and the transmission member and the restriction member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. A gaming machine C1 characterized by the following.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player is rocked by an eccentric cam-shaped transmission member driven by a driving device, It receives an urging force to move the moving member in a direction approaching the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, regulates the swinging of the moving member in the course of the swinging of the moving member, and regulates the swinging of the moving member at predetermined timing. There is a gaming machine having a restriction member for releasing (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-244108). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in accordance with the release of the regulation of the swing of the moving member, the short-diameter side of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member is turned to the side that comes into contact with the moving member. Although the transmission member can be prevented from being damaged in the event of a collision with the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, if the regulating member malfunctions for any reason, the posture of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member cannot be changed, and the eccentricity cannot be changed. There is a problem that the cam-shaped transmission member collides with the moving member on the long diameter side, and the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member may be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force to the moving member and the regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. Can be mechanically determined when the transmission member is released. Thereby, the moving member and the transmitting member can be brought into contact with the high strength side (short diameter side) of the transmitting member facing the moving member, so that the durability of the transmitting member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, the regulating member is operated synchronously with the transmission member only in a phase for releasing the regulation of the swing of the moving member, and when the synchronous operation with the transmission member is released, the regulation member is controlled. The gaming machine C2, wherein the member is in the standby state, and the swing of the moving member is regulated by the regulating member by moving the moving member to a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, after the regulating member releases the regulation of the swing of the moving member, the driving force of the driving device can be exclusively used for the swing of the moving member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the moving member caused by the movement of the regulating member when rotating the transmitting member.

  Further, even when the player operates the moving member during the synchronous driving, the swing of the moving member can be regulated by the regulating member by arranging the moving member at the predetermined position. Synchronous drive with the member (cancellation of the swing regulation of the moving member) can be performed.

  In the gaming machine C2, when the regulating member is in the standby state, the swing of the moving member is regulated by moving the regulating member in a manner that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, The moving member is capable of performing a first operation that does not pass through the predetermined position and a second operation that reaches the predetermined position by a movement mode of the transmission member. A game machine C3 comprising: a recessed portion that is recessed and retracted from a swing locus of an outer portion of the moving member when the first operation is performed.

  In a case where the swing direction of the moving member is regulated by moving the regulating member such that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, the regulation of the moving member is performed as a step before the regulation of the swing direction of the moving member. Resistance is applied from the member. On the other hand, if resistance is applied from the regulating member to an operation not intended to restrict the swing direction, such as the first operation, an extra driving force is required for the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, when the moving member performs the first operation, the recessed portion is retracted from the moving member and is recessed. It is possible to prevent the resistance from being applied to the moving member. Thereby, the load applied to the transmission member can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a first urging device that generates an urging force for swinging the moving member in a direction approaching the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released and the moving member is moved by the urging force toward the transmitting member, the cam portion of the transmitting member has A first side surface that is a side surface that is in contact with the moving member is configured to be in contact with a cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member that is supported by the first shaft, and the moving member includes the cylindrical portion. The gaming machine C4, wherein the first side face is retracted from the moving member when it starts contacting the game machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the moving member is moved toward the transmission member by the urging force. In the cam portion of the transmission member, a first side surface which is a side surface of the transmission member which is in contact with the moving member is configured to be in contact with a cylindrical portion which is a part of the transmission member which is supported by the first shaft. Since the first side face is retracted from the moving member when the moving member starts to contact the cylindrical portion, the swing displacement of the moving member can be maximized. Therefore, it is possible to configure a synchronous state in which the swinging displacement of the moving member is maximized immediately after the regulation of the swinging of the moving member by the regulating member is released.

  In the gaming machine C4, an end of the first side surface opposite to the cylindrical portion comes into contact with the moving member and the transmission member from the beginning.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the speed of the swinging operation of the moving member can be improved.

  Here, when the moving member hits the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam, the moment applied to the eccentric cam increases, and the load applied to the driving device in the rotation direction increases. Therefore, when it is not known when the transmission member collides with the moving member, the large-diameter portion is preferably prevented from hitting the moving member in the rotation direction of the transmission member (a circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the moving member and the transmission member are in contact with each other, it is better to swing the moving member at the large outer diameter portion, since the swing speed of the moving member can be increased, thereby increasing the effect. be able to.

  With synchronous driving, the timing at which the moving member collides with the transmission member can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the moving member comes into contact with the transmission member, the first side surface is slightly retracted, and the first side surface can be brought into contact with the moving member at a timing after the collision, thereby improving the speed of the swinging operation of the moving member. Can be done.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a first urging device that generates an urging force for swinging the moving member in a direction approaching the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the transmitting member abuts on the moving member, and the moving member follows the rotation of the transmitting member. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being swung.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machine C6 includes a first urging device that generates an urging force for swinging the moving member in a direction approaching the transmission member. The eccentric cam rotates about the first shaft, and when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the transmission member contacts the moving member, and the movement follows the rotation of the transmission member. Since the member swings, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the timing at which the regulation of the swing of the moving member is released. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the game.

<An example of the technical concept in which the operation unit arranged at the tip of the moving member vibrates>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player, and a vibrating device that is disposed on the moving member and that can generate vibration; And a longitudinal direction of the moving member is inclined with respect to each other.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by operating a player includes a vibration device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-120741). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is difficult to increase the vibration in order to prevent the vibration of the vibrating device from being transmitted to the gaming machine and causing the malfunction such as the gaming machine to shake. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the longitudinal direction of the moving member and the direction of vibration of the vibrating device disposed on the moving member are inclined, so that the vibration generated by the vibrating device is transmitted to the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It can be decomposed into a directional component along the direction and a directional component along the vertical direction of the directional component, and vibration transmitted to the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  Note that examples of the vibration device include a voice coil motor that generates vibration in a linear direction, a vibrator that generates vibration by rotating an eccentric weight, and the like. In the case of a voice coil motor, the direction of vibration means the direction in which the voice coil motor reciprocates, and in the case of a vibrator, the direction of vibration means a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the weight.

  In the gaming machine D1, a driving device for generating a driving force for swinging the moving member, and a transmission member for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving device to the moving member, the vibration device is a linear device A gaming machine D2 comprising a device for generating vibration, wherein the transmission member is disposed on a side opposite to a direction in which the moving member is moved by the vibration of the vibration device.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the reaction generated when the vibration device operates is directed in the direction of moving the moving member away from the transmission member, so that the moving member is transmitted by the vibration of the vibration device. It can swing in the direction away from the member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the transmission member from receiving a load due to the vibration of the vibration device.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is configured to generate a vibration in a linear direction, and the vibration device is supported by a second shaft provided on the moving member, and the vibration of the vibration device is controlled. A gaming machine D3, wherein a central axis is arranged so as to pass through the second axis, and a buffer member for absorbing vibration is provided on the second axis.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is supported by the second shaft provided on the moving member, and the vibration device is configured of a device that generates linear vibration. Since the central axis of the vibration of the vibration device passes through the second axis and the buffer member is provided on the second axis, the shock of the vibration can be reduced by the buffer member. Thereby, the vibration transmitted to the moving member can be suppressed, and the vibration transmitted to the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D3, the moving member includes a pushing member that is pushed by a player, and the pushing resistance of the pushing member increases the rotational resistance of the second shaft. Machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, the moving member includes a pushing member that is pushed by the player, and the pushing resistance of the pushing member increases the rotational resistance of the second shaft. With this configuration, especially when the player performs the pushing operation of the pushing member, the rotational operation of the vibration device can be suppressed, and a large vibration component can be secured. Thereby, the state in which the vibration device is easily rotated about the second axis and the state in which the vibration device secures a large vibration component can be switched by the operation of the player.

  The gaming machine D5, wherein the vibration device is rigidly connected to the pushing member.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4, the vibration device is connected as a rigid member to the pushing member, so that the player can experience the vibration of the vibration device through the pushing member. Therefore, when the pushing member is not pushed, the vibrating device swings around the vibration and the second axis to attract the player's attention to the vibrating device. On the other hand, when the pushing member is pushed, the vibration device swings. , The linear vibration felt by the player can be increased. Therefore, the behavior of the vibration device can be changed according to the situation (whether or not the player has pushed the pushing member).

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is pivotally supported by a second shaft provided on the moving member, and the vibration device is arranged such that a center axis of vibration of the vibration device passes through a position separated from the second shaft. A gaming machine D6.

  When the connection between the moving member and the vibration device is pivotally supported, the vibration transmitted to the player can be increased by matching the center axis of the vibration of the vibration device with the pivotal support position. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is transmitted to the gaming machine. Therefore, there is a problem that the loosening of the fastening screws and the deterioration of the members occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is caused to rotate by shifting the rotation axis of the vibration device and the center axis of the vibration of the vibration device. The vibration of the device can be used, and the vibration transmitted to the gaming machine can be reduced (the energy of the vibration is used for rotating the vibration device). In addition, the effect of the effect can be improved by swinging the vibration device by the vibration of the vibration device.

  The gaming machine D6, further comprising a detecting device for detecting vibration of the vibrating device, wherein the vibrating device is disposed on an operation member held by a player.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, since the vibration device is disposed on the operation member held by the player and the detection device for detecting the vibration of the vibration device is provided, the vibration device vibrates. By grasping the operation member during the operation, the vibration can be suppressed, and the signal detected by the vibration device can be changed. Thus, it is possible to detect whether the player is holding the operation member (whether the player is in a preparation stage for operating the moving member).

<An example of the technical idea to assist the input timing of the moving member that performs the stir>
A gaming machine E1 comprising an input device operated by a player, the input device being driven in a direction approaching and moving away from the player, and having an input section for performing an input operation.

  There is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine in which a timing at which an input device is operated is designated (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem in that the user cannot pay attention to the game, for example, he / she pays attention to the timing of operating the input device and neglected the adjustment of the ball playing strength.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the input unit of the input device is driven in the direction approaching or moving away from the player, so that the input unit moves in the direction approaching the player and the finger of the player. When the player touches the input section, the input section is operated in such a manner that the input section is pushed back, so that the timing of the operation of the input section can be set on the gaming machine side.

  Note that examples of the input operation include an operation of pressing a push button and an operation of pulling a moving member.

  In the gaming machine E1, the input device includes a vibration device that vibrates in a linear direction, and the vibration device is arranged so that a vibration direction of the vibration device coincides with a direction in which the input unit is operated. The gaming machine E2, wherein the input unit is inoperable when pressed against the unit, and the input unit is operable when the vibration device is retracted from the input unit.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the input unit is disabled when the vibration device is pressed against the input unit, and the input is disabled when the vibration device is retracted from the input unit. Since the unit is operable, the vibrating device can have both the effect of oscillating the input device and the effect of timing the operation of the input unit.

  In the gaming machine E2, when the player operates the input unit, the elasticity coefficient of the first urging device that exerts a reaction force on the player side is equal to the vibration when the transmission device transmits vibration to the input unit. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the gaming machine E3 has a smaller elastic coefficient than a second urging device that applies a reaction force to the device.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the elastic coefficient of the first urging device is made smaller than the elastic coefficient of the second urging device, so that the vibration device is separated from the input device. The operation of the input unit can be performed with a small force, while ensuring a high speed for returning to the position where the input is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the easiness of operating the input unit while securing the magnitude of the vibration passively felt by the player.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the input device is a member having a size that can be gripped by a player, and the input unit can be arranged at a palm position when the player grips the input device. A gaming machine E4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the input device including the input unit is formed as a member having a size that can be gripped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, Since the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm, the operability of the input unit can be improved. That is, by further grasping the input device while holding it, the palm can be pressed against the input unit, and another operation such as switching the input device can be eliminated.

  In addition, since the input unit can be hidden by the palm, it is possible to make only the player holding the input unit understand the operation of the input unit vibrating. As a result, a big hit or the like can be notified in a manner not noticed by other players.

  The gaming machine E4, further comprising a locking portion for locking a finger on a side of the input device opposite to the input portion.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, when the input device is gripped, the vibration on the input unit side is received by the palm, and the finger is hooked on the locking unit, so that the vibration by the vibration device is reduced. Can be trapped inside the palm. This makes it possible to ensure a large vibration felt by the player.

<Example of technical concept in which the spherical portion turns to the player side at the lower end of movement>
An operation member having an operation unit operated by a player and configured to be movable; and a connection member configured to connect the operation member and the game machine main body and configured to be movable. When the posture of the operation member viewed from a player operating the operation unit can form a first state and a second state different from the first state, the amount of change in the posture is reduced. A gaming machine F1 comprising correction means for changing a posture of an operation member in a direction.

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including an operation member having an operation unit such as a push button, in which the attitude of an operation member with respect to a player changes between a first state and a second state as the operation member moves (for example, See JP-A-2014-144218). In such a gaming machine, for example, if the player is in a posture that is easy for the player to operate in the first state, the operation may be difficult in the second state, and the operation feeling of the operation member may be reduced between the first state and the second state. The change causes a problem that the player feels stress and may be dissatisfied with the player.

  For example, when the operation member is arranged at a distance in front of the player and the operation portion requests a pressing operation, even if the operation portion can be easily operated, the operation member is extended in the left-right direction. If the operation unit changes to a mode that requires a pushing operation from the front side by moving in an arc trajectory centered at the center, the space for arranging the arm for pushing the operation unit becomes narrower, It becomes difficult for the player to operate the operation unit, and in the worst case, the player may abandon operating the operation unit.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the posture of the operation member viewed from the player operating the operation member by moving the connection member can form the first state and the second state different from the first state. In such a case, the correction means for changing the attitude of the operation member in a direction to reduce the change amount is provided, so that the player's operation feeling on the operation member can be hardly changed. Therefore, by configuring the first state so that the player can easily play the game, it is possible to maintain the state that is easy for the player to operate even in the second state.

  In addition, as a correction | amendment means, it is comprised from the wall member and the contact member arrange | positioned at the operation member in the aspect which can contact the wall member, and it arises when a contact member contacts a wall member. A device that changes the attitude of the operating member by a reaction force, a device that is configured with a gear group that meshes with gear teeth provided on the operating member, and that applies a rotational load to the gear teeth by moving the connecting member. Is exemplified.

  In addition, examples of the mode of movement of the connection member include rotation about a predetermined rotation axis, slide movement in a linear direction, and the like.

  In the gaming machine F1, a driving device for driving the connection member is provided, and in a movement range of the connection member, a change state in which the operation member changes its posture, and the operation member does not change its posture, and the operation member and the connection member are not changed. A gaming machine F2, wherein a maintenance state in which the posture is maintained is formed, and a load generated on the operation member from the correction means in the change state is oriented in a direction of braking the connection member.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the operating member does not always change its attitude with respect to the connecting member, so that the connecting member is driven compared to the case where the connecting member constantly changes its attitude. It is possible to suppress the driving force required to cause the connection member to be braked by the load generated on the operation member from the correcting means in the change state, and the driving device is required to brake the connection member. The correction means assists the force that needs to be generated, and the load applied to the drive device can be suppressed.

  For example, when the connecting member and the operating member move in the vertical direction and constitute a change state when the connecting member and the operating member are arranged at the lower end of the moving range, the changing member is provided to the operating member at the lower end of the moving range. It is possible to reduce the moving speed of the connecting member and the operating member by the load, and to suppress the increase in the moving resistance of the connecting member and the operating member when the connecting member and the operating member rise to near the upper end of the moving range. In addition, the driving force required for driving the connecting member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F2, it is provided with an abutted member that is brought into contact with the correcting means, and when the operating member moves, the posture of the operating member changes when the correcting means comes into contact with the abutted member. A gaming machine F3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F2, the operating member changes its posture when the correcting means comes into contact with the abutted member, so that the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member. The structure of the connecting member can be simplified as compared with the case where the member is arranged on the connecting member, and the posture of the operating member is adjusted until the correcting means reaches the position where the contacted member is arranged. , The timing at which the player operates the operation unit can be indicated.

  In the gaming machine F2 or F3, when the operating member is in the change state, the operating member is provided with a load in a predetermined direction opposite to the direction of the load generated from the correcting means, thereby causing the operating member to A gaming machine F4, wherein the correcting means is configured to be capable of changing its posture in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2 or F3, when the posture is changed in the changing state, the direction of the displacement and the direction of the force are opposite to each other because the direction of the posture change is opposite to the direction of the posture change. Even if a load is applied to the operation member in a predetermined direction in which the load may be excessive, the correction unit is configured to be able to change the attitude of the operation member in the predetermined direction, thereby preventing the correction unit from being destroyed. can do.

  In the gaming machine F4, the modifying means includes an elastic member having a spring elasticity between the operating member and the operating member, and the modifying means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, the correction means is deformed by the elasticity of the elastic member provided in the correction means between the game machine F4 and the resilient force proportional to the change in the attitude of the operation member. Can be generated, and when a load in a predetermined direction is applied to the operation member, the movement amount of the operation member is increased by increasing the force applied to the operation member from the correction unit as the movement amount of the operation member increases. Can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, there is provided a contact member with which the correcting means comes into contact, and the connection member is a lever member pivotally supported by the game machine main body, wherein the correcting means comprises A gaming machine F6, wherein a direction of a reaction force received when the member comes into contact with the member has a direction component having a direction component perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member at that time.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the correcting means abuts on the member to be contacted in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member. Since the load applied to the member acts in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member and the lever member receives a load in the axial direction, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the lever member in the moving direction (circumferential direction). (The load applied to the operating member by the correcting means can be suppressed from acting on the moving direction of the lever member.) Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the lever member when the operation member is brought into contact with the contacted member and changes its posture, and the operability can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F6, the abutting member protrudes so as to be able to abut on the lever member when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied from the correcting means.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F6, when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the abutted member through the correcting means by the operation of the player, the abutted member is moved to the lever member. The lever member can be braked by extending to the contact position to suppress the moving speed of the lever member. On the other hand, when the load applied from the correcting means to the operation member is less than a predetermined amount, the lever member is moved. The movement resistance can be suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both prevention of breakage of the lever member and lightening of the operation of the lever member.

<An example of the technical idea of switching whether or not the spherical portion turns at the lower end of the movement>
An operation member having an operation section operated by a player, a connection member for connecting the operation member to the game machine main body in a manner movable in a predetermined width, and a driving device for driving at least the connection member; In a gaming machine in which the operation member can be changed between a first posture and a second posture different from the first posture in a state where the members are arranged at predetermined positions, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operation member. A first operating state in which the operating member is maintained in the first posture in a state in which the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, and a state in which the connecting member is arranged in a predetermined position. A driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operation member via a transmission member, and the operation member is configured to be switchable between a second operation state where the operation member is changed from the first posture to the second posture. 1st operation When in a second operating state, the gaming machine movement width of the operating member, characterized in that it is unchanged G1.

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that includes an operation member and a connection member and that drives the operation member relative to the connection member by a driving device that drives the connection member is known (for example, see JP-A-2014-144218). In such a gaming machine, even if there is a scene where operability is emphasized and a scene where emphasis is placed on the effect, there is only one kind of movement of the operation member with respect to the operation of the connection member. It was necessary to select one of the performance effects and to sacrifice the other, leaving room for improvement.

  For example, when a push button operated by a player is provided on the operation member, it is easier for the player to press the push button when the posture of the push button viewed from the player is constant, while the operation member Since the movement of the operation member itself is small, it is difficult to perform a large effect using the movement of the operation member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the first operation state in which the operation member is maintained in the first posture in the state where the connection member is arranged at the predetermined position, and in the state where the connection member is arranged at the predetermined position. Since the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member via the transmitting member and the operating member is changed from the first position to the second position, the second operating state can be switched with the moving width of the operating member unchanged. Thus, both operability and effect can be achieved.

  For example, when a push button is provided on the operation member, when the player is requested to operate the push button, the posture of the operation member is changed to the second posture, and the push button is pressed in a direction that is easy for the player to operate. On the other hand, at the time of an effect that does not require the player to perform an operation, by keeping the posture of the operation member in the first posture, the operability can be switched to an effect that is ignored, and the operation member can be largely operated. . Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement of the operability and improvement of the effect.

  In addition, since the movement width of the operation member is not changed between the first operation state and the second operation state, until the posture of the operation member changes at a predetermined position, the player can select either operation state of the operation member. Since it is difficult to grasp whether the player is playing, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, the operation member is set to the first operation state until the player operates the operation section, the operation member is continuously reciprocated by a predetermined width, and the operation member is switched to the second operation state at a predetermined timing to change the posture of the operation member. The player can be informed of the timing of pressing the operation unit, and the operating member itself is also in a posture that is easy to press, so that the game is easy to understand (the timing for pressing the push button is easy to understand) and comfortable (push button). To make it easier to press).

  In the gaming machine G1, an eccentric cam member for transmitting a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the eccentric cam member is configured to be able to transmit a driving force from the driving device to the connection member. A gaming machine G2 configured to transmit driving force of a driving device to one of the transmission member and the connection member, and provided with a switching unit capable of switching between the transmission member and the connection member.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G1, the driving force of the driving device is switchably transmitted to either the operating member or the connecting member through the eccentric cam member. , The driving force generated from the driving device can be suppressed as compared with the case where the driving is simultaneously performed.

  In addition, as a mode of switching between transmitting the driving force of the driving device to the connection member or transmitting the driving force to the operation member, a gear group connected by meshing from the driving device to the operation member and the connection member is provided, and depending on the situation, A mode in which the gears meshing with each other can be switched or an eccentric cam member is configured to be able to abut on either the connection member or the transmission member during rotation, and the distance between the connection member and the operation member is eccentric cam. For example, a mode in which the width is larger than the width of the member is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine G2, when the eccentric cam member abuts on the transmission member in a state where the eccentric cam member is rotated forward, a driving force is transmitted to the operation member via the transmission member, and the eccentric cam member is rotated in the reverse direction. The gaming machine G3, wherein, when the transmission member abuts on the transmission member, the driving force is not transmitted to the operation member.

  Here, for example, in the case where the driving force is transmitted to the operation member when the eccentric cam member and the connection member are separated from each other, vibration during operation or operation of the operation member by the player may be performed. For example, it is necessary to detect that the connecting member is unintentionally separated from the eccentric cam member and stop the driving device in order to prevent the driving force from being erroneously transmitted to the operating member. Must be added, and the control of the driving device becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, it is possible to switch whether or not the driving force is transmitted to the operation member depending on the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member. Even if the cam member is separated during the operation, as long as the eccentric cam member is kept rotating in a certain direction, the transmission target of the driving force is not switched, so that the driving force may be erroneously transmitted to the operating member. Does not occur, and the control of the driving device can be moderated (it is not necessary to stop the driving device immediately).

  Further, since a detection sensor for detecting that the connecting member and the eccentric cam member are separated from each other can be unnecessary, product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G3, the eccentric cam member includes a first protrusion provided on the outer diameter portion along the rotation axis, and the transmission member is configured to be able to contact the first protrusion. The eccentric cam member is provided with a second projecting portion that is projected, and the second projecting portion has a region in which the eccentric cam member is moved close to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member is rotated. The gaming machine G4, wherein the second convex portion is configured to be closer to the rotation shaft of the eccentric cam member than the first convex portion.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine G3, the second convex portion has a region in which the eccentric cam member is moved close to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member is rotated. In this configuration, the second protruding portion can be disposed closer to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member than the first protruding portion, so that the position of the second protruding portion can be returned to the first protruding portion and the eccentric cam member. The rotation can be performed by passing the second protrusion between the rotation shaft and the rotation shaft.

  Therefore, as compared with the case where the second projecting portion moves to the outside of the trajectory of the outer diameter portion of the first projecting portion of the eccentric cam member and then returns the posture of the transmission member, the first projecting portion becomes the first projecting portion. (2) The rotation angle of the transmission member from when it comes into contact with the protruding portion to when it is separated can be suppressed, and the angle range in which the load applied to the eccentric cam member increases can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine G4, the first convex portion is configured as a wall portion inclined with respect to a predetermined straight line connecting an outermost diameter portion of the first convex portion and a rotation axis of the eccentric cam member. In a state where the eccentric cam member is rotated by rotation, the pushing wall surface which is in contact with the second convex portion is configured to be inclined in such a manner as to be closer to the predetermined straight line in the axial radial direction. Gaming machine G5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G4, when the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member in which the driving force is transmitted to the operating member via the transmission member is the forward rotation, the transmission member is brought into contact with the transmission member. Since the pushing wall surface in contact with the predetermined straight line is configured to be inclined in such a manner as to be more distant in the axial direction with respect to the predetermined straight line, the eccentric cam member has The amount of movement of the transmission member when rotated by a predetermined angle can be reduced. Therefore, the transmission efficiency of the driving force transmitted through the transmission member per predetermined time can be reduced, and a large load is quickly applied to the eccentric cam member via the transmission member by operating the operation member. Load can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, a lock member for fixing the posture of the connection member at a predetermined position is provided, and the release of the fixation of the posture of the connection member by the lock member reverses the rotation of the eccentric cam member. In the gaming machine G6, the fixing of the posture of the connection member by the lock member is maintained when the eccentric cam member rotates forward while the eccentric cam member rotates forward.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the release of the fixing of the connecting member by the lock member occurs only when the eccentric cam member rotates in the reverse direction. By rotating the eccentric cam member in one direction (the direction of normal rotation) in the state where it is disposed, the driving force can be easily transmitted to the operation member via the transmission member while maintaining the posture of the connection member. . Therefore, the maintenance of the posture of the connecting member by the lock member and the change in the posture of the operation member can be achieved without finely controlling the phase of the eccentric cam member, so that the control of the driving device can be moderated. it can.

<An example of the technical idea in which the suppressing member is pressed by the reaction force of the elastic force that pushes out the second moving member>
A first movable member configured to be movable, and a first movable member disposed at least partially protruding outside the first movable member and movable relative to the first movable member. A second moving member, an elastic member disposed inward of the first moving member in the moving direction of the second moving member, one end of which is connected to the second moving member and has spring elasticity; A suppressing member that is disposed at the other end of the elastic member and suppresses the second moving member from being separated from the first moving member by being pressed against the first moving member by the elastic force of the elastic member; A gaming machine H1 comprising: a portion that protrudes from the first moving member of the second moving member, whereby a force for pressing the suppressing member against the first moving member increases.

  BACKGROUND ART A gaming machine including a first moving member and a second moving member that extends outside the first moving member and is movable with respect to the first moving member is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). In such a gaming machine, when the first moving member is moved, the second moving member may be damaged by colliding with another member and may need to be replaced. However, if the holding force is insufficient, the second moving member may come off from the first moving member depending on the magnitude of the load generated upon collision with another member.

  In other words, fixing the member holding the second moving member to the first moving member to the first moving member by fastening with a screw can increase the fixing force as compared with the case of fixing by fitting. On the other hand, when assembling, it takes time to screw in the screws, and when removing it for maintenance or the like, it takes time to remove the screws, which increases the working time.

  That is, the second moving member is firmly fixed to the first moving member, and the time required for assembling the second moving member to the first moving member and for removing the second moving member from the first moving member is reduced. There was a problem that it was difficult to achieve both.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine H1, since the portion protruding from the first moving member operates in the direction opposing the elastic force of the elastic member, the force with which the suppressing member is pressed against the first moving member increases. When a large load is applied to the first moving member due to the second moving member coming into contact with another member, the suppressing member can be more firmly fixed to the first moving member. Therefore, while the second moving member is held by the first moving member by the elastic force, the replacement time is shortened, and the second moving member is also moved by the first moving member when the second moving member comes into contact with another member. Detachment from the member can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine H1, a hook member is provided for holding the restraining member on the first moving member so as to be immovable in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member. A gaming machine H2, wherein the gaming machine H2 is disposed at a part of a position movable in a direction pressed against the first moving member.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the hook member is disposed at a part of the position where the suppressing member can move in the direction in which the suppressing member is pressed against the first moving member. Before attaching to the moving member, the space where the hook member is attached becomes an empty space, so that it is easy to arrange the suppressing member, and after the hook member is attached, the suppressing member moves from the first moving member to the elastic member. Separation in the direction perpendicular to the elastic force can be suppressed.

  Further, since the hook member is disposed at a part of the movable position of the restraining member in the direction pressed against the first moving member, a force for holding the hook member on the first moving member is generated by deformation of the elastic member. Therefore, the hook member can be easily removed from the first moving member by deforming the elastic member in the opposite direction, and accordingly, the second moving member can be easily removed from the first moving member.

  In the gaming machine H2, the elastic member and the suppressing member are disposed inside the first moving member, and the hook member is attached from the outside to the inside of the first moving member. Machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally removing the elastic member and the suppressing member, and the hook member can be attached from the outside of the first moving member. The hook member can be attached to the first moving member without disassembling the first moving member in the case where the first moving member is detached or forgotten to assemble, and the maintenance time can be reduced.

  Further, since the hook member is attached from the outside, when the hook member comes off from the first moving member, it can be configured to drop the hook member out of the first moving member. The necessity of maintenance can be determined without any problem. That is, the necessity of maintenance can be determined without disassembling the first moving member and looking inside.

  Further, in the case where the hook member is attached from the inside of the first moving member, the elastic member may be excessively contracted by a dimension of a locking projection for locking the hook member so that the hook member cannot be pulled out from the first moving member. However, when the hook member is attached from the outside of the first moving member, the locking projection can be arranged outside the first moving member, and the amount of contraction of the elastic member when assembling the hook member can be reduced. Can be suppressed. Thereby, while maintaining the elastic force of the elastic member large and maintaining the strength of holding the second moving member and the suppressing member to the first moving member large (while using a hard elastic member), it is possible to attach the hook member. Can be easy.

  The gaming machine H4, wherein in the gaming machine H3, the hook member is detachable from the first moving member by displacing the restraining member in a direction opposite to a direction pressed by the elastic force.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H3, the hook member is displaced in the direction opposite to the direction in which the suppressing member disposed inside the first moving member is pressed by the elastic force, whereby the first hook member is moved. Since the player can be removed from the moving member, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the hook member from the first moving member during the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hook member from being illegally removed.

  In any one of the gaming machines H2 to H4, when the restraining member enters the position where the hook member is disposed, the elastic force applied to the second moving member is reduced. H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the space in which the hook member is disposed is broken due to the breakage of the hook member, and the second member is inserted into the space by the restraining member. Since the elastic force applied to the moving member is reduced, it is possible to improve the buffering effect on the load applied to the second moving member after the space in which the hook member is broken or the like is vacated. In addition, it is possible to prevent the second moving member from being damaged.

  As the configuration of the hook member, for example, a configuration that can be reassembled after the hook member is broken is exemplified. In this case, a part of the hook member is exposed to the outside of the first moving member during the break, so that it is easy to visually confirm that the hook member is broken.

  In any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the second moving member may be in a withdrawn state in which the second moving member can be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member, and in a locked state in which the second moving member cannot be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member. A gaming machine H6 characterized by being able to form a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the second moving member can be formed in the withdrawn state and the locked state, so that the maintenance performance can be improved. Depending on the case, it is possible to switch the state in which the performance of fraud prevention can be improved by not being able to easily remove the second moving member.

  In the gaming machine H6, the withdrawn state can be formed when the restraining member enters the space where the hook member is disposed in a state where the restraining member is held by the hook member. Gaming machine H7.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H6, the pulled-out state can be formed by injecting the restraining member into an empty space in a state where the hook member is removed from a regular position in the assembled state. In a state where the member is arranged at a regular position, it is necessary to disassemble the first moving member in order to remove the second moving member, and it is possible to suppress an unauthorized removal of the second moving member.

  In addition, when a large load is applied to the hook member and the hook member deviates from a proper position, the hook member can be pulled out, and the second moving member can be easily replaced, thereby improving the maintenance performance. Can be done.

<An example of the technical concept of changing the rotational resistance of the spherical portion to the connecting member>
An operation member configured to be operable by a player, and a connection member that movably supports the operation member, and a movement resistance when the operation member is moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member. A gaming machine I1 comprising variable means for varying.

  BACKGROUND ART A gaming machine including a connection member and an operation member configured to be movable with respect to the connection member is known (see JP-A-2014-144218). In such a gaming machine, when the operation member is operated in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member, the operation feeling (for example, the weight felt by the player) does not change, and the player gets tired of operating the operation member. There was a problem.

  For example, even if the operation member is rotatably supported by the connection member, and the rotation resistance is changed between the case where the operation member is rotated forward and the case where the operation member is rotated in the reverse direction, the player cannot change the operation member. Since the relationship between the operation direction and the rotation resistance is always constant, the player is less aware (discovered) by the operation of rotating the operation member, and the player gets tired of operating the operation member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since there is provided a variable means for varying the movement resistance when the operation member is moved in the predetermined direction with respect to the connection member, the operation when the operation member is operated in the same direction is performed. The operation feeling of the members can be changed, and the interest of the player operating the operation members can be improved.

  When the connecting member is configured to be movable, the variable member may be adjusted by the position of the connecting member, may be adjusted by the displacement of the operating member, or may be other than the operating member and the connecting member. (For example, a member for driving the connection member).

  For example, according to the aspect in which the adjustment is performed using members other than the operation member and the connection member, the state (the state of the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member) can be understood only by touching the operation member. Of attention to the operation member can be increased.

  Further, when the connection member is configured to be movable with respect to the game machine body, by making the strength of the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member as a boundary with the movement resistance of the connection member with respect to the game machine body, In some cases, while asking the player to operate only the operation member, the operation member is more easily moved relative to the connection member than when the connection member is moved relative to the game machine main body, and the operation member is changed relative to the connection member. Can be switched to a state in which the connecting member can be easily moved with respect to the gaming machine main body rather than moving (the difference from hardening the push button).

  The gaming machine I2, wherein in the gaming machine I1, the connection member is configured to be movable, and adjustment of movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing the arrangement of the connection member.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine I1, the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member is adjusted by changing the arrangement of the connecting member, so that the speed at which the connecting member or the operating member is operated is adjusted. Regardless of this, the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member can be changed.

  The movement resistance may be adjusted by changing the arrangement of the connection member. The movement resistance may be changed according to the movement amount of the connection member, or the movement resistance may be adjusted when the connection member is arranged at a predetermined position. Is switched.

  The gaming machine I2, further comprising: an urging member that generates an elastic force for urging the operation member in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member; and a wall member that is disposed so as to be in contact with the operation member. In a state where the connection member is disposed at the predetermined position, the operation member is subjected to a load in the first direction, which is a direction opposite to the urging direction by the urging member, from the wall member, and A gaming machine I3 characterized in that the operating member is configured to be moved.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine I2, the operation member abuts on the wall member by disposing the connection member at the predetermined position, and the operation member is moved in the first direction. The elastic force generated by the urging member that urges the operation member that is stationary with respect to the second member is improved as compared with the case where the connecting member is arranged at a position other than the predetermined position. Therefore, the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member can be increased in a state where the connection member is disposed at the predetermined position.

  The gaming machine I4, further comprising a friction member that extends along the moving direction of the operation member when the connection member is arranged at a predetermined position and rubs the operation member.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, the operating member moves while rubbing with the friction member in a state where the connection member is arranged at the predetermined position, and thus the operating member moves according to the area rubbed from the beginning of rotation. The applied dynamic friction can be applied to the operation member, and the movement resistance can be sufficiently changed.

  In addition, as an arrangement position of the friction member, there is exemplified a form disposed on the connection member and a form disposed on the main body case supporting the connection member.

  The gaming machine I4 includes a main body case that supports the connection member inside the box, and a cover member that is provided outside the main body case, wherein the friction member extends from the cover member to the connection member side. A gaming machine I5 characterized by being configured as a part to be provided.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine I4, it is possible to easily replace the friction member when the friction member is worn, as compared with the case where the friction member is provided on the connection member. .

  In the gaming machine I5, the friction member includes a low friction portion that gives a predetermined dynamic friction to the operation member in a rubbed state, and a high friction portion that gives a large dynamic friction as compared with the low friction portion. A gaming machine I6, which is divided and arranged along the moving direction of the operation member.

  According to the gaming machine I6, the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member can be changed between the case where the operation member mainly receives the dynamic friction from the low friction portion and the case where the operation member mainly receives the dynamic friction from the high friction portion. Therefore, the operational feeling can be switched between two stages.

  In the gaming machine I1, the operation member includes a weight member constituting a position of a center of gravity, and the adjustment of the movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing the distance of the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member. A gaming machine I7 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the adjustment of the movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing the distance from the rotation axis of the operating member to the weight member, so that the operation member is moved. The load applied to the operation member can be reduced as compared with the case where the movement resistance of the operation member is increased by applying the load in the direction opposite to the direction.

  In addition, when viewed from the rotation axis of the operating member, it is possible to improve the rotational resistance in the rotating direction of lifting the weight member, so by moving the weight member, the arrangement of the weight member with respect to the rotation axis is reversed. In addition, the direction in which the rotation resistance becomes heavy can be reversed. Therefore, the operational feeling given to the player can be changed.

  In addition, as an aspect in which the weight member is moved from the rotation axis of the operation member, the inclination of the bottom surface on which the weight member is placed changes due to a change in the posture of the operation member, and the vertical relationship between both ends of the bottom surface is reversed. An example is shown in which the weight member moves on the bottom surface by gravity.

  In the gaming machine I1, a driving device that generates a driving force, a transmission device configured to transmit the driving force of the driving device to the connection member, and a resistance change member that adjusts a movement resistance of the operation member by displacement The gaming machine I8, wherein the resistance change member is displaced by a driving force of the driving device.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the movement resistance of the operation member is adjusted by displacing the resistance changing member by the driving force of the driving device for driving the connection member, so that additional driving is performed. The movement resistance of the operation member can be adjusted without changing the appearance of the operation member and the connection member without using any device.

  Therefore, the state of the movement resistance of the operation member can be confirmed only by touching the operation member, and the value for the player of touching the operation member can be increased. Further, when the movement resistance of the operating member is changed in response to the advantageous state, it is possible to notify that the state has become advantageous to the player in a form that can be understood only by the player performing the operation. .

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the gaming machines are slot machines. A gaming machine J1 characterized by the above-mentioned. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J2, which is characterized in that: Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J3 characterized by being integrated with a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
310, 13310, 14310, 15310, 16310, 20310 Swing operation member (part of operation member, part of input device, first moving member)
311a Insertion hole (locking part)
313d second sensor member (detection device)
317, 13317 Lens member (part of input device, input section, push-in member, operation section)
330, 3330, 5330, 8330, 10330, 13330 Inner case member (part of support member, main body case)
331d1 Lever support shaft (first shaft, second shaft)
331d2 Eccentric cam shaft (first shaft)
333, 2333, 4333, 6333, 14333 Eccentric cam member (transmission member, eccentric cam member)
333b cylindrical part (cylindrical part)
335 first drive unit (drive unit)
336, 4336, 5336, 8336, 14336 Lock member (restriction member, lock member)
338 Gear damper (braking means)
340, 2340, 3340, 4340, 7340, 9340, 13340, 18340, 19340 Lever member (part of moving member, connection member)
350, 4350, 7350, peeling member (part of regulated member)
363 shaft support rod (second shaft)
364 Buffer member 366 Vibration device (part of production member, vibration device)
366b Pressing member (vibrating part)
2333a Body member (rotating gear)
2333b Cam member (eccentric cam)
5336a1 Curved wall section (recessed section)
13312, 15312, 20312 Posture correction device (part of correction means and variable means)
13312a Contact member (second moving member)
13312b Supporting member 13312c Hook member (locking member)
13322 Right front cover (cover member)
13322b, 17322b Wall member (contacted member)
14333c2 Projecting portion (first projecting portion)
14337 Posture switching device (switching means)
14337a Body member (part of transmission member, part of switching means)
14337b Extension (part of transmission member)
14337b1 Projecting portion (second projecting portion)
16315 Separation prevention cover (part of variable means)
16315e Iron ball (weight member)
17322b1 Extension part (part of variable means, friction member)
17362c Friction arm (part of variable means)
18347 Transmission device (part of variable means, part of resistance change member)
CS1 Vibration coil spring (second biasing device)
CS2 Push-in coil spring (first biasing device)
M41 Electromagnet member (electromagnet)
RB rubber band (part of variable means, part of resistance change member)
SP1, SP21, SP31, SP41, SP101 Torsion spring (first biasing member, biasing member)
SP13 Coil spring (elastic member, part of variable means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the player is moving member to move between a first position and a second position by operation, there is a gaming machine provided with a vibration device (patent document 1).

JP 2001-20741 A

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the transmission of vibration of the vibration device .

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the vibration transmission of a vibration device .

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a moving member that rotates between a first position and a second position when operated by a player, and a vibration member that is provided on the moving member to reduce vibration. A vibrating device that can be generated , wherein a direction of vibration of the vibrating device and a moving direction of the vibrating device due to a rotational movement of the moving member are mutually inclined .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the vibration transmission of the vibration device can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine along the line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6 (a). 7A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. It is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member of a lever member, an upper cover member, a lower cover member, and a swing member. It is a front exploded perspective view of a swing operation member. 14A is a front view of the eccentric cam member, FIG. 14B is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member, and FIG. 14C is a cross-sectional view of the eccentric cam member along line XIVc-XIVc in FIG. It is. 15A is a front view of the phase detection member, FIG. 15B is a bottom view of the phase detection member, and FIG. 15C is a cross-sectional view of the phase detection member taken along line XVc-XVc in FIG. It is. (A) is a front view of the lever member, (b) is a side view of the lever member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a), and (c) is an arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a). FIG. 5 is a top view of the lever member as viewed in a direction. 17A is a front view of the operation device, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. FIG. 17A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 17B is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. 17C is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc in FIG. FIG. 19 is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the swing operation member in the XX-XX line of FIG.17 (b). FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 17A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc in FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in 2nd Embodiment in XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). 30A is a front view of the cam member of the eccentric cam member, FIG. 30B is a side view of the cam member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXb in FIG. 30A, and FIG. It is a front view of a main-body member, (d) is a side view of the main-body member in the arrow XXXd direction of FIG.30 (c). (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the eccentric cam member as viewed in the XXXIB direction of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a front view of the eccentric cam member. . (A) is a front view of the unlocking cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member as viewed in the XXXIIb direction of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is FIG. 32 (a). FIG. 13 is a side view of the unlocking cam member when viewed in the XXXIIc direction. (A) is a front view of a lock member, (b) is a side view of the lock member as viewed in the XXXIIIb direction of (a) of FIG. (A) to (d) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and a lock release cam member. (A)-(c) is a front view of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and a lock release cam member. (A)-(c) is a front view of the main body member of the swinging member shown in the axial direction of the shaft support rod. (A) is a top view of the motor fixing plate, (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate in the XXXVIIb direction of FIG. 37 (a), and (c) is shown in FIG. 37 (b). It is a side view of the motor fixing plate which shows the state in which the U-shaped member was slid from the state. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in 3rd Embodiment in XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a front view of a lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member as viewed in the XXXXIVb direction of FIG. 44 (a). (A) And (b) is a side view of a lock member. It is a front exploded perspective view of a lever member and a swing operation member. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a top view of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member, and (b) and (c) are side surfaces of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member in the LIIIb direction in FIG. 53 (a). FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine and the operation device as viewed in cross section along the line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6. It is a front exploded perspective view of an inner case member in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member in the LVIb direction of FIG. 56 (a), and (c) is an LVIc of FIG. 56 (a). It is a side view of the eccentric cam member in a direction view. (A) is a front view of the unlocking cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member as viewed in the direction of LVIIb in FIG. 57 (a), and (c) is FIG. 57 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in LVIIc direction. (A) is a front view of a lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member as viewed in the LVIII direction of FIG. 58 (a). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member which show operation of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member in time series. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member, which show operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member in time series. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member which show operation of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member in time series. It is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member. (A) And (b) of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member which show operation of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member in a time series in 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member which show operation of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member in time series. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member which show operation of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member in time series. FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the seventh embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in 8th Embodiment in XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is a side view of the operation device in 9th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in 10th Embodiment in XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is a partial sectional view of the swing operation member and the lever member in the eleventh embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the swing operation member and the lever member in the twelfth embodiment along the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line in FIG. 17 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device in a 13th embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. It is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member of a lever member, an upper cover member, a lower cover member, and a swing member. It is a front exploded perspective view of a swing operation member. (A) is a bottom view of the front cover and the back cover, (b) is a bottom view of the front cover, the back cover, and the separation prevention cover, and (c) is a line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc of FIG. 83 (b). 3 is a cross-sectional view of a front cover, a rear cover, a separation prevention cover, and a protection cover in FIG. (A) is a perspective view of a back side frame member, and (b) is a back side frame member as viewed in a direction indicated by an arrow LXXXIVb in FIG. 84 (a) (a direction viewed from a direction perpendicular to the surface of the guide bottom wall). 84 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member taken along line LXXXIVc-LXXXIVc in FIG. 84 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of the hook member, (b) is a front view of the hook member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a), and (c) is an arrow of FIG. 85 (a). FIG. 85D is a side view of the hook member as viewed in the LXXXVc direction, and FIG. 85D is a cross-sectional view of the hook member taken along line LXXXVd-LXXXVd in FIG. 85B. (A) is a front perspective view of the support member, (b) is a top view of the support member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a), and (c) is an LXXXVIc in FIG. 86 (b). It is sectional drawing of a support member in the -LXXXVIc line. (A) is a partial top view of the back side frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member along the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87 (a), and (c) is a back side view. FIG. 87 is a partial top view of the frame member and the posture correcting device, and FIG. 87D is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correcting device taken along line LXXXVIId-LXXXVIId in FIG. 87C. It is sectional drawing of the back side frame member and attitude | position correction apparatus in LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe line of 87 (d). (A) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88 (a). (C) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correcting device, and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correcting device taken along line LXXXVIIId-LXXXVIIId in FIG. 88 (c). Yes, (e) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correcting device, and (f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correcting device along line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf in FIG. 88 (e). It is. FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. (A) is a front view of the lock member in 14th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the lock member in the arrow LXXXXIb direction of FIG. 91 (a). FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. (A) to (c) are partial enlarged views of the eccentric cam member and the posture switching device. FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. (A) to (c) are partial enlarged views of the eccentric cam member and the posture switching device. (A) and (b) are top views of the contact member in the fifteenth embodiment, and (c) is a cross-section of the rear-side frame member and the posture correcting device on a line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87. It is a figure, (d) is sectional drawing of the back side frame member and attitude | position correction apparatus in LXXXXXXd-LXXXXXXVIIId line of FIG.98 (c). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correcting device along a line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87, and (b) is a back side frame along the line LXXXXXb-LXXXXXb in FIG. 99 (a). It is sectional drawing of a member and a posture correction apparatus. (A) to (d) are side views of the operation device according to the sixteenth embodiment. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in a 17th embodiment in a line corresponding to a XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of Drawing 17 (a). (A) to (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device according to the eighteenth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of an operating device in a 19th embodiment in a line corresponding to a XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of Drawing 17 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of an operation device in a 20th embodiment in a line corresponding to a XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of Drawing 17 (a). FIG. 104 is a rear view of the swing operation member as viewed in the direction of the arrow CV in FIG. 104 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operating device in a 21st embodiment in a line corresponding to a XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of Drawing 17 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of an operating device in a 22nd embodiment in a line corresponding to a XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of Drawing 17 (a).

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 which are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a tapping screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. And so on.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared with the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (start winning) as a trigger, while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that varies and displays the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes through as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is moved for a predetermined time. Only the operating state (opened).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during probable change and during working hours.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640.

  The second winning opening 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (expanded) is increased. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during probable changes or during working hours, passing the ball through the through gate 67 causes the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be easily opened, and the second winning opening 640 to be easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 such that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, the pachinko machine 10 may aim at the first winning opening 64 by “right-handing” or the second winning opening 640 by “left-handing”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with a method of shooting a ball in accordance with the playing state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Need to be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way of hitting the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol and Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position may be the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. The present invention is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port (not shown). A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port. Out ports are provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning port 65a.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 335a and 337a and a vibration device 366.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 when viewed from the front (that is, at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  The operation device 300 includes a swing operation member 310 that can be gripped and operated by a player. The swing operation member 310 includes an accommodation recess 17 a that is recessed in the front-rear direction along an outer frame of the upper plate 17 and a lower plate. A region formed by a housing recess 15a that is vertically recessed at the center of the unit 15 in the left-right direction can be moved.

  A gap is provided between the swinging operation member 310 and the accommodation recesses 15a, 17a, at least so that a finger of a hand can enter at least without difficulty. Thereby, the player can grip the swinging operation member 310 by grasping it from above. When the swing operation member 310 is gripped from above, the finger inserted between the swing operation member 310 and the housing recess 17a is caught on the side surface on the back side of the swing operation member 310, and the hand is held in this state. The hand is prevented from slipping off the swing operation member 310 even if the force is released and the force is left to gravity. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of the player maintaining the hand on the swing operation device 310.

  Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the operation of the swing operation member 310 is often performed with the left hand. Therefore, the following description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the swing operation member 310 with the left hand.

  FIG. 6A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along a line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6A. 7 is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along the line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A.

  6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. 6 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the upward position (the initial position in the present embodiment), and FIG. 7 illustrates a state where the swing operation member 310 is in the downward position (the push-down position according to the present embodiment). ) Is illustrated, and the hand holding the swing operation member 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  The accommodation recess 15a of the lower plate unit 15 and the accommodation recess 17a of the upper plate 17 are arranged sufficiently separated from the outer shape of the swing operation member 310. Therefore, when the player grips the swinging operation member 310 and performs the pushing-down operation, it is possible to suppress a finger from being pinched between the swinging operation member 310 and the housing recess 15a and the housing recess 17a.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the player places his or her finger on the intermediate frame member 312 and grips the swing operation member 310. In this state, since the lens member 317 also serving as a push button portion is arranged to face the palm, the player can perform an operation of pushing the vibration member 310 by grasping while holding the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it is possible to push the lens member 317 while holding the swing operation member 310 without pressing the push button with a finger or holding the swing operation member 310 while holding the swing operation member 310. it can. Therefore, the operation can be simplified.

  The lens member 317 arranged on the swing operation member 310 is arranged at a position where the lens member 317 hits the palm when the player grips the swing operation member 310. Therefore, by detecting that the player is holding the swing operation member 310 and then vibrating the lens member 317, the vibration can be transmitted to the player (the palm, the finger, etc.), and the vibration can be reduced. Can be prevented from being noticed. Therefore, the effect of the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In addition, by performing the pushing operation of the lens member 317 in accordance with the vibration, it is possible to perform an effect so that the timing of performing the input operation can be achieved. The problem of being unable to concentrate can be solved.

  Since the lens member 317 is hidden inside the player's hand while the player holds the swing operation member 310, it is determined whether the lens member 317 is vibrating (the lens member 317 is moved with respect to the intermediate frame member 312). It is difficult for a player other than the player holding the swing operation member 310 to determine whether or not the player is moving. Therefore, only the player holding the swing operation member 310 can be notified of the jackpot, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the front-back position and the vertical position of the swing operation member 310 are different between the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position and the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position. Thereby, when operating the swing operation member 310, the player moves the position of the hand in the up-down direction or the front-rear direction, so that it is possible to obtain a feeling that the player is operating.

  When the player grips the swing operation member 310, the player's finger swings on the intermediate frame member 312, and the fingertip of the player is caught on the back side frame member 311. Since the back side frame member 311 warps in a manner of drawing an arc having the center of the radius of curvature on the back side, the fingertip can be easily hooked on the back side frame member 311, as shown in FIG. Even when the wrist is hardened, as in the case where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position, the fingertip can be prevented from coming off the back side frame member 311.

  Further, since the fingertip is caught on the back side frame member 311, the vibration of the vibration device 366 (see FIG. 11) can be confined inside the palm, and the vibration felt by the player can be largely secured.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the swing operation member 310 is pressed down from the state shown in FIG. 6, the wrist returns naturally as the swing operation member 310 moves to the lower side in front of the player. Therefore, the operation of pushing the swing operation member 310 to the back (see FIG. 22B) can be performed by extending the wrist in such a manner that the return of the wrist is released. Thereby, the burden on the player who operates the swing operation member 310 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 6, as compared with the arm length R1 from the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to the shaft support rod 363 that is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, the upper end of the swing operation member 310 The arm length R2 up to the pivot 363, which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, is long. Accordingly, when the upper part of the swing operation member 310 is gripped and the swing operation member 310 is rotated around the pivot 363, it can be easily rotated (with a light force). On the other hand, a large force can be required when the user swings the lower end portion of the swing operation member 310 to rotate the swing operation member 310 around the shaft support rod 363 (erroneous operation). Accordingly, the burden on the player when rotating the swing operation member 310 by gripping the upper portion of the swing operation member 310 can be reduced, and the player can place his or her hand on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 and An erroneous operation of rotating the swing operation member 310 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 of the operation device 300 is disposed at a downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 8, in the operation device 300, a swing operation member 310 is arranged to protrude to the front side from a rectangular outer case member 320.

  FIG. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which the outer case member 320 has been removed from the inner case member 330 disposed inside the outer case member 320.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the outer case member 320 has a rear surface side formed along the curved surface of the cover members 344 and 345 (see FIG. 11), and the inner case member 330 has right and left sides of the cover members 344 and 345 from the front side. A front cover 321 attached so as to hide the edge, a long plate-shaped upper cover 322 fitted from above into a projection 321a projecting rearward from an upper end of the front cover 321; a front cover 321 and an upper cover A left cover member 323, a right cover member 324, and a left cover member 324, which are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 330 from the left and right directions in such a manner that flange portions 321b and 322a extending in a flange shape in the left and right direction of the inner case 322 are fitted inside. And a sensor base 325 having a plurality of sensor members 325a protruding and disposed inside the sensor base.

  By fastening and fixing the left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324 while fitting and fixing the front cover 321 and the upper cover 322, it is possible to prevent the fastening screws from being viewed in a front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent mischief of disassembling the operation device 300.

  The sensor member 325a includes a photocoupler-type first sensor member 325a1 inserted into the first sensor insertion hole 332e2, a photocoupler-type second sensor member 325a2 inserted into the second sensor insertion hole 332e3, and a second sensor member 325a2. A photocoupler-type third sensor member 325a3 which is disposed below the sensor member 325a2 and is inserted into the sensor insertion hole 332f.

  Note that the first sensor member 325a1 and the second sensor member 325a2 are sensors that detect the posture of the lever member 340, and the third sensor member 325a3 is a sensor that detects the phase of the eccentric cam member 333.

  Further, the photocoupler-type sensor includes a light projecting unit for projecting light, a light receiving unit for receiving light from the light projecting unit, and a gap (slit) into which a detecting portion can be inserted. It means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

  FIG. 10 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. In FIG. 10, the illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and a state in which the inner case member 330 is disassembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the inner case member 330 includes a left cover member 331 and a right cover member 332 assembled in a box shape in which the lever member 340 is disposed inside, and an eccentric cam protruding from the left cover member 331. An eccentric cam member 333 supported by the shaft 331d2; a phase detection member 334 supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 similarly to the eccentric cam member 333 in which the relative phase of the eccentric cam member 333 is invariable; A first driving device 335 that is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 331 from the outside to generate a driving force for rotating the eccentric cam member 333, and a lock member 336 that is supported by a lock shaft 331d3 protruding from the left cover member 331. A second driving device 337 that is fastened from the outside to the right cover member 332 and generates a driving force for rotating the lock member 336, and a lever member A gear damper 338 is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 for supporting the 40, mainly comprises.

  The left cover member 331 is a bottomed tubular member having an opening formed on the right side, and has a lower side wall 331a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom (the left side in FIG. 10) and a lower side thereof. A rectangular plate-shaped upper side wall portion 331b offset to the left (rear side in FIG. 10) as viewed from the front above the side wall portion 331a, and a right side extending from the edges of the lower side wall portion 331a and the upper side wall portion 331b and extending forward. A plate-like connecting side wall 331c which is in contact with the right cover member 332 except for the upper side, and a plurality of rod-like members formed to project rightward from the lower side wall 331a or the upper side wall 331b and formed in a columnar shape. 331d, a plurality of insertion holes 331e formed in the upper side wall 331b, a photocoupler-type sensor member 331f for detecting the attitude of the lock member 336, and a rod-shaped member 331 protruding to the left of the upper side wall 331b. Comprising a shaft support 331g lever support shaft 331d1 which is placed on top inner fitting support to bottomed cylindrical among, mainly.

  The right cover member 332 is a bottomed cylindrical member having an opening formed on the left side, and has a lower side wall portion 332a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom (the right portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side portion thereof. A plate-like upper side wall 332b offset to the right (front side in FIG. 10) in front view above the side wall 332a, and a front side extending leftward from edges of the lower side wall 332a and the upper side wall 332b. Except for the upper portion, a plate-shaped connecting side wall portion 332c that comes into contact with the left cover member 331 and a lower side wall portion 332a are formed by combining a pair of circular shapes, and the gear portion of the second driving device 337 is formed. A driving member insertion hole 332d to be inserted, a plurality of insertion holes 332e formed in the upper side wall 332b, a sensor insertion hole 332f in which the third sensor member 325a3 is inserted, and a right side of the upper side wall 332b. Stick out A cylindrical support 332g having a bottom and internally supporting the lever support shaft 331d1 disposed at the uppermost part of the member 331d; an annular protrusion 332i annularly protruding on the inner surface side of the upper side wall 332b; Mainly equipped.

  The upper side wall portions 331b and 332b are formed such that the upper portion on the front side has a quarter circle shape centering on the shaft support portions 331g and 332g when viewed in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17B). Notches 331c1 and 332c1 that are cut in the left-right direction are provided on the upper front side.

  The notches 331c1 and 332c1 are portions through which the lever member 340 is passed, and have a role of preventing lateral displacement of the lever member 340 (positional displacement of the lever support shaft 331d1, which is a swing shaft, in the extending direction). In addition, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 9) is attached to the inner case member 330 from the front side by using the quarter circular shape of the upper side wall portions 331b and 332b.

  The rod-shaped member 331d is formed of four cylindrical members in the present embodiment. That is, the rod-shaped member 331d includes a lever support shaft 331d1 disposed at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 331, an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 disposed below the lever support shaft 331d1, and a right side of the lower side wall portion 331a. Mainly includes a lock shaft 331d3 protruding from and an auxiliary shaft 331d4 provided below the lock shaft 331d3.

  The lever support shaft 331d1 is a member on which the lever member 340 is swingably supported, and is supported at both ends by being inserted into the shaft support portions 331g and 332g.

  The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is a member that is inserted in a state where the eccentric cam member 333 and the phase detection member 334 are in phase.

  The lock shaft 331d3 and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 are both shafts through which the lock member 336 is inserted. The lock shaft 331d3 is a member that supports the shaft support hole 336b of the lock member 336. The auxiliary shaft 331d4 is a lock. This is a member for guiding the guide hole 336c of the member 336.

  In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 331e includes three through holes. That is, a guide support hole 331e1 which is arranged on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1 and extends along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, and a circular shape arranged on the back side of the lever support shaft 331d1. A gear damper insertion hole 331e2, which is a through hole through which the gear damper 338 is inserted, and a driving member insertion hole 331e3, which is disposed below the rear side of the gear damper insertion hole 331e2 and is formed by combining a pair of circular shapes. Prepare mainly.

  The guide support hole 331e1 guides the swing of the lever member 340 through which the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted, and defines the end of the swing of the lever member 340 at the end.

  The sensor member 331f detects the posture of the lock member 336 by detecting that the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 passes through the gap between the sensor members 331f.

  The driving member insertion hole 332d has a shape in which a large circle and a small circle are connected. By adjusting the shape of each circle, the driving gear 337b of the second driving device 337 can be enlarged. The right cover member 332 is projected to the left through the circle, and in this state, the pedestal portion that supports the drive gear 337b can be fitted into a small circle.

  This allows the second drive device 337 to be inserted through the inner cover member 332 while supporting the drive gear 337b (the hole having a diameter equal to or larger than the outer diameter of the drive gear 337b). Fixing the shaft position (fixed with a hole having the same diameter as the base of the drive shaft of the drive gear 337b) can be compatible.

  In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 332e includes three through holes. That is, a guide support hole 332e1 formed at a position and a shape that coincides with the guide support hole 331e1 in the left-right direction and guided by the angle regulating rod member 346 of the lever member 340, and a rectangular shape disposed on the back side of the shaft support 332g. A first sensor insertion hole 332e2 through which the first sensor member 325a1 is inserted, and a rectangular through hole which is disposed at a position where the first sensor insertion hole 332e2 is rotated about the shaft support 332g. And a second sensor insertion hole 332e3 through which the second sensor member 325a2 is inserted.

  The sensor insertion holes 332e2 and 332e3 are through holes through which the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 that detect the posture of the lever member 340 by detecting that the sensor detection piece 343b of the lever member 340 passes through the gap.

  A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the shaft supports 331g and 332g. Further, plate-like torsion spring engaging portions 331h, 332h are arranged below the front of the shaft support portions 331g, 332g, and extend outward in the left-right direction of the left cover member 331 and the right cover member 332.

  In the present embodiment, one end of the torsion spring SP1 is in contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h from above, and the other end is in contact with the angle regulating rod member 346 from below. Accordingly, the lever member 340 is urged in a direction in which the swing operation member 310 rises.

  The annular convex portion 332i is a portion where the phase detecting member 334 is externally fitted. Since the phase detection member 334 is externally fitted to the annular projection 332i, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 can be firmly aligned.

  The first driving device 335 mainly includes a driving motor 335a that generates a driving force, and a driving gear 335b that is rotatably supported by the driving motor 335a. The driving gear 335b is meshed with the main body 333a of the eccentric cam member 333, and the driving force is transmitted.

  The lock member 336 is a member that prevents the lever member 340 from swinging, and includes a main body 336a having a substantially L-shaped hook at the distal end, and a shaft formed at the base end of the main body 336a. The support hole 336b, a guide hole 336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 336b, and a gear-shaped protrusion from the base end side of the main body 336a toward the outside of the shaft support hole 336b in the radial direction. It mainly includes a gear portion 336d provided, and a plate-shaped detection piece 336e extending outward in the axial direction of the shaft support hole 336b and capable of passing through a gap between the sensor members 331f.

  The guide hole 336c is a long hole into which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is inserted, and the swing end of the lock member 336 can be defined by the length of the guide hole 336c.

  The second driving device 337 mainly includes a driving motor 337a for generating a driving force, and a driving gear 337b that is rotatably supported by the driving motor 337a. The driving gear 337b is meshed with the gear 336d of the lock member 336, and the driving force is transmitted.

  The gear damper 338 is a member that imparts viscous resistance to the member that meshes and rotates, and the gear member projects rightward from the left cover member 331 (inside the inner case member 330) through the gear damper insertion hole 331 e 2, and the gear thereof The member is engaged with the gear portion 342b (see FIG. 11). Therefore, the lever member 340 receives the viscous resistance from the gear damper 338 while swinging.

  FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340. FIG. 11 shows a state in which the back side frame member 311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 310, and a gear damper receiving member 342, a posture detecting member 343, which is fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 340, and a purpose of preventing destruction. The state in which the peeling member 350 provided as a disassembly is disassembled is illustrated.

  The rear side frame member 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape whose outer shell protrudes to the rear side, and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape in such a manner that the upper part protrudes (returns) to the front side from the protruding end (FIG. 17 (b)). )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a, which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole into which the swing member 360 is partially inserted.

  As shown in FIG. 11, a lever member 340 is formed of a metal material such as iron, and is formed in a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section. The lever member 340 is fastened and fixed to the left side surface of the main body member 341 in the axial direction. A gear damper receiving member 342 having a substantially circular outer shape, a shaft supported coaxially with the gear damper receiving member 342, a substantially circular outer shape when viewed in the axial direction, and fastening to a right side surface of the main body member 341. The posture detecting member 343 to be fixed, the upper cover member 344 formed in a shape that is fitted to the circular portions of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detecting member 343 from above, and the upper cover member 344 with the main body member 341 interposed therebetween. A lower cover member 345 disposed to face, and a corner inserted into the cylindrical portion 342a of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the cylindrical portion 343a of the attitude detecting member 343. The regulating rod member 346, a peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft hole 341b coaxial with the body member 341 mainly includes a swing member 360 which is disposed on the front end of the body member 341, a.

  The gear damper receiving member 342 mainly includes a cylindrical tubular portion 342a inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341 and a gear portion 342b formed in a gear tooth shape along the outer peripheral surface. In addition, the posture detecting member 343 is disposed in the axial direction at a position (the far side in FIG. 11) that is the farthest from the cylindrical portion 343 a inserted into the shaft hole 341 b of the main body member 341. And a plate-shaped sensor detecting piece 343b extending along the main part.

  The cylindrical portions 342a and 343a are portions inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10) is inserted into the inner peripheral side. This enables the lever member 340 to swing about the lever support shaft 331d1.

  The gear portion 342b is a portion that meshes with the gear damper 338 (see FIG. 10), and is a portion that transmits the viscous resistance generated by the gear damper 338 to the lever member 340.

  The sensor detection piece 343b is a portion that allows the posture of the lever member 340 to be detected by passing through a gap between the first sensor member 325a1 or the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 18C).

  The peeling member 350 is provided coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the lever member 340 and has a plate-shaped main body member 351 having an insertion hole 352 inserted through the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10). It mainly includes a rectangular raising member 353 to be fixed, and a magnet member 354 that is arranged above the raising member 353 and is fixed and fixed to the main body member 351 and formed of a magnetic material.

  The magnet member 354 is disposed to face the main body member 341, and is fixedly fastened to the main body member 351, so that the magnet member 354 has a function of uniting and separating the main body member 341 and the main body member 351.

  FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swing member 360 of the lever member 340.

  The main body member 341 of the lever member 340 includes a main body 341a formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, and a pair of shaft holes 341b formed in a substantially central portion of the main body 341a in the left-right direction. A regulating hole 341c drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341b, and a front end of the main body 341a inclined downward (downward in FIG. 12) with respect to the extending direction of the main body 341a. A pair of left and right swing member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e formed in the left and right direction on the root side of the swing member support portion 341d, and a shaft hole 341e formed in the left and right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341e. And a regulating hole 341f.

  The shaft hole 341b is a through hole through which the cylindrical portions 342a and 343a (see FIG. 11) are inserted and into which the lever support shaft 331d1 is inserted. That is, the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are axially supported coaxially with the axis of the shaft hole 341b.

  The restriction hole 341c is a through hole in which the angle restriction rod member 346 is supported.

  The shaft hole 341e is a through hole through which a shaft support rod 363 that supports the swing member 360 is inserted, and the regulating hole 341f is a through hole through which a regulating rod 365 that regulates the swing angle of the swing member 360 is inserted. It is. The inner diameter of the shaft hole 341e is larger than that of the regulating hole 341f by the amount of the buffer member 364 provided around the shaft support rod 363.

  The upper cover member 344 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and forms a curved surface on the back side along a circle centered on the shaft hole 341b. A guide portion 344a, an external fitting portion 344b formed in a U-shape in cross section which is connected to the guide portion 344a and which can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and the guide portion 344a and the external portion. And a connecting portion 344c for connecting the fitting portions 344b. The thickness of the connecting portion 344c is reduced (see FIG. 22).

  The lower cover member 345 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and extends in the left-right direction in a shape along a circle centered on the shaft hole 341b. A rear guide 345a to be formed, an outer fitting portion 345b formed in a U-shaped cross-section that can be fitted to the main body 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and a back guide 345a opposite to the outer fitting 345b. Mainly includes a front curved portion 345c disposed on the side and curved toward the front side, and a front guide portion 345d extending toward the front side from left and right ends of the front curved portion 345c.

  The rear guide portion 345a is a portion disposed along the cutout 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330 together with the guide portion 344a of the upper cover member 344. In the assembled state, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 8) and the upper cover 322 (see FIG. 8) of the outer case member 320 are arranged so as to cover the edges of the rear guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a. Accordingly, the rear guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a can prevent dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inner case member 330.

  The front curved surface portion 345c and the front guide portion 345d are both portions that guide the swing of the main body member 361 of the swing member 360 (see FIG. 11). The front curved surface portion 345c receives a positional shift of the swing member 360 in the rotation direction and an impact when the lens member 317 (see FIG. 10) is pushed in, and the front guide portion 345d allows the swing member 360 to move in the axial direction. Is suppressed.

  Since the lower cover member 345 is disposed to face the lower end of the cutout 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330, the outer case member 320 (see FIG. 8) when the lever member 340 is pressed down. The main body member 341 (made of a metal material) of the lever member 340 can be prevented from directly abutting on the lever member 340. That is, by providing the lower cover member 345 formed of a resin material therebetween, it is possible to reduce the impact when the lever member 340 and the outer case member 320 come into contact with each other.

  The swing member 360 is a member that is disposed at the front end of the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and that can swing about the shaft hole 341e. The swing member 360 is located outside the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped main body member 361 having a side wall portion 361a disposed therein and formed in a U-shaped cross section, and is engaged with a wall portion on the front side of the main body member 361 and is coaxial with the main body member 361 and pivotally supported. A plate-shaped motor fixing plate 362, a cylindrical shaft support rod 363 inserted into the shaft holes 361c and 341e of the main body member 361, and the shaft support rod 363 are fitted into the shaft support member 363 and the shaft support member 363 is externally inserted into the shaft hole 341e. A buffer member 364 to be fitted, a torsion spring SP2 wound around and supported by the buffer member 364, a cylindrical regulating rod 365 inserted through and fixed to the regulating hole 341f, and a motor fixed plate 362 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing plate 362. A vibration device 366 comprised of a voice coil motor that generates a linear vibration in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the plate 362 mainly comprises a.

  The main body member 361 has a pair of plate-shaped side walls 361a arranged to face each other, a front wall 361b connecting the side walls 361a at front ends, and a pair of side walls 361a coaxially and circularly formed. A shaft hole 361c provided therein and into which the buffer member 364 is fitted; an elongated hole regulating hole 361d formed along a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c and through which the regulating rod 365 is inserted; a side wall portion 361a; A fixing plate portion 361e which is bent above the front wall portion 361b in a direction away from each other and to which the swinging operation member 310 is fastened and fixed.

  Since the outer shape of the back side end of the side wall portion 361a is formed in a circular shape centering on the shaft hole 361c, the main body member 361 is moved with the back side end of the side wall portion 361a sliding on the front curved surface portion 345c. Can be rocked.

  The shaft hole 361c is externally supported by the buffer member 364, similarly to the shaft hole 341e. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the vibration generated on the swing member 360 side from being transmitted to the main body member 341 side of the lever member 340.

  The angle regulating hole 361d includes a buffer member 361d1 formed of a resin material. The buffer member 361d1 is attached so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the angle regulating hole 361d. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress an impact when the regulating rod 365 comes into contact with the angle regulating hole 361d.

  The motor fixing plate 362 includes a plate-shaped main body 362a which is vertically locked to the front wall 361b of the main body member 361, and a pair of side wall portions 362b bent at left and right ends of the main body 362a. , Mainly comprising.

  The main body 362a has a projection 362a1 protruding from the front side, and is locked by inserting the projection 362a1 into a hole formed in the front wall 361b.

  The side wall portion 362b is a portion in which a shaft hole 362b1 having the same diameter as the shaft hole 341e is bored, and is externally supported by the cushioning member 364, and is disposed inside the right and left sides of the swing member support portion 341d. That is, the swing member support portion 341d is assembled so as to be sandwiched between the side wall portions 361a and 362b.

  The cushioning member 364 is a tubular member that is inserted through the main body member 341 from the outside. The insertion portion 364a, which is the insertion tip side, has a small diameter, and a root portion 364b that is formed closer to the root side than the insertion portion 364a. Is formed with a larger diameter than the insertion portion 364a.

  Out of those supported by the buffer member 364, the main body member 361 is externally fitted to the root portion 364b, and the main body member 341 and the motor fixing plate 362 are externally fitted to the insertion portion 364a.

  The vibrating device 366 is a device for operating a pair of members in such a manner as to cause a pair of members to approach and separate in a linear direction by electromagnetic force, and is a cylindrical member fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 362 and having a copper wire wound therearound. A certain bobbin member 366a, a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a, and a cylinder having an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a are coaxially arranged and have a disc-shaped shape. And a pressing member 366b (see FIG. 19) connected by a plate.

  The pressing member 366b is made of a magnetic material whose inner cylinder changes its polarity in the axial direction.

  The torsion spring SP2 has one end locked to the main body member 341 and the other end locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP2 urges the swing member 360 in a direction in which the swing member 360 falls down with respect to the main body member 341.

  FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 310. In FIG. 13, the illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 13, the swinging operation member 310 is fixedly fastened to the back side frame member 311 (see FIG. 11), the back side frame member 311 is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 361 e of the swinging member 360. Annular frame member 312 to be formed, a vibration guide member 313 fastened and fixed to the front side of the intermediate frame member 312 in a state where the phases of the intermediate frame member 312 are matched, and the vibration guide member 313 A vibrating member 314 formed in a disk shape having no hole at the center and a light guide member 313a protruding from the vibrating member is inserted, and a vibrating coil spring CS1 fixed to the center of the vibrating member 314 is sandwiched therebetween. When the switch member 315 is disposed to face the vibration member 314, the intermediate member 316 is externally fitted from the front side of the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 is accommodated on the rear side. A lens member 317 which is fitted supported on the vibrating member 314, mainly comprises.

  With the above-described configuration, in the swinging operation member 310, the intermediate frame member 312 and the vibration guide member 313 are fixed to each other, the vibration member 314 and the lens member 317 are fixed to each other, and the switch member 315 and the intermediate member 316 are fixed to each other. .

  The intermediate frame member 312 includes an annular plate-shaped bottom portion 312a, a side wall portion 312b extending forward from the outer periphery of the bottom portion 312a to the entire periphery, and a front side in a direction perpendicular to a surface formed by the bottom portion 312a. Mainly includes a plurality of cylindrical switch support rods 312c standing upright and a back button member 312d movably disposed in the front-rear direction on the rear side upper portion of the bottom portion 312a.

  The bottom 312a includes rectangular recesses 312a1 that are recessed from the radial direction toward the center at the upper, lower, left, and right ends in FIG.

  The recessed portion 312a1 is a portion through which the arm 315f of the switch member 315 is inserted, and the tip of the arm 315f of the switch member 315 is locked to the side wall 312b (see FIG. 21A). Thus, the switch member 315 is disposed so as not to be pulled out with respect to the intermediate frame member 312.

  The switch support rod 312c is a member that is commonly inserted into the vibration guide member 313, the vibration member 314, and the switch member 315. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 from tilting in the operation direction when the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (the stacking direction of each member). Therefore, for example, even when a force is applied to the lens member 317 from a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, it is possible to suppress resistance from being generated in the pushing operation of the lens member 317, and to improve the operability of the pushing operation. . Further, when the vibration member 314 is vibrated by the vibration device 366, the vibration member 314 can be prevented from tilting.

  Here, the vibration of the vibration device 366 means a vibration in which the member vibrates finely, a reciprocating operation in which the member moves in a linear direction, collides with another member at the end of movement, and returns.

  The back button member 312d is usually arranged at a position protruding to the back side by a coil spring interposed between the back button member 312a and a plate-shaped detection piece 312d1 at the center on the front side.

  The vibration guide member 313 includes a plurality (eight in this embodiment) of light guide members 313a that are erected on the front side, a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which the switch support rods 312c are inserted, and a front end at the lower end. It mainly includes a photocoupler-type first sensor member 313c to be provided, and a photocoupler-type second sensor member 313d provided on the rear side at the upper end.

  The light guide member 313a is a transparent member in which a light emitting member such as an LED is disposed on the back side. The light guide member 313a is inserted into the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316, so that the distal end portion is disposed to be opposed to (close to) the lens member 317. Therefore, light emitted from the light emitting member can be guided to the vicinity of the lens member 317, and the effect of causing the lens member 317 to emit light can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 are prevented from tilting in the operation direction when the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the members are stacked). In addition, the inclination of the switch member 315 makes contact with the light guide member 313a, so that the light guide member 313a can be prevented from being damaged.

  The first sensor member 313c is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 315g (see FIG. 21A) provided on the switch member 315 has passed through the gap, and detects the arrangement of the switch member 315.

  The second sensor member 313d is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 312d1 has passed through the gap and detects the posture of the swing operation member 310 to be described later.

  The vibrating member 314 has a substantially disc-shaped main body 314a having an outer diameter of substantially the same cross-section as the bottom 312a and no opening formed in the center, and a plurality of the switch support rods 312c (FIG. Switch support holes 314b (four places in the present embodiment), a central cylindrical portion 314c projecting from the center of the main body portion 314a to the front side in a cylindrical shape and around which the vibration coil spring CS1 is wound and supported, and a switch support rod 312c. A switch receiving member 314d that is inserted from the tip of the main body 314a following the push-in coil spring CS2, a sensor housing hole 314e formed in a lower part of the main body 314a in a shape capable of housing the first sensor member 313c in the front-rear direction, A light guide hole 314f through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted.

  The elastic coefficient of the push-in coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibrating coil spring CS1.

  Since the outer shape of the main body 314a is substantially the same as that of the bottom 312a, the arms 315f of the switch member 315 can be inserted through four recesses formed in the outer peripheral portion.

  The switch receiving member 314d is a cylindrical member in which a large-diameter portion 314d1 having a larger diameter than the switch support hole 314b is formed on the front side, and is inserted into the switch support hole 314b from the front side to have a large diameter. The portion 314d1 is locked in the switch support hole 314b. The push-in coil spring CS2 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the switch support hole 314b.

  The switch member 315 includes a main body 315a formed in a disc shape, a spring receiving portion 315b formed on a cup from the center of the main body 315a toward the front side (left side in FIG. 13), and a switch. A switch support hole 315c through which the support rod 312c can be inserted, a light guide hole 315d formed through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and a pair of switch receiving members arranged at the upper and lower centers (the upper and lower centers in FIG. 13). A guide shaft 315e inserted through 314d, an arm 315f inserted into and locked into the recessed portion 312a1, and a lower portion of the main body 315a (lower side in FIG. 13) that can pass through a gap between the first sensor member 313c. ) Mainly includes a plate-shaped detection piece 315 g protruding from the rear side.

  The switch support hole 315c is formed with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the switch support rod 312c, and is formed with a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the large diameter portion 314d1 of the switch receiving member 314d. Accordingly, when the switch member 315 moves in a direction approaching the vibration member 314, the switch member 315 can be supported by the large diameter portion 314d1.

  Since the guide shaft 315e is inserted through the switch receiving member 314d, the inclination of the switch member 315 with respect to the vibration member 314 can be suppressed.

  The intermediate member 316 includes a light guide hole 316a through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and is externally fixed to the switch member 315 so as not to rotate relatively.

  14 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 333, FIG. 14 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 333, and FIG. 14 (c) is XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the eccentric cam member 333 in a line.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the eccentric cam member 333 includes a main body 333a formed as a rotating gear, a cylindrical tubular part 333b disposed coaxially with the rotation axis of the main body 333a, A cam portion 333c that extends in the axial direction along a circle inscribed in the portion 333b, is formed slightly shorter than the cylindrical portion 333b, and has a hollow inside, and a distal end portion of the cylindrical portion 333b along the axial direction. A pair of notches 333d to be cut, a plate-like rib 333e connecting the cylindrical portion 333b and the cam portion 333c in a direction passing through both axes, and a disk-shaped umbrella covering a gear portion of the main body 333a. And a part 333f.

  The main body part 333a and the cam part 333c are arranged to be shifted in the axial direction (in a two-layer structure). Since the cam portion 333c is hollow, when the cam portion 333c comes into contact with the lever member 340, the cam portion 333c is slightly bent inward (elastically deformed) so that the impact can be absorbed.

  The cam portion 333c is a hollow annular portion having a circular outer shape, and is eccentrically fixed to the main body portion 333a.

  The notch 333d is for making the relative phase with the phase detecting member 334 (see FIG. 15) invariable, and a pair of notches arranged opposite to each other are formed with different circumferential lengths. Thus, it is possible to prevent the phase detection member 334 from being turned 180 degrees and assembled.

  The rib portion 333e is disposed in such a manner as to connect the position farthest from the cylindrical portion 333b of the cam portion 333c and the cylindrical portion 333b, so that the most strong among the hollowly formed cam portions 333c. The strength of the weakened portion can be improved. This can prevent the cam portion 333c from being damaged.

  Note that the rib 333e may be partially cut in the middle of the longitudinal direction. Accordingly, when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small, no load is applied to the rib portion 333e, and the rib portion 333e is divided only when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is large. Can be made to abut each other. This can prevent the rib 333e from being fatigued while the rib 333e is not in contact (when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam 333c is small), thereby improving the durability of the rib 333e. Can be done.

  FIG. 15A is a front view of the phase detection member 334, FIG. 15B is a bottom view of the phase detection member 334, and FIG. 15C is XVc-XVc of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the phase detection member 334 in a line. In FIG. 15C, the annular projection 332i and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17A) are shown by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the phase detecting member 334 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose diameter is enlarged in the middle, and is supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331 d 2 (see FIG. 10). An enlarged portion 334b which is continuously connected to the 334a and is enlarged toward the front side (upward in FIG. 15 (c)) (increased in two stages), and an axial direction from the front end of the enlarged portion 334b. The main part is provided with a plate-shaped detection piece 334c that extends from the bottom surface, and a detent projection 334d that matches the shape of the notch 333d.

  The enlarged diameter portion 334b is a portion that is externally fitted to an annular projection 332i (see FIG. 10) that is annularly provided on the inner surface side of the right cover member 332. The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is supported by the inner surface of the annular convex portion 332i, and the enlarged diameter portion 334b of the phase detecting member 334 is supported by the outer peripheral surface of the annular convex portion 332i from the inner peripheral side. By supporting the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, it is possible to suppress the axial displacement when the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 receives a load from the radial direction.

  The detection piece 334c can pass through a gap between the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9). When the detection piece 334c passes through the gap between the third sensor member 325a3, the rotation preventing projection 334d and the notch 333d mesh with each other to detect the posture of the eccentric cam member 333 whose relative phase with the phase detection member 334 is not changed. can do.

  FIG. 16A is a front view of the lever member 340, FIG. 16B is a side view of the lever member 340 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIb in FIG. 16A, and FIG. FIG. 17 is a top view of the lever member 340 when viewed in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft hole 341e is lower than a straight line directed in the longitudinal direction of the main body member 341 and passing through the shaft hole 341b as compared with the shaft hole 341b (see FIG. ) Below). Thus, it is possible to suppress the load generated on the swing member 360 side from being applied along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340, and to direct the load in the rotation direction of the lever member 340.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a peeling member 350 is provided on the open side of the U-shape. A slight gap is provided between the raising member 353 or the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341.

  Accordingly, when the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, the strength of the main body member 341 is increased by filling the open side of the U-shape of the main body member 341 (the lower side in FIG. 16B) with the peeling member 350. Can be secured.

  Further, when the peeling member 350 starts to be peeled from the state where the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, or in a direction in which the peeling member 350 approaches the main body member 341 from the peeled state (see FIG. 23A). The movement resistance when moving to can be increased.

  Accordingly, the movement resistance when the peeling member 350 relatively moves with respect to the main body member 341 can be increased. For example, the lever member 340 can be controlled in a state where the swinging of the lever member 340 is restricted (see FIG. 22A). When the member 340 is overloaded and the peeling member 350 is pulled off from the main body member 341, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from swinging at high speed due to the applied load.

  FIG. 17A is a front view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. Note that FIG. 17 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged at a downward position (a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pressed down by the player).

  FIG. 18A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 18B is a portion of the operation device 300 along the line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 18C is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc in FIG. 17A. FIG. 19 is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member 310 in FIG. 18B and FIG. 18C are slightly enlarged from FIG. 18A, and in FIG. 19, the central axis of the vibration device 366 of the swing operation member 310 is directed in the vertical direction. The state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position, the eccentric cam member 333 contacts the lower side surface of the peeling member 350. When the lock member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface, the peeling member 350 is prevented from swinging in both directions, so that the swing operation member 310 is fixed at the upward position.

  As in the present embodiment, the lock member 336 is swung about the lock shaft 331d3, and the lock member 336 blocks the swinging of the peeling member 350, and the eccentric cam member 333 is located on the opposite side of the peeling member 350. Is arranged, the posture of the lock member 336 in a state where the peeling member 350 is prevented from swinging by the lock member 336 can be designed and adjusted.

  In the present embodiment, when the distance between the rotation axis of the lock member 336 and the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 is closest, that is, the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side of the peeling member 350 and the cylindrical portion 333b The lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the peeling member 350 only in a state in which is comes into contact with the peeling member 350.

  In other words, the length of the main body portion 336a of the lock member 336 is formed such that the L-shaped hook portion abuts on the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 in a state where the peeling member 350 abuts on the cylindrical portion 333b. .

  Therefore, in a state where the lock member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 and the swinging operation member 310 is fixed at the upward position, the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 is always positioned below the peeling member 350. Is abutted on the side. Therefore, when an overload is applied in a direction in which the swing operation member 310 moves upward from a state where the swing operation member 310 is fixed at the upward position, the overload is applied to the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333. The eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged, and can be prevented from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, the gear portion 342b of the gear damper receiving member 342 meshes with a gear damper 338 disposed on the back side of the gear damper receiving member 342. As will be described later, the gear damper 338 has a role of generating a viscous resistance to the swing of the lever member 340 and a role of generating a resistance force against the load when the lever member 340 receives a load pushing the lever member 340 backward. Have together.

  By disposing the gear damper 338, for example, in a state where the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is pulled off from the peeling member 350, the resistance when the player operates the swing operation member 310 at high speed is large. On the other hand, when the lever member 340 rises due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1, the resistance when the speed is small can be reduced.

  Thus, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be set smaller than when a large resistance corresponding to a high-speed operation of the player is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the degree of freedom in designing the torsion spring SP1 is improved. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 18C, in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position, the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap between the second sensor members 325a2, and the detection piece of the phase detection member 334 is formed. 334c is arranged in the gap between the third sensor members 325a3. That is, the lock member 336 is swung only when the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap between the second sensor members 325a2 and the detection piece 334c of the phase detection member 334 is arranged in the gap between the third sensor members 325a3. This allows the lock member 336 to contact the upper side surface of the peeling member 350.

  Further, as described later, when the peeling member 350 is pulled off from the main body member 341, the sensor detecting piece 343b is moved from the gap between the second sensor members 325a2. Therefore, it is detected that the lock member 336 is not swinging from the state of FIG. 18A (detected by the sensor member 331f) and that the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap between the second sensor members 325a2. Thus, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

  FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 taken along line XX-XX in FIG. In addition, illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 20, the back button member 312d is disposed on the back side of the intermediate frame member 312, and is urged in a direction away from the intermediate frame member 312 by a coil spring. When no load is applied, the detection piece 312d1 is separated from the second sensor member 313d. On the other hand, a pushing load (a load directed upward in FIG. 20) is applied to the back button member 312d, and the back button member 312d is moved until the detection piece 312d1 is inserted into the gap of the second sensor member 313d. It can be detected that the back button member 312d has been pressed.

  FIGS. 21A and 21B are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. In addition, FIG. 21A illustrates a state in which the vibration device 366 operates from the states illustrated in FIGS. 18A and 19 to generate a load upward, and FIG. 21B illustrates a state illustrated in FIG. 19) and the state where the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state of FIG.

  As described above, the switch member 315 is locked so as not to be pulled out from the intermediate frame member 312, and the vibration member 314 is interposed between the switch member 315 and the intermediate frame member 312, and the vibration member 314 is a vibration coil spring CS1. As a result, it is pressed toward the intermediate frame member 312 (downward in FIG. 21A).

  From this state, when current is applied to a copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibration device 366 and the pressing member 366b is pressed against the vibration member 314 by the electromagnetic force generated, the vibration member 314 is pressed against the switch member 315. Move in the direction to be pressed. Thereby, the lens member 317 fitted and fixed to the vibration member 314 moves (upward in FIG. 21A). In this state, since the step portion 317a of the lens member 317 is in contact with the switch member 315, it is difficult to push the lens member 317 in (it becomes hard and cannot be pushed).

  On the other hand, when the vibration member 314 is separated from the lens member 317, the player can push the lens member 317 (pushable state). Therefore, the timing at which the player performs an input operation through the lens member 317 can be designated by driving the vibration member 314.

  Further, since a pushable state in which the lens member 317 can be pushed and a pushable state in which the lens member 317 is fixed so as not to be displaceable and cannot be pushed are configured, the influence on the lever member 340 by the operation performed by the player is provided. Switching can be performed on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) side.

  For example, when the player pushes the lens member 317 intermittently and repeatedly (continuously hits), when the lens member 317 returns from the pushed state, the lever member 340 reacts to the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 18A The load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in the direction approaching ()). Therefore, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, when the push-in state is disabled, the entire swing operation member 310 is pushed down in response to the push-in operation of the player, whereby the lever member 340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 18A). Move in the direction. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the lens member 317, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 collide due to the swinging operation member 310 returning upward by the urging force.

  In addition, as a method of configuring the state in which the lens member 317 cannot be pushed, the lens member 317 is locked by a hook-shaped claw, or the lens member 317 is moved to the end position by a vibration device 366 such as a voice coil motor that linearly reciprocates. An example is a method of overhanging (continuing to apply a load in one direction). According to the method in which the lens member 317 is extended to the end position by the vibration device 366 such as a voice coil motor, the lens member 317 is vibrated by the vibration device 366 and the lens member 317 cannot be pushed. Both effects can occur.

  By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibration device 366, the moving direction of the pressing member 366b can be reversed. Here, since the vibration member 314 is not pulled by the force of the electromagnetic force, there is a possibility that the moving speed may be reduced. In the present embodiment, the vibration member 314 is pressed by the elastic recovery force of the vibration coil spring CS1. And moves downward in FIG. 21 (b).

  Accordingly, the vibration of the lens member 317 can be speeded up without fastening and fixing the pressing member 366b and the vibration member 314.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the step 317a formed on the back side of the lens member 317 comes into contact with the arm 315f of the switch member 315 so that the lens member 317 is pressed. 317 and the vibration member 314 move integrally with the switch member 315. Therefore, since the degree of contraction of the vibrating coil spring CS1 does not change, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance when the lens member 317 is pushed.

  After the pushing operation of the lens member 317, the switch receiving member 314d (see FIG. 13) abutting on the lower side surface of the switch member 315 pushes up the switch member 315 by the elastic recovery force of the pushing coil spring CS2. The lens member 317 returns to the position before being pushed (see FIG. 18A).

  That is, the push-in coil spring CS2 for returning the position of the lens member 317 when the lens member 317 is pushed in and the vibration coil spring CS1 for returning the position of the vibration member 314 can be formed by different members.

  In the present embodiment, since the elastic coefficient of the pushing coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibrating coil spring CS1, the pushing operation of the lens member 317 is performed with a small force while securing a high speed of returning the vibrating member 314. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of the pushing operation of the lens member 317 while securing the magnitude of the vibration passively felt by the player.

  FIGS. 22A and 22B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. 22 (a) and 22 (b) show a state in which the lock member 336 is swung to the fixed side, and in FIG. 22 (a), the swing operation member 310 is arranged at an upward position. FIG. 22B shows a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is pushed to the rear side (the right side in FIG. 22B) from the state in FIG. 22A.

  The lever member 340 that supports the swing operation member 310 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in a direction (clockwise in FIG. 22A) in which the swing operation member 310 is lifted around the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, even if the lock member 336 is swung in the release direction (clockwise in FIG. 22A) from the state of FIG. 22A, the swing operation member 310 can be held at the upward position.

  The swing of the lever member 340 due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is stopped by the lever member 340 coming into contact with the guide support holes 331e1, 332e1, the upper cover 322, and the eccentric cam member 333. As described above, by preparing a plurality of portions that come into contact when the lever member 340 is stopped, the load applied to the lever member 340 can be dispersed, and damage to the lever member 340 can be suppressed. . Hereinafter, each contact portion will be described in detail.

  Since the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted into the guide supporting holes 331e1 and 332e1, the swing of the lever member 340 is stopped by the angle regulating rod member 346 coming into contact with the ends of the guide supporting holes 331e1 and 332e1. Can be. As described above with reference to FIG. 10, since the guide support holes 331 e 1 and 332 e 1 are disposed so as to sandwich the lever member 340 in the swing axis direction, when the lever member 340 is stopped, the lever member 340 is centered on the longitudinal direction. Tilting in the turning direction can be suppressed.

  The connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the upper cover 322. The connecting portion 344c is formed with a step 344c1, which is a portion that vertically contacts the upper cover 322, and a space is formed between the connecting portion 344c and the lever member 340 (see FIG. 22A). Therefore, even when the upper cover 322 abuts on the step portion 344c1, the connecting portion 344c can be deformed toward the space, so that the shock generated between the connecting portion 344c and the upper cover 322 can be reduced. it can.

  Thus, the transmission of the impact to the main body member 341 can be suppressed, so that the configuration of the main body member 341 can be simplified, and the weight of the entire lever member 340 can be reduced. In this case, the elastic coefficient required for the torsion spring SP1 can be suppressed, and accordingly, the driving force required for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 10) that drives the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

  Further, the upper cover member 344 has a role of preventing dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inside of the inner case member 330 in addition to a role of reducing impact. That is, even if the lever member 340 swings (refer to FIG. 23B), the space between the upper cover member 344 and the upper cover 322 is always closed, so that the dust is formed inside the inner case member 330. And balls (game balls, game media) can be prevented from entering.

  Further, the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the notch 331c1 of the inner case member 330 in the swing axis direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 22A). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from wobbling in the swing axis direction using the upper cover member 344.

  The peeling member 350 of the lever member 340 contacts the eccentric cam member 333. Breaking the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented by bringing the lever member 340 into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 with the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 facing the peeling member 350 side.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, in the operation device 300, a straight line L <b> 1 indicating the central axis in the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 passes through the shaft support rod 363. Therefore, the shock of the vibration of the vibration device 366 is given to the shaft support rod 363, but a buffer member 364 (see FIG. 12) is disposed between the shaft support rod 363 and the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 12). Therefore, the shock of the vibration can be reduced by the buffer member 364. Thereby, the vibration transmitted to the lever member 340 can be suppressed.

  The angle between the straight line L1 and a straight line L2 along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340 is defined as an angle θ1. Thereby, the vibration generated by the vibration device 366 can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2, and is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 to vibrate the pachinko machine 10. The load to be applied (the load in the direction along the straight line L2) can be suppressed.

  Similarly, the force applied in the pushing direction of the lens member 317 (parallel to the straight line L1) can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2. By pushing the lens member 317, the load applied to the lever support shaft 331d1 can be suppressed.

  The vibration device 366 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 22A) of the lever support shaft 331d1, and a reaction generated when the vibration device 366 operates operates in a direction to push down the swing member support portion 341d of the main body member 341 downward. Pointed. Therefore, the main body member 341 can be swung in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 by the vibration of the vibration device 366. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the eccentric cam member 333 from receiving a load due to the vibration of the vibration device 366.

  As shown in FIG. 22B, in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed in, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c. In this case, the direction F1 of the load generated toward the lever member 340 is directed to the direction in which the swing member support portion 341d of the lever member 340 is pressed down about the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of a load toward the eccentric cam member 333 due to the pushing operation of the swing operation member 310.

  When the swing operation member 310 is pushed in, the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 form an angle θ2. Since the angle θ2 is larger than the angle θ1, the directional component of the vibration of the vibration device 366 along the straight line L2 can be reduced as compared with the state of FIG. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed by pushing the swing operation member 310.

  In addition, the directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2 can be increased. Therefore, the lever member 340 can be easily swung counterclockwise in FIG. 22B by utilizing the reaction of the vibration, and the vibration mode felt by the player pushing the swinging operation member 310 is changed. A plurality of types of vibrations, that is, a vibration in a linear direction along the straight line L1 and a vibration in which the swinging operation member 310 rotates around the shaft support rod 363 can be caused to appear.

  FIG. 23A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 23B is a cross-section of the operation device 300 along the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc in FIG. FIG. FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the main body member 341 is pulled off from the peeling member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is pressed down in a state where the swinging of the peeling member 350 is restricted by the lock member 336. A sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

  In the state shown in FIG. 22, a load equal to or more than a predetermined amount (a load equal to or more than the attraction force due to magnetic force) is applied in the direction in which the lens member 317 is pushed in, or a load equal to or more than a predetermined amount (in the direction in which the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down). The main body member 341 is pulled off from the magnet member 354 by applying a load equal to or more than the attraction force, and the swing operation member 310 moves to the state shown in FIG. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a large load from being applied between the lock member 336 and the peeling member 350, and to prevent the lock member 336 and the peeling member 350 from being damaged.

  The eccentric cam member 333 is disposed on the opposite side of the direction in which the lever member 340 moves when the swing operation member 310 is pressed down. Since no load is transmitted, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 23B, by moving the sensor detecting piece 343b from the gap between the second sensor members 325a2, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

  In this case, the attraction force due to the magnetic force generated between the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341 suddenly disappears, and the swinging operation member 310 moves vigorously downward. For this reason, the lever member 340 may swing excessively, and a load may be generated on the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 310 is pressed down, the rear side frame member 311 and the front cover 321 of the swing operation member 310 are arranged to face each other and are brought into contact with each other. Even in the case of excessive rotation, the load can be reduced by deforming the rear frame member 311 or the front cover. This can prevent the lever member 340 from being damaged.

  When the player releases the load applied downward from the state shown in FIG. 23A, the main body member 341 is pivoted clockwise by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 in FIG. Is adsorbed to the peeling member 350 again. Thereby, the posture (arrangement) of the lever member 340 (and the main body member 341) can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

  Since the peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331d1, which is the swing axis of the main body member 341, in a state where the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, the weight of the peeling member 350 increases. Does not move in the moving direction.

  That is, the weight balance of the main body member 341 before and after the lever support shaft 331d1 changes between a state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and a state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled from the main body member 341. That is, when the peeling member 350 is pulled off, the moment in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310 applied to the main body member 341 becomes larger. Thus, after the peeling member 350 is peeled, the speed at which the main body member 341 rises can be reduced, so that the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be suppressed. Can be.

  Further, since the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section and the peeling member 350 moves in a manner of entering from the U-shaped open side of the main body member 341 to the U-shaped closed side, the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 When frictional resistance is generated between the main body member 341 and the separation member 350, the speed at which the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be reduced.

  Since the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is transmitted to the main body member 341 and transmitted to the peeling member 350, the locking member 336 or the eccentric cam is kept in a state where the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are pulled apart. It is possible to prevent the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 from acting on the member 333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged in a state where the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are separated from each other.

  Since the peeling member 350 is fixed to the eccentric cam member 333 and the lock member 336 in the state of FIG. 23A, the sensor detecting piece 343b enters the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 again, and It is possible to detect that the member 341 and the peeling member 350 are attracted.

  FIGS. 24A and 24B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. Note that FIG. 24A illustrates a state in which the lock member 336 has been swung to the release side (clockwise in FIG. 24A) from the state of FIG. 22A, and FIG. The state where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated by about 180 degrees from the state of FIG. 24A and the lever member 340 is swung is illustrated. Also, the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pressed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  When the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 enters the gap between the sensor members 331f, it is possible to detect that the lock member 336 swings to the release side. After detecting that the lock member 336 swings to the release side, the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) of the first drive device 335 is rotated to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 and swing the lever member 340. Can be done. Note that the eccentric cam member 333 may be continuously rotated in one direction, or the rotation direction may be switched halfway.

  While the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating, the lever member 340 is urged in a direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 24A) pressed against the eccentric cam member 333 by the torsion spring SP1. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in conjunction with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. Thereby, it is possible to easily attract the player's attention to the swing operation member 310.

  When the vibration device 366 operates in the state shown in FIG. 24A or FIG. 24B, the reaction of the vibration acts in a direction to push down the main body member 341 along the straight line L1. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 due to the reaction of the vibration, so that it is possible to suppress the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 due to the operation of the vibration device 366.

  Consider a case where the lens member 317 is pushed in. Assuming that the direction of the load applied to the lens member 317 is along the straight line L1 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the lever member 340 is moved downward (FIG. 24 ( a) There is a possibility of swinging (counterclockwise) or a swing operation of the swinging operation member 310 (clockwise in FIG. 24A).

  In this embodiment, in any case, since a load is applied to swing the lever member 340 in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333, the load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the lens member 317 in. Can be suppressed. Thereby, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

  FIGS. 25A and 25B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 25A shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 has been rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 from the state of FIG. 24B, and FIG. The state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise by the predetermined angle θ3 from the state shown in FIG. 3 is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. In FIGS. 25A and 25B, the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pressed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  In the present embodiment, since the swing member 360 is urged forward (in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 25), the player can easily grip the swing operation member 310 and perform the downward operation. That is, when a force is applied in the direction M1 (see FIG. 25A) from the state of FIG. 24B to push down the swing operation member 310, the swing operation member 310 is swung (the shaft support rod). The swing operation member 310 can be immediately pushed down without performing the operation of swinging about the center 363).

  Here, if the lever member 340 can be separated from the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 can be urged from a position separated from the eccentric cam member 333 to collide with the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 25 (a) and FIG. 25 (b), since the swing operation member 310 can be pushed up from the position of the imaginary line to the position of the solid line), the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 333 is made hollow so that the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged. That is, the load from the lever member 340 is received by the elastic deformation of the eccentric cam member 333, and the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged.

  As described above, the eccentric cam member 333 can rotate the lever member 340 by continuously rotating regardless of the rotation direction. Here, the characteristics of the rotation direction will be described.

  FIG. 25A shows the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A) (hereinafter, this phase is referred to as a “retreat phase”). Shows the rotation angle of. That is, in order to rotate from the evacuation phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 in FIG. 25A, it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ1 by clockwise rotation.

  FIG. 25B shows the rotation angle from the phase (retreat phase) of the eccentric cam member 333 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A). That is, in order to rotate from the retreating phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 in FIG. 25B, it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ2 by counterclockwise rotation. Here, the angle φ1 is smaller than the angle φ2 (φ1 <φ2).

  Assuming that the eccentric cam member 333 rotates at a constant speed, the direction in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted phase is the direction in which the lever member 340 is biased by the torsion spring SP1 and the rotational direction of the eccentric cam member 333. Can be made shorter than when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise (when the angle is φ2).

  Further, when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted position, the lever member 340 is rotated in a state where the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 and the direction in which the lever member 340 is biased by the torsion spring SP1 are opposed to each other. The position where the eccentric cam member 333 and the eccentric cam member 333 abut can be brought closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 (the position where the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 abut in FIG. 25 (a) and the eccentric cam in FIG. 25 (b)). (It can be closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 than the position where the member 333 and the lever member 340 contact each other.) In this case, if the same torque is applied to the lever member 340, the load generated at the position where the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 contact each other is reduced. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 can be reduced, so that the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, since a large load may be applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by the player lifting the swing operation member 310, the eccentric cam member 333 is continuously rotated in the same direction. In this case, it is preferable to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise in FIG. In this case, when the rib 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates within the angle range of the angle φ2 in FIG. 25B, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 from the lever member 340 is suppressed (the lever support shaft). Since the distance from 331d1 to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member becomes longer), even if the eccentric cam member 333 moves in the direction approaching the lever member 340, the possibility that the eccentric cam member 333 is damaged is reduced. Can be lower.

  On the other hand, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates within the angle range of the angle φ1 in FIG. 25A, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 increases (from the lever support shaft 331d1). (The distance to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 is shortened.) However, since the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating in the direction away from the lever member 340, the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 are The load generated on the eccentric cam member 333 at the contact position can be suppressed, and the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved. It is not necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 in the same direction, and the eccentric cam member 333 may perform a reciprocating rotation operation (reversal operation) on the angle φ1 side or the angle φ2 side.

  FIGS. 26A and 26B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. 26A shows a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is swung in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 26A) from the state in FIG. 24B, and FIG. 26A illustrates a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated to the retreat phase from the state of FIG. 26A and the lever member 340 is swung until it comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333, and a cross section of the swing operation member 310 is illustrated. The vision is omitted.

  Here, when the operation of pushing down the lever member 340 is exclusively required while the lever member 340 is rocked by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the posture of the lever member 340 changes as shown in FIG. Without this, the swing operation member 310 does not normally swing backward (clockwise in FIG. 26A). Therefore, by detecting that the back button member 312d has been pressed, it is possible to detect that the player has performed an erroneous operation (an operation of lifting the swinging operation member 310).

  In this case, a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 through the lever member 340. Since the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged, the eccentric cam member 333 is driven by the driving force of the driving gear 335b until the retreat phase as shown in FIG. Can be prevented.

  At this time, by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise in FIG. 26B, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated more safely. That is, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated while the contact position between the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 is separated from the lever support shaft 331d1, which is compared with the case where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise. Thus, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

  FIGS. 27A and 27B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 27A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pressed down from the state in FIG. 24A, and FIG. 27B illustrates a state in which the swing operation is performed from the state in FIG. FIG. 27A shows a state in which the member 310 is swung clockwise about the shaft support rod 363 in FIG. 27A, and the sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

  When a force is applied in the direction D1 shown in FIG. 27A from the state of FIG. 24A, the swing operation member 310 can be pushed down together with the lever member 340. Next, when a force is applied along the direction D2 opposite to the direction D1 from the state of FIG. 27A, the posture of the lever member 340 is maintained, and the swing operation member 310 is pivoted about the pivot rod 363. Can be rocked. As described above, since a series of operations can be performed by reversing the direction of the force without requiring two types of operations (operations of different modes such as pushing and rotating), the operation of the operation device 300 can be performed. Can be easy.

  During this operation, since the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 function as rigid bodies (the state fixed by the attraction force of the magnet member 354 is maintained), it is possible to suppress a change in the operational feeling felt by the player, Operability of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the swing operation member 310 is swung, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344, so that the lever member 340 is moved in the direction opposite to that of FIG. The load is applied in the clockwise direction. This allows the lever member 340 to be easily fixed to the position of FIG. 27A when the swing operation member 310 is swung, and holds the swing operation member 310 in the state of FIG. 27B. Can be made easier.

  Next, an operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 has the center portion. It is formed as a separate member from the main body member 2333a to be supported and the cam member 2333b to be supported eccentrically. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the second embodiment, the urging force acts in the direction in which the lever member 2340 is raised from the torsion spring SP21, and the head swing operation member 310 is rotated backward from the torsion spring SP22 (clockwise in FIG. 28A). Energizing force works.

  The torsion spring SP21 is wound around the shaft supporting portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of which is in contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 9) from above, and the other end of the torsion spring member 346. Touched from below. Thus, the lever member 2340 is urged in a direction in which the swing operation member 310 is raised.

  The torsion spring SP22 is supported by being wound around the buffer member 364 (see FIG. 12), and one end is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 2362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP22 urges the swing member 2360 in a direction in which it rotates backward with respect to the main body member 341 (clockwise in FIG. 28A).

  FIGS. 28A and 28B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. 28 (a) and 28 (b) show a state in which the rocking of the lever member 2340 is restricted by the lock member 2336. In FIG. 28 (b), the neck is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 28 (a). A state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung rearward about the pivot 363 is illustrated. In the present embodiment, the state of FIG. 28A is the initial position, and in FIG. 28A, the posture P21 in which the swinging operation member 310 is swung by the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Is done. FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. However, since the appearance is the same as the operation device 2300, the operation device 300 will be described as the operation device 2300. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the vibration device 2366 is a device for operating a pair of members mutually in a manner of moving the pair of members close to and away from each other in a linear direction by electromagnetic force. A bobbin member 2366a, which is a tubular member around which a copper wire is wound, and a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a and an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a. And a pressing member 2366b in which the cylinders are coaxially arranged and connected by a disk-shaped plate. The inner cylinder of the pressing member 2366b is formed of a magnetic material.

  The bobbin member 2366a and the pressing member 2366b are smaller in length in the radial direction than the bobbin member 366a and the pressing member 366b in the first embodiment, and the central axis C21 of the vibration device 2366 is located on the front side from the shaft support rod 363 (FIG. 28). (A) on the left side.

  Here, when the swing operation member 310 is provided as an operation unit at the end of the lever member 2340 as in the present embodiment, it may be required for the player to perform the holding in the effect. However, it was difficult to detect whether the player held the swing operation member 310. For example, it is possible to request that the push button be pressed for a long time.However, when requesting operation of the push button is frequently used, it is necessary to push the push button every time with a force greater than the reaction force of the push button. May be stressful.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the central axis of the vibration device 2366 is spaced apart from the front side of the shaft support rod 363, the oscillation member 2360 reciprocates and swings due to the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 2366. The posture of the swing operation member 310 changes in a manner of reciprocatingly swinging between the posture shown in FIG. 28A and the posture P21. Accordingly, before the player grips the swing operation member 310, the back button member 312d reciprocates in the pushing direction (the direction parallel to the center axis C21), so that the back button member 312d is moved to the second sensor member 313d (FIG. 20). ), It is possible to detect that the player is before gripping the swing operation member 310.

  On the other hand, when the player grips the swing operation member 310, the posture of the intermediate frame member 312 is fixed by the gripping force, and the back button member 312d does not reciprocate, so that the signal detected by the second sensor member 313d is detected. Pattern changes. By detecting this change, it is possible to detect that the player has gripped the swing operation member 310.

  When the swing operation member 310 is gripped, there is no reaction force generated, so that the force required for the player is small. In addition, the player only needs to cover the swing operation member 310 with the hand of the player (the player can immediately operate the swing operation member 310). For example, the player places his or her own weight on the intermediate frame member 312. Alone, it is possible to reduce the stress on the player.

  Thus, whether or not the player is holding the swinging operation member 310 (whether or not the operation is in the preparation stage) can be performed without requiring the player to operate the push button, and the effect is advanced. The timing can be set to the timing when the player grips the swing operation member 310, and the stress on the player due to requesting the operation of the push button can be eliminated.

  When the connection between the lever member 2340 and the oscillating member 2360 is pivotally supported, the center axis of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 and the rotation axis of the oscillating member 2360 are matched to increase the vibration transmitted to the player. be able to. On the other hand, in this case, large vibration is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, there is a problem that the loosening of the fastening screws and the deterioration of the members occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is used to rotate the vibration operation member 310 by shifting the rotation axis of the vibration member 2360 and the central axis of the vibration of the vibration device 2366. The vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) can be reduced (the energy of the vibration is used for rotating the swing operation member 310). In addition, the lens member 317 can be vibrated while rotating the swing operation member 310 by the vibration of the vibration device 2366, so that the effect can be improved.

  The rod-shaped member 2331d includes a lock release shaft 2331d5 (see FIG. 28A) extending in parallel with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2.

  FIGS. 29A and 29B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. Note that FIG. 29A illustrates a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down while the lock member 2336 is arranged on the release side and is arranged at a downward position. FIG. 29B illustrates a state in which the swinging operation member 310 has been rotated from the state illustrated in FIG. 29A to the end of rotation in the forward rotation direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29A).

  Since the swing operation member 310 is urged backward by the torsion spring SP22 (clockwise direction in FIG. 29A), the swing operation member 310 is held until the lever member 2340 is disposed at the lower end of the swing range. Is kept pressed against the upper cover member 344.

  When a load is further applied to the swing operation member 310 in a direction in which the lever member 2340 is pushed down to the lower end of the swing range (see FIG. 29A), the swing operation member 310 is further pushed down. It rotates in the forward rotation direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29A). This allows the player to recognize the lower end of the operation of pushing down the swinging operation member 310, and does not know the end of the operation range of the swinging operation member 310. Applying a load can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 that transmits the driving force to the lever member 2340 and the lock release cam member 2339 that swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side (see FIG. 29A) are both driven. It is rotated by the gear 335b. This eliminates the necessity of disposing the second drive device 337 (see FIG. 10), and can reduce the product cost. Hereinafter, the eccentric cam member 2333, the lock release cam member 2339, and the lock member 2336 will be described.

  FIG. 30A is a front view of the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30B is a side view of the cam member 2333b as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXb of FIG. (C) is a front view of the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (d) is a side view of the main body member 2333a when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXd of FIG. 30 (c). 30 (c) and 30 (d), the main body member 2333a is partially viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, the cam member 2333b has a cylindrical portion 2333b1 supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) and a circle inscribed in the cylindrical portion 2333b1. A cam portion 2333b2 extending in the axial direction along the axis and formed slightly shorter than the cylindrical portion 2333b1 and having a hollow inside, and a pair of cutouts cut along the axial direction at the tip of the cylindrical portion 2333b1 The notch 2333b3, the plate-like rib portion 2333b4 connecting the cylindrical portion 2333b1 and the cam portion 2333b2 in a direction passing through both axes, and the rib portion 2333b4 is provided to project from the rib portion 2333b4 in parallel with the axis of the cylindrical portion 2333b1. And a projection portion 2333b5.

  The protruding portion 2333b5 is a projection that is disposed at a position radially separated from the cylindrical portion 2333b1 by the length of the radius R21 and inserted into the annular concave portion 2333a3 of the main body member 2333a, and is formed of a magnetic material. It is bonded to the rib portion 2333b4 with an adhesive or the like. In addition, the protruding portion 2333b5 has a side surface (upper and lower side surfaces in FIG. 30 (a)) arranged in a manner intersecting with the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 2333b1 and a curved surface shape following a circular shape centered on the cylindrical portion 2333b1. Is formed.

  Note that the cylindrical portion 2333b1 corresponds to the cylindrical portion 333b, the cam portion 2333b2 corresponds to the cam portion 333c, the notch 2333b3 corresponds to the notch 333d, and the rib portion 2333b4 corresponds to the rib portion 333e. Since the technical ideas are common, the description is omitted here.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 (c) and 30 (d), the main body member 2333a is provided with a shaft hole 2333a2 having a circular cross section supported at the center by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10). A disk-shaped disk portion 2333a1 in which gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) are formed on the outer peripheral surface, and along the axial direction of the shaft hole 2333a2 from the front side of the disk portion 2333a1. An annular concave portion 2333a3 mainly provided with an annular concave portion, and a fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in which a magnetic material is annularly disposed along the outer peripheral surface of the annular concave portion 2333a3.

  In the annular concave portion 2333a3, the distance from the center of the shaft hole 2333a2 to the inner peripheral surface of the annular concave portion 2333a3 is the length of the radius R22, and the radial width is slightly larger than the thickness of the convex portion 2333b5. In the present embodiment, the radius R22 has the same length as the deformation R21 (radius R21 = radius R22). Further, the depth of the annular recess 2333a3 is longer than the length of the projection 2333b5.

  Here, since the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the annular concave portion 2333a3, the cam member 2333b is moved from the lever member 2340 when the convex portion 2333b5 is provided above the tubular portion 2333b1. When receiving an overload, the cam member 2333b receives a load in a direction in which the protruding portion 2333b5 is released from the fixed magnet portion 2333a4. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the protruding portion 2333b5 from being pressed against the fixed magnet portion 2333a4, and it is possible to suppress deterioration due to friction between the magnets.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are assembled, FIG. 31A is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. FIG. 31A is a side view of the eccentric cam member 2333 as viewed in the XXXXb direction, and FIG. 31C is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333. FIG. 31C illustrates a state in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are relatively rotated from the state illustrated in FIG. 31A. At D12 (b), the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are partially viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), in a state where the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 and assembled, the projecting portion 2333b5 is circular. The magnetic force is inserted into the annular concave portion 2333a3, and a magnetic force acts between the convex portion 2333b5 and the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 so as to attract each other. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b can be integrally rotated by the driving force transmitted from the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 10).

  At this time, the shape of the projecting portion 2333b5 is formed by a curved surface along a circle centered on the cylindrical portion 2333b1, and the area of contact with the side surface of the annular recess 2333a3 can be increased. The member 2333b can be firmly fixed.

  On the other hand, since the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are merely attracted and fixed by magnetic force, when the cam member 2333b receives a load with a force greater than the attracting force, the cam member 2333b slides on the main body member 2333a. Can be made. That is, as shown in FIG. 31A, the main body member 2333a is shifted from the state in which the reference line O representing the reference phase of the main body member 2333a coincides with the straight line Q21 representing the phase of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b. By applying a load in the rotating direction to the fixed cam member 2333b, the reference line O and the straight line Q21 can be changed to a state where the straight line Q21 is displaced as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 32A is a front view of the unlocking cam member 2339, and FIG. 32B is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member 2339 in the XXXIIb direction of FIG. 32) is a side view of the unlocking cam member 2339 when viewed in the XXXIIc direction of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the unlocking cam member 2339 is formed to have the same size as the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and has gear teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface thereof so as to mesh with the driving gear 335b. Portion 2339a, a shaft hole 2339b formed at the center of the main body 2339a and through which the unlocking shaft 2331d5 is inserted, and extending radially outward along the front side surface of the main body 2339a. A release portion 2339c formed to have a length capable of contacting the locking portion 2666d of the lock member 2336, and a detection piece extending radially outward at a position 90 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the release portion 2339c. 2339d.

  The detection piece 2339d passes through a gap between the detection sensors (not shown). Thus, the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 can be detected.

  FIG. 33 (a) is a front view of the lock member 2336, and FIG. 33 (b) is a side view of the lock member 2336 as viewed in the XXXIIIb direction of FIG. 33 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, the lock member 2336 has a shape in which the gear 336d (see FIG. 10) is omitted. The lock member 2336 is a member for preventing the swing of the lever member 2340, and is formed in a plate-shaped main body 2336a having a substantially L-shaped hook at the distal end and a base end of the main body 2336a. A shaft support hole 2336b through which the lock shaft 331d3 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, a guide hole 2336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 2336b, and a lock release cam member of the main body 2336a Mainly includes a locking portion 2336d protruding above the shaft support hole 2336b (the tip of the L-shaped hook-shaped portion) from the side surface on the side (the left side in FIG. 33B) facing the 2339.

  The body portion 2336a has a large force to rotate the lock member 2336 when the side surface of the tip portion formed in an L-shaped hook shape (the side surface that comes into contact with the lower side of the lever member 2340) comes into contact with the lever member 2340. It is an aspect.

  The guide hole 2336c is a long hole into which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 (see FIG. 10) is inserted. The swing end of the lock member 2336 can be defined by the length of the guide hole 2336c.

  The locking portion 2336c is a portion pressed from the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 (see FIG. 32). In addition, a torsion spring (not shown) is locked to the locking portion 2336c, and the lock member 2336 receives an urging force toward the fixed side (see FIG. 28A) from beginning to end.

  34 and 35 are front views of the lever member 2340, the eccentric cam member 2333, the lock member 2336, and the lock release cam member 2339, which illustrate in a time series that the lever member 2340 swings by the rotation of the drive gear 335b. It is.

  Note that FIG. 34A illustrates a state in which the swinging of the lever member 2340 is restricted by the lock member 2336. In FIG. 34B, the lock release cam member 2339 is changed from the state illustrated in FIG. FIG. 34C illustrates a state where the lock member 2336 is rotated until the lock member 2336 is released from the state illustrated in FIG. 34B. FIG. 34D illustrates a state in which the lock release cam member 2339 is rotated from the state illustrated in FIG. 34C and the lock member 2336 returns to the fixed side position.

  FIG. 35 (a) shows a state in which the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 contacts the lever member 2340 on the side opposite to the cylindrical portion 2333b1 (the side disposed at an angle of 180 degrees). 35 (b), the state where the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of FIG. 35 (a) and the lever member 2340 abuts on the lock member 2336 from the upper side, and in FIG. 35 (c), FIG. The state where the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of (b) and the swing of the lever member 2340 is restricted by the lock member 2336 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when it is necessary to rotate the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 by the angle θ21 before coming into contact with the locking portion of the lock member 2336, the lock release cam member 2339 is rotated by the angle θ21. 34B, the swing of the lever member 2340 is restricted, so that the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 cannot rotate. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b, which rotate in synchronization with the lock release cam member 2339, relatively rotate from the state shown in FIG. 34A by the angle θ21 (see FIG. 34B).

  As described above, since the cam member 2333b is rotatable relative to the main body member 2333a, even when the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlocking cam member 2339 are assembled out of phase, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 causes the lever member to rotate. The drive motor 335a (see FIG. 10) can be prevented from being damaged by being dammed by 2340.

  After the lock release cam member 2339 rotates by the angle θ21, the lock release cam member 2339 starts to move the lock member 2336 to the release side, so that the swing of the lever member 2340 can be released. The rotation causes the lever member 2340 to swing. In this case, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are attracted by magnetic force and rotate integrally.

  When the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 comes out above the lock member 2336 and the lock member 2336 returns to the fixed side (see FIG. 34D), the rear end of the lever member 2340 regardless of the timing thereafter. (FIG. 34 (a) right end portion) pushes the curved surface portion of the hook-shaped portion of the main body portion 2336a of the lock member 2336, thereby pushing the lock member 2336 to the release side, and further lowering the rear end portion of the lever member 2340. The swing is naturally regulated.

  Therefore, for example, when the player operates the swinging operation member 310 in the lifting direction and the rear end of the lever member 2340 descends, regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (FIG. 34D) Regardless of the posture shown in FIG. 35A or FIG. 35B, the swing is restricted by swinging the lever member 2340 to below the hook-like portion of the lock member 2336.

  Here, as a countermeasure against the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts the swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), the eccentric cam member 2333 is formed of an elastic material such as rubber, and the member is made of an elastic material. A method of releasing the load by deforming is considered. However, in this case, there has been a problem that the member is sagged or the shape is changed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the player lifting the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). This can prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged.

  That is, irrespective of the posture of the lever member 2340 (regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 shown in FIG. 34 (d), FIG. 35 (a) or FIG. 35 (b)), the swing operation member 310 (FIG. 28), the lever member 2340 pushes the cam member 2333b (slids against the main body member 2333a), and the lever member 2340 swings below the hook-like portion of the lock member 2336. The swing is regulated by being moved.

  On the other hand, in this case, although the posture of the cam member 2333b is the same (see FIG. 35 (c)), the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 is different (FIGS. 34 (d) and 35 (a)). Or, see FIG. 35 (b)). Therefore, the rotation angle of the drive gear 335b required until the lock release cam member 2339 moves the lock member 2336 to the release side again differs, and it becomes difficult to determine the timing of starting the drive of the lever member 2340. was there.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 can be matched by detecting the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 with a detection sensor (not shown). That is, when the rocking of the lever member 2340 is restricted by the locking member 2336, the arrangement of the cam member 2333b is fixed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 35 (c). In this state, the drive gear 335b is rotated to lock the cam member 2333b. By rotating the release cam member 2339 to a predetermined phase (see FIG. 34B), the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 can be matched.

  This allows the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 to match each other regardless of the timing at which the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). The drive start timing can be easily matched.

  Next, the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 36A to 36C are front views of the main body member 2361 of the swinging member 2360 illustrated in the axial direction of the shaft support rod 363. Note that FIG. 36A illustrates a state in which the main body member 2361 is swingably disposed at the rear end on the backward rotation side (see FIG. 28A), and FIG. A state in which the main body member 2361 is oscillated (see FIG. 28B) is shown. In FIG. 36C, the main body member 2361 is moved along the longitudinal direction of the long hole 2361f from the state shown in FIG. 36B. 2 shows a state in which the sliding movement has been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the main body member 2361 is a member coaxial with the shaft hole 341e (see FIG. 12) and supported by the shaft support rod 363, and the shape of the side wall portion 361a (see FIG. 12) is slightly deformed. The fixed side wall portion 2361a, the elongated hole 2361f formed along the extending direction of the fixed plate portion 361e from the shaft hole 361c, and the fixed plate portion 361e extending from the upper end of the angle regulating hole 361d. And a long hole 2361g formed along the direction.

  As a result, as long as at least the main body member 2361 is not pivotally arranged at the end on the forward rotation side, the shaft support rod 363 and the restriction rod 365 are disposed so as not to enter the long holes 2361f and 2361g. Therefore, the main body member 2361 performs only the swing operation about the pivot 363.

  Next, the motor fixing plate 2362 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 (a) is a top view of the motor fixing plate 2362, FIG. 37 (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 in the XXXVIIb direction of FIG. 37 (a), and FIG. FIG. 38 is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 showing a state where the U-shaped member 2362d is slid from the state shown in FIG. 37 (b). 37B and 37C, the outer shape of the main body member 2361 is shown by imaginary lines in FIG. 37 (b) and FIG. 37 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 37, the motor fixing plate 2362 includes a main body 2362a and a side wall 2362b formed by extending the main body 362a and the side wall 362b rearward (upward in FIG. 37), and a bottom of the main body 2362a. A pair of rod portions 2362c extending downward from the side, a U-shaped member 2362d which is slidably disposed on the rod portions 2362c and has a crotch width larger than the width of the long holes 2361f and 2361g; Mainly equipped.

  The side wall portion 2362b includes a long hole 2362b1 that is formed along the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a.

  The U-shaped member 2362d is disposed in such a manner that the direction of the U-shaped crotch width is along the width direction of the long holes 2361f and 2361g, and is urged away from the main body 2362a by an elastic spring or the like (not shown). Is done. That is, when no load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. 37 (b), and the U-shaped legs overlap the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. In addition, it is possible to prevent the shaft support rod 363 and the restriction rod 365 from moving along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

  On the other hand, when a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d in a direction approaching the main body 2362a, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. Since it overlaps with the long holes 2361f and 2361g, the shaft support rod 363 and the restriction rod 365 can be moved along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

  That is, by switching whether or not to apply a load to the U-shaped member 2362d, it can be switched whether or not the main body member 2361 can be moved along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

  Here, a member that slides the U-shaped member 2362d will be described. In the present embodiment, a plate-shaped first release member 2370 disposed slidably along the longitudinal direction inside the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 and a back side frame member 311 of the swing operation member 310 are provided. A plate-shaped second release member 2380 that is slidably disposed in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the main body 2362a through the provided through-hole.

  Note that the first release member 2370 is provided so as to be able to slide the U-shaped member 2362d on the rear side (the right side in FIG. 28A), and the second release member 2380 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 28A). The character member 2362d is slidably provided.

  In addition, the first release member 2370 pushes the U-shaped member 2362d when the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 2340, so that the main body member 351 contacts the end of the first release member 2370. Shaped. The second release member 2380 is configured such that the front swinging operation member 310 is disposed at the downward position, and the front swinging member 2360 is rotated to be disposed at the end of the swing in the forward rotation direction. The U-shaped member 2362d is brought into contact with the end portion and is pushed.

  For example, in the state shown in FIG. 29B, the U-shaped member 2362d on the front side (left side in FIG. 29A) is slid while the U-shaped member on the rear side (right side in FIG. 29A) is slid. Since 2362d is not slid, the swing operation member 310 cannot be slid downward.

  FIGS. 38A and 38B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 38A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state illustrated in FIG. FIG. 38B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is slid along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g from the state illustrated in FIG. 38A.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the peeling member 350 is pulled off from the main body member 341, and the swinging operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position and rotated and arranged at the end of the swing in the forward rotation direction. Thus, the pair of U-shaped members 2362d is slid and the swing operation member 310 can slide along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

  At this time, the body member 341 of the lever member 2340 has already overloaded the swing operation member 310 due to the peeling member 350 being pulled off, and the swing operation member 310 swings to the lower end of the swing range. In addition, a downward force is further applied to the swing operation member 310. Therefore, the player does not necessarily apply an overload when operating the swing operation member 310, and may determine that the swing operation member 310 is being destroyed regardless of the operation. it can.

  Therefore, for example, by detecting the state shown in FIG. 38B by a detection sensor (not shown) and issuing an alarm, it is possible to prevent the player from overloading the swinging operation member 310. However, it is possible to prevent the operation device 2300 from being destroyed.

  In addition, when the overload is not applied to the swing operation member 310, the slide movement of the swing operation member 310 can be prevented. Therefore, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 310 is improved by the long holes 2361f and 2361g. It can be prevented from changing.

  Next, an operation device 3300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described where the driving force for driving the lever member 340 is transmitted to the lever member 340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1, but the operating device 3300 in the third embodiment drives the lever member 3340. The driving force to be transmitted is transmitted in front of the lever support shaft 331d1. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the third embodiment, an urging force is exerted from the torsion spring SP31 in a direction to cause the lever member 3340 to fall forward, and an urging force is exerted from the torsion spring SP32 to a direction to cause the swinging operation member 310 to fall backward.

  The torsion spring SP31 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of which is in contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 10) from above, and the other end of the torsion spring member 346. It is abutted from above. Accordingly, the lever member 340 is urged in a direction in which the swing operation member 310 falls forward.

  The torsion spring SP32 is supported by being wrapped around the buffer member 364, and has one end locked to the front curved surface portion 345c and the other end locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP32 urges the swing member 360 in a direction in which the swing member 360 rises with respect to the main body member 341.

  FIGS. 39A and 39B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 according to the third embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. 39 (a) and 39 (b) show a state in which the rocking of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the lock member 336. In FIG. 39 (b), the neck is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a). A state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung forward about the pivot 363 is illustrated. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 39A is the initial position. Also, although the operation device 300 is illustrated in FIG. 17A, the appearance is the same, so that the description will be made assuming the operation device 3300. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the operation device 3300 in the present embodiment does not include the eccentric cam member 333, and the driving of the lever member 3340 is performed by a solenoid mechanism described later. Hereinafter, the solenoid mechanism will be described.

  The solenoid mechanism includes a magnetic member 3339 formed of a magnetic material disposed inside the inner cover member 3330, and a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member 3345f fixed to the lever member 3340. .

  The lower cover member 3345 of the lever member 3340 includes a pair of transmission portions 3345e extending rearward and downward from the left and right ends of the rear guide portion 345a and molded integrally with the lower cover member 3345. A metal rod-shaped member 3345f is fixed to the end in a posture parallel to the lever support shaft 331d1, and current is conducted to the rod-shaped member 3345f.

  The magnetic material 3339 is a U-shaped magnet that extends from the front side wall of the inner cover member 3330 to the back side (the right side in FIG. 39A) in a pair of upper and lower sides. In the present embodiment, the upper arm 3339n disposed on the upper side has an N pole, and the lower arm 3339s disposed on the lower side has an S pole. The lower surface of the upper arm 3339n and the upper surface of the lower arm 3339s are arranged with a slight gap in the vertical direction from the locus of the movement of the bar-shaped member 3345f with the swing of the lever member 3340. Therefore, when the lever member 3340 swings, it is possible to prevent the rod-shaped member 3345f from colliding with the magnetic member 3339.

  Here, for example, when an electric current is applied to the bar-shaped member 3345f toward the near side in FIG. 39A, an electromagnetic force is generated to move the bar-shaped member 3345f rearward (to the right in FIG. 39A). When a current is applied in the opposite direction, an electromagnetic force is generated to move the rod-shaped member 3345f forward (to the left in FIG. 39A). The lever member 3340 can be swung by these electromagnetic forces.

  FIG. 40A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 3300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 40A illustrates a state in which the lock member 336 is arranged on the release side, the lever member 3340 is swung by the urging force, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position.

  In this embodiment, since the lever member 3340 is urged forward by the torsion spring SP1, the lever member 3340 can be started to swing by disposing the lock member 336 on the release side.

  As in the present embodiment, when the lever member 3340 is urged in the direction of falling forward, when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310, the eccentricity that drives the lever member 3340 to the side closer to the lever member 3340 is used. It is necessary to arrange the cam member, and there is a problem that the eccentric cam member is easily damaged by the operation of the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member is omitted, and the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 3340 by the solenoid mechanism. Since the magnetic member 3339 constituting the solenoid mechanism is disposed in such a manner as to leave a slight gap from the movement trajectory of the rod member 3345f constituting the solenoid mechanism, it is possible to suppress the collision between the rod member 3345f and the magnetic member 3339. Then, it is possible to prevent the solenoid mechanism from being damaged when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310.

  FIG. 40B is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 3300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. Note that FIG. 40B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state illustrated in FIG. 39B and the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are separated.

  Since the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is directed in the direction in which the lever member 3340 falls forward (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 40B), even if the player releases his / her hand from the state in FIG. The swing operation member 310 does not immediately move upward, but is maintained in place.

  Here, assuming that the biasing direction of the lever member 340 is the rising direction, when the player overloads the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 is separated from the peeling member 350 and the lock member 336 is damaged. Even if the player can release the hand, the swinging operation member 310 rises as soon as the player releases his hand, so the player does not notice that the player is overloading and repeatedly applies the overload to the swinging operation member 310. There was a problem that there was a risk of calling.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the direction of the urging of the lever member 3340 is directed to the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 40B), the swing operation member 310 is directed downward. Can be kept in place. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player repeatedly applies an overload to the swing operation member 310.

  In the present embodiment, a rod-shaped member 3345f that receives an electromagnetic force for driving the lever member 3340 operates integrally with the main body member 341. That is, in a state where the main body member 341 is separated from the peeling member 350, the main body member 341 can be swung by the electromagnetic force applied to the rod-shaped member 3345f.

  Here, when the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 340 (see FIG. 10) by the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10), when the eccentric cam member 333 is disposed below the peeling member 350, the lever member is turned by the lock member 336. When the swing of the 340 is regulated, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 is also regulated at the same time (see FIG. 18A). Therefore, when the swing of the lever member 340 is restricted by the lock member 336, when the eccentric cam member 333 operates, there is a problem that a load is applied to the lock member 336 and the lock member 336 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the rocking of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the lock member 336, the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving the electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 can be rocked. On the other hand, no driving force is transmitted to the peeling member 350.

  Therefore, even when a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f when the rocking of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the lock member 336, the electromagnetic force generated at that time is used for the rocking of the main body member 341 and the rocking of the peeling member 350 is performed. Since it is not used for movement, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 from being damaged.

  FIGS. 41A and 41B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. Note that FIG. 41A illustrates a state where the lever member 3340 is swung in a rising direction from the state illustrated in FIG. 40B, and FIG. 41B illustrates a state illustrated in FIG. 41A. , The state where the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving an electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 of the lever member 3340 can be swung. Here, when the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10) is disposed below the peeling member 350 and the lever member 3340 is driven by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 is moved from the peeling member 350 to the lever member 340. The main body member 341 cannot be driven in a state where the main body member 341 is peeled off (see FIG. 23B).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the driving force is not transmitted to the main body member 341 via the peeling member 350, but the electromagnetic force received by the rod-shaped member 3345f is transmitted to the main body member 341 via the transmission portion 3345e. The main body member 341 is driven. Therefore, even when the position of the peeling member 350 is fixed, the main body member 341 can be swung.

  The body member 341 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 40B toward the back side of FIG. 40B through the rod-shaped member 3345f until the transmission portion 3345e changes its posture by the angle α31, thereby changing the main body member 341 to the state shown in FIG. 41 (a) until the transmitting portion 3345e changes its posture by the angle α32 from the state shown in FIG. 41 (a), by flowing a current toward the back side of FIG. 41 (a). The main body member 341 can be in the state shown in FIG.

  By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the posture of the main body member 341 can be repeatedly changed between the state of FIG. 41 (a) and the state of FIG. 41 (b). Accordingly, a fluttering operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300 can be performed.

  In addition, even in a state where the peeling member 350 is fixed by suction to the main body member 341 (see FIG. 40A), by inverting the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the player can pay attention to the operation device 3300. Actions can be taken. At this time, the path along which the bar-shaped member 3345f moves is the same as the path in a state where the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Therefore, the peeling member 350 is pulled from the main body member 341 by a single magnetic member 3339. It is possible to cope with the case where the peeling member 350 is adsorbed on the body member 341 and the case where the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341.

  Note that the weight balance in the longitudinal direction of the main unit member 341 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Even if a large amount of current flows, the speed of the tilting operation can be made different. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  FIGS. 42A and 42B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. In FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), for easy understanding, the swing operation member 310 is shown in a side view instead of a sectional view, and the player's hand is shown in imaginary lines. .

  FIG. 42 (a) shows a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position and the player's hand is put on the back side of the swing operation member 310 (the right side in FIG. 42 (a)). In this state, when a current flows through the bar-shaped member 3345f toward the back of the drawing of FIG. 42A, the bar-shaped member 3345f receives an electromagnetic force and swings in a direction in which the lever member 3340 rises. By the swing of the lever member 3340, the swing operation member 310 is caught by the player's hand, and the swing operation member 310 swings in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42A). As a result, the state of the back button member 312d changes, and by detecting the change with the second sensor member 313d (see FIG. 20), it is possible to determine the presence or absence of an input operation from the player.

  In this case, the player can perform the input operation only by putting his or her hand on the swing operation member 310, and the input operation can be facilitated. Further, the state of the back button member 312d changes depending on the mode (timing and strength) of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f (the swinging operation member 310 on which the player puts his hand swings forward). Can be controlled. Therefore, without requiring the player to perform an input operation, the player places his / her hand on the swing operation member 310 and controls the direction and intensity of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, so that the input of the back button 312d is performed on the control side. The timing of the operation can be determined. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the player, for example, when performing an effect that requires input at a good timing.

  Further, if the player does not put his / her hand on the back side of the swing operation member 310, for example, only putting his / her hand on the lens member 317, the lever member 3340 is raised from the state shown in FIG. Even when swinging, the swing operation member 310 does not swing in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42A). Therefore, when there are a plurality of operation modes of the operation device 3300, it is possible to specify an operation method for performing input with good timing, and it is possible to cause a player to operate the operation device 3300 in an appropriate method.

  This is impossible in a mode in which the eccentric cam member 333 is disposed below and below the lever support shaft 331d1 of the lever member 3340. For example, as in the present embodiment, a bar-shaped member 3345h is provided in front of the lever support shaft 331d1. This is the first effect achieved by adopting a mode in which the received electromagnetic force is transmitted and the main body member 341 is swung in the rising direction.

  Next, an operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the lock member 336 restricts the swing of the lever member 340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position has been described. However, the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment has The lock member 4336 regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 43 is an exploded front perspective view of an operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 43, the illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and a state in which the inner case member 4330 is disassembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the inner case member 4330 includes a left cover member 4331 and a right cover member 4332 assembled in a box shape in which the lever member 4340 is disposed inside, and an eccentric cam protruding from the left cover member 4331. An eccentric cam member 4333 supported by the shaft 331d2 and a lock member 4336 supported by a lock shaft 4331d3 protruding from the left cover member 331 are mainly provided. The arrangement and posture of the driving member insertion hole 332d and the second driving device 337 in this embodiment are slightly different from those in the first embodiment, but the technical idea of driving the lock member 4336 is different from that in the first embodiment. Since they are the same, the same reference numerals are given and their explanation is omitted.

  The left cover member 4331 is different from the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment, and includes a plurality of rod-shaped members 4331d formed to protrude rightward from the upper side wall 331b and formed in a columnar shape.

  The bar-shaped member 4331d is provided at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 4331, a lever support shaft 331d1, an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 disposed below the lever support shaft 331d1, and a rear portion of the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. Mainly provided with a lock shaft 4331d3.

  The lock shaft 4331d3 is a shaft through which the lock member 4336 is inserted, and is supported by the left cover member 4331 and the right cover member 4332 at both ends.

  The eccentric cam member 4333 includes a cam portion 4333c, unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment. The cam portion 4333c has the same configuration as the cam portion 333c, but has a larger diameter of the eccentric cam than the cam portion 333c. In detail, the end of the cam portion 4333c is aligned with the axis of the main body portion 333a, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position with the largest diameter portion of the cam portion 4333c closest to the lever member 4340. The diameter of the eccentric cam is formed by the size of the eccentric cam.

  The lock member 4336 is disposed below the lock receiving member 4350 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is disposed near the downward position and the side of the lever member 4340 where the lock receiving member 4350 is disposed is disposed upward. It is a member that abuts and regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

  FIG. 44 (a) is a front view of the lock member 4336, and FIG. 44 (b) is a side view of the lock member 4336 as viewed in the XXXXIVb direction of FIG. 44 (a).

  The lock member 4336 includes a main body member 4336a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission member 4336b formed in a fan-shaped cross section and transmitting the driving force of the second driving device 337 by meshing gears. , Mainly comprising.

  The main body member 4336a is penetrated in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 44 (a)) of the main body portion 4336a1 formed in a long plate shape and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. Shaft support hole 4336a2, locking portion 4336a3 projecting above shaft support hole 4336a2 from the side surface of main body portion 4336a1 opposite to transmission member 4336b, and side surface of main body portion 4336a1 facing transmission member 4336b. And a recessed portion 4336a4 that is recessed from the back side (the right side in FIG. 44B) to the front side below the shaft support hole 4336a2.

  The locking portion 4336a3 is a portion to which the other arm of the torsion spring SP41, which is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and whose one arm is locked to the connection side wall 331c, is locked (see FIG. 45). Thus, the main body member 4336a is constantly urged counterclockwise in FIG. 44 (b).

  The concave portion 4336a4 is a portion that comes into contact with the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b. Since the depth of the recessed portion 4336a from the back side is equal to or greater than the thickness of the projecting portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b, the main body member when the main body member 4336a is in the lock standby state (see FIG. 45A). The posture of 4336a can be defined based on the relationship between main body member 4336a and connection side wall portion 331c (holding posture while main body member 4336a is in contact with connection side wall portion 331c).

  The transmission member 4336b is formed in a fan-shaped cross section, and a main body 4336b1 in which a gear portion meshed with the drive gear 337b is formed in a curved surface portion, and in the left-right direction (FIG. 44 (a) left-right direction) of the main body portion 4336b1. A shaft support hole 4336b2 that is bored and through which a lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted; a plate-shaped detection piece 4336b3 that can detect the attitude of the transmission member 4336b through a gap between sensor members (not shown); The main portion 4336b4 mainly includes a protruding portion 4336b4 that protrudes from a side surface of the portion 4336b1 facing the main body member 4336a and that comes into contact with the concave portion 4336a4 in the swing direction of the main body portion 4336b1.

  The protrusion 4336b4 is formed at the rear end of the main body 4336b1. Thus, by swinging the transmission member 4336b in a direction to approach the connection side wall portion 331c, the rear side surface of the main body member 4336a that swings by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 can be brought into contact with the connection side wall portion 331c. it can.

  FIGS. 45A and 45B are side views of the lock member 4336. FIG. In FIGS. 45A and 45B, the drive gear 337b and the connecting side wall 331c are shown in an assembled state.

  The lock member 4336 can be configured to have a lock standby state shown in FIG. 45A and a lock forced release state shown in FIG. 45B. The lock standby state refers to a state in which the transmission member 4336b is disposed close to the connection side wall 331c and the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connection side wall 331c.

  The lock forced release state means that the drive gear 337b rotates from the lock standby state and the transmission member 4336b swings in a direction away from the connection side wall 331c, so that the main body member 4336a faces the lever member 4340. This means a state in which the end portion is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the lever member 4340. In the lock forcible release state, the projecting portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b abuts the recessed portion 4336a4 to maintain the posture of the main body member 4336a.

  When the lever member 4340 abuts from above the main body member 4336a in the lock standby state, the swing of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47A). When the lock is forcibly released from the state in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted, the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 is released, and the lever member 4340 can swing (see FIG. 48).

  Here, by bringing the lock gear into the lock standby state again (by rotating the drive gear 337b and turning the transmission member 4336b clockwise in FIG. 6A), the lock member 4336 of the lever member 4340 is brought into contact with the lock member 4336 as described later. The swing of the lever member 4340 can be automatically restricted as the end on the contact side gets over the lock member 4336 upward. On the other hand, by maintaining the lock forcibly released state, it is possible to prevent the swing of the lever member 4340 from being restricted.

  FIG. 46 is an exploded front perspective view of the lever member 4340 and the swing operation member 310. The lever member 4340 includes a main body member 4341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, a lock receiving member 4350 supported coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 4341, It mainly comprises.

  The main body member 4341 is formed in a shape of a long rod having a U-shaped cross section, and has a front main body portion 4341a having a cutout on the rear left side (the left side in FIG. 46), and a mode for supplementing the cutout of the front main body portion 4341a1. An electromagnet member M41 for attaching the rear main body 4341a2 having an L-shaped cross section, and adsorbing the rear main body 4341a2 and the front main body 4341a1 only when current is conducted and fixed to the upper surface side of the rear main body 4341a2. And a pair of shaft holes 341b drilled in the left-right direction substantially at the center of the front main body portion 4341a1.

  The lock receiving member 4350 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape which is long in the front and rear directions, and is fixed to the lower surface of the rear main body portion 4341a2 of the lever member 4340, and has a left-right direction at a front end of the main body 4351. And a shaft hole 4352 coaxial with the shaft hole 341b and supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the rear main body portion 4341a2 can swing about the lever support shaft 331d1 independently of the front main body portion 4341a1, which will be described later.

  FIGS. 47A and 47B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. 47 (a) and 47 (b) show a state in which the rocking of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336. In FIG. 47 (b), the neck is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 47 (a). A state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung rearward about the shaft support rod 363 (see FIG. 46) is illustrated, and a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. Also, although the operation device 300 is illustrated in FIG. 17A, the appearance is the same, so that the description will be made assuming the operation device 4300. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (b), similarly to the first embodiment, the swing operation of the swing operation member 310 is performed in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted, and the back button member 312d is pushed in. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, since the lock member 4336 is abutted from below on the lever member 4340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1, it is possible to resist the erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 with the strength of the lock member 4336. Can be.

  Since the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the lock member 4336 behind the lock shaft 4331d3, it is possible to prevent the lock member 4336 from swinging toward the forcibly unlocked state (see FIG. 45B). can do. Thus, a load can be applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 4336 in the direction in which the lock member 4336 falls forward (left direction in FIG. 47A), and the posture of the lock member 4336 can be maintained.

  In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 4333 can be separated from the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated by the lock member 4336. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 from being damaged when the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated due to malfunction or the like while the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336. it can.

  FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 4300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. Note that FIG. 48 illustrates a state in which the lock member 4336 is in the lock release state and the lever member 4340 has begun to swing.

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the lock member 4336 is in the lock release state from the state in which the rocking of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47A), the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is applied. As a result, the lever member 4340 swings in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48).

  This can encourage the player to operate the operation device 4300, but since the swing speed of the lever member 4340 is determined by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 and does not change every time, the degree of freedom in rendering is reduced. There was a problem that.

  Note that the posture of the eccentric cam member 4333 at the time of contact with the lever member 4340 is variously changed, and the operation speed can be varied by linking the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the swing of the lever member 4340. However, there is a problem that the eccentric cam member 4333 may be damaged when the lever member 4340 erroneously collides with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed. Therefore, the timing at which the lock member 4336 is swung toward the forcibly unlocked state is determined by the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9) that the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retreat phase (see FIG. 49A). It is preferred that the detection be performed after the detection.

  Here, the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 366 included in the swinging operation member 310 acts in a direction to cause the lever member 4340 to fall forward along the straight line L1. Thus, for example, by vibrating the vibration device 366 while the lever member 4340 is swinging in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48), the lever member 4340 can be pushed back in the direction of falling forward, The swing speed and the manner of swing of the member 4340 can be changed (can be made slower). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from accidentally colliding with the eccentric cam member 4333 at a high speed.

  FIGS. 49A and 49B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. Note that FIG. 49A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position, and FIG. 49B shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is moved rearward from the state of FIG. 49 (a) (rightward direction) is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

  In FIGS. 49A and 49B, the lock member 4336 is maintained in the lock forcibly released state. Therefore, for example, even if the player performs an operation of gripping and moving the swinging operation member 310 up and down from the state of FIG. 49 (a), the rocking of the lever member 4340 is not restricted by the lock member 4336. When the user releases his / her hand, the swinging operation member 310 returns to the upward position by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1.

  FIGS. 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a) and 51 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). FIGS. 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a) and 51 (b) show a state in which the lever member 4340 swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 in a time-series manner. You.

  FIG. 50A illustrates a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retreat phase, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the eccentric cam member 4333, and the lock member 4336 is in the lock standby state. 50) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 has rotated counterclockwise by about 90 degrees from the state of FIG.

  51A, the eccentric cam member 4333 is further rotated in the same direction from the state of FIG. 50B, and the lever member 4340 is in contact with the upper end of the lock member 4336 to restrict the swing. FIG. 51B shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 further rotates in the same direction from the state of FIG. 51A, and is in the retreat phase (see FIG. 50A).

  As shown in FIG. 50 (a), FIG. 50 (b), FIG. 51 (a) and FIG. 51 (b), the operating device 4300 is pressed down by the player after the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position. Even when the operation is not performed, the swinging operation member can be moved to the downward position (initial position) by swinging the lever member 4340 by the eccentric cam member 4333.

  Lock member 4336 is in a lock standby state. In this case, when the lever member 4340 pushes the left side surface of the lock member 4336, the lock member 4336 rotates in the direction of falling backward (see FIG. 50B). On the other hand, since the lock member 4336 is always urged forward by the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45), when the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 4336, the urging force lowers the lever member 4340. Side (see FIG. 51 (a)). As described above, in the process of swinging the lever member 4340, the lock member 4336 automatically regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

  Therefore, even if the timing at which the player pushes down the swinging operation member 310 is unknown, it is possible to prevent the lock member 4336 from restricting the swing of the lever member 4340 by disposing the swinging operation member 310 at the downward position. It can be done reliably.

  In the arrangement in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated (see FIG. 51A), the largest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 is in contact with the lever member 4340. Therefore, in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated by the lock member 4333 (see FIG. 51A), the eccentric cam member 4333 is not rotated in the reverse direction, but is continuously rotated in the same direction. The member 4333 can be returned to the evacuation phase. Therefore, a detection device for detecting the timing of reverse rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 can be eliminated, and the control of the first driving device 335 for driving the eccentric cam member 4333 can be easily performed.

  FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 4300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. The outer shapes of the lever member 4340, the swing operation member 310, and the eccentric cam member 4333 in the state of FIG. 50A are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 52, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 back and forth at an angle θ41 about the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated at an angle θ42 around the lever support shaft 331d1. Accordingly, a fluttering operation of causing the player to pay attention to the operation device 4300 can be performed.

  At this time, by reciprocatingly rotating the cam portion 4333c of the eccentric cam member 4333 with the cam portion 4333c disposed on the opposite side of the lever support shaft 331d1, the distance from the contact position between the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 to the lever support shaft 331d1 is obtained. The distance can be kept long. Thereby, the driving force required to swing the lever member 4340 can be suppressed (the driving force may be small), and the load applied to the eccentric cam member 4333 from the lever member 4340 can be suppressed (overload). Tolerable).

  Further, when the lock member 4336 is in the lock forcible release state, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the lever member 4340 from the lock member 4336 when the lever member 4340 swings back and forth, and to rotate the eccentric cam member 4333. Therefore, the driving force generated by the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 43) can be suppressed.

  FIG. 53 (a) is a top view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340, and FIGS. 53 (b) and 53 (c) are lever members as viewed in the LIIIb direction of FIG. FIG. 46 is a side view of a main body member 4341 and a lock receiving member 4350 of 4340. FIG. 53 (c) illustrates a state where the front main body portion 4341a1 has swung in a direction away from the electromagnet member M41 from the state of FIG. 53 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 53A, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are attracted by the electromagnet member M41. Therefore, unless a load greater than the attraction force of the electromagnet member M41 is applied to the main body member 4341, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 swing together.

  On the other hand, the electromagnet member M41 loses the attraction force when the conduction of the current is stopped. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off, the relative position (angle) between the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 changes (see FIG. 53 (c)).

  FIGS. 54A and 54B are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 as viewed in cross section along the line VIb-VIb in FIG. Although the pachinko machine 10 and the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment are illustrated in FIG. 6, since the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment have the same appearance, the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment is used. The description will be made assuming that the operation device 4010 and the operation device 4300 are illustrated.

  Here, in the operation device 4300, the protruding length of the swing operation member 310 toward the front side changes depending on whether the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position or the downward position. That is, in the state illustrated in FIG. 54A, the swinging operation member 310 is extended toward the front side by the distance X41 compared to the state illustrated in FIG. 54B.

  In this case, since the width dimension of the pachinko machine 4010 in the front-rear direction is smaller in the state shown in FIG. 54B, when selecting a box for packing the pachinko machine 4010, for example, as shown in FIG. If the selection is made based on the state, the size of the box can be reduced. On the other hand, when the power is turned off in a state where the rocking is restricted by the lock member 4336 when the lever member 4340 is fixed in the shape of a straight bar, even if a force is applied to the swinging operation member 310 from the outside, the swinging operation member There is a problem that the pachinko machine 4010 cannot be placed in a packing box because the 310 cannot be arranged in the upward position.

  Further, if the width of the line is determined by the width of the pachinko machine 4010 in a state where the swinging operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position in a factory inspection line or the like, the swinging operation member 310 is incorrectly arranged at the downward position. There is a problem that the swing operation member 310 may collide with an inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line in the state in which it is performed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the attraction force of the electromagnet member M41 integrating the main body member 4341 of the lever member 4340 is lost by turning off the power. Therefore, by turning off the power, regardless of whether or not the lock receiving member 4350 is in contact with the lock member 4336, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 causes the front main body portion 4341a1 of the lever member 4340 to swing in the rising direction, The swing operation member 310 can be arranged at the upward position.

  Thus, the swing operation member 310 can be reliably arranged at the upward position during packing. In addition, by turning off the power when the pachinko machine 4010 flows through the inspection line, it is possible to prevent the swing operation member 310 from colliding with the inspection machine or the like.

  Next, an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock member 4336 are independently driven has been described. However, the operating device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is configured such that the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are formed by a single drive motor 335a. Are driven synchronously. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a front exploded perspective view of the inner case member 5330 according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 55, the illustration of the right cover member is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the inner case member 5330 includes an eccentric cam member 5333 supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, and a columnar unlocking shaft disposed behind the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 with the drive gear 335b interposed therebetween. 5331d5, a lock release cam member 5339 supported by the lock release shaft 5331d5, and a lock member 5336 supported by the lock shaft 4331d3.

  FIG. 56 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 5333, FIG. 56 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 5333 in the LVIb direction of FIG. 56 (a), and FIG. FIG. 56 is a side view of the eccentric cam member 5333 as viewed in the LVIc direction of FIG. 56 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 56, the eccentric cam member 5333 mainly includes a cam portion 5333c having a substantially D shape in a front view and an umbrella portion 5333f in which a cutout 5333f1 is partially provided.

  The cam portion 5333c is formed in a substantially D-shape when viewed from the front, extends in a straight line shape up to the maximum diameter end of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has high rigidity and rigidity compared to the rigid portion 5333c1. And a buffer portion 5333c2 for reducing the impact from the lever member 4340. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the rigid body portion 5333c1 in a front view is set to be approximately three times the thickness of the buffer portion 5333c2 in a front view.

  The notch 5333f1 of the umbrella portion 5333f is a notch formed to have a size that allows the drive gear 355b to be removed in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is disposed to face the drive gear 355b, and is formed with respect to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. 55). This is a mark for adjusting the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333. Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are synchronously operated by a single drive motor 335a (see FIG. 55), the posture of the lever member 4340 is detected and only one of the lock member 5336 or the eccentric cam member 5333 is detected. Cannot be swung, so that the phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 and the phase of the lock member 5336 need to be matched in advance.

  In this embodiment, since the notch 5333f1 is provided in the umbrella portion 5333f, the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 can be easily determined using the notch 5333f1 as a mark.

  When the umbrella portion 5333f is disposed on the opposite side (the lower portion in FIG. 56 (b)) of the main body portion 333a, the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, the eccentric cam member 5333 cannot be inserted if the umbrella portion 5333f hits the drive gear 335b when the eccentric cam member 5333 is inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2.

  That is, since the eccentric cam member 5333 can be inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 only in a position where the notch 5333f1 faces the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 can be assembled in a correct position.

  FIG. 57 (a) is a front view of the unlocking cam member 5339, and FIG. 57 (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member 5339 in the LVIIb direction of FIG. 57 (a). 57) is a side view of the unlocking cam member 5339 as viewed in the LVIIc direction of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the unlocking cam member 5339 is formed to have the same size as the main body 333a of the eccentric cam member 5333 and has gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 59) on the outer peripheral surface. Is formed, a shaft hole 5339b formed at the center of the main body portion 5339a and through which the lock release shaft 5331d5 is inserted, and radially outward along the front side surface of the main body portion 5339a. A release portion 5339c that is extended and formed to have a length that can contact the locking portion 4336a3 of the lock member 5336, and a disk-shaped umbrella portion 5339d that covers the gear portion on the front side of the main body portion 5339a. Prepare mainly.

  The umbrella portion 5339d includes a notch 5339d1 that is partially cut from the outer peripheral surface toward the shaft side. The notch 5339d1 of the umbrella portion 5339d is a notch formed to have a size that allows the drive gear 355b to be removed in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is disposed to face the drive gear 355b. This is a mark for adjusting the initial phase of the lock release cam member 5339.

  When the umbrella portion 5339d is disposed on the opposite side (the lower portion in FIG. 57 (b)) of the main body portion 5339a, the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the umbrella portion 5339d hits the drive gear 335b when inserting the unlocking cam member 5339 into the unlocking shaft 5331d5, the unlocking cam member 5339 cannot be inserted.

  That is, the unlocking cam member 5339 can be inserted into the unlocking shaft 5331d5 only when the notch 5339d1 faces the drive gear 335b, so that the unlocking cam member 5339 can be assembled in a correct attitude.

  FIG. 58 (a) is a front view of the lock member 5336, and FIG. 58 (b) is a side view of the lock member 5336 as viewed in the LVIII direction of FIG. 58 (a). As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), the lock member 5336 is formed of a member formed in a long plate shape, and a transmission member 4336b (FIG. 44) formed in a plate shape having a sector shape in section. Is not required.

  The lock member 5336 is formed in a long plate-like main body member 5336a, and is penetrated in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 58 (a)) of the main body member 5336a, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted therethrough. And a locking portion 5336c protruding above the shaft supporting hole 5336b from a side surface (the left side in FIG. 58A) of the main body member 5336a facing the unlocking cam member 5339. Prepare for.

  The locking portion 5336c is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3, and the other arm of the torsion spring SP41 whose one arm is locked to the connection side wall 331c is locked, and the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 57). Is a portion pressed from the release portion 5339c.

  The main body member 5336a has a curved wall portion 5336a1 that is curved along a locus of a rear end portion of the lever member 4340 on a side surface on a side that comes into contact with the lever member 4340 when the lock member 5336 is in the lock standby state. A projection portion 5336a2 is provided mainly from the upper end of the curved wall portion 5336a1 to the side close to the lever member 4340 along a circle centered on the shaft support hole 5336b.

  The projecting portion 5336a2 is inclined upward as the lower end surface approaches the tip. This can prevent the lever member 4340 from being caught (locked) by the protruding portion 5336a2. Therefore, the driving force of the first driving device 335 that generates the driving force for driving the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333 can be suppressed.

  FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member 5333, and a lock release cam that represent the operation of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in time series. It is a schematic diagram of member 5339 and lock member 5336. FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the swinging of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 5336. In FIG. 59 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (a). When the lock release cam member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the lever member 4340 can be swung from the initial position before a driving force is applied to the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 5333 from being damaged as the player operates the swing operation member 310 immediately after the swing operation member 310 moves. For example, when the swing operation member 310 starts moving from the initial position, even if the player swings the swing operation member 310 up and down, the lever member 4340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 5333. Collision between the cam member 5333 and the lever member 4340 can be suppressed.

  This is a problem that cannot be avoided when restricting the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position (for example, in the case of the first embodiment). This has been solved by restricting the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position as in the embodiment.

  Note that, even when the player does not hold the swing operation member 310, the eccentric cam member 5333 has a mechanical posture when the lock member 5336 releases the swing restriction (see FIG. 59B). Therefore, the lever member 4340 can reliably contact the specific position of the eccentric cam member 5333 (the position on the short diameter side, the position on the opposite side of the cam portion 5333c).

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released and the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the eccentric cam member 5333 has the cylindrical portion 333b connected to the lever. The posture closest to the member 4340 is taken. Therefore, damage to the cam portion 5333c due to the collision of the lever member 4340 with the cam portion 5333c can be suppressed.

  Further, since the cam portion 5333c is arranged on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the swing of the lever member 4340 immediately after the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released. The angle (movement amount) can be maximized. That is, in the present embodiment, in the mode in which the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 operate synchronously, the swing angle of the lever member 4340 immediately after the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released. This is a synchronization mode in which the maximum amount of movement is secured. This makes it possible to secure a large amount of upward movement of the swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 17B) when the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the effect of the swinging operation member 310 is produced. Can be improved.

  FIGS. 60A and 60B show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member 5333, and a lock release cam that represent the operation of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in time series. It is a schematic diagram of member 5339 and lock member 5336. In FIG. 60 (a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (b), and the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is disposed above the locking portion 5336c of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336 is provided. FIG. 60B shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 60A, and the rear end of the lever member 4340 becomes a curved wall of the lock member 5336. The state of sliding with the portion 5336a1 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved by swinging the lever member 4340 on the side surface of the rigid body portion 5333c1.

  Here, when the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam hits from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam of the lever member 4340, the moment applied to the eccentric cam increases, and the load applied to the driving device in the rotation direction increases. Therefore, when it is not known when the eccentric cam collides with the lever member 4340, it is preferable that the large-diameter portion does not hit the operating member in the rotation direction of the transmission member (a circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the lever member 4340 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are in contact with each other, it is more preferable to swing the operating member at the large outer diameter portion (radially outward), so that the swing speed of the operating member is reduced. Because it can be large, the effect can be enhanced.

  With synchronous driving, the timing at which the lever member 4340 collides with the eccentric cam member 5333 can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the rigid portion 5333c1 is slightly retracted, and the rigid portion 5333c1 can be brought into contact with the lever member 4340 at the timing after the collision, and the lever member 4340 swings. The speed of operation can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 60A and the state shown in FIG. 60B are alternately repeated (the driving gear 335b is alternately rotated to rotate) so that the lever member 4340 is moved up and down. The swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be vertically reciprocated.

  Here, when the lock member 5336 is driven alone, the lock member 4336 is set to the lock forcible release state (see FIG. 48) when the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down, and is operated by the player or the eccentric cam member. When the lever member 4340 is swung in the direction in which the lever member 4340 is tilted forward by being pushed up by 4333, and the swinging operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position, the lock member 4336 is set in the lock standby state, so that the lever member 4340 Swing can be regulated.

  This suppresses the resistance from being applied to the lever member 4340 from the lock member 4336 in the state where the lever member 4340 is vertically reciprocated (see FIG. 52), and is necessary for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55). Driving force can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are controlled in synchronization, the posture of the member that drives the lock member 5336 (the lock release cam member 5339 in the present embodiment) depends on the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, especially when the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position by the operation of the player, it may be difficult to immediately arrange the lock member 5336 in the lock standby state.

  For example, when the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is disposed on the opposite side of the lock member 5336, it is necessary to rotate the lock member 5336 by half rotation before the release portion 5339c starts pushing the lock member 5336. Therefore, it becomes difficult to swing the lock member 5336 according to the operation of the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lock member 5336 is always in the lock standby state in the states shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b). Thereby, when operated by the player, the lever member 4340 is swung in the direction to fall forward, and the lock member 5336 is always brought into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340 when the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position. The swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated (see FIG. 62).

  However, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 5336 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocated by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333, the lever member 4340 receives resistance from the lock member 5336, and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 5333 is increased. There is a risk that it will be excessive.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the curved wall portion 5336a1 formed on the lock member 5336 allows the lock member 5336 to escape from the lever member 4340 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocated by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, the resistance applied to the lever member 4340 from the lock member 5336 can be suppressed.

  When the lever member 4340 swings in the direction of falling forward from the state shown in FIG. 60B, the rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the protruding portion 5336a2, and the lock member 5336 is turned to the unlocked state side. 60A (clockwise in FIG. 60A), the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336 returns to the biasing direction to enter the lock standby state, thereby causing the lever member 4340 to rotate. Swing is regulated.

  Therefore, it is possible to restrict the swing direction of the lever member 4340 at an arbitrary timing while suppressing the resistance when the lever member 4340 swings back and forth.

  Note that the unlocking cam member 5339 transmits the driving force to the lock member 5336 only when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)). The transmission is canceled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is caused to reciprocate and swing, the lock member 5336 operates in conjunction with each other, and it is possible to prevent a problem such as collision with the lever member 4340 from occurring.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (a), until the lock member 5336 is arranged at the lock standby position, the lever member 4340 is in the posture in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the posture in FIG. 59 (b)). To maintain.

  Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are controlled synchronously, the lock member 5336 is moved from the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)) to the lock standby state (see FIG. 60 (a)). Thus, the eccentric cam member 5333 may swing the lever member 4340. In this case, there is a problem that the swing operation member 310 cannot be maintained at the upward position in the lock standby state.

  In the present embodiment, since the rigid portion 5333c1 is formed in a straight line in contact with the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 333b (see FIG. 60 (a)), the eccentric cam member 5333 is at a predetermined angle (from the position shown in FIG. 59 (b)). Even if rotated (up to the position of FIG. 60 (a)), the gap between the rigid body portion 5333c1 and the lever member 4340 is only buried, and the swinging of the lever member 4340 can be suppressed. Thus, the swing operation member 310 can be maintained at the upward position while the lock member 5336 is changed from the unlocked state to the lock standby state.

  FIGS. 61A and 61B are schematic diagrams of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 61A shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60B, and the rear end of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the projection 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. 61B, the state where the eccentric cam member 5333 has been rotated from the state shown in FIG. 61A and the upper surface of the lock member 5336 has been rotated to the position in which it contacts the lower surface of the lever member 4340 is shown. You.

  As shown in FIG. 61A, when the rear end of the lever member 4340 pushes up the protruding portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 rotates in a direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 5333 is further rotated, the rear end of the lever member 4340 moves above the upper end of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336 is returned by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Thus, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the upper surface of the lock member 5336.

  Until the rear end of the lever member 4340 abuts on the protrusion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 escapes from the lever member 4340 by the curved wall portion 5336a1. The structure can suppress the resistance applied from the outside.

  In addition, since a load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 during a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the protrusion 5336a2, the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). And the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) can be secured at a high speed. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 can be reliably restricted.

  FIG. 62 is a schematic view of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 62 illustrates a state in which the lever member 4340 has been pressed down by the player in the direction of falling forward from the state illustrated in FIG. 60B.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), a circumscribed circle C41 of the cam portion 5333c around the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 contacts the lower surface of the lever member 4340. Therefore, it is not necessary to return the eccentric cam member 5333 in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 62) in a state where the swing operation member 310 is operated by the player and is arranged at the downward position, and the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved in the same direction (clockwise in FIG. 62). By rotating the eccentric cam member 5333 in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 62, the eccentric cam member 5333 can be returned to the initial position (see FIG. 59A).

  Even if the player does not push down the lever member 4340 in the direction of falling forward from the state shown in FIG. 60B, the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved from the state shown in FIG. By rotating the lever member 4340 clockwise, the lever member 4340 is rocked, and the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) to restrict the rocking of the lever member 4340. Can be.

  This allows the swing operation member 310 to return to the downward position regardless of whether or not the player performs an operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310 after the lock member 5336 is unlocked.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the swing width of the lever member 4340 is ensured by disposing the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c below the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. In the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is disposed above the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b) show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member, which represents the operation of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in time series in the sixth embodiment. 6333 is a schematic diagram of a lock release cam member 5339 and a lock member 5336. FIG. FIG. 63 (a) shows a state in which the swinging of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 5336. In FIG. 63 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 63 (a). When the lock release cam member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the eccentric cam member 6333 has an unlocking cam member 5339 in a state where the cam portion 5333c faces the lever member 4340 in a state immediately before the unlocking cam member 5339 contacts the locking member 5336. With this, the notch 6333f1 of the umbrella portion 6333f is recessed in an arrangement different from that of the fifth embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), when the lock member 5336 is brought into the unlocked state, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lever member 4340 come into contact immediately, so that the lever member 4340 is It swings following the rotation of the member 6333. Therefore, according to the method of synchronizing the operation of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the operation of the unlocking cam member 5339 in the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the timing of releasing the restriction of the lock member 5336.

  Further, since the swing speed of the lever member 4340 depends on the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be arbitrarily set immediately after the lock member 5336 is released. Accordingly, the degree of freedom in designing the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 moving up and down can be improved.

  FIGS. 64A and 64B show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member 6333, and a lock release cam that represent the operation of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in time series. It is a schematic diagram of member 5339 and lock member 5336.

  In FIG. 64 (a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 63 (b), and the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is disposed above the locking portion 5336c of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336 is provided. FIG. 64B illustrates a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64A, and the rigid portion 5333c1 of the eccentric cam member 6333 is positioned below the lever member 4340. The state of contact with the side surface is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, when the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 is disposed on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the lever member 4340 is used. Swings, the swing is stopped by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. Therefore, there is no possibility that the cam portion 5333c and the lever member 4340 collide with each other. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 is increased, an overload occurs when the lever member 4340 and the cam portion 5333c collide. The eccentric cam member 6333 is not damaged.

  Therefore, by increasing the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 only between FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the lever member 4340 is brought into the state shown in FIG. (A state arranged at the lower end) can be shortened. Thus, the period during which the lever member 4340 is in the state shown in FIG. 64A can be set arbitrarily, so that the degree of freedom in designing the swing operation of the lever member 4340 can be improved.

  FIGS. 65A and 65B are schematic diagrams of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 65A illustrates a state where the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64B and the rear end of the lever member 4340 slides on the curved wall 5336a1 of the lock member 5336. 65B, the state where the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 65A and the rear end of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the protruding portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336 is shown. Is done.

  Further, when the eccentric cam member 5333 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 65 (b), the rear end of the lever member 4340 is pushed up, and the upper surface of the lock member 5336 contacts the lower surface of the lever member 4340. This restricts the swing of the lever member 4340.

  In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 64 (b) and the state shown in FIG. 65 (a) are alternately repeated (the drive gear 335b is alternately rotated to rotate) so that the lever member 4340 is moved up and down. The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be vertically reciprocated (tilted).

  In this case, as shown in FIGS. 64B and 65A, the lock release cam member 5339 does not contact the lock member 5336 (the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member is separated from the lock member 5336). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the resistance from being applied to the lock release cam member 5339 from the lock member 5336, and to stabilize the rotation state of the eccentric cam member 5333.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the rear end of the lever member 4340 pushes up the protruding portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 rotates in a direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 6333 is further rotated, the rear end of the lever member 4340 moves above the upper end of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336 is returned by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Then, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the upper surface of the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 63A).

  In addition, since a load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 during a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the protrusion 5336a2, the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). And the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) can be secured at a high speed. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 can be reliably restricted.

  In the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), a case is considered where a load is applied from the player in the direction of lifting the lever member 4340 upward. In this case, a downward load is applied to the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 from the lever member 4340, and the eccentric cam member 6333 is rotated clockwise. In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking cam member 5339 are operated synchronously, when the rotation of the unlocking cam member 5339 is restricted, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333 is also restricted, and The eccentric cam member 6333 may be damaged by the applied load.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lever member 4340 is lifted from the state of FIG. 65A and the rear end is lowered, the unlocking cam is rotated with the clockwise rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333. Since the member 5339 rotates clockwise, the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 moves in a direction away from the lock member 5336. Accordingly, since there is no possibility that the lock release cam member 5339 abuts on the lock member 5336 to restrict the rotation, the eccentric cam member 6333 can be prevented from being damaged by the load applied from the lever member 4340.

  In the present embodiment, the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 differ in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 65A) (FIG. 65A). (A position that does not interfere in the direction parallel to the paper). Therefore, even if the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 rotate in the approaching direction in FIG. 65A from the state of FIG. Since they pass each other, breakage of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lock release cam member 5339 can be prevented.

  Next, an operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the gear damper 338 constantly applies resistance to the lever member 340 has been described. However, the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment is limited to the case where the peeling member 7350 is pulled off from the lever member 7340. A case where resistance is applied to the lever member 7340 from the gear damper 7347 will be described. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 66A and 66B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. 66A shows a state in which the peeling member 7350 is attracted to the lever member 7340. In FIG. 66B, the swing of the peeling member 7350 is regulated by the lock member 336, and the lever member 7340 is peeled off. The state where the member 7350 is peeled off is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 66A, the lever member 7340 includes a gear damper 7347 disposed inside the main body member 341. The gear damper 7347 is engaged with a gear portion 7351a formed in a gear tooth shape along a circle centered on an insertion hole 352 formed in the main body member 7351 of the peeling member 7350.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are attracted and fixed and swing together, the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a does not change. The member 7340 does not receive the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66B, the swinging of the peeling member 7350 is restricted by the lock member 336, and the lever member 7340 swings in a state where the peeling member 7350 is pulled off from the lever member 7340. When the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) is operated), the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a changes, so that the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 is given to the lever member 7340.

  Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 acts on the lever member 7340 only when the player applies an overload to the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) enough to peel the lever member 7340 from the peeling member 7350. can do. This makes it possible to change the operational feeling when the player operates the swing operation member 310 and to prompt the player to use the swing operation member 310 appropriately.

  For example, when the operation resistance when operating the swing operation member 310 in the state of FIG. 66B becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult for the player to perform the operation, resulting in stress. When the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 return to the state where they are fixed by suction, the operation resistance is reduced, and the player can easily operate. Therefore, the player who tries to avoid the stress will avoid applying an overload to the swing operation member 310. This can prevent the operation device 7300 from being destroyed.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above embodiments, the case where the lock members 336, 2336, 4336, 5336 are pivotally supported by the inner case members 330, 3330, 4330, 5330 has been described. However, the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment has the lock member 8336. However, the inner case member 8330 is configured to be slidable as the lever member 340 swings. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 67A and 67B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 8300 according to the eighth embodiment, taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the external shape is the same as the operation device 8300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 will be substituted. The same applies to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 67 (a) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position, and FIG. 67 (b) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position. .

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the inner case member 8330 includes a plurality of elongated hole-shaped slide holes 8331i formed in the left cover member 8331 along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. The slide hole 8331i is formed in a position corresponding to a right cover member (not shown) arranged in a pair with the left cover member 8331, similarly to the left cover member 8331.

  The slide hole 8331i is formed of a pair of long holes, the inner surface is formed of a smooth surface, and the first slide hole 8331i1 is provided on the side away from the lever support shaft 331d1, and the inner surface is formed of a smooth surface. And a second slide hole 8331i2 disposed closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 than the first slide hole 8331i1.

  The second slide hole 8331i2 is a long hole into which the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 of the shaft portion 8336f of the lock member 8336 is inserted. The frictional resistance between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2 changes depending on the posture of the lock member 8336.

  The lock member 8336 is pivotally supported by a plate-like slide plate 8370 provided so as to slide along the inner surface of the left cover member 8331. The lock member 8336 is a cylindrical portion inserted into the shaft support hole 336b and includes a shaft portion 8336f penetrating the slide plate 8370, and is supported by the slide plate 8370 via the shaft portion 8336f.

  The shaft portion 8336f includes a wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 which is a part in the axial direction and is inserted into the second slide hole 8331i2. The wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 has a pair of first side surfaces 8336f1a formed in such a manner as to be separated by a predetermined distance from a side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where they are opposed to each other (see FIG. 67A). In a state where the second slide holes 8331i2 are opposed to each other, a pair of second side surfaces 8336f1b are provided mainly with side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide holes 8331i2 (see FIG. 68 (a)). It is configured in a curved substantially rhombic shape.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the first side surface 8336f1a is formed in a curved shape (having the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 when the lock member 8336 is located on the release side. You. Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the second side surface 8336f1b has a curved surface shape (having the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 when the lock member 8336 is located on the fixed side. It is formed.

  In a state where the lock member 8336 is disposed on the release position side, the first side surface 8336f1a does not abut on the second slide hole 8331i2, and a gap is provided for a predetermined distance, so that the movement follows the swing of the lever member 340. The sliding resistance of the sliding plate 8370 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 67 (b) shows a state in which the lock member 8336 has been rotated from the position on the release side toward the position on the fixed side by a predetermined amount. Even in this state, a slight gap is left between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2. That is, even if the lock member 8336 rotates slightly from the position on the release side, the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370 does not increase, so that the swing resistance of the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the player swings the operation device 8300. Impairment of the operational feeling when performing the dynamic operation can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if the lock member 8336 is kept rotated from the release side position to the fixed side position by a predetermined amount, the period until the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side at a predetermined timing is shortened. can do. This makes it easier to arrange the lock member 8336 at a desired position on the fixed side.

  The slide plate 8370 includes a protrusion 8371 which is inserted into the slide hole 8331i and is formed to have a circular cross section, a magnet 8372 which is disposed to face the peeling member 350 and is formed of a magnetic material, and a lock member 8336. A drive motor 8373 disposed on the slide plate 8370 so that the rotation axis and the drive axis are parallel to each other, and a drive gear 8374 rotated by the drive motor 8373 and meshed with the gear 336d of the lock member 8336. Prepare mainly.

  The projecting portion 8371 is formed in an arc shape centering on the lever support shaft 331d1. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the protrusion 8371 from being caught by the locking recess 8331i2.

  The magnet portion 8372 is formed from a magnetic material and is adhered to the peeling member 350. When the lever member 340 is swung while the magnet member 8372 is adhered to the peeling member 350, the slide plate 8370 slides along the slide hole 8331i.

  The drive motor 8373 drives the drive gear 8374 so that the lock member 8336 can be arranged at a position on the release side (see FIG. 67A) and a position on the fixed side (see FIG. 68A). Drive means. Since the drive motor 8373 is provided on the slide plate 8370, the drive motor 8373 slides with the slide plate 8370.

  The peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects magnetism along a lower side surface, and the magnetic sensor MC1 detects whether the magnet portion 8372 is attracted to the peeling member 350 or the peeling member 350 separates from the magnet portion 8372. Is detected. Hereinafter, an example of control of the lock member 8336 will be described.

  Here, in the state of FIG. 67 (a), the detection piece 343b (see FIGS. 23 (b) and 16) is disposed in the gap between the second sensor members 325a2 (see FIG. 23 (b)). It is detected that the member 340 is disposed at the end of the swing range. In the state of FIG. 67 (b), the detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap between the first sensor member 325a1 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever member 340 is arranged at the end of the swing range. Is detected.

  Therefore, when the lever member 340 repeatedly switches between the state shown in FIG. 67A and the state shown in FIG. 67B while the eccentric cam member 333 is stopped, the player swings the swing operation member 310. It can be detected that the operation is repeatedly performed in the maximum movable range up and down (signals are output from the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 to the main controller). In this case, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged by the repeated collision of the lever member 340 (peeling member 350) with the eccentric cam member 333.

  In a mode in which the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lever member 340 in a stopped state can be fixed by the lock member 336, but the lever member in the middle of swinging can be fixed. It was difficult to fix 340 with lock member 336.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lock member 8336 can move following the lever member 340, the swing of the lever member 340 is stopped by the lock member 8336 even during the swing operation of the lever member 340. It is possible to do. Therefore, when it is detected that the player repeatedly operates the swing operation member 310 up and down in the maximum movable range, the locking member 8336 is operated to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. Can be. Hereinafter, this will be described.

  FIGS. 68A and 68B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 8300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 68 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged between the upward position and the downward position, and FIG. 68 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is at least a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 68 (a). Is applied to the swing operation member 310 downward, and the lever member 340 is pulled off from the peeling member 350.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), by rotating the drive gear 8374 and disposing the lock member 8336 on the fixed side, the second side surface 8336f1b of the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 comes into contact with both side surfaces of the second slide hole 7332i2. Thus, the sliding movement of the slide plate 8370 is stopped by the frictional force. In this state, for the operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310, the lock member 8336 locks the peeling member 350 downward, and for the operation of pushing up the swing operation member 310 via the magnet portion 8372. The slide plate 8370 locks the peeling member 350 upward. For this reason, the lever member 340 maintains the posture in the state of FIG. 68A even if a slight load is applied in the vertical direction.

  From the state of FIG. 68 (a), when the player applies a load to the swinging operation member 310 downward by a predetermined amount or more (at least the attraction force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340). The peeling member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 340 (see FIG. 68B). Thus, the lock member 8336 can be prevented from being damaged by transmitting a load equal to or more than a predetermined amount applied to the swing operation member 310 to the lock member 8336 by the player.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the slide plate 8370 is fixed in the middle of its movement range (middle of the movement range of the lever member 340), so that the player lifts the swing operation member 310. However, by contacting the magnet portion 8372 before the lever member 340 contacts the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 can be prevented from contacting the eccentric cam member 333. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), since the angle range in which the lever member 340 can be rocked (the range above the peeling member 350) is narrowed, the player moves the swing operation member 310 upward. By doing so, the momentum applied to the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the load generated when the lever member 340 contacts the peeling member 350 from above can be suppressed.

  Accordingly, the load generated on the lock member 8336 due to the reaction when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the peeling member 350 can be suppressed, so that the driving force of the drive motor 8373 for driving the lock member 8336 can be suppressed. it can.

  FIGS. 69A and 69B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 8300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. In FIG. 69 (a), the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 which are pivoted by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 are shown by imaginary lines, and the peeling member is in a state where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release side. The lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 in a state where 350 is pulled off from the magnet portion 8372 are shown by solid lines, and in FIG. 69 (b), the lock member 8336 is moved from the state shown by solid lines in FIG. The state where it is arranged on the fixed side is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 69A, when the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 causes the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 to swing, the slide plate 8370 also slides together with the peeling member 350. At this time, if a downward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 at a high speed, the slide plate 8370 cannot follow the moving speed of the peeling member 350 (the speed is reduced by the frictional resistance with the slide hole 8331i). The member 350 and the slide plate 8370 can be separated from each other (see the solid line in FIG. 69A).

  In this case, when the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release side, the slide plate 8370 is not fixed, and the player performs an operation of lifting the swinging operation member 310 upward, the peeling member 350 contacts the eccentric cam member 333. The contact may cause the eccentric cam member 333 to be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the peeling member 350 includes the magnetic sensor MC1 that detects that the magnet portion 8372 has been pulled off from the peeling member 350. When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the peeling member 350 and the magnet portion 8372 have separated, the lock member 8336 is immediately disposed on the fixed side (see FIG. 69 (b)), whereby the peeling is performed. The upper surface of the lock member 8336 can be abutted against the lower surface of the member 350.

  Thus, even if the player applies an upward load to the swing operation member 310, the peeling member 350 contacts the lock member 8336 before the peeling member 350 contacts the eccentric cam member 333, so that the downward movement occurs. Since the movement is stopped, the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged. Note that this effect is achieved only when there is a configuration in which the lock member 8336 slides together with the peeling member 350 as in the present embodiment.

  That is, when the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, depending on the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (for example, see FIG. 24B), the lock member 336 is fixed to the fixed side. However, there is a possibility that the upper surface of the eccentric cam member 333 may protrude more toward the peeling member 350 than the upper surface of the lock member 336, and if an upward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in this state. The peeling member 350 contacts the eccentric cam member 333. Therefore, the effect of preventing damage to the eccentric cam member 333 is not sufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the peeling member 350 and the lock member 8336 similarly move by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 (the state in which the peeling member 350 contacts both the eccentric cam member 333 and the magnet portion 8372). Is maintained), so that the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side immediately after the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372, so that the upper surface of the lock member 8336 is more detached than the eccentric cam member 333. You can get closer. Thus, the locking member 8336 is brought into contact with the peeling member 350 before the eccentric cam member 333, and it is possible to prevent the peeling member 350 from colliding with the eccentric cam member 333.

  It is preferable that the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 is stopped when the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the magnet portion 8372 and the peeling member 350 have separated. If the eccentric cam member 333 continues to rotate as it is and moves in a manner in which the largest diameter portion approaches the peeling member 350, the largest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 333 may approach the peeling member 350 beyond the lock member 8336. That's why.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the entirety of the lever members 340, 2340, 3340, 4340 is rigid has been described. However, the operation device 9300 in the ninth embodiment uses a coil spring to swing the operation member 310 of the lever member 9340. It has elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 to be formed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 70A and 70B are side views of the operation device 9300 in the ninth embodiment. 70A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the downward position, and FIG. 70B shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is directed downward in the state shown in FIG. 70A. A state where a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied and the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are bent is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the lever member 9340 includes coil spring-like elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 arranged in a pair in the vicinity of the swing operation member 310.

  In a state where the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 310, the state in which the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are contracted to substantially the same length is maintained. In order to support the weight of the swing operation member 310 and maintain the state shown in FIG. 70A (a state in which both are contracted to substantially the same length), the elastic coefficient of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 decreases. The elastic coefficient is set higher than the elastic coefficient of the elastic connecting member CS91 on the side, and both lengths are substantially the same.

  When the load applied by the player to the swing operation member 310 is smaller than a predetermined amount, the relative positional relationship between the lever member 9340 and the swing operation member 310 is maintained by the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), when a load equal to or more than a predetermined amount is downwardly applied to the swing operation member 310, the expansion / contraction state of the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 changes (the upper elastic connecting member Since the length of CS91 is longer than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92), the relative positional relationship between the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 9340 is broken, and the swing operation member 310 is loaded. It is possible to suppress the load from being directly transmitted to the rear part of the lever member 340 (the peeling member 350 and the like, see FIG. 16). In other words, the load applied to the swing operation member 310 can be consumed for deformation of the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the member (for example, the eccentric cam member 333, see FIG. 10) inside the outer case member 320 from being damaged by the load applied to the swing operation member 310.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74. In the above embodiments, the case where the eccentric cam members 333, 2333, 4333, 5333 are disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and below the lever members 340, 2340, 4340 has been described. In the operation device 10300, the eccentric cam member 2333 is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and above the lever member 340. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 71 (a), 71 (b), 72 (a) and 72 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 according to the tenth embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). Although FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the external shape is the same as that of the operation device 10300 according to the present embodiment, so that it is substituted. 73 and 74 are similarly used.

  FIG. 71 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position. In FIG. 71 (b), the eccentric cam member 2333 is moved from the state of FIG. FIG. 72 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ101 from the state shown in FIG. 71 (a). FIG. 72B shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged at an upward position.

  As shown in FIG. 71A, the operating device 10300 includes a box-shaped inner case member 10330 having a rectangular cross section, and the inner case member 10330 pivotally supports the eccentric cam member 2333 behind the lever support shaft 331d1. An eccentric cam shaft 10331i is provided, and a drive gear 10335 driven by a drive motor is provided at a position separated from the eccentric cam shaft 10331i by a predetermined distance. The rotation of the drive gear 10335 drives the eccentric cam member 2333 to rotate. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP101 formed of an elastic material generates an urging force for urging the lever member 340 in a direction to push the swinging operation member 310 downward.

  Accordingly, since the lever member 340 is constantly urged in a state of being pressed against the eccentric cam member 2333, the lever member 340 can be operated by following the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333.

  In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 2333 described in the second embodiment is used as a means for swinging the lever member 340, the player pushes down the swinging operation member 310, so that the rear end of the lever member 340 is moved. Even when the portion is lifted and a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 from the lever member 340, the main member 2333a and the cam member 2333b slide, thereby preventing the cam member 2333b from being damaged.

  Here, even if the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, if the extending direction of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b and the upper surface of the lever member 340 abut against each other in a vertical posture, the lever member 340 will be disengaged. May act in the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 2333 (do not escape in the circumferential direction), and the cam member 2333b may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71A, in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position, the portion P101 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the lever member 340 becomes the eccentric cam member 2333. The position is shifted by a predetermined angle from the rib portion 2333b4 (the position shifted by a predetermined angle clockwise in FIG. 71).

  Thus, even if a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 from the lever member 340 in the state of FIG. 71A, a load is applied in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the cam member 2333b is moved relative to the main body member 2333a. Can be slid. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

  In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 2333 is disposed behind and above the lever support shaft 331d1, if the player performs an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 separates from the eccentric cam member 333. Move in the direction you want. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged due to an erroneous operation of lifting the lever member 340.

  In the state of FIG. 71 (a), a columnar member is provided below the peeling member 350, and the lever member 340 cannot be further swung (the posture of FIG. 71 (a) is changed). End position).

  When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 71B to the state shown in FIG. 72A, the swing operation member 310 swings upward. When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates in the reverse direction (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 72A to the state shown in FIG. 71B, the swinging operation member 310 swings downward. As described above, by repeatedly rotating the eccentric cam member 2333 clockwise and counterclockwise, the swinging operation member 310 can be vertically reciprocated (pivoted). Thereby, an advantageous state or an unfavorable state for the player can be notified. In addition, the operation device 10300 can be visually recognized by a player as a rendering device.

  When the swing operation member is vertically reciprocated by the reciprocating rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, it is preferable that the eccentric cam member 2333 is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 as in the present embodiment. The lever support shaft 331d1 can be easily arranged on the player side (front), so that the swing angle of the swing operation member 310 even when the notch 331c1 and 332c1 have the same length in the circumferential direction of the lever support shaft 331d1. This is because it is possible to increase. In this case, the vertical movement amount of the swing operation member 310 can be kept large, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

  In the state shown in FIG. 72B, the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side, and the movement of the peeling member 350 is restricted by the lock member 336. Therefore, when a small load such as a player putting a hand on the swing operation member 310 is applied, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are prevented from swinging.

  73 (a), 73 (b) and 74 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 73 (a), the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position, the lock member 336 is arranged at the fixed position, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is retracted to the opposite side of the lever member 340. 73 (b) shows a state in which the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 from the state of FIG. 73 (a), and is in contact with the eccentric cam member 2333. In FIG. The state where the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle from the state of FIG. 73 (b) and the lever member 340 is swung clockwise is shown, and the state of FIG. 73 (b) is an imaginary line. Is illustrated in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side and the movement of the lever member 340 is regulated, the eccentric cam member 2333 is controlled to move to a position away from the lever member 340 accordingly. . Accordingly, when a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 is pulled off from the peeling member 350 and moves, the lever member 340 comes into contact with the cylindrical portion 2333b1 side of the eccentric cam member 2333 (FIG. 73). (Refer to (b)), it is possible to prevent the cam portion 2333b2 of the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is pulled off from the peeling member 350, the load applied by the player to the swing operation member 310 is reduced. A part is used to peel off the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350. Therefore, the load applied by the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333 can be reduced.

  When the player applies a load in the downward direction to the swinging operation member 310, the lever member 340 does not move until the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, so that a reaction force is transmitted to the player ( The swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 is increased). Thus, in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attraction force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swing operation member 310. It is necessary to perform the operation (it becomes heavy), so that the player can be given an operational feeling.

  As shown in FIG. 74, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated to swing the lever member 340 and swing the head. The member 310 can be reciprocated up and down (pulling motion).

  This makes it difficult for the player to recognize a change in the internal state that the lever member 340 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350. Therefore, anxiety felt by the player due to the destructive operation of peeling the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350 can be suppressed.

  Further, by swinging the lever member 340 after the operation of pushing down the swinging operation member 310, the reaction force can be returned to the hand of the player holding the swinging operation member 310, and the player can feel a sense of operation. Can be granted.

  On the other hand, after the lever member 340 is peeled from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates at a high speed, so that the lever member 340 swings back and forth at a high speed. This allows the player to be notified of the abnormality. For example, the characters “weak” can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko machine 10 to notify the player that the load applied to the swing operation member 310 is too strong.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the lever member 340 is reciprocated up and down with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. It can be used to give a feeling of returning operation, and can also be used to notify a player of an abnormality. The former case has an effect of promoting the operation performed by the player, and the latter case has an effect of suppressing the operation performed by the player. Note that this state can be switched according to the magnitude of the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350, the player can perform a predetermined operation or perform a predetermined operation. Can be suppressed.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pushing operation of the lens member 317 and the swing operation of the swing operation member 310 are not structurally linked has been described. However, the operation device 11300 in the eleventh embodiment includes the swing operation member 11310. Is increased by the pushing operation of the lens member 317. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 11310 and the lever member 340 in the eleventh embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Although FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the external shape is the same as that of the operation device 11300 according to the present embodiment, so that it is substituted. Further, FIG. 75 (a) illustrates a no-load state in which the lens member 317 does not receive a pressing load, and FIG. 75 (b) illustrates a state where the lens member 317 is pressed in from the state of FIG. 75 (a). The state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the swing operation member 11310, a through hole is formed on the central axis of the pressing member 11366b of the vibration device 11366, and the radial direction of the shaft support rod 363 extends from the bottom wall of the bobbin member 11366a. A pair of through holes are opened toward both sides. Therefore, a through hole penetrating from the vibration member 11314 to the shaft support rod 363 through the vibration device 11366 is formed. The interval between the openings of the bobbin member 11366a is shorter than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2 wound around the shaft support rod 363.

  The vibration member 11314 includes a rotation stopper 11314g inserted into a through hole of the pressing member 11366b.

  The rotation stopping portion 11314g is a rod-shaped portion inserted into the through hole of the pressing member 11366b, and includes a sandwiching portion 11314g1 that is inserted into the pair of through holes of the bobbin member 11366a and formed into a pair of leaf springs. .

  The sandwiching portion 11314g1 is arranged at a position separated from the torsion spring SP2 in a no-load state (see FIG. 75A), and in a state where the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 75B). It is arranged at a position to hold SP2. Here, the holding portion 11314g1 is formed in the shape of a leaf spring, and in the state of FIG. 75 (b), the holding portion 11314g1 holds the shaft support rod 363 together with the torsion spring SP2, so that the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation member 310 is provided. , The resistance of the swing operation centered at the center can be increased. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

  In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 11366, the vibration of the vibration device 11366 is consumed as the driving force of the swing around the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player (FIG. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the vibration component of 75 (a) in the vertical direction.

  Also, while suppressing the swing of the swinging operation member 310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can move the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In a no-load state where the hand is released, the swinging operation member 310 can be caused to swing by the vibration of the vibration device 11366.

  Thus, the same vibrating device 11366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player pushing the lens member 317 and the effect of intensifying the operation of the swinging operation member 11310 to attract the player's attention in the no-load state. Can be compatible.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the resistance of the swinging operation of the swing operation member 11310 is increased by the pushing operation of the lens member 317 has been described. However, the operating device 12300 according to the twelfth embodiment has the pushing operation of the lens member 317. As a result, the regulating rod 365 is pressed against the lower end of the angle regulating hole 361d of the swing member 360. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 76A and 76B are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 12310 and the lever member 340 in the twelfth embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. Although FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the external shape is the same as that of the operation device 12300 according to the present embodiment, so that it is substituted. Further, FIG. 76 (a) illustrates a no-load state in which the lens member 317 does not receive a pressing load, and FIG. 76 (b) illustrates a state where the lens member 317 is pressed in from the state of FIG. 76 (a). The state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 76A, the swing operation member 12310 mainly includes an intermediate frame member 12312 and a vibration member 12314.

  In the intermediate frame member 12312, the opening at the center of the bottom 312a is enlarged compared to the intermediate frame member 312 (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment.

  The vibration member 12314 includes a rod-shaped pressing rod portion 12314g extending downward from the main body portion 314a along the vibration device 366 at an enlarged portion of the center opening of the intermediate frame member 12312. The pressing rod portion 12314g is extended to a position where the tip can contact the regulating rod 365.

  The pressing rod portion 12314g is disposed at a position in contact with the regulating rod 365 in a no-load state (see FIG. 76A), and in a state where the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 76B). 365. Therefore, when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the swinging operation member 12310 is rotated clockwise by the distance that the pressing rod portion 12314g moves (the distance between the main body portion 314a and the pressing member 366b), and the shaft support rod is rotated. 365 is pressed against the end of the angle regulating hole 361d. In this state, the pivot bar 365 can be fixed to the angle regulating hole 361d, so that the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 12310 around the pivot bar 363 can be suppressed. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 12310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

  In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 366, the vibration of the vibration device 366 is consumed as the driving force of the swing around the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player (FIG. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the vibration component of (a) in the vertical direction.

  In addition, while suppressing the swing of the swinging operation member 12310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can move the lens member 317 out of the lens member 317. In a no-load state where the hand is released, the swinging operation member 12310 can be caused to swing by the vibration of the vibration device 366.

  Thus, the same vibrating device 366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player pushing the lens member 317 and the effect of intensifying the operation of the swinging operation member 12310 to attract the player's attention in the no-load state. Can be compatible.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 causes the lever member 340 to rotate, and during the rotation operation, the swing operation member 310 is held by the lever member 340 in the biasing direction with respect to the lever member 340. Although the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment has been described, while the lever member 340 rotates, the swing operation member 310 moves the lever member 340 in the opposite direction to the biasing direction with respect to the lever member 340. A state of displacement can be configured. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a front perspective view of the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 77 illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 of the operation device 13300 is disposed at a downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 77, in the operation device 13300, a swing operation member 13310 is arranged so as to protrude forward from a rectangular outer case member 13320.

  FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 13300. Note that FIG. 78 illustrates a state in which the outer case member 13320 has been removed from the inner case member 13330 disposed inside the outer case member 13320.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the outer case member 13320 has a rear surface formed in a shape along the curved surface of the cover members 344 and 345 (see FIG. 11), and the inner case member 13330 has left and right sides of the cover members 344 and 345 from the front side. It mainly includes a left front cover 13321 and a right front cover 13322 that are attached in a manner to hide the edge, and a left cover member 13323 and a right cover member 13324 that are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 13330 from the left and right.

  The left cover member 13323 and the right cover member 13324 are provided with adjusting slots 13323a and 13324a, respectively, which are formed at the outer upper end and formed in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction.

  The adjustment long holes 13323a and 13324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322, respectively, and are elongated in the left-right direction, so that the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 are formed due to variations in molding and the like. Even when the shapes vary, the positions of the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 with respect to the swing operation member 13310 in the left-right direction can be easily adjusted. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the lateral displacement between the wall member 13322b fitted into the right front cover 13322 and the contact member 13312a.

  The left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 are fastened and fixed to the adjustment slots 13323a and 13324a in the front-rear direction, and are also fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at end faces opposed in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the right front cover 13322 is fitted rightward from the end face of the right front cover 13322 that comes into contact with the left front cover 13321, and the right front cover 13322 is prevented from falling in the front-rear direction by the fitting concave 13322 a. Wall member 13322b attached in a manner, and in a state where the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 are assembled (see FIG. 77), the leftward movement is stopped by the end surface of the left front cover 13321. The member 13322b is held inside the fitting recess 13322a.

  With such a configuration, when replacing the wall member 13322b, the wall member 13322b can be replaced only by removing the right front cover 13322. (The wall member 13322b is damaged by the load from the posture correction device 13312. This is an easy part). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

  FIG. 79 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 13300. In FIG. 79, the illustration of the outer case member 13320 is omitted, and a state in which the inner case member 13330 is disassembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a plurality of rod members 13331d. The plurality of rod members 13331d pivotally support a lever support shaft 331d1 that supports the lever member 13340 and an eccentric cam member 5333. An eccentric cam shaft 331d2, a lock shaft 4331d3 on which a lock member 5336 is supported, and a length shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1 that is arranged above the lock shaft 4331d3 and the lock release cam member 5339 is supported Mainly provided with a lock release shaft 13331d5.

  A bent sheet metal member B13 is fixed to the left cover member 13331 by being fastened to the distal end of the lock release shaft 13331d5. As a result, the unlocking cam member 5339 is maintained so that it cannot be removed from the unlocking shaft 13331d5.

  Since the lock release shaft 13331d5 is formed shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1, the lever member 13340 is provided at a portion where the lock release shaft 13331d5 is not provided (a portion on the right side in front view of the tip of the lock release shaft 13331d5). By rotating, it is possible to avoid interference between the lock release shaft 13331d5 and the lever member 13340.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a left cover member 13331 and a right cover member 13332 assembled in a box shape in which the lever member 13340 is disposed inside, an eccentric cam member 5333, a phase detection member 334, and , A first driving device 335, a lock member 5336, a gear damper 338, and a lock release cam member 5339.

  FIG. 80 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 13310 and the lever member 13340. FIG. 80 shows a state in which the back side frame member 13311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 13310, and also shows a state in which the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detection member 343 fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 13340 are disassembled. Is illustrated.

  The rear side frame member 13311 is formed in a hemispherical shape with an outer shell protruding to the rear side, and is depressed in a substantially semicircular shape in such a manner that the upper part projects (returns) to the front side from the protruding end (FIG. 17 (b)). )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a, which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole into which the swing member 360 is partially inserted.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the lever member 13340 is formed of a metal material such as iron and has a main body member 13341 formed in a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section, a gear damper receiving member 342, and a coaxial with the gear damper receiving member 342. The posture detecting member 343, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, the angle regulating rod member 346, and the swing member 360 provided at the front end of the main body member 341 are supported. Prepare mainly.

  FIG. 81 is an exploded front perspective view of the main body member 13341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swing member 360 of the lever member 13340.

  The main body member 13341 of the lever member 13340 has a main body portion 13341a formed in a long rod shape in a U-shaped cross section, a pair of shaft holes 341b formed in a substantially central portion of the main body portion 13341a in a left-right direction, and a restriction. A hole 341c, a pair of swing member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e, a restriction hole 341f, and an eccentric cam member 5333 and a lock member 5336 (see FIG. 79) which are fastened and fixed to the rear lower portion of the main body 13341a. And a contact member 13341g to be contacted.

  The contact member 13341g is in contact with the eccentric cam member 5333 on the front side portion of the lower side surface, and is in contact with the lock member 5336 on the rear side portion of the lower side surface. The cross-sectional shape of the contact member 13341g is the same as the shape of the lock receiving member 4350 (see FIG. 46).

  Next, the frame structure of the swing operation member 13310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 13310. The swing operation member 13310 includes a disk-shaped intermediate base M13 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 361e (see FIG. 81) of the swing member 360, and a rear side frame member fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the intermediate base M13. 13311, a posture correcting device 13312 disposed inside the rear side frame member 13311 and having a portion extending from the inside to the outside, and a flange portion sandwiched between the rear side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13. A front cover 13313 and a rear cover 13314 which are fastened and fixed to each other by sandwiching the rear frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13 from the front-rear direction, and a pair of covering members provided at the fastening positions of the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314. The separation preventing cover 13315 and fitted from below the separation preventing cover 13315 (FIG. 82). That the protective cover 13316, a lens member 13317 which is elastically connected with the intermediate base M13, mainly comprises a.

  The posture correcting device 13312 includes a contact member 13312a that protrudes outward from the guide hole 13311b of the rear frame member 13311, a support member 13312b that is disposed between the contact member 13312a, and the coil spring SP13. And a hook member 13312c having a hook-shaped portion that protrudes inward from the hook insertion hole 13311e of the rear side frame member 13311 and that fits with the locking projection 13312b3 of the support member 13312b.

  The contact member 13312a includes a straight bar-shaped protrusion 13312a1 and a flange 13312a2 that protrudes from the protrusion 13312a1 in a flange shape in the left-right direction.

  The overhang portion 13312a1 is a portion that extends outside the guide hole 13311b of the back side frame member 13311, and the flange portion 13312a2 abuts on the extension wall 13311c of the back side frame member 13311 so that the abutment member 13312 is no more. This is the part that prevents overhang.

  The front cover 13313 includes a recessed locking recess 13313a that is opened rearward below the fastening position with the rear cover 13314 (in the rear in FIG. 82).

  The separation preventing cover 13315 is recessed in the same shape as the outer shape of the protective cover 13316 and is provided with a receiving recess 13315a configured to be able to receive the protective cover 13316 in an assembled state, and above the receiving recess 13315a (on the near side in FIG. 82). Mainly comprises a retaining hole 13315b which is formed such that a rod that is pierced and inserted therein can be fitted into the locking recess 13313a in an assembled state (see FIG. 77).

  FIG. 83 illustrates a method of assembling the front cover 13313, the rear cover 13314, the separation preventing cover 13315, and the protective cover 13316 in time series. FIG. 83A illustrates a bottom view of the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314. 83 (b) is a bottom view of the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, and the separation preventing cover 13315, and FIG. 83 (c) is the front cover 13313 and the back surface along the line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc in FIG. 83 (b). It is sectional drawing of the cover 13314, the separation prevention cover 13315, and the protective cover 13316.

  As shown in FIG. 83, FIG. 83 (a) illustrates a state in which the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314 are fixed, and FIG. 83 (b) shows the state of the separation preventing cover 13315 in the state of FIG. 83 (a). FIG. 83 (c) shows a state in which a protective cover 13316 is added to the state shown in FIG. 83 (b) and is fixed to the rear frame member 13311.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314 are assembled by fastening the wall portions opposed to each other by fastening screws N13a. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), a separation screw 13315 is attached so as to cover the fastening screw N13a (at least in the front-rear direction (covering in the vertical direction in FIG. 83 (b))), and the fastening screw inserted into the locking recess 13313a. N13b is screwed into the retaining hole 13315b, so that the separation preventing cover 13315 is fixed undetachably.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (c), the protective cover 13316 is fitted into the receiving recess 13315a so as to cover the fastening screw N13b (fitted to the side (right side in FIG. 83 (c)) so as not to be pulled out), and thereafter When the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) is fastened and fixed to the rear frame member 13311, the upper surface of the rear frame member comes into contact with the lower surface of the protective cover 13316.

  With this structure, it is difficult to separate the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, and it is possible to partially disassemble the operation device 13300 and prevent an illegal passage of a wire inside.

  That is, in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, the fastening screw N13a must be removed, but the path to the fastening screw N13a is prevented by the separation preventing cover 13315.

  Further, in order to separate the separation preventing cover 13315 from the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, the fastening screw N13b must be removed. However, the path to the fastening screw N13b is prevented by the protective cover 13316. Is in contact with the rear side frame member 13311 in the pull-out direction in the assembled state, so that it is necessary to remove the rear side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) in order to remove the protective cover 13316.

  Therefore, in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, it is necessary to remove the rear frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13. In the assembled state, the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover are provided on the rear side of the rear frame member 13311. Since 13322 is disposed close to (see FIG. 77), the access path for removing the fastening screw inserted from the back side to the front side becomes narrow. Therefore, it is difficult to remove the rear frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13, and it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Next, the rear frame member 13311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the back side frame member 13311, and FIG. 84 (b) is a view in the direction of the arrow LXXXIVb in FIG. 84 (a) (view in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d). 84) is a top view of the back side frame member 13311, and FIG. 84 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 along line LXXXIVc-LXXXIVc in FIG. 84 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 84, the rear frame member 13311 has an insertion hole 311a through which the lever member 13340 (see FIG. 80) is inserted, and a front-rear direction (FIG. 84 (c) left and right direction) below the insertion hole 311a. ), A wall-shaped extending wall 13311c extending outside the left and right side surfaces of the guide hole 13311b inside the back side frame member 13311, and a bottom wall of the guide hole 13311b. A guide bottom wall 13311d extending inside the back side frame member 13311 along the bottom surface, and a hook insertion hole 13311e drilled vertically at an end of the guide bottom wall 13311d opposite to the guide hole 13311b. A pair of support member guide walls 13311f extending from the end of the extension wall 13311c along the opening direction of the guide hole 13311b. The mainly it includes.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (c), the hook insertion hole 13311e is inclined such that the side surface on the guide bottom wall 13311d side is away from the guide hole 1311b as going upward from the lower end. This inclination secures the contact area of the hook member 13312c with the inclined contact portion 13312c3, which will be described later, and prevents the guide bottom wall 13311d from being damaged (cracked) by the load applied from the hook member 13312c.

  The support member guide wall 13311f has an upper end surface (FIG. 84 (a) front side surface) formed as a surface parallel to the guide bottom wall 13311d.

  Next, the hook member 13312c will be described with reference to FIG. The hook member 13312c is a member made of a hard resin material. FIG. 85 (a) is a front perspective view of the hook member 13312c, and FIG. 85 (b) is the direction of the arrow LXXXVb in FIG. 85 (a). FIG. 85 (c) is a front view of the hook member 13312c as viewed from the side, FIG. 85 (c) is a side view of the hook member 13312c as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXVc in FIG. 85 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the hook member 13312c in the LXXXVd-LXXXVd line of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the hook member 13312c is a member formed in a symmetrical shape, and extends from the upper end of the rectangular plate-shaped main body 13312c1 to the front side along the vertical direction. The hook 133133c2 provided, an inclined contact portion 13312c3 extending from the lower end of the main body 13312c1 to the front side, and a bottom wall extending outward from the bottom surfaces of the main body 13312c1 and the inclined contact 133133c3. And a concave portion 13312c5 formed by cutting a part of the main body 13312c1 in the longitudinal direction from the lower surface of the bottom wall portion 13312c4.

  The inclination angle of the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the inclined contact portion 13312c3 is the same as the inclination angle of the hook insertion hole 13311e with respect to the guide bottom wall 13311d of the rear side frame member 13311.

  Next, the support member 13312b will be described with reference to FIG. The support member 13312b is a member made of hard resin and formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to the longitudinal direction when viewed from above. FIG. 86 (a) is a front perspective view of the support member 13312b, and FIG. 86B is a top view of the support member 13312b as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86A, and FIG. 86C is a cross-sectional view of the support member 13312b along the line LXXXVIc-LXXXVIc in FIG. 86B. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the support member 13312b includes a main body 13312b1 formed in a plate shape having an L-shaped cross section, and a pair of plate-shaped contact plates 13312b2 connecting both side surfaces of an intersection of the main body 13312b1. The main part 13333b1 mainly includes a locking projection 13312b3 projecting from the end of the main body 13312b1 in the thickness direction, and a peeping hole 13312b4 drilled in the vertical direction at the intersection of the main body 13312b1.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (c), the support member 13312b is a member in which the coil spring SP13 and the contact member 13312a are disposed in a region surrounded by the main body 13312b1 and the contact plate 13312b2.

  In addition, when the main body 13312b1 is assembled in a state of covering the coil spring SP13, the coil spring SP13 can be visually recognized through the viewing hole 13312b4, so that the coil spring SP13 is forgotten to be inserted at the time of assembly, or the position of the coil spring SP13 with respect to the support member 13312b is shifted. Can be prevented.

  Next, a method for assembling the posture correcting device 13312 to the rear frame member 13311 will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 87 and 88, the manner in which the posture correcting device 13312 is assembled to the back side frame member 13311 is illustrated in a time-series manner.

  FIG. 87 (a) is a partial top view of the back side frame member 13311, and FIG. 87 (b) is a partial cross sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 along the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87 (a). 87 (c) is a partial top view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 13312, and FIG. 87 (d) is the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device along the line LXXXVIId-LXXXVIId in FIG. 87 (c). FIG. 87 (e) is a cross-sectional view of the rear-side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 13312 taken along line LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe of FIG. 87 (d).

  Also, FIGS. 88 (a), 88 (c) and 88 (e) are partial top views of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 13312, and FIG. 88 (b) is a view of FIG. 88 (a). 88 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 13312 along the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb, and FIG. 88 (d) is the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device along the line LXXXVIIId-LXXXVIIId of FIG. 88 (c). FIG. 88 (f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 13312 taken along line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf in FIG. 88 (e).

  The method of assembling the rear frame member 13310 and the posture correcting device 13312 will be described in detail. First, the posture correcting device 13312 is moved along the guide bottom wall 13311d to the rear side frame member 13310 shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b), and FIG. 87 (c) and FIG. 87 (d). ), The tip of the main body 13312b1 of the support member 13312b is inserted into the guide hole 13311b. Here, a hook member 13312c is attached to the left side of the support member 13312b, but since it is to be retrofitted, a space for a path for inserting the support member 13312b into the guide hole 13311b (see FIG. 87 (d)). (Left space) can be widened, and the support member 13312b can be easily inserted into the guide hole 13311b.

  In this state, as shown in FIG. 87 (e), the abutting member 13312a is configured such that the flange portion 13312a2 is locked (blocked) by the extension wall 13311c of the back side frame member 13311, so that the back side frame member 13311a is formed. It is arranged inside.

  In the state shown in FIG. 87 (c) to FIG. 87 (e), the coil spring SP13 is in a state of being shortened from its natural length. That is, a rightward load is applied to the support member 13312b, and when the load is released, the support member 13312b moves to the left.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), the hook member 13312c is inserted into the hook insertion hole 13311e of the rear frame member 13311 from the state shown in FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e). It is inserted from the outside of the frame member 13311 (the lower side in FIG. 88B). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), a part of the hook member 13312c is exposed to the outside of the back side frame member 13311, so that if the assembling is forgotten, or if the hook member is damaged and falls off, the appearance is reduced. Inspection can detect those defects.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 (c) and 88 (d), the hook member 13312c is pushed in until the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the hook member 13312c contacts the lower surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d, and the hook member 13312b is hung on the support member 13312b in this state. When the applied load is removed, the support member 13312b is moved leftward in FIG. 88F to a position where the support member 13312b contacts the hook member 13312c by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 (the leftward movement of the support member 13312b is controlled by the hook member 13312c). In this case, the upward movement of the support member 13312b is restricted by covering the locking protrusion 13312b3 from above with the hook 133133c2 of the hook member 13312c.

  That is, the support member 13312b is positioned by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 on the back side frame member 13311 as shown in FIGS. 88 (e) and 88 (f).

  In this embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the moving dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced. That is, in the embodiment in which the hook member 13312c is assembled to the rear frame member 13311 from the inside of the rear frame member 13311, the hook member 13312c is moved to the rear side in the same manner as the hook portion 13312c2 blocks the upward movement of the support member 13312b. In the case where the hook-shaped portion for blocking the upward movement from the frame member 13311 is provided on the opposite side of the hook portion 13312c2, the support member 13312b is added to the size of the hook portion 13312c2 in addition to the size of the hook-shaped portion. Also need to be moved.

  In this case, it is difficult to select the coil spring SP13, and there is a possibility that the function of the posture correcting device 13312 will be affected. That is, when the holding force of the posture correcting device 13312 is emphasized, it is better to select a coil spring SP13 having a large elastic force. When the support member 13312b needs to be moved extra (for example, it needs to be moved twice as long) at the time of assembly, the elastic force generated from the coil spring SP13 increases accordingly (for example, becomes twice), and the force is weak. It is difficult for workers to assemble.

  On the other hand, the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 that holds the support member 13312b in the assembled state depends on the natural length of the coil spring SP13 in the assembled state regardless of the distance that the support member 13312b is moved when the hook member 13312c is assembled. By displacement. Therefore, when the distance for moving the support member 13312b is reduced, the support member 13312b can be assembled with a smaller force and a large holding force can be secured. In the present embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the rear frame member 13311, the movement dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced.

  When removing the posture correcting device 13312, the front end (the left end in FIG. 88 (f)) of the support member 13312b is moved in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts, whereby the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b are engaged. The stopper is released, and the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b can be separately removed from the rear side frame member 13311.

  In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 88 (f)), the front end of the main body 13312b1 is disposed inside (surface position) outside the outer surface of the rear side frame member 13311. It is considered difficult to pull out the support member 13312b from the outside, and in order to move the support member 13312b in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts, it is necessary to apply a force from inside the back side frame member 13311. This can prevent the player from accidentally removing the support member 13312b from the back side frame member 13311, or preventing the player from removing the support member 13312b or the hook member 13312c.

  In order to prevent wobble of the support member 13312b, in the assembled state (see FIG. 88 (f)), the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c2 of the hook member 13312c and the upper surface of the locking projection 13312b3 of the support member 13312b are in close contact. Need to be done. For this reason, it is necessary to strictly control the dimensional relationship. However, due to the variation in the molding of the support member 13312b and the hook member 13312c, the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c2 does not go up to the upper side of the upper surface of the locking convex portion 13312b3 if only the fitting is performed. (The back surface of the hook 13312c2 (the surface on the right side in FIG. 88 (f)) and the locking protrusion 13312b3 come into contact with each other and the support member may stop halfway).

  In the present embodiment, the force is concentrated and pushed into the recessed portion 13312c5 disposed on the hook member 13312c, so that the hook member 13312c is deformed with a relatively small force, and the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c1 is engaged with the locking projection. It can be pushed inside the back side frame member 13311 until it goes above the upper surface of 13312b3.

  Even when the hook member 13312c is damaged or the hook member 13312c is forgotten to be attached, the support member 13312b is moved by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 until the support member 13312b is pressed against the wall on the opposite side of the guide hole 13311b. The insertion hole 13311e is closed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of intruding the wire from the hook insertion hole 13311e.

  Next, the function of the posture correction device 13312 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 89A and 89B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 13300 taken along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 89 (a) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, and FIG. 89 (b) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position. .

  As shown in FIG. 89A, the direction Y13a in which the lens member 13317 moves when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position (a linear direction passing through the shaft support rod 363, and the vibration device 366 is displaced). The case where the operation direction U13a in which the player pushes the lens member 13317 in the same direction as the (direction) is described. The smaller the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a, the easier the operation becomes (the wrist can be pushed in without being turned).

  By rotating the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) from the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated, and the lever member 13340 is rotated to the downward position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), when moving the swing operation member 13310 from the upward position to the downward position, the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position The lever member 13340 is rotated by an angle θ13x formed by a straight line X13a parallel to the angle X13a and a straight line X13b parallel to the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position.

  Here, in a case where the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 are not relatively displaced, and the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a is the angle θ13x.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, the tip of the protrusion 13312a1 of the contact member 13312a contacts the wall member 13322b, and the swing operation of the lever member 13340 is performed. The member 13310 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 89A by the angle θ13y. The angle θ13y is set to the same angle as the angle at which the main body member 361 of the swing member 360 can rotate.

  When the swing operation member 13310 is swung with respect to the lever member 13340, the direction in which the lens member 13317 moves is changed to the direction Y13b (the angle formed by the direction Y13a and the direction Y13b is the angle θ13y). Therefore, in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position, the direction Y13b in which the lens member 13317 moves is moved toward the operation direction U13a (the angle between the direction in which the lens member 13317 is moved and the operation direction U13a is reduced). Therefore, it is possible to avoid a change in the operational feeling and to prevent a situation in which the player has difficulty in pressing the lens member 13317.

  In the present embodiment, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is achieved by disposing the posture correction device 13312 inside the swing operation member 13310. Therefore, the structure can be simplified as compared with a case where a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the swing operation member 13310 is provided inside the lever member 13340.

  In addition, since the posture is changed at the timing when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, it is compared with the case where the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is continued while the lever member 13340 is rotated. Then, it is possible to easily suggest to the player the timing of pressing the lens member 317. That is, for example, by displaying “press” or the like on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) in accordance with the timing at which the posture of the swing operation member 13310 changes with respect to the lever member 13340, the third symbol is displayed. The display on the display device 81 and the movement of the operation device 13310 can be linked, and the timing at which the player should press the lens member 13317 can be clearly notified to the player.

  In the present embodiment, although the posture correcting device 13312 has a function of applying a load for changing the posture of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340, the force applied from the posture correcting device 13312 to the swing operation member 13310 is a lever member. The rotation occurs in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of 13340 (when the lever member 13340 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 89B, a load is generated to rotate the swing operation member 13310 clockwise in FIG. 89B). Therefore, the force generated by the posture correcting device 13312 to change the posture of the swing operation member 13310 also functions as a force for braking the lever member 13340. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the lever member 13340 from rotating too much due to excessive momentum and the rear end portion (the right end portion in FIG. 89B) of the lever member 13340 from colliding with the inner case member 13330.

  Note that the wall member 13322b with which the posture correcting device 13312 comes into contact can also come into contact with the lever member 13340 when the lever member 13340 is going to rotate excessively counterclockwise (to further rotate from the state of FIG. 89 (b)). It is arranged in a suitable position. Thus, even when the player overloads the lens member 13317, the wall member 13322b can prevent the lever member 13340 from over-rotating.

  Here, it is also possible to connect a gear from the rotation axis of the lever member 13340 to the swing operation member 13310 along the lever member 13340, and to rotate the swing operation member 13310 by meshing rotation of the gear group. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the posture of the swing operation member 13310 is changed by the contact member 13312a protruding from the swing operation member 13310 abutting on the wall member 13322b, so that the lever member 13340 is provided. The weight of the gear group can be saved. Therefore, the weight of the lever member 13340 can be reduced, and the driving force of the driving motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), the elastic force (displacement in the torsion direction) of the torsion spring SP2 for urging the swing operation member 13310 is compared with the state where the torsion spring SP2 is disposed at the upward position. , The state of being arranged at the downward position is made larger. In the downward position, a force is applied from the posture correcting device 13312 to the swing operation member 13310 in a manner to rotate the swing operation member 13310 in the direction opposite to the biasing direction of the torsion spring SP2.

  Therefore, the force for fixing the swing operation member 13310 so as not to be relatively displaced with respect to the lever member 13340 is smaller than the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upper position. Is larger. Therefore, a state (upward position) in which the rotation resistance of the swinging operation member 13310 is small (light) with respect to the lever member 13340 (upward position), and a state (downward position) in which the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 is large (heavy). Can be formed.

  For example, when the operation of hitting the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) is performed when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is weak, and the swing operation member 13310 is caused by the recoil of the hit. While it is possible to perform an effect of swinging about the lever member 13340, while performing an operation of hitting the lens member 13317 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation member 13310 By increasing the rotational resistance of the lever member 13340, the swing operation member 13310 can be fixed to the lever member 13340, and for example, when the lens member 13317 is continuously hit, it is possible to prevent the lens member 13317 from being missed. .

  Note that the change in the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 in the present embodiment is caused by the change in the position of the lever member 13340, and the action does not change with the moving speed of the lever member 13340.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90, a description will be given of a posture change of the swing operation member 13310 in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position. FIGS. 90A and 90B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 13300 along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. Note that FIGS. 90A and 90B show a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position. In FIG. 90A, the contact member 13312a comes into contact with the wall member 13322b. 90 (b), a force is applied to the swing operation member 13310 even after the lens member 13317 is pushed in, and the coil spring SP13 of the posture correcting device 13312 is contracted while being rotated. , The state in which the swing operation member 13310 is tilted forward.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (b), even when an overload is applied to the lens member 13317, the posture correction device 13312 is configured in such a manner as to be able to contract, so that when the lens member 13317 is overloaded In addition, the posture of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed, and the wall member 13322b can be prevented from being damaged (penetrated and broken).

  When the tip of the contact member 13312a is pressed against the wall member 13322b to rotate the swing operation member 13310, the displacement of the coil spring SP13 increases as the rotation angle increases, and the elastic force generated by the coil spring SP13 reduces the displacement. Since it becomes larger in proportion, it is possible to suppress the swing operation member 13310 from excessively rotating.

  In the present embodiment, since the shaft support rod 363 that is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 13310 is provided in the directions Y13a and Y13b in which the lens member 13317 is pushed, the swing operation member is pressed by the load that pushes the lens member 13317. The generation of a force for rotating 13310 can be suppressed.

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the case has been described where the posture of the swing operation member 13310 is always changed when the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position. In the state where the operation member 14310 is arranged at the downward position, it is possible to switch between the case where the posture of the swing operation member 14310 changes and the case where the posture does not change. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 91 (a) is a front view of a lock member 14336 according to the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 91 (b) is a side view of the lock member 14336 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXXIb in FIG. 91 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 91, the lock member 14336 is formed in a vertically long rod shape, and has a main body member 14336a having a curved wall portion 5336a1 and a convex portion 5336a2, a shaft support hole 5336b, and a main body member 14336a. And a locking member 14336c that is configured to be movable in the protruding direction.

  The locking member 14336c is fitted into the main body member 14336a so as to be able to protrude and has a biasing spring SP14a disposed between the locking member 14336c and the main body member 14336a. It is arranged at a position where it can be touched. The locking member 14336c includes a chamfered portion 14336c1 configured to bevel the upper surface.

  Therefore, when the lock release cam member 5339 (see FIG. 92A) comes into contact with the locking member 14336c from above, the locking member 14336c is pushed inward along the chamfered portion 14336c1 toward the inside of the main body member 14336a ( The lock member 14336 can be rotated by pressing the locking member 14336c when it comes into contact with something other than above (for example, from the front side (from the left side in FIG. 91B)). .

  With reference to FIG. 92 (a), an eccentric cam member 14333 and a posture switching device 14337 which rotates while contacting the eccentric cam member 14333 will be described. FIG. 92A is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 14300 taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (a), the eccentric cam member 14333 includes a main body 333a, a cylindrical portion 333b, a cam portion 14333c having different shapes in the left-right direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 92 (a)), and an umbrella portion. 5333f.

  The cam portion 14333c has a semicircular portion 14333c1 formed in a semicircular shape on the near side in FIG. 92 (a), and a semicircular portion on the left side of the semicircular portion 14333c1 (in the back of the drawing in FIG. 92 (b)). And a protruding portion 14333c2 protruding from an end of the 14333c1.

  The projecting portion 14333c2 has a side surface in the circumferential direction inclined with respect to the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333. Therefore, when the protruding portion 14333c2 and the attitude switching device 14337 come into contact with each other, the pressing force of the protruding portion 14337b1 is generated not only in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also in the radial direction (the eccentric cam shaft). 331d2). Therefore, the load on the eccentric cam member 14333 in the rotation direction can be reduced.

  The posture switching device 14337 includes a main body member 14337a configured in a plate shape having an L-shaped cross section, an extending portion 14337b extending in a bifurcated shape from the side of the main body member 14337a, and the main body member 14337a. The posture of the main body member 14337a is maintained at an intermediate position by applying an elastic force to an end portion of the main body member 14337a and the end of the main body member 14337c that supports the main body member 14337a and the extension portion 14337b at a connection portion with the extension portion 14337b. And an elastic device 14337d.

  The main body member 14337a is configured such that the end opposite to the end supported by the shaft support portion 14337c can protrude from the inner case member 14330. In the state shown in FIG. 92 (a), the main body member 14337a has a positional relationship (a positional relationship of touching at a distance of 0) in which a load cannot be applied even if the main body member 14337a contacts the swing operation member 14310.

  The extending portion 14337b is disposed on the same plane as the umbrella portion 5333f as a position in the left-right direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 92A), and can be brought into contact with the projecting portion 14333c2 on the opposite side of the shaft support portion 14337c. FIG. 92A is provided with a protruding portion 14337b1 protruding toward the near side of the drawing. Here, the projecting portion 14337b1 is disposed on the movement trajectory of the projecting portion 14333c2 in the state of FIG. 92 (a), and the main body member 14337a is rotated to the end (FIG. 93 (b) or FIG. 95 (b)) at a position deviating from the movement trajectory of the protruding portion 14333c2.

  The elastic device 14337d has a case fixed to the inside of the inner case member 14330, a portion in contact with the main body member 14337a is concavely formed in a U shape, and the position can be changed while the concave portion is urged by a coil spring. Be composed. That is, even if the main body member 14337a is rotated, when the rotational force is removed, the position can be returned in a form converged on the U-shaped concave portion.

  FIG. 92B is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 14300 taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. In FIG. 92 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated from the state of FIG. 92 (a), and the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock release cam member 5339 rotate counterclockwise, so that the lock member 14336 is rotated. , The state where the lever member 13340 is rotated and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged at the upward position. That is, between FIG. 92A and FIG. 92B, the swing operation member 14310 is moved by the same distance as the swing operation member 13310 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as compared with the thirteenth embodiment, the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and a guide hole formed so that the posture correcting device 13312 (see FIG. 80) protrudes. A back side frame member 14311 formed in a state where the 13311b is closed is disposed on the rear side surface of the swing operation member 14310.

  FIGS. 93A and 93B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 14300 along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 93 (a) shows a state where the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 92 (b) and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged at the downward position, and FIG. 93 (b). FIG. 93A shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 93A and the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 is rotated to the rotation end. When the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated from the state of FIG. 93 (b), the state returns to the state of FIG. 92 (a).

  That is, in the driving state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 92A, no load is generated from the posture switching device 14337 to the swing operation member 14310, and the swing operation member 14310 is connected to the lever member 13340. Move while maintaining the posture with respect to.

  Next, the interlocking of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the attitude switching device 14337 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 94A to 94C are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337. FIG. 94 (a) shows a state where the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise and the protruding portions 14333c2 and 14337b1 are in contact with each other. FIG. 94 (c) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of a), and the protruding portion 14337b1 is moved toward the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 from the protruding portion 14333c2. 94B shows the state immediately after the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 94B, and the contact between the protruding portions 14333c2 and 14337b1 is released.

  As shown in FIG. 94, in the present embodiment, as compared with the case where the attitude switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1, the protruding portions 14333c2 and 14337b1 are formed in a state where the rotation angle of the extending portion 14337b is small. Contact can be released.

  That is, when pushing the attitude switching device 14337 with the semicircular portion 14333c1, the extension portion 14337b continues to rotate until the protruding portion 14337b1 is pushed out from the rotation trajectory of the semicircular portion 14333c1.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the protruding portion 14337b1 can escape between the protruding portion 14333c2 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 94 (b)), the state shown in FIG. 94 (a). Therefore, the contact between the projecting portions 14333c2 and 14337b1 can be released only by rotating the extending portion 14337b to the state shown in FIG. 94B (see FIG. 94C). Therefore, it is possible to reduce a region where the extension portion 14337b becomes a resistance of rotation of the eccentric cam member 14333, and it is possible to suppress a driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 14333.

  With reference to FIGS. 95 and 96, FIGS. 95 (a), 95 (b), 96 (a) and 96 (b) show lines corresponding to lines XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). It is a partial sectional view of operation device 14300. In FIG. 95 (a), the swing operation member 14310 is arranged at the downward position, and the protruding portion 14333c2 of the eccentric cam member 14333 is disposed below the protruding portion 14337b1 of the attitude switching device (FIG. 95A). 92 (a) is shown. In FIG. 95 (b), the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 95 (a), and the protruding portion 14333c pushes the protruding portion 14337b1. FIG. 96A shows a state in which the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 is rotated to the rotation end, and FIG. 96A shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 95B. FIG. 96 (b) shows a state where the eccentric cam member 14333 has been rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 96 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, by rotating the eccentric cam member 14333 counterclockwise, the swing operation member 14310 can be swung through the attitude switching device 14337 (FIG. 95 (b)). reference). That is, by simply switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, switching between an operation state in which the swing operation member 14310 swings in the downward position and an operation state in which the posture of the swing operation member 14310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is maintained. Can be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), when a load is applied to the swing operation member 14310 by the eccentric cam member 14333, the eccentric cam member 14333 does not apply a load to the lever member 13340. This is because a sufficient distance is provided between the lever member 13340 and the attitude switching device 14337, and the lever member 13340, the attitude switching device 14337, and the eccentric cam member 14333 are arranged in a positional relationship such that they do not abut at the same time. Therefore, while it is possible to transmit the driving force to each of the plurality of members by the eccentric cam member 14333, it is possible to prevent the driving force from being transmitted at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the driving force of the driving motor 335a (see FIG. 79). Can be.

  Since the upper side surface (the side surface in contact with the protruding portion 14337b1) of the protruding portion 14333c2 is formed to be inclined with respect to the axial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the protruding portion 14333c2 and the posture switching device 14337 are formed. At the time of contact, the pressing force of the convex portion 14337b1 is generated not only by the circumferential force of the eccentric cam member 14333, but also by a radially generated force (a load generated by a distance relationship with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2). Can be done. Therefore, the load on the eccentric cam member 14333 in the rotation direction can be reduced.

  When the eccentric cam member 14333 further rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 96B, the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 95A. At this time, the lock release cam member 5339 is brought into contact with the lock member 14336 from above, so that the lock member 14336c (see FIG. 91) of the lock member 14336 is in a retracted state, and the rotation of the lock release cam member 5339 is rotated. Inhibition is prevented.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96, by switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, it is possible to switch whether or not the posture changes in a state where the swing operation member 14310 is arranged at the downward position. By arranging the eccentric cam member 14333 in a specific phase, the control of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be eased compared to the case where a load is applied to the swinging operation member 14310 (slightly idling). However, no change in appearance can be caused).

  Here, the time required for the eccentric cam member 14333 to change from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. 92 (b) and the eccentric cam member 14333 are rotated from the state of FIG. 95 (a). In this way, the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 14333 is adjusted by adjusting the time until the state changes to the state shown in FIG. 95B (by determining the stop positions of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 so as to match). By switching the rotation direction as it is, the state shown in FIG. 92A is changed to the state shown in FIG. 92B at the same timing after the driving of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79), or the state shown in FIG. Either the change from the state to the state of FIG. 95 (b) can be caused.

  For example, the time required to change from the state of FIG. 95 (a) to the state of FIG. 95 (b) is shorter than the time required to cause the change to the state of FIG. 92 (b) to the state of FIG. Assuming that the time is shorter, if there is no change from the state of FIG. 95 (a) to the state of FIG. 95 (b) after the operation vibration of the drive motor 335a is sensed, the state of FIG. ) Changes from the state of FIG. 92 to the state of FIG. 92B, and it is possible to determine what operation the swing operation member 14310 will perform next without paying attention to the movement of the swing operation member 14310. This will reduce the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the player feels the vibration of the drive motor 335a, whether the change from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. It can be made impossible to determine whether a change from the state of a) to the state of FIG. 95B occurs. Therefore, the player's attention to the swing operation member 14310 can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 mesh with the same drive gear 335b and rotate synchronously has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 may be rotated by different drive gears as in the fourth embodiment. In this case as well, the time from when one of the drive motors is operated to the time when the swing operation member 14310 starts to swing (rotates clockwise in FIG. 92A) with respect to the lever member 13340, and The same effect can be obtained by adjusting the time until the member 13340 starts rotating clockwise in FIG. 92A.

  In addition, even when the time until each operation starts is different, the first drive motor that takes a long time is rotated first, the second drive motor that takes a short time is rotated later, and then the first drive motor is used first. By stopping the driven first drive motor (the player still feels the vibration of the second drive motor during this time), the player can feel the vibration of the first drive motor that takes a long time, The operation by the second drive motor can be caused, and the player can be surprised.

  Next, the interlocking of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 97A to 97C are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the attitude switching device 14337. Note that FIG. 97 (a) illustrates a state where the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise, and the protruding portions 14333c2 and 14337b1 have begun to abut. In FIG. 97 (b), FIG. FIG. 97 (c) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount and the protruding portion 14337b1 is moved to the side closer to the outer periphery of the protruding portion 14333c2. The state where the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of (b), and the protruding portion 14337b1 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the protruding portion 14333c2 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 97, as the upper surface of the projection 14333c2 is closer to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 from the outer peripheral surface, it is inclined away from the straight line connecting the outer peripheral surface and the eccentric cam shaft 331d. Causes the protrusion 14337b1 to move in the axial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 (the load component in the axial direction becomes dominant). Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 14333 (the load applied to the drive motor 335a) can be suppressed as compared with the case where resistance in the circumferential direction occurs on the eccentric cam member 14333.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 97 (c), the load applied to the eccentric cam member 14333 from the projecting portion 14337b passes through the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, so that no force for rotating the eccentric cam member 14333 is generated, and the driving motor 335a Even when the power is off, it is possible to withstand the load from the protruding portion 14337b. Therefore, the power consumption of the drive motor 335a can be reduced.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the case where the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 cannot be removed from the outside of the rear side frame member 13311 has been described. However, the operating device 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment has the contact member 13312a A state in which the rear side frame member 13311 is pulled out from the outside can be configured. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  98 (a) and 98 (b) are top views of the contact member 15312a in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 98 (c) is a back side frame along a line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 98D is a cross-sectional view of the rear-side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 15312 taken along line LXXXXXXVIIId-LXXXXXVIIId in FIG. 98C.

  FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the overhang member 13312a1 (locked state), and FIG. 98 (b) shows a state where the flange member 15312a2 is removed from the overhang member 13312a1 ( (Pull-out state) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b), the contact member 15312a has a rod-shaped overhang member 15312a1 whose end is configured to be deformable, and a protrusion member 15312a1 having a T-shaped cross section. And a flange member 15312a2 that deforms the projecting member 15312a1 by being embedded in the main body.

  The overhang member 15312a1 is mainly formed of a long rod-shaped main body 15312a11 and a pair of deformed portions 15312a12 connected at one end in the short direction of one end of the main body 15312a11. Prepare. The connecting portion between the main body 15312a11 and the deformable portion 15312a12 is cut to facilitate deformation, and the deformable portion 15312a12 is in a state where the flange member 15312a2 is not embedded (see FIG. 98 (b)). 15312a11 fits inside the width in the short direction.

  The flange member 15312a2 is based on the distance between the base portion 15312a21 formed to have a size that fits between the pair of support member guide walls 13311f and the connection between the main body 15312a11 and the deformed portion 15312a12 of the projecting member 15312a1 from the base portion 15312a21. And a protruding portion 15312a22 protruding with a short width.

  With such a configuration, when the protruding portion 15312a22 of the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the overhang member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 of the overhang member 15312a1 is brought into a locked state in which it protrudes outward (see FIG. 98A). When the flange member 15312a2 is separated from the overhang member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 is in a withdrawn state (see FIG. 98 (b)) which narrows inward.

  FIGS. 98 (c) and 98 (d) show a state in which the hook member 13312c is assembled to the back side outer frame member 13311. In this state, since the coil spring SP13 is shorter than the natural length, it is possible to generate a load from the coil spring SP13 for embedding the flange member 15312a2 in the projecting member 15312a1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98 (d), the contact member 15312a is locked. In this locked state, even if an attempt is made to pull out the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 is caught and cannot be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1 and illegally pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1.

  FIG. 99 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 15312 taken along a line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87, and FIG. 99 (b) is a diagram illustrating the LXXXXXb- in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the back side frame member 13311 and attitude | position correction apparatus 15312 in LXXXXIXb line.

  Note that FIG. 99 (a) and FIG. 99 (b) show a state where the hook member 13312c is removed from the back side frame member 13311 and the support member 13312b is slid to the space occupied by the hook member 13312c. .

  In the state shown in FIG. 99 (a) and FIG. 99 (b), the coil spring SP13 is in a state longer than the natural length, so that a force for pressing the flange member 15312a2 against the overhang member 15312a1 is not generated, and the deformed portion 15312a12 has a shape. By returning (returning to the state of FIG. 98B), the contact member 15312a is pulled out. Thus, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be extracted from the outside of the back side frame member 13311 (right side in FIG. 99B).

  That is, it is possible to replace the overhang member 15312a1 only by sliding the support member 13312b laterally without separating the support member 13312b from the rear frame member 13311. Therefore, for example, many members are arranged inside the back side frame member 13311, and even if it is not possible to separate the support member 13312b from the guide bottom wall 13311d, the support member 13312b collides with another member and is likely to be damaged. It is possible to replace a certain overhang member 15312a1 and to improve the maintainability.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the hook member 13312c falls off and the support member 13312b moves, the force for pushing the contact member 15312a to the outside of the rear side frame member 13311 is reduced. When a large load that falls off due to cracking or the like of the 13312c is applied from the support member 13312b to the hook member 13312c, it is possible to suppress the contact member 15312a from being similarly damaged.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the hook member 13312c falls off, the contact member 15312a can be pulled out, so that replacement can be performed immediately. For example, the fatigue strength is designed so that the hook member 13312c falls off when the contact member 15312a collides with the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) a predetermined number of times as a number of times in which the fatigue strength is weighted in consideration of safety. Thus, it is possible to determine the replacement time of the contact member 15312a by using the dropping of the hook member 13312c as a mark. Further, in a state where the hook member 13312c is dropped, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be pulled out from the outside of the rear side frame member 13311, so that replacement can be easily performed and maintenance performance can be improved.

  Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the elastic force of the torsion spring SP1 for urging the swing operation member 13310 changes depending on whether the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position or the downward position, and Although the case where the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes has been described, the operation device 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment additionally operates the swing operation member 16310 by changing the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310. The feeling can be changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 100A to 100D are side views of the operation device 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment. 100 (a) to 100 (d) show an external view of the swing operation member 16310, a cross-sectional view of the lever member 13340 is schematically shown, and other portions are schematically imagined. This is illustrated by a line.

  100 (a) and 100 (b) show a state in which the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, and in FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d), the swing operation member 16310 is downward. The state where it is arranged at the position is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (c), a state in which the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the moving end on the forward rotation side (counterclockwise side in FIG. 100 (a)) with respect to the lever member 13340 is shown. 100 (b) and 100 (d), a state in which the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the moving end on the backward (the clockwise side in FIG. 100 (a)) with respect to the lever member 13340 is shown. Illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the swing operation member 16310 hides the rear frame member 13311, the posture correcting device 13312, the front cover 13313, the rear cover 13314, and the fastening portions of the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314. In addition, a separation prevention cover 16315 having an iron ball 16315e for changing the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310, and a protection cover 13316 disposed between the separation prevention cover 16315 and the rear side frame member 13311 (FIG. 82) and a lens member 13317.

  The separation preventing cover 16315 is provided on the receiving recess 13315a and the retaining hole 13315b (see FIG. 82) and on the wall surfaces of the rear frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313 in the front-rear direction (left and right directions in FIG. 100 (a)) from the lower end of the disk portion. Extending portion 16315c extending along the inner surface, a long groove 16315d arranged in a long groove shape on a side surface of the extending portion 16315c facing the rear frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313, and the inside of the long groove 16315d. And an iron ball 16315e movably disposed.

  The long groove 16315d is a groove for rolling the iron ball 16315e disposed inside by gravity, and in FIG. 100 (a), the right end portion is closer to the shaft support rod 363 than the left end portion. The distance is shortened.

  Further, the angle θ13y for rotating the swing operation member 16310 from the forward rotation end to the rearward rotation end is 10 degrees (θ13y = 10 °), and the rotation angle of the lever member 13340 is 34 degrees. By setting the angle θ16a of the long groove 16315d at 100 (a) to be less than 24 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 100 (a)) (θ16a <24 °), the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position. In this case, the position of the iron ball 16315e can be maintained with respect to the swing operation of the swing operation member 16310 regardless of whether the iron ball 16315e is swung downward (the vertical relationship between the left and right ends of the long groove 16315d is maintained). Can be). In the present embodiment, the angle θ16a is set to about 10 degrees.

  The iron ball 16315e is a spherical member made of iron, and is a ball that can bear most of the weight of the swing operation member 16310. Therefore, when the iron ball 16315e moves, the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 changes.

  As shown in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (b), when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, an iron ball 16315e is arranged at the right end of the long groove 16315d, and the center of gravity is set at the shaft support rod 363. 100 (c) and 100 (d), when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the downward position, an iron ball 16315e is arranged at the left end of the long groove 16315d, and the center of gravity is set. The position is moved away from the pivot 363.

  That is, the distance from the pivot 363 to the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position or the downward position. Thus, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed.

  For example, in the case where the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position than in the case where the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the position of the center of gravity is farther from the shaft support rod 363 and the moment around the axis of the swing operation member 16310 (FIG. 100 (c) counterclockwise moment) can be increased.

  Therefore, in a state where the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the downward position (see FIG. 100C and FIG. 100D), the player pushes the lens member 13317 to perform the front swing operation member 16310. After rotating in the turning direction (after rotating from the state of FIG. 100 (d) to the state of FIG. 100 (c)), the posture of the swing operation member 16310 returns due to the load generated by the posture correcting device 13312 (FIG. 100 (c)). ) To the state shown in FIG. 100 (d)) can be made longer (so as to return slowly) than when the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 is arranged near the rotation axis. Can be).

  Thus, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is reduced by the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 (see FIG. 89) in the thirteenth embodiment. When the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the downward position while maintaining the same, the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 rotating in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 100C) can be increased. . In this case, the time from when the player hits the lens member 13317 to return to the state shown in FIG. 100D after the swing operation member 16310 is brought into the state shown in FIG. Also, when the player hits the lens member 13317 again (when the player repeatedly hits the lens member 13317), the posture of the swing operation member 16310 can be maintained in the state of FIG. 100 (c), and immediately from the state of FIG. 100 (c). As compared with the case where the state returns to the state of FIG. 100D, the continuous tapping operation of the lens member 13317 can be facilitated.

  Also, in terms of the change in rotation resistance due to the difference in the rotation direction of the swing operation member 16310, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, the swing operation member 16310 is rotated clockwise in FIG. Since the direction in which the iron ball 16315e is moved downward is a direction in which the iron ball 16315e is moved downward, the rotation resistance can be reduced as compared with the case where the iron ball 16315e is rotated counterclockwise in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the direction in which the swing operation member 16310 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 100C is the direction in which the iron ball 16315e is moved downward. Rotational resistance can be reduced as compared with the case of rotating clockwise in FIG. 100 (c).

  Therefore, depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the downward position or the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, the direction in which the rotational resistance when rotating the swing operation member 16310 is reduced is reduced. Can be reversed.

  According to the present embodiment, the rotation resistance of the swinging operation member 16310 is changed by the movement of the iron ball 16315e (due to a change in the state of the inside of the swinging operation member 16310). The load applied to the swing operation member 16310 can be reduced as compared with the case where the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310 is increased by applying a load in the direction.

  Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the case where the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes due to the change in the torsion of the torsion spring SP2 has been described. However, the operation device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment includes the swing member 17360. The operability of the swinging operation member 13310 can be changed by rubbing the wall member 17322b with the wall member 17322b. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 101 (a) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, and FIG. 101 (b) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position. . FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b) show a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed, and a swing operation member with respect to the lever member 13340, respectively. The state where 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side is illustrated.

  In the present embodiment, a swing member 17360 is pivotally supported at the tip of the lever member 13340 instead of the swing member 360 in the first embodiment. The swing member 17360 mainly includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 17362 formed to rub against the wall member 17322 b, a shaft support bar 363, a buffer member 364, a regulating bar 365, and a vibration device 366. (See FIG. 81).

  The motor fixing plate 17362 includes a friction arm portion 17362c extending in the radial direction of the shaft hole 362b1 through which the shaft support rod 363 is inserted from the side wall portion 362b.

  Also, instead of the wall member 13322b of the thirteenth embodiment, a wall member 17322b is fitted between the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 (see FIG. 78). The wall member 17322b includes an extending portion 17322b1 extending upward from an upper end thereof.

  As shown in FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b), the extending portion 17322b1 does not come into contact with the friction arm portion 17362c when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, and the swing operation member 13310 Is formed in a state of contacting the friction arm portion 17362c in a state in which is disposed at the downward position. That is, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, the extending portion 17322b1 has a contact surface pressed against the distal end portion of the friction arm portion 17362c. It is formed in an arc shape centered at 363. Thereby, the contact area between the extended portion 17322b1 and the friction arm portion 17362c can be secured, and a sufficient dynamic friction force can be exhibited. Accordingly, since the rotational resistance of the motor swing plate 13362 increases due to the dynamic frictional force, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 also increases, so that the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

  Since the change in the operational feeling described above changes depending on the position of the lever member 13340, the change amount does not change depending on the operation speed of the lever member 13340. Therefore, regardless of whether the swing operation member 13310 is swung at a high speed or the swing operation member 13310 is operated slowly, if the tip of the lever member 13310 is disposed at the downward position, the swing operation member 13310 is provided. In the same manner, a dynamic frictional force can be applied to the rotation of, so that a change in the operational feeling can be reliably generated.

  Further, the dynamic frictional force changes according to the pressing force, and does not change according to the rotation speed of the motor fixing plate 17362. Therefore, in the state where the tip of the frictional arm portion 17362c is pressed against the extension portion 17322b1. Even when the rotation speed is low (for example, when the rotation is started), a sufficient dynamic frictional force can be generated.

  In this embodiment, since the extending portion 17322b1 is provided on the wall member 17322b, when the extending portion 17322b1 is damaged, the members that need to be replaced are limited to the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322. it can. Therefore, replacement of the wall member 17322b can be facilitated, and maintainability can be improved.

  Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the case where the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 changes depending on the arrangement of the lever member 13340 has been described. However, the operating device 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment drives the driving force via the eccentric cam member 5333. Is transmitted to the swinging member 18360, so that the rotational resistance of the swinging operation member 13310 can be changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 102A to 102C are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. Note that FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (c) show a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position, and the torsion spring SP2 is not shown, and the lower cover member 345 (FIG. 81) (See FIG. 2) is removed. Also, a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated forward with respect to the lever member 18340 is shown.

  The operation device 18300 according to the present embodiment includes a swing member 18360 that is disposed inside the swing operation member 13310 and rotates integrally with the swing operation member 13310, and a lever member 18340 that pivotally supports the swing member 18360. , At least as a part different from the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  The oscillating member 18360 includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 18362 having a thin wall portion 18362 c extending from the side wall portion 362 b along the opening direction of the shaft hole 362 b 1, a shaft support rod 363, and a cushioning member 364. , A regulating rod 365 and a vibration device 366 (see FIG. 81).

  The thin wall portion 18362c is a portion disposed around the shaft support rod 363 in an assembled state (see FIG. 102A). In the present embodiment, the thin wall portion 18362c is attached to the shaft support rod 363. A rubber band RB capable of generating a load in the pressing direction is wound around the thin wall portion 18362c.

  The rubber band RB is a band-shaped member formed of a rubber material, and both ends are fixed to the periphery of the lever support shaft 331d1 by pins so as not to move. Therefore, when rotating the swing operation member 13310, sliding friction occurs between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB.

  The lever member 18340 includes, instead of the main body member 13341 of the thirteenth embodiment, a main body member 18341 having a transmission device 18347 configured to be movable by being brought into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333.

  The main body member 18341 sandwiches a long hole 18341h extending obliquely to the longitudinal direction of the lever member 18340 and a direction in which the long hole 18341h extends on the side wall portion of the main body 18341a formed in a U-shaped cross section. And a pair of guide wall portions 18341i arranged in parallel in an aspect. The long hole 18341h extends to a position where it interferes with the rubber band RB, as shown in FIG.

  The transmission device 18347 has a protrusion inserted into the long hole 18341h and is sized so as to be slidable between the guide walls 18341i. The pusher 18347a is supported by the lower end of the pusher 18347a. An adjusting portion 18347b and a projecting portion 18347c projecting from the lower end of the pushing portion 18347a along one side surface of the adjusting portion 18347b (along the upper side surface in this embodiment). In the present embodiment, the adjusting portion 18347b is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 102A (the posture in which the adjusting portion 18347b comes into contact with the overhang portion 18347c) by an urging spring (not shown) with respect to the pushing portion 18347a.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, the long hole 18241h and the guide are provided in a positional relationship in which the adjusting portion 18347b and the eccentric cam member 5333 collide while the eccentric cam member 5333 rotates. A wall portion 18341i is provided.

  By extending the overhang portion 18347c beyond the pivotal support position of the adjustment portion 18347b, it is possible to prevent the adjustment portion 18347b from rotating in a direction approaching the overhang portion 18347c. Therefore, a direction in which the adjusting portion 18347b is easily rotated with respect to the pushing portion 18347a and a direction in which the adjusting portion 18347b is hardly rotated can be created.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to switch whether or not to change the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position.

  That is, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 102A from the state of FIG. 102A, the driving force is used to rotate the adjusting portion 18347b with respect to the pushing portion 18347a. The part 18347a does not move along the long hole 18341h (see FIG. 102 (b)). Therefore, the state of the rubber band RB does not change, and the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 does not change.

  On the other hand, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 102A from the state of FIG. 102A, the adjusting portion 18347b is locked in the rotating direction by the overhang portion 18347c, and the adjusting portion 18347b is pushed in by the pushing portion 18347a. Therefore, the driving force is used to move the long hole 18341h (see FIG. 102 (c)). In this case, since the pushing portion 18347a deforms the rubber band RB in the extending direction, the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB are more closely adhered to each other, and the sliding resistance between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB increases. . Therefore, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes.

  Therefore, even if the swinging operation member 13310 appears to be in the same state as the state in which the swinging operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 5333 is switched and the transmission device 18347 is operated or stopped. Thus, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

  Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the load generated from the posture correcting device 13312 is given only to the swing operation member 13310. However, the operating device 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment has the load generated from the posture correcting device 13312. It can be applied to the lever member 19340. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 103A and 103B are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. 103 (a) and 103 (b) show a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, and in FIG. 103 (a), the player gives the swing operation member 13310 FIG. 103 (b) shows a state in which no force is applied, and FIG. 103 (b) shows a state in which the player applies a force to the swing operation member 13310 and rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 103 (b)). Illustrated.

  The lever member 19340 is configured in such a manner that only the locking projection 19345e protrudes from the side wall of the lower cover member 345 of the lever member 13340 in the thirteenth embodiment is added from the lever member 13340. The locking projection 19345e is disposed at a position on the rotation locus of the rotation lever 19337b when the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position.

  As shown in FIG. 103A, in the present embodiment, an inner case member 19330 is provided instead of the inner case member 13330. The inner case member 19330 is configured such that a transmission device 19337 is added inside the inner case member 13330.

  The transmission device 19337 is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft 19337a of the left cover member 13331 and is formed in an L-shaped cross section, and a rotation direction of the rotation lever 19337b fixed to the left cover member 13331 (FIG. 103 (a)). ) A torsion spring SP19 for generating a biasing force in a counterclockwise direction).

  When the rotating lever 19337b is located at the rotating end in the biasing direction (see FIG. 103 (a)), the posture maintaining portion 19337b1 abuts on the inner surface of the front wall surface of the left cover member 13331, and maintains the posture. When the rotary lever 19337b is positioned at the rotation end in the biasing direction while being bent from the rod-shaped portion having the portion 19337b1, the front end and the front contact surface 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 of the left front cover 13321 and the surface position. And a contact portion 19337b2 disposed on the main body. In this embodiment, the arrangement of the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and an opening is also formed in the inner case member 19330, so that the contact member 13312a and the contact portion 19337b2 are formed inside the opening. And can be abutted.

  With these configurations, the load applied to the swing operation member 13310 can be used as a load for suppressing the vibration of the lever member 19340. The details will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at a downward position in a state where the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 13310 (for example, an eccentric cam member 5333 (see FIG. 89)). (When the swing operation member 13310 is moved by the rotation of the lever), the contact member 13312a of the posture correcting device 13312 is pushed by the contact portion 19337b2 of the transmission device 19337, and the swing operation member 13310 rotates with respect to the lever member 19340. (The state shown in FIG. 103A). In this state, the rotating lever 19337b is not in contact with the lever member 19340, and no load is transmitted, so that the driving force for driving the rotating lever 19337b can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the player performs an operation of rotating the swing operation member 13310 from the state of FIG. 103 (a), if the load at that time exceeds the urging force of the torsion spring SP19. The contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 rotates the rotation lever 19337b of the transmission device 19337. In this case, when the rotating lever 19337b comes into contact with the locking projection 19345e in the rotating direction, a reaction operation of the lever member 19340 in the rotating direction via the rotating lever 19337b (the operation of rotating clockwise in FIG. 103 (b)). ) Can be suppressed.

  Therefore, for example, when the player hits the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) of the swing operation member 13310, a load is applied in a direction to raise the lever member 19340 due to the reaction, and the rear end of the lever member 19340 is moved from below. Although the supporting lock member 5336 (see FIG. 12B) may be overloaded, in the present embodiment, the rotation lever 19337b is configured to suppress the rotation of the lever member 19340. The required load can be reduced.

  Further, when the rotating lever 19337b contacts the lever member 19340, the rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 increases, and the driving force for driving the lever member 19340 may be unnecessarily large. In this embodiment, the lens member 13317 is used. Since the rotation lever 19337b can be brought into contact with the lever member 19340 only when an overload is applied (see FIG. 77), a normal (for example, when the player does not touch the swing operation member 13310) is used. The rotation resistance of the lever member 19340 can be maintained in a low state.

  Thereby, while the driving force of the lever member 19340 is suppressed, when an overload is applied, the rotation resistance of the lever member 19340 is temporarily increased, so that the locking member 5336 (see FIG. 89 (b)) is provided. The applied load can be suppressed, and the durability of the lock member 5336 can be improved.

  Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the case where the posture correcting device 13312 that rotates the swinging operation member 13310 in the direction in which it is raised moves linearly is described. However, the operating device 20300 in the twentieth embodiment is configured such that the posture correcting device 20312 is rotated. It is configured as a mobile device. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 104A and 104B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 20300 in the twentieth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A, and FIG. FIG. 7A is a rear view of the swing operation member 20310 when viewed in the direction of the arrow CV.

  104 (a) and 104 (b) show a state in which the swing operation member 20310 is arranged at the downward position, and in FIG. 104 (a), the player swings the swing operation member 13310. FIG. 104 (b) shows a state in which no force is applied and the swing operation member 20310 is rotated in the backward rotation direction. In FIG. 104 (b), a force is applied from the player to the swing operation member 13310 and the forward rotation direction (FIG. 104 ( (b) Counterclockwise rotation) shows a state in which the swing operation member 20310 is rotated.

  The swing operation member 20310 is provided in a cup-shaped (outer shape similar to the rear frame member 13311) rear side frame member 20311 disposed below the swing member 366, and disposed on the rear side frame member 20311. It mainly includes a posture correcting device 20312, a front cover 13313, a rear cover 13314, a separation preventing cover 13315, a protective cover 13316, and a lens member 13317 (see FIG. 82).

  The rear side frame member 20311 includes a functional wall portion 20311c that is a partition that divides an opening on the rear surface into an insertion hole 311a and an operation region hole 20311b that opens a region where the posture correction device 20312 operates.

  The functional wall portion 20311c is recessed from the back side to the front side with a width slightly larger than the shaft bar portion 20312a1 of the posture correcting device 20312, and is formed to be able to support the shaft bar portion 20312a1; Above the concave portion 20311c1, the insertion concave portion 20311c2, which is concavely formed in a fan-shaped cross section (a shape in which the width increases as the depth increases from the entrance) and the concave portion 20311c1 of the insertion concave portion 20311c2, And a locking projection 20311c3 projecting from the inner side surface on the far side.

  The posture correcting device 20312 mainly includes a main body member 20312a having a J-shaped cross section, and a leaf spring-shaped leaf spring member 20312b assembled with the main body member 20312a so as to pass through the opening 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. Prepare for.

  The main body member 20312a includes a shaft bar portion 20312a1 that is supported by the recessed portion 20311c1, a flat plate portion 20312a2 formed by disposing the shaft bar portion 20312a1 at an end, and a shaft bar portion 20312a1 and a flat plate portion. An opening portion 20312a3 formed between the opening portions 20312a2, a curved portion 20312a4 formed by bending from the lower end portion of the flat plate portion 20312a2, and a pinch formed to be able to pinch the leaf spring member 20312b at a distal end portion of the curved portion 20312a4. And a concave portion 20312a5.

  A side surface of the insertion recessed portion 20311c2 far from the recessed portion 20311c1 is disposed in parallel with a wall portion in which the recessed portion 20311c1 is recessed, and a vertical interval between them is greater than a thickness of the leaf spring member 20312b. Is also slightly increased.

  The leaf spring member 20312b is set to have a thickness smaller than the dimension of the entrance of the insertion recess 20311c2 and a width smaller than the opening 20312a3. An upper portion 20312b1 that presses the shaft bar portion 20312a1 fitted in the 20311c1 so that it cannot be pulled out, and is bent from the lower end portion (located at the upper end portion of the opening portion 20312a3) of the upper portion 20312b1 and the opening portion 20312a3 faces inward. It mainly includes a lower portion 20312b2 that is extended in a penetrating manner and inserted into the holding concave portion 20312a5, and a locking hole 20312b3 that is formed in the upper portion 20312b1. In the present embodiment, the leaf spring member 20312b is urged in a direction in which the bending is gentle (a direction in which the lower end portion in FIG. 104A rubs counterclockwise).

  The locking hole 20312b3 is a hole in which the locking projection 20311c3 is hooked in a state where the leaf spring member 20312b is inserted into the insertion concave portion 20311c2. Therefore, even when an outward (rightward in FIG. 104A) load is applied to the leaf spring member 20312b in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the leaf spring member 20312b from dropping out of the insertion concave portion 20311c2. .

  According to the configuration in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the main body member 20312a from dropping off from the recess 20311c1 due to the elastic force of the leaf spring member 20312b. That is, when the shaft bar portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a is moved in the dropping direction, the leaf spring member 20312b also needs to be moved together. Since the direction is to bite into the portion 20311c3, the leaf spring member 20312b cannot be moved, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the shaft bar portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a from dropping from the recessed portion 20311c1.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the main body member 20312a receives a load from the wall member 13322b and is pushed into the inside of the back side frame member 20311, the main body member 20312a is pressed in the direction in which the urging force of the leaf spring member 20312b increases. Since the spring member 20312b is displaced, it becomes more difficult to drop the shaft bar portion 20312a1 from the concave portion 20311c1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player mistakenly removes the posture correcting device 2031 during a game while using no fastening member such as a screw.

  Here, when an overload occurs between the wall member 13322b and the main body member 20312a and the main body member 20312a is broken, the lower end of the main body member 20312a is not locked to the lower end of the operation area hole 20311b, The leaf spring member 20312b is deformed to a position where the bending is eliminated. Therefore, since the leaf spring member 20312b is exposed outside the back side frame member 20311, a difference from a normal state is large, and the necessity of maintenance can be easily determined by an appearance inspection.

  As a method of assembling the posture correcting device 20312 to the functional wall portion 20311c, first, the shaft bar portion 20312a1 is fitted into the recessed portion 20311c1 with the leaf spring member 20312b inserted through the opening 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. At this time, the leaf spring member 20312b has not yet been inserted into the holding recess 20312a5.

  Next, the upper part 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b, which can freely move inside the opening 20312a3, is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2.

  Finally, the lower part 20312b2 of the leaf spring member 20312b is pulled downward from the inside of the back side frame member 20311 and inserted into the holding recess 20312a5, whereby the state shown in FIG. 104A can be formed. In this state, the upper portion 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b is rotated around the side surface on which the recessed portion 20311c1 is formed as a fulcrum in a direction approaching the locking protrusion 20311c3 inside the inserted concave portion 20311c2, and the locking hole is formed. 20312b3 is hooked on the locking projection 20311c3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper portion 20312b1 from dropping from the insertion concave portion 20311c2.

  As described above, if the leaf spring member 20312b is touched from the inside of the back side frame member 20311, the assembling and removal are easy (the lower side 20312b2 may be deformed), but the back side frame member is in an assembled state. When the leaf spring member 20312b is touched only from the outside of 20311, removal becomes difficult.

  Therefore, when the posture correcting device 20312 is detached from the inside by removing the rear frame member 20311 as in the case of maintenance, the operation can be performed quickly and easily, and the posture can be corrected from the outside of the rear frame member 20311. Fraud such as removal of the device 20312 can be made difficult.

  Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, the case where the motor fixing plate 17362 rubs against the wall member 17322b has been described. However, in the operating device 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment, the motor fixing plate 21362 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the lever member 13340. It consists of. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 106A and 106B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A. FIG. 106 (a) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, and FIG. 106 (b) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position. . Further, FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b) show a state where the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed, and in FIG. 106 (a), the lever member 13340 is attached to the lever member 13340. On the other hand, FIG. 106B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side, and FIG. 106B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the rear rotation side. You.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the wall member 21322b includes an extended slide portion 21322b2 that extends forward and upward (in FIG. 106 (a), diagonally to the upper left) and is disposed inside the pair of friction arms 17362c.

  The extension slide portion 21322b2 includes a long hole 21322b21 that is formed in the left-right direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 106) and extends in the up-down direction. The groove portion 21322b21 is arranged at a position where the protruding pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. 106 (a), and from the position, the outer side of an arc passing through the position with the lever support shaft 331d1 as a center. 106 is formed in such a manner that the distance from the lever support shaft 331d1 increases as it goes downward, and the projecting pins 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. 106 (b).

  The swing member 21360 includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 21362 having a shape similar to the motor fixing plate 362, a shaft support rod 363, a buffer member 364, a regulating rod 365, a vibration device 366, (See FIG. 81).

  The motor fixing plate 21362 mainly includes a main body portion 362a, a side wall portion 362b, a pair of friction arm portions 17362b, and a projection pin 21362d protruding inward from the pair of friction arm portions 17362b.

  In this embodiment, since the protruding pin 21362d is inserted into the elongated hole 21322b21, the shape of the elongated hole 21322b21 changes the manner of movement of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 accompanying rotation of the lever member 13340. be able to. For example, by forming the long hole 21322b21 to have a shape equivalent to an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, the swing operation member 13310 can rotate with respect to the lever member 13340 when the lever member 13340 rotates around the lever support shaft 331d1. Displacement can be eliminated.

  On the other hand, by making the long hole 21322b21 extend in a direction inclined with respect to an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 as in the present embodiment, the lever member 13340 is projected by rotation. The motor fixing plate 21362 is rotated so as to fill the displacement of the fitting position that occurs between the setting pin 21362d and the long hole 21322b21. Accordingly, if the motor fixing plate 21362 rotates (in a rotatable direction, that is, from the state shown in FIG. 106A to the state shown in FIG. 106B) with (in conjunction with) the rotating operation of the lever member 13340. 106 (a) (clockwise), the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated. Thus, the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated in conjunction with each other.

  Next, a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described twenty-first embodiment, the case where the posture of the swing operation member 13310 changes due to the projection pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 being guided by the groove portion 21322b21, but the operation device 22300 in the twenty-second embodiment has The posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is caused by the gear meshing rotation. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 107A and 107B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 22300 in the twenty-second embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A.

  FIG. 107 (a) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, and FIG. 107 (b) illustrates a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position. Note that FIGS. 107 (a) and 107 (b) show a state where the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed, and in FIG. 107 (a), the lever member 22340 is attached to the lever member 22340. On the other hand, FIG. 107B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side, and FIG. 107B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the rear rotation side. You. In FIG. 107 (a) and FIG. 107 (b), illustration of the torsion spring SP1 and the guide support hole 331e1 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 107, the operation device 22300 pivotally supports the swing operation member 13310 at one end (the left side in FIG. 107 (b)), and a lever member 22340 pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331 d 1. A wall member 22322b having an arcuate wall portion 22322b2 always meshed with the rotating gear 22347 of the lever member 22340, and a oscillating member 22360 having a toothed plate portion 22362c always meshed with the rotating gear 22347 of the lever member 22340. Prepare mainly.

  The lever member 22340 is configured in such a manner that a rotary gear 22347 supported by the angle regulating rod member 346 is added to the lever member 13340 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  The wall member 22322b is a plate member fitted into the fitting concave portion 13322a (see FIG. 78), and includes an inward extending portion 22322b1 extending in a direction approaching the lever support shaft 331d1, and an inward extending portion thereof. An arc-shaped wall portion 22322b2 extending from the inner end (the right side in FIG. 107A) of the 22322b1 along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and having gear teeth meshed with the rotating gear 22347. And.

  The oscillating member 22360 has a motor fixing plate in which the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 81) of the oscillating member 360 in the thirteenth embodiment has a toothed plate portion 22362c in which gear teeth to be meshed with the rotary gear 22347 are formed. 22362.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the lever member 22340 is rotated, the rotary gear 22347 is rotated with respect to the arcuate wall portion 22322b2, and the motor fixing plate 22362 is supported by the rotation of the rotary gear 22347. The rod 363 is rotated about an axis. Therefore, the rotation of the swing operation member 13310 can be continued while the lever member 22340 is rotating.

  In the present embodiment, the lever member 22340 is rotated 34 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 107A to the state shown in FIG. 107B, and during this time, the swing operation member 13310 is rotated 10 degrees. That is, the gear ratio of the tooth plate portion 22362c to the gear teeth formed on the arc-shaped wall portion 22322b2 is about 0.3 (= 10/34).

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the shape of the body member 341 of the lever member 340 is fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be partially expandable and contractible in the longitudinal direction. In this case, the main body member 341 is contracted, and the swinging operation member 310 is configured to be able to be stored at the rear, so that the swinging operation member 310 is disposed at the downward position and protrudes to the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the packing box is provided. In the case of protruding, the front and rear width of the swinging operation member 310 can be reduced to a size that can be accommodated in a packing box.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the gear damper 6347 generates viscous resistance only when the peeling member 6350 is peeled from the lever member 6340 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a viscous resistance may be generated in the gear damper only when the lever member 6340 and the peeling member 6350 are fixed by suction. In this case, a resistance corresponding to the operation speed when the player operates the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the player, and the operational feeling can be improved.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350 (when the circumscribed circle of the rotation trajectory of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact). Although the case where the upper end of the lock member 4336 abuts on the lower end of the lock receiving member 4350 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lock receiving member 4350 may be restricted from swinging by the upper end of the lock member 4336 at a position separated upward from the eccentric cam member 4333.

  In this case, when the lock receiving member 4350 swings due to the rotational driving of the eccentric cam member 4333, the lock receiving member 4350 is not restricted by the lock member 4336, so that the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotationally driven in one direction. By doing so, it is possible to perform a tilting operation of reciprocating the swing operation member 310 up and down.

  Further, for example, when the intermediate portion between the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350, the lock receiving member 4350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336. But it is good.

  In this case, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 in one direction, the lock receiving member 4350 can reciprocate up and down above the upper end of the lock member 4336, and can perform a tilting operation. In addition, even if the player performs an erroneous operation of lifting the swinging operation member 310 upward during the swinging operation, the swing of the lock receiving member 4350 can be restricted by the lock member 4336, and the eccentric cam member 4333 is not moved. Damage can be prevented.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the lock member 8336 enters the lower side of the lever member 340 when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other and regulates the swing of the lever member 340 has been described. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a bar-shaped member that extends and contracts from the side wall of the inner case member 8330 toward the inside of the inner case member 8330 is provided, and the bar-shaped member is extended when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other, The lever member 340 may be inserted under the rear end portion.

  In this case, it is not necessary to make the shape of the hook-shaped tip portion of the lock member 8336 into a shape below the lever member 340, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lock member 8336 can be improved.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side in a state where the lever member 340 is in the middle position of the swing angle range has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side when the rear end of the lever member 340 is arranged at the uppermost position of the swing angle range.

  In this case, even if the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the range in which the lever member 340 can swing above the peeling member 350 whose swing is restricted is limited, so that the player's operation is possible. Accordingly, the momentum in the swing direction applied to the lever member 340 is suppressed (the lever member 340 cannot be moved to such an extent that the momentum is applied). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the inner case member 8330 from being damaged by the lever member 340 vigorously colliding with the inner case member 8330.

  Further, for example, when the rear end of the lever member 340 is located at the lowest position in the swing angle range, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side. In this case, the distance between the rear end of the lever member 340 and the upper side surface of the inner case member 8330 can be increased in the posture in which the swinging of the lever member 340 is restricted. The player notices that the sensation transmitted to the player is changed by this operation (the weight of the peeling member 350 is not transmitted to the player and the swing operation member 310 is felt heavy), and the player swings the swing operation member. It is possible to have a time margin to reduce the load applied to 310.

  On the other hand, when the rear end of the lever member 340 is located at the lowermost position of the swing angle range, the peeling member 350 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other, so that a load is applied from the peeling member 350 to the eccentric cam member 333. May occur. Therefore, in order to prevent this, only when the lock member 8336 is arranged on the information than the middle position of the swing range (when the eccentric cam member 333 does not contact the peeling member 350), the lock member 8336 is fixed to the fixed side. May be arranged.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case has been described where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are formed with the same length, and the elastic coefficient of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is larger than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 may have the same elastic coefficient, and the upper elastic connecting member CS91 may be shorter than the lower elastic connecting member CS92.

  In this case, in a state where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 have the same length (stretched) with each other, the upper elastic connecting member CS91 has a larger elastic displacement and a larger elastic recovery force. In a later state, the lens member 317 of the swing operation member 310 can be easily held upward. This makes it easy for the player to push the lens member 317 from above.

  In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the case where the hook member 13312c is formed of a hard resin has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hook member 13312c may be formed of a shape memory material that maintains its shape at room temperature and changes shape in a manner in which the engagement with the support member 13312b is released by heating. In this case, the replacement of the hook member 13312c can be performed without removing the rear frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the protective cover 13316 is formed from a hard resin and the rear side frame member 13311 needs to be removed from the intermediate base M13 in order to remove the protective cover 13316 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the protective cover 13316 may be formed from a soft resin material. In this case, by changing the shape of the protective cover 13316, the protective cover 13316 can be removed even while the rear frame member 13311 is fixed to the intermediate base M13.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the surface state of the extending portion 17322b1 of the wall member 17322b is uniform has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a first region having a large friction coefficient and a second region having a smaller friction coefficient than the first region may be formed in the surface state of the extending portion 17322b1. In this case, the friction arm portion 17362c gives the player a sense of operation (rotational resistance, weight) that gives the player who swings the swing operation member 13310 while the friction arm portion 17362c and the extension portion 17322b1 are rubbing. It can be changed between the case where it rubs with the region and the case where the friction arm portion 17362c rubs with the second region.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the rotating lever 19337b is in contact with the lever member 19340 in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation lever 19337b may be in contact with the lever member 19340 while the swing operation member 13310 is moving toward the downward position (the lever member 19340 is moving). In this case, by operating the rotating lever 19337b in a direction opposite to the rotating direction of the lever member 19340 and bringing the lever into contact with each other, an effect of decelerating the lever member 19340 can be obtained.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<One example of the technical concept of a structure in which the lever member 340 breaks when locked>
In a gaming machine including a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's operation, and a regulating member that regulates movement of the moving member, the moving member may be configured such that the player An operating member to be operated, and a regulated member connected to the operating member and capable of regulating movement of the regulating member, wherein the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulating member. A gaming machine A1 wherein the shape of the moving member is configured to be deformable when a load of a predetermined amount or more acts on the operating member.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's manual operation is regulated at a predetermined position by a regulating member (for example, See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the player applies an overload to the moving member in a state where the movement is restricted, the load is applied to the restricting member through the moving member, and the restricting member may be damaged. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the moving member includes the operating member operated by the player and the regulated member which is connected to the operating member and whose movement can be regulated by the regulating member. In the state where the member is restricted from moving by the regulating member, the load of the moving member is deformable by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the operating member, so that the load is consumed for deforming the shape of the moving member. Thus, the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restriction member from being damaged by the player applying an overload to the moving member.

  In addition, as a configuration of the moving member that realizes deformation of the shape of the moving member due to the application of a load, for example, a configuration in which an elastic member such as a spring is disposed in a part of the A configuration in which each part is attracted by magnetic force is exemplified.

  In a configuration in which an elastic member such as a spring is provided in a part of the moving member, the degree of deformation of the shape of the moving member changes in proportion to the applied load. The greater the degree of deformation, the greater the degree of deformation of the moving member. For this reason, as the overload is applied to the operation member by the player, the load consumed by the elastic member can be increased, and the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced accordingly.

  In a configuration in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts and each member is attracted by magnetic force, the moving member maintains its shape until a load greater than the attracting force is applied, and the moving member is not applied until a load greater than the attracting force is applied. Is deformed. Thereby, when operating normally with a load equal to or less than the suction force, the moving member can be treated as a rigid body, and the operation of the moving member can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine A1, the moving member is fixed to the operating member by a predetermined amount or more in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and in a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulating member. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being able to constitute at least a non-transmission state in which the operation member is relatively movable with respect to the regulated member by applying a load of.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1, the moving member is operated in a fixed state in which the operation member is fixed to the regulated member and in a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulating member. By applying a load equal to or more than a predetermined amount to the member, at least the non-transmission state in which the operation member is relatively movable with respect to the regulated member can be configured. In the non-transmission state, transmission of the load to the regulating member can be suppressed while ensuring the performance.

  In the gaming machines A1 and A2, a supporting member that supports the moving member is provided, and the operating member and the regulated member that constitute the moving member are coaxially supported by a first shaft provided on the supporting member. The gaming machine A3, wherein the movement of the moving member is a swing about the first axis.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines A1 and A2, the operation member is operated so that a large load is not applied between the regulating member and the regulated member. Damage to the regulating member can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A4, further comprising a first urging member for generating an urging force for moving the moving member in the swing direction, wherein the urging force is applied to the operation member.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the urging force of the first urging member is applied to the operation member side and is not applied to the regulated member side. It is possible to prevent the urging force from being applied. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged by receiving an excessive urging force from the first urging member when the moving member is in the non-transmission state.

  Here, when an excessive urging force is generated, the spring member is arranged in a manner to connect the operation member and the regulated member, and the spring member does not expand and contract in the fixed state, but operates in the non-transmission state. The case where the spring member between the member and the regulated member is expanded and contracted to generate an urging force is exemplified. In this case, if the amount of change in the distance between the operation member and the regulated member increases, an excessive urging force may be generated from the regulated member to the regulating member.

  In the gaming machine A4, the first shaft is disposed in the longitudinal direction in the horizontal direction, and the urging force of the first urging member is generated in a direction in which the operating member is caused to fall forward, and the fixed state is set. The gaming machine A5, wherein the non-transmission state is configured by applying a downward load to the operation member in a state where the movement member is restricted from swinging by the restriction member.

  Here, if the direction of urging of the first urging member is set to the direction in which the moving member rises, when the player overloads the operation member downward, the operation member is separated from the regulated member and regulated. Even if the damage to the members can be prevented, the operating member rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so that the player may not notice that the operating member is overloaded and may repeatedly overload the operating member. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, since the direction of urging of the operating member by the first urging member is directed to the direction in which the operating member is tilted forward, the operating member is moved downward. Can be kept in place. Thus, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player repeatedly applies an overload to the operation member.

  In the gaming machine A4, the first shaft is disposed in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, and the urging force of the first urging member is directed in a direction to raise the operation member, and the movement in the fixed state is performed. The gaming machine A6, wherein the non-transmission state is configured by applying a downward load to the operation member in a state where the member is restricted from swinging by the restriction member.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, since the operation member is oriented in a direction of ascending and a downward load is applied to the operation member, a non-transmission state is configured. Even if a downward load is applied to the moving member and the moving member is in the non-transmission state, when the player releases the load, the operating member moves to the fixed state side by the urging force. Accordingly, the arrangement of the operation members can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

  A gaming machine A7 provided with a braking means for reducing a swing speed of the operation member when the moving member returns from the non-transmission state to the fixed state in the gaming machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, since the swing speed of the operation member when returning from the non-transmission state to the fixed state is reduced, the operation member can quickly return to the fixed state. Thus, transmission of an impact to the regulating member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A7, the braking means is a gear damper provided on the support member and capable of generating viscous resistance, and a gear portion provided on the operation member meshes with the gear damper. Gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the braking means is constituted by a gear damper capable of generating a viscous resistance. Therefore, the greater the swing speed of the operating member, the greater the resistance applied to the operating member. . Therefore, the resistance when the swing speed is low (the return speed of the operation member is low) is suppressed. For example, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state, the player operates the operation member and the operation member swings at high speed. If so, the resistance can be increased.

  Thus, the urging force of the first urging member can be set smaller than in a case where a large resistance corresponding to a high-speed operation of the player is generated irrespective of the swing speed, and the first urging member can be freely designed. The degree can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A8, the gear damper is provided in a manner to generate a viscous resistance to the relative movement between the operation member and the regulated member.

  Here, when the operating member and the regulated member are fixed and swing as a unit, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member does not change, so that the operating member does not receive viscous resistance from the gear damper.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, when the operating member swings in the non-transmission state, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member changes. Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper is given to the operation member.

  Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper can be applied to the operation member only when the player applies a load to the operation member such that the regulated member and the operation member constitute a non-transmission state. Thereby, it is possible to change the operational feeling when the player operates the operation member, and to prompt the player to appropriately use the operation member.

  For example, if the operation resistance when operating the operation member becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult for the player to perform the operation, resulting in stress. When the operating member and the regulated member return to the fixed state, the operating resistance is reduced, and the player can easily operate.

  Therefore, a player who tries to avoid stress will avoid applying an overload to the operation member. Thereby, it can suppress that a moving member is destroyed.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, a driving device for generating a driving force for driving the moving member, and a transmission member for transmitting the driving force to the moving member, the moving member receiving a load, The gaming machine A10, wherein the transmission member is disposed at a position where the load is not transmitted when changing from the fixed state to the non-transmission state.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, even if the moving member receives a load and changes from the fixed state to the non-transmitting state, the load is not transmitted to the transmitting member. In addition, the damage of the transmission member can be suppressed, and the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

  In addition, as the position where the load is not transmitted from the moving member, when the moving member moves in the direction to receive the load, the position on the opposite side of the direction in which the moving member moves or the moving member moves in the direction to receive the load In this case, a position in a direction in which the moving member moves and a position separated from the moving member by a predetermined distance is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A10, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state and a driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operation member and is not transmitted to the regulated member. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A10, even when a driving force is generated from the driving device when the swinging of the moving member is restricted by the restricting member, the driving force generated at that time is the operating member. Is not used for swinging the regulated member, so that the regulating member can be prevented from being damaged.

  In the gaming machines A2 to A11, when the moving member is in the fixed state and the moving member is disposed at the second position as compared to when the moving member is disposed at the first position, the operating member Is configured to protrude outward, and when the moving member is disposed at the second position, the movement of the moving member is regulated by the regulating member, and the operating member and the regulated member are attracted by the electromagnet. The gaming machine A12 wherein the fixed state is configured by being performed.

  Here, when the swing of the operation member is restricted at the first position, the width of the operation member protruding outward is small. Therefore, for example, when selecting a box for packing the gaming machine, the operation member is controlled at the first position. If the box is selected based on the state in which the box is fixed, the size of the box can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power is turned off in a state where the swing of the operation member is restricted at the second position, the operation member cannot be moved from the second position, and the gaming machine cannot be put in the packing box. There was a problem.

  Further, if the line width is determined by the width of the state where the operating member is located at the first position in a factory inspection line or the like, the operating member may be erroneously located at the second position and the swing may be fixed. There is a problem that the operating member may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A11, even if the movement is restricted at the second position at which the moving member projects the operation member, the operation member and the restricted member are not moved. Since it is fixed by the electromagnet, the operation member and the regulated member can be unlocked by turning off the power. Thereby, the operation member can be easily arranged at the first position, and the gaming machine can be easily stored in the packing box, and the inspection on the improved inspection line can be easily performed.

<An example of the technical idea that the eccentric cam can be separated from the lever>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player, a driving device that generates a driving force that moves the moving member, and a driving force that is generated by the driving device. A transmission member that transmits the moving member in one direction, whereby the moving member moves in a direction away from the transmission member by operating the moving member in one direction. Machine B1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player is driven by gear meshing (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-2014). -144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the moving member is manually operated while the moving member is being driven, the load on the gear increases, the durability of the driving device and the transmission member is reduced, and the moving member is driven. There is a problem that a load may be applied to the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the player operates the moving member in one direction, the moving member moves in the direction away from the transmission member, so that a load is applied from the moving member to the drive device and the transmission member. Can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress that the moving member applies a load to the player by the driving. The transmission member is exemplified by an eccentric cam, a solenoid, and the like.

  In the gaming machine B1, the transmitting member is constituted by a member which is eccentrically supported on a first shaft and is rotated about the first shaft.

  Here, when the moving member is operated in one direction, the moving member and the transmitting member are separated from each other. Therefore, when the moving member is operated in the other direction, the moving member and the transmitting member collide. The arm length of the transmitting member often increases as the moving width of the moving member increases. In this case, the transmission member may be damaged by the collision.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B1, the transmission member is formed of an eccentric cam, so that the moving member is driven at a portion where the distance from the first shaft to the outer shape is long. When colliding with the moving member while securing the moving amount, the moving member and the transmitting member collide from the first axis by taking a posture in which a portion having a short distance from the first axis to the outer shape is directed toward the moving member. The arm length of the transmission member in the portion to be formed can be shortened. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the transmission member from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine B2, a first urging member that generates an urging force for moving the moving member in a specific direction is provided, and the specific direction is a direction in which the moving member and the transmission member are brought closer to each other. Gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the moving member is pressed against the transmission member by the urging force of the first urging member. The member can be reciprocated. This makes it easier to attract the player's attention to the moving member.

  In the gaming machine B3, the moving member is pivotally supported by a second shaft that is different from the first shaft and extends in the left-right direction, and the moving member is operated by a player. A gaming machine B4 comprising a member, wherein the transmission member is disposed on the opposite side of the operation member with respect to the second shaft and below the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B3, the transmission member is located below the moving member in a state where the second shaft extends in the left-right direction and the lever can swing forward. Since it is arranged on the side and on the opposite side of the operation member with the second shaft interposed therebetween, it is possible to suppress a load from being applied to the transmission member when the player presses down the operation member. Thereby, the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, an effect member for effecting an effect for a player is provided on the operation member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4, the operation member is provided with the effect member for effecting the effect on the player, so that the player's attention can be focused on the operation member.

  Examples of the effect device for effecting the effect for the player include a light emitting device such as an LED disposed on a base, a vibration device that generates vibration, and the like.

  In the gaming machine B5, the effect member includes at least a vibration device that generates vibration, and a load applied to the operation member by vibrating the vibration device is directed in a direction that causes the moving member to move away from the transmission member. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that:

  Here, when the effect device is provided on the operation member, the weight of the moving member on the operation member side increases, so that a large urging force of the first urging member is required. Therefore, the load applied to the transmission member may be increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the effect member is provided with a vibrating device that generates at least vibration, and the load applied to the operating member by vibrating the vibrating device is reduced by the moving member. Is moved away from the transmission member, so that the load applied to the transmission member from the moving member by the vibration of the vibration device can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B6, the operation member is formed in a spherical shape having a hollow inside, and the vibration device is disposed at a substantially central portion of the operation member, and a vibration portion vibrated by the vibration device is provided outside the operation member. A gaming machine B7 connected to the shell as a rigid body.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B6, the operating member is formed in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, and the vibration device is disposed substantially at the center of the operating member. The size of the vibration device can be ensured while keeping the size small. In addition, since the vibrating unit vibrated by the vibration device is not hidden inside the operation member but is connected as a rigid body to the outer shell of the operation member, vibration is directly applied to the finger of the player operating the operation member. Can tell. Therefore, the effect of producing the vibration device can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the operation member includes a pushing member that enables a pushing operation downward, and a direction axis for pushing the pushing member is the same as the first shaft with the second shaft interposed therebetween. A gaming machine B8 arranged on the opposite side.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the operating member includes a pushing member that allows a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is the second axis. Since it is arranged on the opposite side of the first axis with respect to the axis, when the player pushes the pushing member, the load is applied in the direction in which the moving member is separated from the transmitting member, and the load applied to the transmitting member from the moving member Can be reduced.

  The gaming machine B9, wherein the gaming machine B8 has a pushable state in which the pushing member can be pushed in, and a non-pushable state in which the pushing member is fixed so as not to be displaceable and cannot be pushed.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B8, a pushable state in which the pushing member can be pushed in, and a push-in impossible state in which the pushing member is fixed so as not to be displaced and cannot be pushed, are configured. The effect on the moving member by the operation performed by the player can be switched on the gaming machine side.

  For example, when the player intermittently repeatedly pushes (continuously hits) the pushing member, when the pushing member returns from the pushed state, a load is applied in a direction in which the moving member approaches the transmission member due to the reaction. Therefore, the transmission member may be damaged.

  On the other hand, when the push-in state is disabled, the entire operation member is pushed down in response to the push-in operation of the player, whereby the moving member also moves in a direction away from the transmission member. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the pushing member, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the transmitting member and the moving member collide due to the operating member returning upward by the urging force.

  In addition, as a method of configuring the push-in impossible state, there are a method of locking the push-in member with a hook-shaped claw, and the push-in member is extended to the end position by a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor that reciprocates linearly. A method (continue to apply a load in one direction) is exemplified. According to the method in which the pushing member is extended to the end position by a vibration device such as a voice coil motor, the vibration device causes both the pushing member to vibrate and the pushing member to be unable to be pushed. Can be done.

  In any of the gaming machines B4 to B9, the first axis and the second axis are arranged in parallel, and the rotation direction of the transmission member is such that the side separated from the first axis across the second axis is A gaming machine B10, which is set in a direction facing a moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B4 to B9, the rotation direction of the transmission member is set to a direction facing the moving member on a side farther from the first axis with the second axis interposed therebetween. Therefore, when the transmission member moves facing the moving member, the load applied to the transmission member from the moving member is suppressed (the distance from the second shaft to the contact position between the moving member and the transmission member is long). Therefore, even if the transmission member moves in the direction approaching the moving member, the possibility of the transmission member being damaged can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the transmission member is supported by a first shaft, and a rotating gear to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving device; An eccentric cam abutting on a member, wherein a fixed state in which the rotary gear is fixed to the eccentric cam, and a non-transmission state in which the rotary gear is relatively movable with respect to the eccentric cam. A gaming machine B11 characterized by being made possible.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, in the fixed state, the moving member can be swung by the rotation of the transmission member, and the eccentric cam is moved from the moving member by a threshold value or more. When receiving the load, the load applied to the eccentric cam from the moving member can be released by setting the eccentric cam and the rotary gear in the non-transmission state. This can prevent the eccentric cam from being damaged.

  The case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear can be configured to be in the non-transmission state is, for example, a case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear are attracted and fixed by a magnetic force, or a case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear A case where the members are fitted by friction is exemplified.

<One example of a technical concept in which a lock member that fixes a moving member is operated in synchronization with the moving member>
A moving member that moves between the first position and the second position by a player's operation, a driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving member, and a shaft that is eccentrically supported by the first shaft and A game machine comprising: a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving device to the moving member; and a regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member, wherein the regulating member controls the swing of the moving member. A restrictable standby state and a release state for releasing the restriction of the swing of the moving member can be configured, and the transmission member and the restriction member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. A gaming machine C1 characterized by the following.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player is rocked by an eccentric cam-shaped transmission member driven by a driving device, It receives an urging force to move the moving member in a direction approaching the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, regulates the swinging of the moving member in the course of the swinging of the moving member, and regulates the swinging of the moving member at predetermined timing. There is a gaming machine having a restriction member for releasing (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-244108). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in accordance with the release of the regulation of the swing of the moving member, the short-diameter side of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member is turned to the side that comes into contact with the moving member. Although the transmission member can be prevented from being damaged in the event of a collision with the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, if the regulating member malfunctions for any reason, the posture of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member cannot be changed, and the eccentricity cannot be changed. There is a problem that the cam-shaped transmission member collides with the moving member on the long diameter side, and the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member may be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force to the moving member and the regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. Can be mechanically determined when the transmission member is released. Thereby, the moving member and the transmitting member can be brought into contact with the high strength side (short diameter side) of the transmitting member facing the moving member, so that the durability of the transmitting member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, the regulating member is operated synchronously with the transmission member only in a phase for releasing the regulation of the swing of the moving member, and when the synchronous operation with the transmission member is released, the regulation member is controlled. The gaming machine C2, wherein the member is in the standby state, and the swing of the moving member is regulated by the regulating member by moving the moving member to a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, after the regulating member releases the regulation of the swing of the moving member, the driving force of the driving device can be exclusively used for the swing of the moving member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the moving member caused by the movement of the regulating member when rotating the transmitting member.

  Further, even when the player operates the moving member during the synchronous driving, the swing of the moving member can be regulated by the regulating member by arranging the moving member at the predetermined position. Synchronous drive with the member (cancellation of the swing regulation of the moving member) can be performed.

  In the gaming machine C2, when the regulating member is in the standby state, the swing of the moving member is regulated by moving the regulating member in a manner that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, The moving member is capable of performing a first operation that does not pass through the predetermined position and a second operation that reaches the predetermined position by a movement mode of the transmission member. A game machine C3 comprising: a recessed portion that is recessed and retracted from a swing locus of an outer portion of the moving member when the first operation is performed.

  In a case where the swing direction of the moving member is regulated by moving the regulating member such that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, the regulation of the moving member is performed as a step before the regulation of the swing direction of the moving member. Resistance is applied from the member. On the other hand, if resistance is applied from the regulating member to an operation not intended to restrict the swing direction, such as the first operation, an extra driving force is required for the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, when the moving member performs the first operation, the recessed portion is retracted from the moving member and is recessed. It is possible to prevent the resistance from being applied to the moving member. Thereby, the load applied to the transmission member can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a first urging device that generates an urging force for swinging the moving member in a direction approaching the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released and the moving member is moved by the urging force toward the transmitting member, the cam portion of the transmitting member has A first side surface that is a side surface that is in contact with the moving member is configured to be in contact with a cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member that is supported by the first shaft, and the moving member includes the cylindrical portion. The gaming machine C4, wherein the first side face is retracted from the moving member when it starts contacting the game machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the moving member is moved toward the transmission member by the urging force. In the cam portion of the transmission member, a first side surface which is a side surface of the transmission member which is in contact with the moving member is configured to be in contact with a cylindrical portion which is a part of the transmission member which is supported by the first shaft. Since the first side face is retracted from the moving member when the moving member starts to contact the cylindrical portion, the swing displacement of the moving member can be maximized. Therefore, it is possible to configure a synchronous state in which the swinging displacement of the moving member is maximized immediately after the regulation of the swinging of the moving member by the regulating member is released.

  In the gaming machine C4, an end of the first side surface opposite to the cylindrical portion comes into contact with the moving member and the transmission member from the beginning.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the speed of the swinging operation of the moving member can be improved.

  Here, when the moving member hits the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam, the moment applied to the eccentric cam increases, and the load applied to the driving device in the rotation direction increases. Therefore, when it is not known when the transmission member collides with the moving member, the large-diameter portion is preferably prevented from hitting the moving member in the rotation direction of the transmission member (a circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the moving member and the transmission member are in contact with each other, it is better to swing the moving member at the large outer diameter portion, since the swing speed of the moving member can be increased, thereby increasing the effect. be able to.

  With synchronous driving, the timing at which the moving member collides with the transmission member can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the moving member comes into contact with the transmission member, the first side surface is slightly retracted, and the first side surface can be brought into contact with the moving member at a timing after the collision, thereby improving the speed of the swinging operation of the moving member. Can be done.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a first urging device that generates an urging force for swinging the moving member in a direction approaching the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the transmitting member abuts on the moving member, and the moving member follows the rotation of the transmitting member. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being swung.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machine C6 includes a first urging device that generates an urging force for swinging the moving member in a direction approaching the transmission member. The eccentric cam rotates about the first shaft, and when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the transmission member contacts the moving member, and the movement follows the rotation of the transmission member. Since the member swings, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the timing at which the regulation of the swing of the moving member is released. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the game.

<An example of the technical concept in which the operation unit arranged at the tip of the moving member vibrates>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player, and a vibrating device that is disposed on the moving member and that can generate vibration; And a longitudinal direction of the moving member is inclined with respect to each other.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by operating a player includes a vibration device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-120741). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is difficult to increase the vibration in order to prevent the vibration of the vibrating device from being transmitted to the gaming machine and causing the malfunction such as the gaming machine to shake. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the longitudinal direction of the moving member and the direction of vibration of the vibrating device disposed on the moving member are inclined, so that the vibration generated by the vibrating device is transmitted to the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It can be decomposed into a directional component along the direction and a directional component along the vertical direction of the directional component, and vibration transmitted to the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  Note that examples of the vibration device include a voice coil motor that generates vibration in a linear direction, a vibrator that generates vibration by rotating an eccentric weight, and the like. In the case of a voice coil motor, the direction of vibration means the direction in which the voice coil motor reciprocates, and in the case of a vibrator, the direction of vibration means a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the weight.

  In the gaming machine D1, a driving device for generating a driving force for swinging the moving member, and a transmission member for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving device to the moving member, the vibration device is a linear device A gaming machine D2 comprising a device for generating vibration, wherein the transmission member is disposed on a side opposite to a direction in which the moving member is moved by the vibration of the vibration device.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the reaction generated when the vibration device operates is directed in the direction of moving the moving member away from the transmission member, so that the moving member is transmitted by the vibration of the vibration device. It can swing in the direction away from the member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the transmission member from receiving a load due to the vibration of the vibration device.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is configured to generate a vibration in a linear direction, and the vibration device is supported by a second shaft provided on the moving member, and the vibration of the vibration device is controlled. A gaming machine D3, wherein a central axis is arranged so as to pass through the second axis, and a buffer member for absorbing vibration is provided on the second axis.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is supported by the second shaft provided on the moving member, and the vibration device is configured of a device that generates linear vibration. Since the central axis of the vibration of the vibration device passes through the second axis and the buffer member is provided on the second axis, the shock of the vibration can be reduced by the buffer member. Thereby, the vibration transmitted to the moving member can be suppressed, and the vibration transmitted to the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D3, the moving member includes a pushing member that is pushed by a player, and the pushing resistance of the pushing member increases the rotational resistance of the second shaft. Machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, the moving member includes a pushing member that is pushed by the player, and the pushing resistance of the pushing member increases the rotational resistance of the second shaft. With this configuration, especially when the player performs the pushing operation of the pushing member, the rotational operation of the vibration device can be suppressed, and a large vibration component can be secured. Thereby, the state in which the vibration device is easily rotated about the second axis and the state in which the vibration device secures a large vibration component can be switched by the operation of the player.

  The gaming machine D5, wherein the vibration device is rigidly connected to the pushing member.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4, the vibration device is connected as a rigid member to the pushing member, so that the player can experience the vibration of the vibration device through the pushing member. Therefore, when the pushing member is not pushed, the vibrating device swings around the vibration and the second axis to attract the player's attention to the vibrating device. On the other hand, when the pushing member is pushed, the vibration device swings. , The linear vibration felt by the player can be increased. Therefore, the behavior of the vibration device can be changed according to the situation (whether or not the player has pushed the pushing member).

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is pivotally supported by a second shaft provided on the moving member, and the vibration device is arranged such that a center axis of vibration of the vibration device passes through a position separated from the second shaft. A gaming machine D6.

  When the connection between the moving member and the vibration device is pivotally supported, the vibration transmitted to the player can be increased by matching the center axis of the vibration of the vibration device with the pivotal support position. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is transmitted to the gaming machine. Therefore, there is a problem that the loosening of the fastening screws and the deterioration of the members occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is caused to rotate by shifting the rotation axis of the vibration device and the center axis of the vibration of the vibration device. The vibration of the device can be used, and the vibration transmitted to the gaming machine can be reduced (the energy of the vibration is used for rotating the vibration device). In addition, the effect of the effect can be improved by swinging the vibration device by the vibration of the vibration device.

  The gaming machine D6, further comprising a detecting device for detecting vibration of the vibrating device, wherein the vibrating device is disposed on an operation member held by a player.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, since the vibration device is disposed on the operation member held by the player and the detection device for detecting the vibration of the vibration device is provided, the vibration device vibrates. By grasping the operation member during the operation, the vibration can be suppressed, and the signal detected by the vibration device can be changed. Thus, it is possible to detect whether the player is holding the operation member (whether the player is in a preparation stage for operating the moving member).

<An example of the technical idea to assist the input timing of the moving member that performs the stir>
A gaming machine E1 comprising an input device operated by a player, the input device being driven in a direction approaching and moving away from the player, and having an input section for performing an input operation.

  There is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine in which a timing at which an input device is operated is designated (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem in that the user cannot pay attention to the game, for example, he / she pays attention to the timing of operating the input device and neglected the adjustment of the ball playing strength.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the input unit of the input device is driven in the direction approaching or moving away from the player, so that the input unit moves in the direction approaching the player and the finger of the player. When the player touches the input section, the input section is operated in such a manner that the input section is pushed back, so that the timing of the operation of the input section can be set on the gaming machine side.

  Note that examples of the input operation include an operation of pressing a push button and an operation of pulling a moving member.

  In the gaming machine E1, the input device includes a vibration device that vibrates in a linear direction, and the vibration device is arranged so that a vibration direction of the vibration device coincides with a direction in which the input unit is operated. The gaming machine E2, wherein the input unit is inoperable when pressed against the unit, and the input unit is operable when the vibration device is retracted from the input unit.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the input unit is disabled when the vibration device is pressed against the input unit, and the input is disabled when the vibration device is retracted from the input unit. Since the unit is operable, the vibrating device can have both the effect of oscillating the input device and the effect of timing the operation of the input unit.

  In the gaming machine E2, when the player operates the input unit, the elasticity coefficient of the first urging device that exerts a reaction force on the player side is equal to the vibration when the transmission device transmits vibration to the input unit. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the gaming machine E3 has a smaller elastic coefficient than a second urging device that applies a reaction force to the device.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the elastic coefficient of the first urging device is made smaller than the elastic coefficient of the second urging device, so that the vibration device is separated from the input device. The operation of the input unit can be performed with a small force, while ensuring a high speed for returning to the position where the input is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the easiness of operating the input unit while securing the magnitude of the vibration passively felt by the player.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the input device is a member having a size that can be gripped by a player, and the input unit can be arranged at a palm position when the player grips the input device. A gaming machine E4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the input device including the input unit is formed as a member having a size that can be gripped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, Since the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm, the operability of the input unit can be improved. That is, by further grasping the input device while holding it, the palm can be pressed against the input unit, and another operation such as switching the input device can be eliminated.

  In addition, since the input unit can be hidden by the palm, it is possible to make only the player holding the input unit understand the operation of the input unit vibrating. As a result, a big hit or the like can be notified in a manner not noticed by other players.

  The gaming machine E4, further comprising a locking portion for locking a finger on a side of the input device opposite to the input portion.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, when the input device is gripped, the vibration on the input unit side is received by the palm, and the finger is hooked on the locking unit, so that the vibration by the vibration device is reduced. Can be trapped inside the palm. This makes it possible to ensure a large vibration felt by the player.

<Example of technical concept in which the spherical portion turns to the player side at the lower end of movement>
An operation member having an operation unit operated by a player and configured to be movable; and a connection member configured to connect the operation member and the game machine main body and configured to be movable. When the posture of the operation member viewed from a player operating the operation unit can form a first state and a second state different from the first state, the amount of change in the posture is reduced. A gaming machine F1 comprising correction means for changing a posture of an operation member in a direction.

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including an operation member having an operation unit such as a push button, in which the attitude of an operation member with respect to a player changes between a first state and a second state as the operation member moves (for example, See JP-A-2014-144218). In such a gaming machine, for example, if the player is in a posture that is easy for the player to operate in the first state, the operation may be difficult in the second state, and the operation feeling of the operation member may be reduced between the first state and the second state. The change causes a problem that the player feels stress and may be dissatisfied with the player.

  For example, when the operation member is arranged at a distance in front of the player and the operation portion requests a pressing operation, even if the operation portion can be easily operated, the operation member is extended in the left-right direction. If the operation unit changes to a mode that requires a pushing operation from the front side by moving in an arc trajectory centered at the center, the space for arranging the arm for pushing the operation unit becomes narrower, It becomes difficult for the player to operate the operation unit, and in the worst case, the player may abandon operating the operation unit.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the posture of the operation member viewed from the player operating the operation member by moving the connection member can form the first state and the second state different from the first state. In such a case, the correction means for changing the attitude of the operation member in a direction to reduce the change amount is provided, so that the player's operation feeling on the operation member can be hardly changed. Therefore, by configuring the first state so that the player can easily play the game, it is possible to maintain the state that is easy for the player to operate even in the second state.

  In addition, as a correction | amendment means, it is comprised from the wall member and the contact member arrange | positioned at the operation member in the aspect which can contact the wall member, and it arises when a contact member contacts a wall member. A device that changes the attitude of the operating member by a reaction force, a device that is configured with a gear group that meshes with gear teeth provided on the operating member, and that applies a rotational load to the gear teeth by moving the connecting member. Is exemplified.

  In addition, examples of the mode of movement of the connection member include rotation about a predetermined rotation axis, slide movement in a linear direction, and the like.

  In the gaming machine F1, a driving device for driving the connection member is provided, and in a movement range of the connection member, a change state in which the operation member changes its posture, and the operation member does not change its posture, and the operation member and the connection member are not changed. A gaming machine F2, wherein a maintenance state in which the posture is maintained is formed, and a load generated on the operation member from the correction means in the change state is oriented in a direction of braking the connection member.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the operating member does not always change its attitude with respect to the connecting member, so that the connecting member is driven compared to the case where the connecting member constantly changes its attitude. It is possible to suppress the driving force required to cause the connection member to be braked by the load generated on the operation member from the correcting means in the change state, and the driving device is required to brake the connection member. The correction means assists the force that needs to be generated, and the load applied to the drive device can be suppressed.

  For example, when the connecting member and the operating member move in the vertical direction and constitute a change state when the connecting member and the operating member are arranged at the lower end of the moving range, the changing member is provided to the operating member at the lower end of the moving range. It is possible to reduce the moving speed of the connecting member and the operating member by the load, and to suppress the increase in the moving resistance of the connecting member and the operating member when the connecting member and the operating member rise to near the upper end of the moving range. In addition, the driving force required for driving the connecting member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F2, it is provided with an abutted member that is brought into contact with the correcting means, and when the operating member moves, the posture of the operating member changes when the correcting means comes into contact with the abutted member. A gaming machine F3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F2, the operating member changes its posture when the correcting means comes into contact with the abutted member, so that the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member. The structure of the connecting member can be simplified as compared with the case where the member is arranged on the connecting member, and the posture of the operating member is adjusted until the correcting means reaches the position where the contacted member is arranged. , The timing at which the player operates the operation unit can be indicated.

  In the gaming machine F2 or F3, when the operating member is in the change state, the operating member is provided with a load in a predetermined direction opposite to the direction of the load generated from the correcting means, thereby causing the operating member to A gaming machine F4, wherein the correcting means is configured to be capable of changing its posture in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2 or F3, when the posture is changed in the changing state, the direction of the displacement and the direction of the force are opposite to each other because the direction of the posture change is opposite to the direction of the posture change. Even if a load is applied to the operation member in a predetermined direction in which the load may be excessive, the correction unit is configured to be able to change the attitude of the operation member in the predetermined direction, thereby preventing the correction unit from being destroyed. can do.

  In the gaming machine F4, the modifying means includes an elastic member having a spring elasticity between the operating member and the operating member, and the modifying means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, the correction means is deformed by the elasticity of the elastic member provided in the correction means between the game machine F4 and the resilient force proportional to the change in the attitude of the operation member. Can be generated, and when a load in a predetermined direction is applied to the operation member, the movement amount of the operation member is increased by increasing the force applied to the operation member from the correction unit as the movement amount of the operation member increases. Can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, there is provided a contact member with which the correcting means comes into contact, and the connection member is a lever member pivotally supported by the game machine main body, wherein the correcting means comprises A gaming machine F6, wherein a direction of a reaction force received when the member comes into contact with the member has a direction component having a direction component perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member at that time.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the correcting means abuts on the member to be contacted in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member. Since the load applied to the member acts in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member and the lever member receives a load in the axial direction, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the lever member in the moving direction (circumferential direction). (The load applied to the operating member by the correcting means can be suppressed from acting on the moving direction of the lever member.) Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the lever member when the operation member is brought into contact with the contacted member and changes its posture, and the operability can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F6, the abutting member protrudes so as to be able to abut on the lever member when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied from the correcting means.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F6, when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the abutted member through the correcting means by the operation of the player, the abutted member is moved to the lever member. The lever member can be braked by extending to the contact position to suppress the moving speed of the lever member. On the other hand, when the load applied from the correcting means to the operation member is less than a predetermined amount, the lever member is moved. The movement resistance can be suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both prevention of breakage of the lever member and lightening of the operation of the lever member.

<An example of the technical idea of switching whether or not the spherical portion turns at the lower end of the movement>
An operation member having an operation section operated by a player, a connection member for connecting the operation member to the game machine main body in a manner movable in a predetermined width, and a driving device for driving at least the connection member; In a gaming machine in which the operation member can be changed between a first posture and a second posture different from the first posture in a state where the members are arranged at predetermined positions, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operation member. A first operating state in which the operating member is maintained in the first posture in a state in which the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, and a state in which the connecting member is arranged in a predetermined position. A driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operation member via a transmission member, and the operation member is configured to be switchable between a second operation state where the operation member is changed from the first posture to the second posture. 1st operation When in a second operating state, the gaming machine movement width of the operating member, characterized in that it is unchanged G1.

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that includes an operation member and a connection member and that drives the operation member relative to the connection member by a driving device that drives the connection member is known (for example, see JP-A-2014-144218). In such a gaming machine, even if there is a scene where operability is emphasized and a scene where emphasis is placed on the effect, there is only one kind of movement of the operation member with respect to the operation of the connection member. It was necessary to select one of the performance effects and to sacrifice the other, leaving room for improvement.

  For example, when a push button operated by a player is provided on the operation member, it is easier for the player to press the push button when the posture of the push button viewed from the player is constant, while the operation member Since the movement of the operation member itself is small, it is difficult to perform a large effect using the movement of the operation member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the first operation state in which the operation member is maintained in the first posture in the state where the connection member is arranged at the predetermined position, and in the state where the connection member is arranged at the predetermined position. Since the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member via the transmitting member and the operating member is changed from the first position to the second position, the second operating state can be switched with the moving width of the operating member unchanged. Thus, both operability and effect can be achieved.

  For example, when a push button is provided on the operation member, when the player is requested to operate the push button, the posture of the operation member is changed to the second posture, and the push button is pressed in a direction that is easy for the player to operate. On the other hand, at the time of an effect that does not require the player to perform an operation, by keeping the posture of the operation member in the first posture, the operability can be switched to an effect that is ignored, and the operation member can be largely operated. . Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement of the operability and improvement of the effect.

  In addition, since the movement width of the operation member is not changed between the first operation state and the second operation state, until the posture of the operation member changes at a predetermined position, the player can select either operation state of the operation member. Since it is difficult to grasp whether the player is playing, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, the operation member is set to the first operation state until the player operates the operation section, the operation member is continuously reciprocated by a predetermined width, and the operation member is switched to the second operation state at a predetermined timing to change the posture of the operation member. The player can be informed of the timing of pressing the operation unit, and the operating member itself is also in a posture that is easy to press, so that the game is easy to understand (the timing for pressing the push button is easy to understand) and comfortable (push button). To make it easier to press).

  In the gaming machine G1, an eccentric cam member for transmitting a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the eccentric cam member is configured to be able to transmit a driving force from the driving device to the connection member. A gaming machine G2 configured to transmit driving force of a driving device to one of the transmission member and the connection member, and provided with a switching unit capable of switching between the transmission member and the connection member.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G1, the driving force of the driving device is switchably transmitted to either the operating member or the connecting member through the eccentric cam member. , The driving force generated from the driving device can be suppressed as compared with the case where the driving is simultaneously performed.

  In addition, as a mode of switching between transmitting the driving force of the driving device to the connection member or transmitting the driving force to the operation member, a gear group connected by meshing from the driving device to the operation member and the connection member is provided, and depending on the situation, A mode in which the gears meshing with each other can be switched or an eccentric cam member is configured to be able to abut on either the connection member or the transmission member during rotation, and the distance between the connection member and the operation member is eccentric cam. For example, a mode in which the width is larger than the width of the member is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine G2, when the eccentric cam member abuts on the transmission member in a state where the eccentric cam member is rotated forward, a driving force is transmitted to the operation member via the transmission member, and the eccentric cam member is rotated in the reverse direction. The gaming machine G3, wherein, when the transmission member abuts on the transmission member, the driving force is not transmitted to the operation member.

  Here, for example, in the case where the driving force is transmitted to the operation member when the eccentric cam member and the connection member are separated from each other, vibration during operation or operation of the operation member by the player may be performed. For example, it is necessary to detect that the connecting member is unintentionally separated from the eccentric cam member and stop the driving device in order to prevent the driving force from being erroneously transmitted to the operating member. Must be added, and the control of the driving device becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, it is possible to switch whether or not the driving force is transmitted to the operation member depending on the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member. Even if the cam member is separated during the operation, as long as the eccentric cam member is kept rotating in a certain direction, the transmission target of the driving force is not switched, so that the driving force may be erroneously transmitted to the operating member. Does not occur, and the control of the driving device can be moderated (it is not necessary to stop the driving device immediately).

  Further, since a detection sensor for detecting that the connecting member and the eccentric cam member are separated from each other can be unnecessary, product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G3, the eccentric cam member includes a first protrusion provided on the outer diameter portion along the rotation axis, and the transmission member is configured to be able to contact the first protrusion. The eccentric cam member is provided with a second projecting portion that is projected, and the second projecting portion has a region in which the eccentric cam member is moved close to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member is rotated. The gaming machine G4, wherein the second convex portion is configured to be closer to the rotation shaft of the eccentric cam member than the first convex portion.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine G3, the second convex portion has a region in which the eccentric cam member is moved close to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member is rotated. In this configuration, the second protruding portion can be disposed closer to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member than the first protruding portion, so that the position of the second protruding portion can be returned to the first protruding portion and the eccentric cam member. The rotation can be performed by passing the second protrusion between the rotation shaft and the rotation shaft.

  Therefore, as compared with the case where the second projecting portion moves to the outside of the trajectory of the outer diameter portion of the first projecting portion of the eccentric cam member and then returns the posture of the transmission member, the first projecting portion becomes the first projecting portion. (2) The rotation angle of the transmission member from when it comes into contact with the protruding portion to when it is separated can be suppressed, and the angle range in which the load applied to the eccentric cam member increases can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine G4, the first convex portion is configured as a wall portion inclined with respect to a predetermined straight line connecting an outermost diameter portion of the first convex portion and a rotation axis of the eccentric cam member. In a state where the eccentric cam member is rotated by rotation, the pushing wall surface which is in contact with the second convex portion is configured to be inclined in such a manner as to be closer to the predetermined straight line in the axial radial direction. Gaming machine G5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G4, when the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member in which the driving force is transmitted to the operating member via the transmission member is the forward rotation, the transmission member is brought into contact with the transmission member. Since the pushing wall surface in contact with the predetermined straight line is configured to be inclined in such a manner as to be more distant in the axial direction with respect to the predetermined straight line, the eccentric cam member has The amount of movement of the transmission member when rotated by a predetermined angle can be reduced. Therefore, the transmission efficiency of the driving force transmitted through the transmission member per predetermined time can be reduced, and a large load is quickly applied to the eccentric cam member via the transmission member by operating the operation member. Load can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, a lock member for fixing the posture of the connection member at a predetermined position is provided, and the release of the fixation of the posture of the connection member by the lock member reverses the rotation of the eccentric cam member. In the gaming machine G6, the fixing of the posture of the connection member by the lock member is maintained when the eccentric cam member rotates forward while the eccentric cam member rotates forward.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the release of the fixing of the connecting member by the lock member occurs only when the eccentric cam member rotates in the reverse direction. By rotating the eccentric cam member in one direction (the direction of normal rotation) in the state where it is disposed, the driving force can be easily transmitted to the operation member via the transmission member while maintaining the posture of the connection member. . Therefore, the maintenance of the posture of the connecting member by the lock member and the change in the posture of the operation member can be achieved without finely controlling the phase of the eccentric cam member, so that the control of the driving device can be moderated. it can.

<An example of the technical idea in which the suppressing member is pressed by the reaction force of the elastic force that pushes out the second moving member>
A first movable member configured to be movable, and a first movable member disposed at least partially protruding outside the first movable member and movable relative to the first movable member. A second moving member, an elastic member disposed inward of the first moving member in the moving direction of the second moving member, one end of which is connected to the second moving member and has spring elasticity; A suppressing member that is disposed at the other end of the elastic member and suppresses the second moving member from being separated from the first moving member by being pressed against the first moving member by the elastic force of the elastic member; A gaming machine H1 comprising: a portion that protrudes from the first moving member of the second moving member, whereby a force for pressing the suppressing member against the first moving member increases.

  BACKGROUND ART A gaming machine including a first moving member and a second moving member that extends outside the first moving member and is movable with respect to the first moving member is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). In such a gaming machine, when the first moving member is moved, the second moving member may be damaged by colliding with another member and may need to be replaced. However, if the holding force is insufficient, the second moving member may come off from the first moving member depending on the magnitude of the load generated upon collision with another member.

  In other words, fixing the member holding the second moving member to the first moving member to the first moving member by fastening with a screw can increase the fixing force as compared with the case of fixing by fitting. On the other hand, when assembling, it takes time to screw in the screws, and when removing it for maintenance or the like, it takes time to remove the screws, which increases the working time.

  That is, the second moving member is firmly fixed to the first moving member, and the time required for assembling the second moving member to the first moving member and for removing the second moving member from the first moving member is reduced. There was a problem that it was difficult to achieve both.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine H1, since the portion protruding from the first moving member operates in the direction opposing the elastic force of the elastic member, the force with which the suppressing member is pressed against the first moving member increases. When a large load is applied to the first moving member due to the second moving member coming into contact with another member, the suppressing member can be more firmly fixed to the first moving member. Therefore, while the second moving member is held by the first moving member by the elastic force, the replacement time is shortened, and the second moving member is also moved by the first moving member when the second moving member comes into contact with another member. Detachment from the member can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine H1, a hook member is provided for holding the restraining member on the first moving member so as to be immovable in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member. A gaming machine H2, wherein the gaming machine H2 is disposed at a part of a position movable in a direction pressed against the first moving member.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the hook member is disposed at a part of the position where the suppressing member can move in the direction in which the suppressing member is pressed against the first moving member. Before attaching to the moving member, the space where the hook member is attached becomes an empty space, so that it is easy to arrange the suppressing member, and after the hook member is attached, the suppressing member moves from the first moving member to the elastic member. Separation in the direction perpendicular to the elastic force can be suppressed.

  Further, since the hook member is disposed at a part of the movable position of the restraining member in the direction pressed against the first moving member, a force for holding the hook member on the first moving member is generated by deformation of the elastic member. Therefore, the hook member can be easily removed from the first moving member by deforming the elastic member in the opposite direction, and accordingly, the second moving member can be easily removed from the first moving member.

  In the gaming machine H2, the elastic member and the suppressing member are disposed inside the first moving member, and the hook member is attached from the outside to the inside of the first moving member. Machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally removing the elastic member and the suppressing member, and the hook member can be attached from the outside of the first moving member. The hook member can be attached to the first moving member without disassembling the first moving member in the case where the first moving member is detached or forgotten to assemble, and the maintenance time can be reduced.

  Further, since the hook member is attached from the outside, when the hook member comes off from the first moving member, it can be configured to drop the hook member out of the first moving member. The necessity of maintenance can be determined without any problem. That is, the necessity of maintenance can be determined without disassembling the first moving member and looking inside.

  Further, in the case where the hook member is attached from the inside of the first moving member, the elastic member may be excessively contracted by a dimension of a locking projection for locking the hook member so that the hook member cannot be pulled out from the first moving member. However, when the hook member is attached from the outside of the first moving member, the locking projection can be arranged outside the first moving member, and the amount of contraction of the elastic member when assembling the hook member can be reduced. Can be suppressed. Thereby, while maintaining the elastic force of the elastic member large and maintaining the strength of holding the second moving member and the suppressing member to the first moving member large (while using a hard elastic member), it is possible to attach the hook member. Can be easy.

  The gaming machine H4, wherein in the gaming machine H3, the hook member is detachable from the first moving member by displacing the restraining member in a direction opposite to a direction pressed by the elastic force.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H3, the hook member is displaced in the direction opposite to the direction in which the suppressing member disposed inside the first moving member is pressed by the elastic force, whereby the first hook member is moved. Since the player can be removed from the moving member, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the hook member from the first moving member during the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hook member from being illegally removed.

  In any one of the gaming machines H2 to H4, when the restraining member enters the position where the hook member is disposed, the elastic force applied to the second moving member is reduced. H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the space in which the hook member is disposed is broken due to the breakage of the hook member, and the second member is inserted into the space by the restraining member. Since the elastic force applied to the moving member is reduced, it is possible to improve the buffering effect on the load applied to the second moving member after the space in which the hook member is broken or the like is vacated. In addition, it is possible to prevent the second moving member from being damaged.

  As the configuration of the hook member, for example, a configuration that can be reassembled after the hook member is broken is exemplified. In this case, a part of the hook member is exposed to the outside of the first moving member during the break, so that it is easy to visually confirm that the hook member is broken.

  In any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the second moving member may be in a withdrawn state in which the second moving member can be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member, and in a locked state in which the second moving member cannot be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member. A gaming machine H6 characterized by being able to form a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the second moving member can be formed in the withdrawn state and the locked state, so that the maintenance performance can be improved. Depending on the case, it is possible to switch the state in which the performance of fraud prevention can be improved by not being able to easily remove the second moving member.

  In the gaming machine H6, the withdrawn state can be formed when the restraining member enters the space where the hook member is disposed in a state where the restraining member is held by the hook member. Gaming machine H7.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H6, the pulled-out state can be formed by injecting the restraining member into an empty space in a state where the hook member is removed from a regular position in the assembled state. In a state where the member is arranged at a regular position, it is necessary to disassemble the first moving member in order to remove the second moving member, and it is possible to suppress an unauthorized removal of the second moving member.

  In addition, when a large load is applied to the hook member and the hook member deviates from a proper position, the hook member can be pulled out, and the second moving member can be easily replaced, thereby improving the maintenance performance. Can be done.

<An example of the technical concept of changing the rotational resistance of the spherical portion to the connecting member>
An operation member configured to be operable by a player, and a connection member that movably supports the operation member, and a movement resistance when the operation member is moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member. A gaming machine I1 comprising variable means for varying.

  BACKGROUND ART A gaming machine including a connection member and an operation member configured to be movable with respect to the connection member is known (see JP-A-2014-144218). In such a gaming machine, when the operation member is operated in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member, the operation feeling (for example, the weight felt by the player) does not change, and the player gets tired of operating the operation member. There was a problem.

  For example, even if the operation member is rotatably supported by the connection member, and the rotation resistance is changed between the case where the operation member is rotated forward and the case where the operation member is rotated in the reverse direction, the player cannot change the operation member. Since the relationship between the operation direction and the rotation resistance is always constant, the player is less aware (discovered) by the operation of rotating the operation member, and the player gets tired of operating the operation member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since there is provided a variable means for varying the movement resistance when the operation member is moved in the predetermined direction with respect to the connection member, the operation when the operation member is operated in the same direction is performed. The operation feeling of the members can be changed, and the interest of the player operating the operation members can be improved.

  When the connecting member is configured to be movable, the variable member may be adjusted by the position of the connecting member, may be adjusted by the displacement of the operating member, or may be other than the operating member and the connecting member. (For example, a member for driving the connection member).

  For example, according to the aspect in which the adjustment is performed using members other than the operation member and the connection member, the state (the state of the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member) can be understood only by touching the operation member. Of attention to the operation member can be increased.

  Further, when the connection member is configured to be movable with respect to the game machine body, by making the strength of the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member as a boundary with the movement resistance of the connection member with respect to the game machine body, In some cases, while asking the player to operate only the operation member, the operation member is more easily moved relative to the connection member than when the connection member is moved relative to the game machine main body, and the operation member is changed relative to the connection member. Can be switched to a state in which the connecting member can be easily moved with respect to the gaming machine main body rather than moving (the difference from hardening the push button).

  The gaming machine I2, wherein in the gaming machine I1, the connection member is configured to be movable, and adjustment of movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing the arrangement of the connection member.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine I1, the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member is adjusted by changing the arrangement of the connecting member, so that the speed at which the connecting member or the operating member is operated is adjusted. Regardless of this, the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member can be changed.

  The movement resistance may be adjusted by changing the arrangement of the connection member. The movement resistance may be changed according to the movement amount of the connection member, or the movement resistance may be adjusted when the connection member is arranged at a predetermined position. Is switched.

  The gaming machine I2, further comprising: an urging member that generates an elastic force for urging the operation member in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member; and a wall member that is disposed so as to be in contact with the operation member. In a state where the connection member is disposed at the predetermined position, the operation member is subjected to a load in the first direction, which is a direction opposite to the urging direction by the urging member, from the wall member, and A gaming machine I3 characterized in that the operating member is configured to be moved.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine I2, the operation member abuts on the wall member by disposing the connection member at the predetermined position, and the operation member is moved in the first direction. The elastic force generated by the urging member that urges the operation member that is stationary with respect to the second member is improved as compared with the case where the connecting member is arranged at a position other than the predetermined position. Therefore, the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member can be increased in a state where the connection member is disposed at the predetermined position.

  The gaming machine I4, further comprising a friction member that extends along the moving direction of the operation member when the connection member is arranged at a predetermined position and rubs the operation member.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, the operating member moves while rubbing with the friction member in a state where the connection member is arranged at the predetermined position, and thus the operating member moves according to the area rubbed from the beginning of rotation. The applied dynamic friction can be applied to the operation member, and the movement resistance can be sufficiently changed.

  In addition, as an arrangement position of the friction member, there is exemplified a form disposed on the connection member and a form disposed on the main body case supporting the connection member.

  The gaming machine I4 includes a main body case that supports the connection member inside the box, and a cover member that is provided outside the main body case, wherein the friction member extends from the cover member to the connection member side. A gaming machine I5 characterized by being configured as a part to be provided.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine I4, it is possible to easily replace the friction member when the friction member is worn, as compared with the case where the friction member is provided on the connection member. .

  In the gaming machine I5, the friction member includes a low friction portion that gives a predetermined dynamic friction to the operation member in a rubbed state, and a high friction portion that gives a large dynamic friction as compared with the low friction portion. A gaming machine I6, which is divided and arranged along the moving direction of the operation member.

  According to the gaming machine I6, the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member can be changed between the case where the operation member mainly receives the dynamic friction from the low friction portion and the case where the operation member mainly receives the dynamic friction from the high friction portion. Therefore, the operational feeling can be switched between two stages.

  In the gaming machine I1, the operation member includes a weight member constituting a position of a center of gravity, and the adjustment of the movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing the distance of the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member. A gaming machine I7 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the adjustment of the movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing the distance from the rotation axis of the operating member to the weight member, so that the operation member is moved. The load applied to the operation member can be reduced as compared with the case where the movement resistance of the operation member is increased by applying the load in the direction opposite to the direction.

  In addition, when viewed from the rotation axis of the operating member, it is possible to improve the rotational resistance in the rotating direction of lifting the weight member, so by moving the weight member, the arrangement of the weight member with respect to the rotation axis is reversed. In addition, the direction in which the rotation resistance becomes heavy can be reversed. Therefore, the operational feeling given to the player can be changed.

  In addition, as an aspect in which the weight member is moved from the rotation axis of the operation member, the inclination of the bottom surface on which the weight member is placed changes due to a change in the posture of the operation member, and the vertical relationship between both ends of the bottom surface is reversed. An example is shown in which the weight member moves on the bottom surface by gravity.

  In the gaming machine I1, a driving device that generates a driving force, a transmission device configured to transmit the driving force of the driving device to the connection member, and a resistance change member that adjusts a movement resistance of the operation member by displacement The gaming machine I8, wherein the resistance change member is displaced by a driving force of the driving device.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the movement resistance of the operation member is adjusted by displacing the resistance changing member by the driving force of the driving device for driving the connection member, so that additional driving is performed. The movement resistance of the operation member can be adjusted without changing the appearance of the operation member and the connection member without using any device.

  Therefore, the state of the movement resistance of the operation member can be confirmed only by touching the operation member, and the value for the player of touching the operation member can be increased. Further, when the movement resistance of the operating member is changed in response to the advantageous state, it is possible to notify that the state has become advantageous to the player in a form that can be understood only by the player performing the operation. .

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the gaming machines are slot machines. A gaming machine J1 characterized by the above-mentioned. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J2, which is characterized in that: Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J3 characterized by being integrated with a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
The technical concept relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operation member that moves between a first position and a second position by manual operation by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). Gazette).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the operability of the operation member has room for improvement.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine with good operability of operation members.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has an operating member that is operated by a player and is configured to be movable, and the operating member is connected to the gaming machine body while being movable. The connection member is configured to move the connection member so that the attitude of the operation member viewed from a player operating the operation unit changes to a first state and a second state different from the first state. A correction means is provided for changing the attitude of the operation member in a direction in which the amount of change in the attitude is reduced when formation is possible.
The gaming machine according to the second technical concept is the gaming machine according to the first technical concept, further including a driving device that drives the connection member, and in a moving range of the connection member, a change state in which the operation member changes its posture; A maintenance state in which the posture of the operation member and the connection member is maintained without changing the posture of the operation member is formed, and a load generated on the operation member from the correction unit during the change state causes the connection member to move. Turn to the direction of braking.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, further comprising an abutted member abutted on the correcting means, wherein the correcting means is moved to the abutted member when the operating member is moved. The contact changes the posture of the operation member.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the operability of the operation member can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the operability at the time of the driving operation can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the operating member can be reduced in weight.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
310, 13310, 14310, 15310, 16310, 20310 Swing operation member (part of operation member, part of input device, first moving member)
311a Insertion hole (locking part)
313d second sensor member (detection device)
317, 13317 Lens member (part of input device, input section, push-in member, operation section)
330, 3330, 5330, 8330, 10330, 13330 Inner case member (part of support member, main body case)
331d1 Lever support shaft (first shaft, second shaft)
331d2 Eccentric cam shaft (first shaft)
333, 2333, 4333, 6333, 14333 Eccentric cam member (transmission member, eccentric cam member)
333b cylindrical part (cylindrical part)
335 first drive unit (drive unit)
336, 4336, 5336, 8336, 14336 Lock member (restriction member, lock member)
338 Gear damper (braking means)
340, 2340, 3340, 4340, 7340, 9340, 13340, 18340, 19340 Lever member (part of moving member, connection member)
350, 4350, 7350, peeling member (part of regulated member)
363 shaft support rod (second shaft)
364 Buffer member 366 Vibration device (part of production member, vibration device)
366b Pressing member (vibrating part)
2333a Body member (rotating gear)
2333b Cam member (eccentric cam)
5336a1 Curved wall section (recessed section)
13312, 15312, 20312 Posture correction device (part of correction means and variable means)
13312a Contact member (second moving member)
13312b Supporting member 13312c Hook member (locking member)
13322 Right front cover (cover member)
13322b, 17322b Wall member (contacted member)
14333c2 Projecting portion (first projecting portion)
14337 Posture switching device (switching means)
14337a Body member (part of transmission member, part of switching means)
14337b Extension (part of transmission member)
14337b1 Projecting portion (second projecting portion)
16315 Separation prevention cover (part of variable means)
16315e Iron ball (weight member)
17322b1 Extension part (part of variable means, friction member)
17362c Friction arm (part of variable means)
18347 Transmission device (part of variable means, part of resistance change member)
CS1 Vibration coil spring (second biasing device)
CS2 Push-in coil spring (first biasing device)
M41 Electromagnet member (electromagnet)
RB rubber band (part of variable means, part of resistance change member)
SP1, SP21, SP31, SP41, SP101 Torsion spring (first biasing member, biasing member)
SP13 Coil spring (elastic member, part of variable means)

Claims (3)

An operation member having an operation unit operated by a player and configured to be movable, and a connection member configured to connect the operation member and the game machine body and to be movable,
When the posture of the operation member viewed from a player operating the operation unit can be formed into a first state and a second state different from the first state by the movement of the connection member, the posture A game machine comprising correction means for changing the attitude of the operation member in a direction to reduce the change amount of the game machine. A driving device for driving the connection member, wherein a change state in which the operation member changes in posture and a posture between the operation member and the connection member are maintained without changing the posture in the movement range of the connection member; Maintenance state is formed,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a load generated from said correcting means on said operating member in said changing state is oriented in a direction to brake said connecting member. 2. The apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising a contact member abutting on said correcting means, wherein the posture of said operating member changes when said correcting means comes into contact with said contact member when said operating member moves. 2. The gaming machine according to 2.

Images